Home

- TRX

1. If the DIG button is checked the Spot button reads the fields of the modem digital software if defined and running 4 Round Table mode By right clicking the grid Listing tab and selecting the Duplicate submenu the QuickLog window opens and allows you to quickly duplicate data Frequency Mode Date Comment from an existing QSO in order to create a new QSO This function may be particularly useful for round table QSOs Es For SWL file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 239 of 365 If you are SWL you have to save two QSOs each time callsign 1 and callsign 2 To speed up the process please do as follow e From the Preferences under Logbook tab rename the Track field as 2XQSO mandatory e Fill in the callsign field with callsign 1 press Enter edit other fields if necessary and type callsign 2 in the Track field 2XQSO e Save this QSO with callsign 1 e TRX Manager saves the QSO and creates a new QSO with callsign 2 while 2XQSO is filled in with callsign 1 All fields related to this QSO are preserved e Edit this QSO if necessary and save it Particular fields the logical field Export is initialized to YES checked for each new QSO to provide manual or automatic update to another database Let this field to YES for a new QSO this allows TRX Manager exporting this QSO After the exportation is completed the field can be automatically or not updated to NO to prevent the QSO from be
2. Analysis mode The band scope provides a classical representation of the spectrum FS for Frequency Signal but also an analysis for a long period of time TFS for Time Frequency Signal or Waterfall each value of the signal is translated into a colour Blue S0 Green S9 Red S9 60dB it is possible to toggle at any time from FS to TFS using the TFS button E Please note that the TFS mode takes a while to draw all the screen This time depends on the accuracy 1 to 8 Scanning During the scanning the signal threshold from where the scan pauses is adjustable with the vertical slider The pause delay or Scanning delay is adjustable from the Preferences Transceiver dialog box Scanning Step is set automatically in Auto mode or by the user in Manual mode Manual mode is recommended for FM or AM channels while Auto mode is preferable for SSB and CW Q Tip For a better precision of the display please set the AGC switch on AUTO position or on FAST file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 112 of 365 Zoom To zoom a particular portion of the spectrum hold the mouse button more than 1s and move the mouse until the upper limit is reached Band Scope and Monitoring When used together Band Scope and Monitoring are interfaced any frequency change from Monitoring or directly from your transceiver influences the spectrum display so you don t need to scan again Markers for current frequency and last fr
3. TRX Acom V 1 2 0 improved amp support for ACOM Antenna switch Watch Dog Support for RACAL 6790 Logbook Suffix option auto QSLSDATE option Browser Google added as search engine Change for FCC database via Internet FT 736 supported as sub transceiver FJ added as DXCC entity total 338 Various fixes eV 4 1 6 Support for Yaesu FT 450 Support for ACOM2000 amplifier TRX Acom exe Prefix database updated Linear Reminder for manual amplifier or manual antenna tuner DXSpots DXCC Country now displayed with DXCC summary DXCC Column ev 4 1 5 LPT Driver updated for Windows Vista 64 bits ev 4 1 4 SWL Module selection for Font added Browser Search from IK3QAR QSL Manager database added DX Announce GRID gt GRID can be added to the comment eV 4 1 3 CW Keyer 16 memory buttons switchable LOG frame now possible to click a memory button before the previous message is totally sent TS 2000 480 K2 fix for internal CW keyer Support for Orion fixed with help of TenTec Synchro ICOM selection added Support for Omni VII Radio mode e V 4 1 2 IC 756PRO3 Multi Meter fixed IC 756PRO 7800 XFC updated WebCluster fix for data with hyperlink Fix for Edit Band submenu 60m 1 25m 33cm bands added Setup s script fixed for Vista New settings for FT 2000 ev 4 1 1 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 348 of 365
4. 3 If IOTA is checked under Preferences Terminal 4 if TRACKING LIST is checked under Preferences Terminal and the callsign is listed in the DX Tracking List E3 Filtering options Apart for a few specific Webcluster options defined from the WebCluster Preference tab most of the DX Spots filtering options are set from the Preferences Terminal Spots tab DXCC Award status If Spot Status is checked in the Preferences in addition to the assignment of an icon to the new or confirmed countries the program displays a more comprehensive coded information DX Tnx Bill Garry t n new band Bill gl DXCC Column The DXCC Award status for each spot is coded on 4 characters as follow ABCD Confirmed C Worked W New N for BAND Confirmed C Worked W New N for MODE Confirmed C Worked W New N for BAND MODE Confirmed C Worked W New N for all BANDS and MODES DADU DXCC Country is displayed in clear If more than one DXCC Country is possible for a given prefix a appears If the LoTW users list is installed appears in front of the DXCC Status for each user of LoTW Tracking a callsign Tracking a particular callsign is possible you have to define the callsign to track from the DX Tracking dialog box If a DX Spot is found with this callsign it will displayed whatever its DXCC Status with this icon file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 280 of 365 Di
5. 3 Your Joystick is a force feedback device In that case you must use a driver or a program not included which forces the joystick to be centered It is possible that file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 103 of 365 only R Axis may be usable 4 You don t understand how to set the joystick Please start from beginning by clicking the Default button of the Preferences Joystick tab Then activate the XY Axis and press the button 6 of your joystick your joystick is now ready to use Calibrating is especially required if you don t have any driver for your joystick for home made devices How to build a Joystick Joysticks are generally cumbersome Wiring a joystick for a sound card is not difficult the wiring diagram is provided for your enjoyment but without any support of any kind ABC Rear View of Pot 100 K Lin Elevator Wiring a Joystick Es Note Sound card inputs are rare on recent computers An USB to game port connectors is a possible and inexpensive solution file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 104 of 365 Memory channels Memory channels overview Generally you can toggle the channel memory mode quickly from the Monitoring by selecting a valid channel using the small arrows and clicking the C button Depending on the transceiver you are using selecting an empty channel may load a blank channel or may have no effect the VFO mode stays selected
6. Adjust TUNE again for maximum output power Stop Tuning Repeat the same operation at full power The final criteria for a good adjustment is when peaking TUNE gives you a maximum at the recommended NOMINAL value for Gain A warning It is important you do not try to maximize Gain which can only result in a signal of poor quality and may damage your amplifier The objective of this alternative Tune UP procedure is to reach optimum efficiency while tuning your amplifier for its NOMINAL gain This ensures transmission of perfect quality file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 156 of 365 Acom linears TRX Manager controls the ACOM 2000 and ACOM 600S amplifiers manufactured by ACOM ACOM 600S Support of the ACOM 600S is integrated to TRX Manager Setup You have to set up TRX Manager from the Setup dialog under the SYNCHRO A tab You have to select ACOm600S Speed 9600bds by default and com port Once configured and restarted TRX Manager automatically synchronizes the band switch of the amplifier with your transceiver Operation The ACOM 600S module External menu provides additional functions and displays the more critical parameters POWER ON function requires a cable wired for DTR and RTS You will also need an adapter please contact ACOM for details and availability This window opens outside the main screen you can press the TOP button to keep it on screen Remote mode You can send the follow
7. DXCluster WebCluster Filter for Spotters gt 5000Km TRX Synchro Stepp IR control option Support for Spid rotor controllers TS 2000 Button for Antenna 1 2 Misc tab ev3 5 5 PTT Switching option for CW Line Fix for some ICOMs eV 3 5 3 TS 2000 ON OFF function or F9 key Setup FT 1000MP fix RX EDSP TX EDSP loading with previous session IC 756PRO2 Button for RX Antenna LogBook new field QSL Print e V 3 5 2 Translation in Swedish by Magnus SM6VFJ TRX Command 32 commands possible Logbook Increased field length Name 25 Comments 100 only for a new logbook Logbook New fields Notes and Address Prefix database updated Customization of the Prefix database 11m possible Support for FT 857 Remote control Polling command for the rotor interface e V 3 5 1 Browser support for eQSL callsign look up Minor fixes e V 3 5 0 New DX Bar window Terminal Auto QSY option to stop the screen saver see Preferences Terminal DX Squelch function to mute the receiver until a spot is clicked Tools DX Squelch button see also Preference Terminal to set up the delay DXCC Summary Details Option for Sort Order DX Spots fix invalid spots are rejected if spot status option checked DX Spots option for RTTY in the comment Preferences Terminal Callsign look up via the Internet also accessible from the logbook link with the f
8. e Comment RTTY PSK Digital modes allows you to define the mode by default for RTTY and PSK FSK SSB Data if RTTY or PSK is available in the comment field An Offset can be defined to calculate the correct carrier frequency in SSB If you use a digital software the modem mode is set accordingly If you select Plan TRX Manager does nothing else that setting the mode according to the band plan In principle Offset Mark frequency in FSK e Comment Auto QSX Auto QSX provides detection of Split Up 1 QSX if such information is available in the comment field file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 270 of 365 e Log filter if checked any call that is logged already Worked and or Confirmed in your database for the same band AND mode which equal the spot received will be ignored Select None to disable this filter e DXCC Filter Needed for DXCC your preference for DXCC by Mode or Band defines Icons for new mode band and confirmed Band is recommended If Show All no filter is checked all spots are displayed whatever their DXCC Status e IOTA all Spots with a IOTA number in comment will be displayed whatever their DXCC Status this options is grayed ou if display all is checked since in that case all spots are displayed e Trackink List all Spots of the DX Tracking List will be displayed whatever their DXCC Status An alert sound can be set up from the Preferences Wav dialog for these particular spots By clic
9. C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 155 of 365 Linear computer assisted Tune A properly tuned linear amplifier has a constant power gain regardless of the antenna impedance A Tuning method which optimizes Gain is generally more precise than the usually used plate dip which is nearly unusable with tetrodes and pentodes or just maximum output etc Such method is offered by some high end amplifiers Nominal gain alternative method This method consists of tuning your amplifier for a NOMINAL gain by using the LOAD capacitor while you adjust the TUNE capacitor for the maximum output The NOMINAL gain is a specification which has to be known before you start tuning In fact even if you don t use this method reading the gain while you are tuning is a very fast way to know if your amplifier is properly tuned It is possible to proceed as follow 1 10 COST Oy U Cash MANDATORY knowing the NOMINAL gain of your amplifier for each band at 0 5dB or better 0 2dB You may obtain the nominal gain by reading the specifications of the manufacturer and confirming by a classic method of tuning taking into account that measured gain is always slightly lower than real gain Perform a gain measurement as indicated above 1 Preset amplifier with preset Tune and Load values Tune at reduced power Tune gt WITH amplifier in line Adjust TUNE capacitor for maximum output Adjust LOAD capacitor for the nominal Gain i e 11dB
10. SELECT FROM Logbook WHERE CALL LIKE FR AND DATE_ON gt 04 25 2000 this query selects all the QSOs made after the April 25 2000 for which the call field contains FR SELECT FROM LOGBOOK WHERE BAND 2m and MODE FM OR MODE AM OR MODE SSB OR MODE USB OR MODE LSB AND COMMENT NOT LIKE RPT AND COMMENT NOT LIKE REPEATER AND QSL_RCVD Y ORDER BY DXCC this query selects all the confirmed QSOs made on 2 meters in phone AM or FM or SSB or USB or LSB QSO with RPT or REPEATER in the comment field are excluded The records are sorted by DXCC Some other useful queries are listed in the Advanced search topic Logbook file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 321 of 365 OLE Link OLE Overview TRX Manager is able to communicate with other programs via the Windows OLE feature This idea was introduced by Dennis WN4AZY author of the powerful LOGic logging program links TRX Manager and LOGic Supported programs TRX Manager is able to be controlled from the following programs e LOGic by Dennis WN4AZY a comprehensive logging program e HAMSCOPE by Glen KD5HIO a program for digital communications e MULTIKEYER by Glen KD5HIO a CW Keying program e Voice Keyer Express by Stu N7QJP a digital memory recorder e Swisslog by Walter HB9BJS an other powerful logging program e a Screen saver and a test program FT Control see below e TRX Meter High precision S Meter e TRX Synchro TRX Aco
11. Setup for four Transceivers Support for up to 4 Transceivers at the same time one Main Transceiver three Sub Transceivers Support for SO4R single operator four radios operation Synchro mode Support for SteppIR beam and Kenwood ICOM radios New comprehensive Band Plan 3 Regions supported Auto Mode adjustable Backlash parameter New QuickMemories Support for logging to LOGic in real time Support for QRZ Online subscriptions Support for FIDX9000ICPCR1000I1C 7000 eV 3 8 8 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 349 of 365 IC 756 amp PRO IC 7800 Selection of VFO Main Sub fixed eV 3 8 7 Prefix database updated for 3YOX Logbook critical fields Freq Date S Meter automatically filled in if empty ADIF Error message added if binary fields found Remote and Monitoring submenu moved to Transceiver menu eV 3 8 6 CW Settings Internal CW Keyer for each Transceiver please check your settings Dual Setup Support for SO2R Single Op 2 radios Reading REG files at Startup Band Decoder selectable for each transceiver Preferences Transceiver Remote Connect IP option at startup VolIPoption at Startup fix for TRX Audio TS 2000 SAT mode problem to set mode of SUB VFO fixed Prefix database updated e V 3 8 5 Fix for TenTec RX320 TS 570 TS 870 Elecraft RTS HandShaking selectable WebCluster stops download at 00 00Z fixed FT
12. The desired command is typed exclusively in hexadecimal in the RS232 Command field If the command is a string each character must be translated into hexadecimal Direct commands to a transceiver under the control of TRX Manager These commands are sent via OLE to TRX Manager Consequently TRX Manager must be running when you activate the button Only commands to a Kenwood some others using ASCII strings and Icom transceivers are processed Depending on the type of transceiver ICOM ou Kenwood the syntax is different You have to use the correct syntax by referring to the manual for your transceiver see also CAT Programming In case of your transceiver is not an ICOM or a Kenwood the STRING selection may work not guaranteed for a syntax written with Ascii strings if Monitorings shows the macro buttons TRX Command will work in most cases For Kenwood Please select STRING for the Command to field and fill in the Bytes field with number of bytes of the answer if required the command is typed in using the format required by the manual the end delimiter is not required For ICOM Please select ICOM for the Command to field the command is typed in using the format required by the manual but without Preamble Addressees FEFEXXYY and without the End of message code FD only the command the sub command and the data area are required Multiple commands Multiple commands in a chain are possible the multiple
13. Using the mouse wheel Keyboard control support for USB tuning knob Joystick control Drag and drop of frequencies are possible from to the Monitoring window Particular functions Band selection For each band the software retains the last visited frequency mode filter tuner like a band stack register but unrelated with those of your transceiver The Mhz button displays a numeric keypad from which you can enter a Frequency using the Mouse QMB Buttons of QMB frame are related to Quick Memories Clarifier RIT If available Clarifier RIT shift is displayed R for RX shift and T for TX Shift From the Configuration dialog E you may chose between this function Default and function buttons Macro Tuning steps ICOM If available tuning steps of the transceiver may be selected from this frame Please note the corresponding selections do not have any effect on TRX Manager itself From the Configuration Preferences dialog you may chose between this function Default and function buttons Macro Channels The current memory channel in use is displayed and may be changed in one channel steps by clicking the little arrows near the channel number or by typing a channel number and pressing C See also Memory channels Lock dial function The LOCK button A allows you to lock the main tuning knob to prevent accidental frequency changes But TRX Manager is doing more by locking a particular VFO Yo
14. e Alpha Amp In this mode TRX Synchro controls the Alpha amplifier for band changes and Frequency changes Speed is fixed at 4800 Bauds and com port is selectable By using the Tune Load and ENT buttons you may store your settings for up to 6 antennas Ant 1 6 e File TRX Synchro behaves like a Kachina transceiver reads writes KC505_01 dat file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 327 of 365 TRX Pan A Panoramic Spectrum Analyser for SDR TRX Pan is delivered with TRX Manager it is an external program accessible from the TRX Manager s Externalsubmenu TRX Pan can work with a software defined wideband receiver with I Q output and a fixed center frequency like Softrock or a SDR centered on the IF local frequency of your transceiver controlled via CAT with TRX Manager like LP Pan In both cases TRX Pan provides real time Spectrum Analysis and interactivity with TRX Manager via OLE TRX Pan only supports Windows drivers It is fun to use even with an inexpensive Softrock SDR with a limited bandwidth centered in the 40m band connected to an RX antenna while TRX Manager controls your transceiver on the same band Warning disconnect the SDR before keying down TRX Pan with and IF Adapter and TRX Manager is optimized for Elecraft K3 Yaesu FT 950 and Yaesu FTDX5000 transceivers but can be used with any transceiver supported by TRX Manager with more limited features bandwidths are fixed to standard values
15. file C Help index htm Page 213 of 365 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 214 of 365 VUCC Award TRX Manager provides various function to track the progression of your VUCC VHF UHF Century Club Award From the DXCC Window TRX Manager displays the status of the VUCC Award for a given gridsquare from the DXCC window as well as the corresponding QSOs for this gridsquare by clicking a colored square The VUCC Summary A summary of this award is available for the 6m 2m 70cm and SAT bands HF bands excluded from the Display Awards Summary VUCCsubmenu a If DXAtlas V2 24or later is installed the DXAtlas button ix creates the trx manager wkd and trx manager cfm gridsquares files in the DX Atlas Squares folder and displays the worked and confirmed gridsquares on the map Please note each time you launch the VUCC Summary TRX Manager writes a database called GridSquare_Summary mdb with the valid QSOs for this award You may open this database from Access in order to edit or print detailed reports Other reports Comprehensive reports may also be displayed by using the Logbook s Explorer file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 215 of 365 IOTA Award TRX Manager support IOTA Award tracking Island on the Air RSGB IOTA Information The IOTA Icon oe opens the IOTA information window The IOTA icon is available from the Display IOTA submenu but also from several context menus Logbook DXS
16. file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 339 of 365 Versions history e V 5 5 2 QSL Labels printing Correction in case a selection is active ICOM Update for the new firmware IC 7800 V3 1 IC 7600 2 0 IC 7100 E4 HamQTH now uses https e V 5 5 1 ICOM Polling option QRZ_XML Fix for State field e V 5 5 0 OmniRig crash at startup fixed Logbook support for LogEQF and F6ISZ Carnet removed Update for QRZ COM e V 5 4 9 QRZ COM Lookup now similar to other database auto login and improvements Support for HamQTH Search DXCC Activity can be used with QRZ COM support for GoList removed eV 5 4 8 SteppIR new design new optional driver Synchro 2 now supported limited fixes TRX Tools fixes and some support for Windows emulators Support for ICOM IC 7850 IC 7851 support for IC 7800 V3 1 with thanks to Larry KJ6YVT ev 5 4 7 Fixes for Yaesu FTDX 9000 FT 2000 Cluster autoconnect support for a password Band plan improved support for RTTY and DATA modes L D U D PSK PKT Please edit your preferences or Reset to the updated IARU band plan Support for K3S ev 5 4 6 Prefix database updated Fix for ICOM IC 7200 Digital modes Interface with Fidigi MMVARI Engine implemented ev 5 4 5 Improved support for ACOM 600S Fix for QRZ COM HAM DB ev 5 4 4 Remote control direct control of VFO B for the compatible
17. Abilty to save recall sessions i e position and size of main windows HF Propagation predictor New grids to display the database New short wave database Extended support for TS 2000 Support for FT 817 e V 2 6 5 Labels Landscape Portrait option available IC 706MKIIG Tools Levels window available with some controls FCC database shows all records found FCC_Call exe also updated Spots filtering by mode now possible see Preferences Terminal tab Logbook F12 key saves the QSO eV 2 6 4 LogBook Fix of the ADIF Sequence for County CNTY eV 2 6 3 Explorer Logbook Print to File option TS 570 870 support for Ant Tuner ev 2 6 2 Logbook LOGData is now the default folder FCC Database callsign look up TS 570 870 850 950 change Levels moved to the TT Tools Levels panel eV 2 6 0 Logbook additional fields for Operator and Power Importing LogPlus supported JST bi directional communication Remote Control of AF level IC 706MKIIG Selection of filters fixed FT 847 DCS Code supported CAT ON at startup Awards QSL_Sent I ignores the QSO ev 2 5 2 QSL Labels printing a selection of the QSOs is possible Searching a QSO a selection by Band or Mode is possible Monitoring displays A B B A or A M according to the VFO ev 2 5 1 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 356 of 365 Prefix database TX added for F
18. An HAM Radio amateurs team has contributed in helping to test the software I thank also GES F6ELU RADIO 33 F5OLS ICOM France F6FOW John KI4JPL TenTec Stan LZ1IU ACOM for the technical assistance brought to the implementation of the Yaesu Kenwood TenTec ICOM ACOM transceivers amplifiers Copyright 1999 2015 Laurent Labourie All rights reserved IDDN FR 001 180003 00 R P 1999 000 31400 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 Page 5 of 365 TRX Manager en TRX Manager features map This diagram shows the various functions grouped by main features Web Server m i i Packet Link P Remote Control J e Telnet Link a SteppIR Amplifier Kenwood Mode Software Synchro Mode ICOM Mode K3 Mode I I I I I I I I i I I i I i j J I I I J d J I J I i Band Decoder LPT Station Device Control Control Keyer Azimuth Rotator Elevation Remote Control Wattmeter Tune Load info 3 E ANA Amplifier Reminder Standby Operate control TRX Manager Sub 1 Sub Features Map Sub 2 MH Transceivers Control Sub 3 31 10 2015 file C Help index htm TRX Manager en j i Awards tracking j m r DDFM Prefix Database tting er Telnet a WebCluster Web P DX Map W a I GEO Google Earth F Azimuth j Auto QSY EEr O e aea Auto Split file C Help index htm Page 6 of
19. CW keyer Inserts Date and Time Scanning Comment for each Scanning Memory Warning previous data lost TRX Synchro File option behaves like a Kachina transceiver Setup for TS 480HX TS 2000 480 Internal Keyer Real mode Fix run time error Terminal Sound announce toggle now enabled for DX Spots TS2000 480 Monitoring Initialization of AF Gain Prefix database updated for K7C Kure Is e V 3 7 9 Scanning dialog updated TS 2000 480 Internal Keyer TX displayed during transmit Rotator Prosistel D Elevation added Keyer new Shortcut for My Callsign US Keyboards BackSpace key now deletes the last character in real time mode Orion support removed for this rig but you can still use it various fixes e V 3 7 8 Fixes for the Channels module inopportune change of the Label file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 350 of 365 Winkey Initialization may fail text sent now appears at the CW speed DXSpots Channels Listview control keeps the columns width workaround for an old bug eV 3 7 7 Support for PROSISTEL D rotator Fixes for Orion PX rotator Improved support for Alinco DX 77 TRX Synchro updated Logbook Expert mode user defined fixed RST for casual contesting Older ICOMs Monitoring polls the transceiver every 500ms Various fixes e V 3 7 6 DX Map flickering of the display fixed TS 480
20. D repeats the message while duration is less than Y M inserts message Y P dynamically changes the length of the particular CQ delay mode selected to the specified Y seconds C 0 1 permits changing the CQ mode from pause standard to period S Speed Change Buffered Winkey only with Y speed in WPM H HSCW Speed change same as above for HSCW with Y speed in WPM B Cancel Buffered Speed Change Winkey only no parameter Example 1 Schedule synchronized timing mode CW Sequencing C 1 P 120 CQ DE F6DEX D 60 K The program will repeat the message CQ de F6DEX during 60 seconds and end with K The CQ mode is period this message will start again after the 120 seconds following the beginning of the sequence at 00 00 then 00 02 Ea Note You must press the CQ Sequencing button and the corresponding message button to engage the loop Example 2 Standard CQ mode CW Sequencing C 0 P 60 CQ de F6DEX N 3 K The program will repeat CQ de F6DEX 3 times then end with K After the message has been sent the program pauses 60 seconds cq mode pause and starts a new CQ 3 Note You must press the CQ Sequencing button and the corresponding message button to engage the loop file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 189 of 365 CQ Sequencing TRX manager includes a sophisticated CQ sequencer Principle The cycle button U makes it possible to launch a loop of CQ calls or any other message The de
21. If control of the linear is not possible control of Vox or RF Power is also provided to prevent from transmitting on prohibited segments or after band changes Please see Options for more information Operation Preset values for TUNE and LOAD capacitors and eventually USR1 and USR2 if defined are displayed for each segment according to your Options making tuning your linear easier and faster If Auto is activated the Linear Reminder warns you as soon as a band change happens or a cross band condition is detected If you use the OPR SBY control function see above and Options your amplifier or your transmitter is disabled StandBy while OK is not clicked 3 Pense Lin aire Alarm When an alarm happens please press OK to turn off alarm and re activate the transmitter or the amplifier If Auto is NOT activated only Cross band conditions will be displayed as an alarm However in that case TRX Manager does not perform any action on the relay or the transmitter When a Cross Band alarm prompts you can turn off Split to turn off the Alarm or OPR if cross band is needed Tune F and Tune gt provides a quick timed tuning using full or reduced output power according to your Options Digital Wattmeters If a digital wattmeter LP 100 or LP 100A or ALPHAPOWER 4500 or Elecraft W2 is connected on your computer to set up from SETUP TRX1 tab the linear reminder displays direct power FWD and SWR during the transmission M
22. TRX Manager en Page 11 of 365 See also Getting started Installing an update To install a TRX Manager update you must have administrator privileges Installing the updates is automated after you download the trmup5xx exe file from the TRX Manager s Whatsnew page you run the patch file Its setup will find the installation folders checks for your registration and updates the necessary files System upgrade and registration If you upgrade your system e g W7 8 to W10 your registration will be deleted by Windows Please reinstall TRX manager as indicated above You don t need to uninstall TRX manager This process will preserves all your personal files and settings After your Registration is completed and confirmed you can update TRX manager again Installing an upgrade new version If you need to uninstall and reinstall the program or to install a new copy of the program the following procedures are recommended e Do not delete any file or folder manually e Backup you most important files such as Logbook mdb memory files mem short wave database files mdb It is recommended you backup all the TRX Manager s subfolders located in AppData Local TRX Manager e Install the new version on top of the existing version same folder e Register the new version Installing TRX manager on a new computer From the old computer e Make sure you don t use the program files folder to save your data logbook see folde
23. however some tests have been successfull with Windows emulators for MAC or Linux For this purpose without opening TRX Manager and using TRX Tools exe it is recommended you set the following options from the Compatibilty menu before running TRX Manager e Windows emulator checked TRX Manager avoids using the Internet Explorer resources some other functions may be disabled or limited file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 12 of 365 e OLE Enabled by default Unchecked if necessary e g repetitive crash at Startup or during a session If this option is unchecked the OLE Link is disabled Please understand that installing and running all the functions of TRX Manager can not be guaranteed and in any cases not supported file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 13 of 365 Getting started Please run TRX Manager from the Start menu Your first session Setup For your first session the software prompts you to choose the Language the IARU Region and pops up the Setup dialog box Q Trp For this first session please KEEP THE DEFAULT settings unless you understand exactly your changes The only exception is DTR which may be required to power on your RS232 TTL interface if used gt Related Topics e Overview and Settings e Features map Usually you only need to choose your transceiver under TRX1 the desired serial port and if available the Speed In some cases if you not
24. 17 GND 18 Tip TRX 1 GND Sleeve Data 6 Tip TRX 2 GND Sleeve Data 7 e Tip TRX 3 GND Sleeve Data 8 Tip TRX4 GND Sleeve Data 9 e Expanded TRX Keyer Interface KL Multikeyer interface by Bob KI2L Example 2 Controlling the state of your linear amplifier A specific PIN of the LPT port may be assigned to control the state Standby Operate of your linear amplifier Of course a very basic interface transistor reed relay has to be built between the remote ports of your transceiver your linear and the LPT port since TRX Manager does not control your amplifier directly The purpose of this sample is to control the state of your amplifier while you are running TRX2 SO4R must be checked Setup TRX1 and a parallel band decoder available and properly configured Band Decoder must be checked Preferences Transceiver while running TRX2 as Main transceiver Example you choose PIN 7 for this function you may choose any PIN between 2 9 PIN 7 has to be wired to control the linear relay line between your transceiver and your amplifier Settings for the Band Decoder under Setup BAND DCD b flag is assigned to TRX2 by TRX Manager PIN 7 uses position 6 160m 1000a0cd gt PIN 7 at low level gt Standby 20m 1010abcd gt PIN 7 at high level gt Operate for TRX2 See also Linear Reminder Support for registry files If SO4R is checked TRX Mana
25. Boutons Defaut C 8 Macros C7423 M R solution HF 1Hz M Window Fond Fo Layout colors window is Note At startup TRX Manager applies Fore Background colors defined from the Preferences Software dialog Displayed frequencies Whatever the transceiver you are using the program always displays from top to bottom the RX Frequency RX Mode the TX Frequency Offset and TX Mode the VFOA and VFO B frequencies the current channel s frequency Bw 100Hz _ Vo FIL3 100Hz VFO A FREQ RECEIVE Displayed frequencies In the case of some transceivers especially ICOMs the selected VFO is unknown at startup and VFO A and VFO B frequencies may be reversed In addition if you click the SUB p icon of the Monitoring available with some transceivers you can replace the channel s frequency display by the VFO B frequency and only by the VFO B frequency Each digit of this display is clickable This function is particularly useful in Split The offset TX RX is displayed just above here 3 14 TX in CW 3 14 CW Et ai 1 Os a Be M R SUB display Tuning methods The Monitoring module implements various tuning scanning methods e Frequency editing direct entry and MHz frame e Graphic tuning and mouse wheel control Tuning frame e Tuning knob and Programmable scanning Dial frame e Tuning by clicking digits file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 86 of 365
26. Depending on the supported bandwidths the program selects the nearest possible bandwidth and the nearest IF Shift value consequently you may have to adjust these parameters carefully to suit your requirements All values in Hz s How band settings are preserved TRX Manager preserves all band settings DSP IPO ATT NB per band after a frequency change However the default filter for the mode applies if this option is selected Preferences DSP BPT checked Operation Power On Off Power On Off function CAT button is supported Please always power on from the computer if the rig is OFF at startup However in some cases il may be difficult to wake up the transceiver TRX Manager features an auto power on off function that you can activate from Setup Dual RX transceivers FTDX 5000 FT 2000 FTDX 9000 e VFO A VFO B buttons select the VFO and the functions under control Monitoring and Levels windows e The S Meter is always displayed for the main receiver VFO A Levels window The Levels window allow controlling most of the current and useful functions of the Transceiver Transceiver Levels submenu or Levels button from the Monitoring file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 58 of 365 To control the sub receiver s functions select VFO B Auxiliary Meter From the Monitoring below the S Meter select YAESU to display the auxiliary meter values You may select the current m
27. For imported QSOs you have to update your database using the Tools DXCC Update function The DXCC Update updates and reformates CQZ and ITUZ fields with two digits Zone 01 for Zone 1 calculates Bands from Frequencies update the country code from the callsign if the country code is not imported updates the country names from the country code if available update a blank or null QSL_Sent field with the field by default Preferences QSLS URWNe After this update is done you may still have unrecognized countries because TRX Manager can not resolve prefixes with multiple possibilities in that case you have to manually enter the country code from the logbook window You also may have errors in that case you also have to manually update the log book by forcing the country with a slash ex 1S 9MOC for Spratly Is or by forcing the ARRL DXCC Country code see below How to force a DXCC country Logbook s sorting functions under Listing may be used to display unfilled Countries or null ADIF country codes Then from the Edit tab the button or a right click on any QSO from the listing tab is used to open the DXCC Code dialog box You may choose a valid country or enter a code for a deleted country 29 2000 10 50 fio s0 S l Oct al St ma KH5K Kingman Reef KH6 Hawaiian Island KH K Kure Island KH8 American Samoa KH9 Wake Island KL Alaska KP1 N Deleted countries TRX Manager is not able to
28. K3 optimized band switching 2m band added DX Spots more accurate filtering by mode now filtering by Type see Band Plan HAM filter added allows to exclude Spots on specific segments DX Bar option for fixed Scale ev 4 5 1 PWBopredefined macro added K3 Time Out for ON OFF status increased from 10ms to 15ms FTDX 5000 tested FT 950 FTDX 5000 predefined filters gt IF SHift selected with Bandwidth NAR function added FT2000 FT 450 Narrow function added warning you must update your preference see help Terminal Telnet watch dog eV 4 5 0 Support for Yaesu FTDX 5000 Fix for ICOMs polling of S Meter ev 4 4 9 Support for Elecraft W2 Wattmeter Support for Yaesu FTDX 5000 eV 4 4 8 Support for YO3DMU s PSTRotator Interface added DXCC Window configurable colors eV 4 4 7 Fixes for ICOMs channels synchro and K3 eV 4 4 6 WebServer Viewport tag User defined tag various fixes Logbook auto backup for each day of the week Terminal Auto Connect at startup Telnet K3 updated for MCU 3 94 Improved CW Data Terminal TT new Graphic Equalizer EQ NB Levels settings Levels Warning MCU 3 94 or later required file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 345 of 365 ev 4 4 5 Remote Watch dog function for Slave and Master Remote control Web Server LogBook auto backup each day the first time you launch TRX Manager located in B
29. Meter fixed ET 1000MP EDSP TRX Manager resets EDSP only if you key from the program Rotator support for Orion PX firmware ev 3 7 5 Various fixes DXSpot Web Terminal Single Click option removed Double Click required Support for the Winkey CW Interface Keyer change Key assignments for Mess 1 to 8 F1 to F8 keys Log button SAVES the QSO button added for Paste only eV 3 7 4 NRD 535 Driver updated for non h versions VFO A B NRD 545 VFO A B DXMap shows current rotator s azimuth eV 3 7 3 Two identical rotators on same com port but with different Offset are accepted New driver for NRD 545 Reduced CPU Usage for Yaesu rigs Support for IC 756PRO3 not tested Optimization for USB Serial ports Terminal amp WebCluster Column width adjustable to zero e V 3 7 2 Transverter option Function buttons Option for On Off button Logbook DX Atlas button TRX Synchro Updated for Alpha amplifiers and Steppp IR beams Support for NRD 535 e V 3 7 1 IC 756PRO2 IC 7400 Support for Data mode Monitoring Layout options DX Mail DX Spot forwarding via EMail Remote control Password for TX RX or RX only with other restrictions eV 3 7 0 Orion rotator support for feedback WebCluster Preferences Stacked option Spots Monitoring New design Support for external Multi Meter OLEand Remote Preferences Transceiver Settings saved for each
30. Receive 24 900 70 MANUAL CW Nar any call sign opens the DXCC window your call sign sends this message to the server gt lists messages for you DX opens the spot dialog box any other string sends the corresponding command string to the server file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 265 of 365 Setting up the TNC parameters Setting the serial port is made via the Parameters Setup dialog box under Terminal First check the TNC Enabled option then read the manual of your controller to determine parameters such as speed parity data bits stop bits It is best to choose a high speed baud rate such as 9600 or more to avoid the slowing down of the communication loop with the transceiver An important parameter is the command signal used by your TNC to switch to the command mode check lt CTRL C gt for TNC 2 PK232 KAM check lt Escape gt for DK9SJ s modems TNC2S H 3S with TF Eprom In some cases you may have to check Add LF to automatically add a Line feed LF after a carriage return CR please check this option only if frames are not properly displayed Priority to CAT is usually NOT checked In some rare cases probably with some older transceivers operating at slow speed checking Priority to CAT may increase the fluidity of CAT control and the stability of the software communications with the TNC are then processed only after all data coming from the transceiver are rece
31. Scanning does not stop During a scanning SC command the firmware does not respond Frequencies are not displayed and it is not possible to stop scanning by sending SCO Bad communication Please ensure that RTS Transceiver and TRX Manager are matched While RTS ON RTS checked is generally recommended depending on your hardware you may have better results with RTS OFF RTS Unchecked CTCSS DCS Command to write CTCSS code into the memory channels is not provided by Yaesu command to set DCS code VFO or Channels is not provided by Yaesu Preferences Bandwidth of default filters Narrow Wide must be defined from the Preferences Transceiver dialog DSP frame Please check DSP PBT Enabled in order to activate the automatic filter selection according to mode changes See also Modes and Filters file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 57 of 365 FILTERS FTDX9000 FT 2000 You can not select the bandwidth directly you have to set up the P2 parameter of the SH CAT command for each filter from 00 Narrow to 31 Wide These values may differ from one rig to another The CW_W SSB_N buttons allows you testing the parameters directly from the Preferences panel P2 parameter SH Command Note Bandwidths displayed by the program are only approximations FILTERS FT 950 FT 991 FTDX 5000 FTDX3000 FTDX1200 You select the values directly in Hz from the Preferences panel CW bandwidth SSB bandwidth High Low
32. The V M stores the current VFO into the selected channel cn WM Channel 1 is selected However TRX Manager makes the internal memory channels of the transceiver user friendly by offering direct access to some of their properties Moreover the program allocates a label to each memory channel different CTCSS encoding and repeater shift only valid for FM and some models These features may help you to work through FM repeaters The label is displayed above the RX Frequency Monitoring For more details about the supported functions for a given transceiver please see the Specifications section of the help related to your transceiver F Functions related to the memory channels Direct editing of each memory channel Displaying all the content of the memory Creating and saving the content of the memory on hard disk Scanning by software Ea Notes e With some transceivers the channels are virtual and not related to the channels of the transceiver see Specifications e With most transceivers especially Kenwood and ICOM repeater s Offset is not supported but Shift sets up the appropriate difference between the RX and TX frequencies except TS 2000 e With ICOM transceivers and some others TRX Manager does not read the contents of the whole bank of memories However the frequency and mode associated with each memory channel are read with selection of the channel from the monitoring window warning The memo
33. The Preference Software dialog allows setting the default colors and fonts for most windows It is recommended you choose a non proportional font for Terminal A non proportional font is required for an accurate alignement of data in many modules of TRX Manager Courrier New is the default but Consolas available with all recent computers gives the best results A non proportional font can also be selected for Lists TRX Manager uses Arial or MS Sans Serif by default as proportional font Many windows provide a specific option to customize fonts font sizes and or the colors Monitoring Logbook SW database Position and size of the windows All the windows can be laid out on the screen as you wish Most windows can be minimized as icons in the lower display area but only a limited number of windows can be maximized i e to occupy all of the screen However most windows can be resized with the mouse to adjust the size of the characters or the data Normalizing a window can be done by clicking its title bar How to locate the open windows The Windows menu lists the titles of all open or minimized windows Just click on the title of the desired window If the selected window is minimized it will be normalized ta TRX Manager IC 746 OLE file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 22 of 365 Reorganization of the windows The Windows menu offers the standard Windows s functions Cascade position
34. Tools DX Tracking i submenu or from the Preferences Spots tab You have to define the full callsign to track and select the band or All bands If a DX Spot matches one of the Callsigns of the list it will be displayed in the DX Cluster or Web Cluster whatever its DXCC Status with this icon rf 21J xROZR DX Tracking List Options e DX Cluster Tracking List enabled List enabled for DX Cluster Spots Default e Prompt for QSY When the Callsign is found a dialog box appears and allows you instant QSY Sound announcement and alarms You may associate tracked callsigns fe with a sound announcement by defining the corresponding WAV file from the Preferences Wave tab The internal mailer can forward an alert via EMail as soon a tracked spot T is received please configure the DX Mail frame under Preference Terminal file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 274 of 365 Sound announces Ability to play WAV file for sound announcement when receiving DX Spots or particular messages from a BBS or Cluster is given TRX Manager is not provided with any WAV file you have to create these files and to fill in the corresponding parameters of the Preferences dialog box under WAV tab Wave files must be located in the TRX Manager Wave folder see note about the UseMyDucuments option Please avoid using WAV files more than 25 K 3 Note All sound effects may be disabled enabled by unchecking checking the Sound
35. You can not connect SERVER from Client If you can not connect TRX Manager via the Internet or your LAN please check your Firewall it must be configured so that TRX Manager your VoIP software and IP ports required for remote control are not blocked Common errors are mismatched ports and wrong use of LOCAL and EXTERNAL PUBLIC IPs Public and local IP addresses may be a source of confusion e LOCAL IP adresses generally those with 192 168 are used through a home local personal network configuring the firewall is required e PUBLIC or EXTERNAL IP adresses are used through the Internet and require you set up both your firewall and your router accordingly In TCP mode through a public network the SERVER router must be configured to forward all packets received on the specified port to the target computer In UDP mode through a public network both SERVER and CLIENT s routers must be configured to forward all packets received on the specified port to the target computer By clicking MY Ips Remote TRX window you can get your local LOC and your public EXT IPs Your LOCAL IP may change each time you login your computer if it does not have a static IP in your network Your Internet provider may change sometime your PUBLIC IP Unfortunately some providers do not allow using UDP or TCP for remote connections or block some specific ports file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 165 of 365 2 Communication s
36. below and or the state of the FAST button If exists Monitoring Sub rig panel 7 4 u AUTO LSB al Left Right clicking a digit allows precise tuning OR engages a scanning depending on the state of the FAST button By default the FAST digit tuning option is NOT checked In that case FAST Button NOT checked a short click allows a precise tuning digit by digit while a long click gt 1s engages a continuous scanning FAST button IS checked the short click function is disabled The continuous tuning is engaged as soon as you click a digit In the case of the FAST Digit tuning option Scanning dialog IS checked the short click is always disabled This option may be useful for the windows which do not have a FAST button or if you don t like need the precise tuning function file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 99 of 365 Programmable scanning The scanning buttons lt lt lt gt gt gt i l engage a continuous scanning around the current frequency A How to STOP scanning This scanning is continuous and does not stop on busy frequencies or channels Once Scanning is engaged you have to click the Tuning knob to stop scanning How to stop on busy frequencies The Monitoring s scanning does not stop on busy frequencies Please see the Band Scope topic for a scanning which stops on busy frequencies Scanning dialog Steps and Scanning ranges and some other options are
37. mo mio mu Miz m3 mi4 mi5 73 gt e MMAR Canaux Playback RTTY 45 BPSK 31 BPSK 63 BPSK 125 MFSK 16 eoo do 9 8 Biso F To set the tone of a sub channel drag the label or set this channel active and R Click the waterfall You can move a channel by dragging its label If a sub channel is active you can R Click the Waterfall to set the position Tone of this active subchannel remember that a L Click sets the Tone of the main channel only If necessary you can re order the channels by Tone using the Channels Order submenu and or Reset all the channels to the default Tones at startup Advanced operation Display BPF MMVARI menu By default MMVARI displays a FFT of the band pass at the top of the window and a Waterfall just below From the MMVARI FFT submenu you can change the type of graphic to display instead of the FFT Sync Signal You can not change the Waterfall The FFT Scale and the Frequency scale can be adjusted The Square amplitude option FFT Scale is recommended in most of the cases unless your noise level is very low If RIG RF is selected in the Frequency Scale submenu MMVARI displays the true frequency vs the Tone if Tone AF is selected The BPF a submenu allows selecting a Wide 1000Hz Medium 500Hz Narrow 250 or Ultra Narrow 100Hz audio filter around the signal However this selection does not have a sensible effect because the filter is in the sound card and totally ou
38. sub menu for Step Remote Synchro button Remote Window eV 3 6 3 Support for TS 480 Rotator fixes for Rotor EZ HY Gain Monitoring Tuning control new scanning functions improved support for USB Knob Logbook Real Time option default Remote control TRX Command supported ICOM Real remote control mode full control via TCP IP VUCC Update for DXAtlas 2 24 e V 3 6 2 Monitoring new tuning control and improved support for the mousewheel Browser customized list of Favourites Support for TenTec RX320 receiver Kenwood fix of memory channels editing dialog TS 2000 selection for AF SQL or AF RF Gain controls TS 2000 Elecraft K2 full control of the com port via TCP IP Interface with MultiKeyer by KD5HIO Rotor Spidrotor1 2 Reverse Mounted option allows rotating from 180 to 180 Feedback WebCluster Watch List Recorder Sound card is selectable Menu and DX Bar buttons for 60m and 23cm bands Logbook 1 25m 33cm 23 cm bands added QSO Before new columns for Comment RS T Preferences Active Border option e V 3 6 1 WebCluster now compatible with DXSCape www dxscape com eV 3 6 0 F7 Hotkey opens the DXCC window clears and gives the focus QuickLog function fixes and improvements ICOM Levels Manual Notch control RF Power if available Selected Filter Width 756PRO2 Support for TenTec ORION transceiver Remote control sup
39. to be tested DXTelnet auto reconnect function TRX Pan updated V2 2 2 Spot BPH ev 4 5 9 TRX Pan updated V2 1 9 support for FT 950 FTDX5000 with TRX Manager V4 5 9 MouseWheel supported Support for TS 590 Logbook Export Current SELECT Query can be used to select QSOs to be exported eV 4 5 8 TRX Pan updated V2 1 3 Prefix database updated for P5 Various fixes for ICOMs file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 344 of 365 ev 4 5 7 TRX Pan totally revisited new design new options and features image rejection improved Logbook search function new options Logbook LOTW new options for import and export Terminal Telnet Improved Watchdog eV 4 5 6 TRX Pan updated fix for negative values of Phase QSY Detect new options Support for LoTW users list ev 4 5 5 K3 now reads and controls Sub WIDTH in real time mini terminal K3 window TT improved ICOMS amp K3 fixes for Remote mode Linear amp inhibit max drive power options LOTW support for TQSL automated submissions New folders structure Use AppDataoption Please see the important Note about folders used by TRX Manager TRX Pan updated Offset by mode tracks K3 sIF and Hysteresis setting eV 4 5 4 updated for K3 firmware 4 14 minor fix for special prefix database ev 4 5 3 Prefix database updated PJ2 7 ev 4 5 2 Stop Sleep Mode option preferences software
40. type not a straight serial data cable The FT 847 s microprocessor uses the same com port to exchange data with the FC 20 CAT programs and a clone transceiver thus this transceiver doesn t allow you to simultaneously use the FC 20 antenna tuner and the CAT system It is not the fault of the programmer Particular cases KENWOOD ELECRAFT The Kenwood or Elecraft transceivers function better at high speed Please select the highest speed available HandShaking parameter is selectable With Kenwoods only try None NOT checked or RTS Checked if you don t have any communication Make sure your cable supports RTS Handshaking if RTS is selected If RTS is selected for Handshaking you can NOT use it for PTT Switching or CW Keying With Elecraft Handshaking is NOT required and may lock up the program this option is only required with some serial servers Step 5 check your com ports 9 Choosing an USB RS232 Interface The RS232 USB Converters built with FTDI chips are the more reliable and are strongly recommended A multi ports PCI card internal to the computer is a very good solution which minimizes RFI and a cheaper alternative to 4 separate USB Interface Cable See how to select your converter http www usb serial adapter org TRX Manager can NOT communicate through a serial port that is already opened from an other application or an other module of TRX Manager From the Windows device manager please check there is no
41. 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 251 of 365 Opening and creating a new Log book a Creating a new Log book is easy by using the Openbutton i j You have to choose the MDB extension and to type if necessary the name of the new data base If this data base doesn t exist TRX Manager will create a new one the new data base becomes the current data base It is also possible to declare the name of the new data base via the preferences dialog box logbook tab Q Tip Don t forget to compact your database from time to time in order to optimize its performances file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 252 of 365 Contest Mode The TRX Manager s Contest mode allows contesting without necessarily using specialized software In Contest mode the Logbook is configured in a very convenient way and some actions like sending CW messages serial number are automated directly from the Logbook Export using the Cabrillo format is supported Setting up TRX Manager for a contest Contest set up is done from the Parameters Contest eq dialog You enable disable the Contest mode by checking unchecking the CONTEST MODE option You may also activate the Contest mode from the Logbook s toolbar using the Contest toogle All other settings are done from the Contest dialog only J ARAL International D gt Contest Phone i Jor 0a 2013 01 00 30 03 2013 23 59 _ cecccccccccc RRR NNNN IIIIII M Contest dialog Confi
42. 12345 08 30 00 09 00 00 BCLs E Pa ae ee QO bas file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 297 of 365 Die Gro tunkstelle Nauen ist die lteste Sendeanlage der Welt Be Honow Ely s pho locaton Misplaced Inageconnate Comment it Pan ramio sioad your photos Rl 2 eee HFCC Database required file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 298 of 365 Creating a new database Creating a new Short Wave database is easy by using the Import Createbutton a You have to choose the MDB extension and to type the name of the new data base If this data base doesn t exist TRX Manager will create it the new data base becomes the current data base From the Open button you may open an existing database mdb as extension t3 Notes e You have to compact your database from time to time in order to optimize its performances e It is recommended that you place all files related to this module into the SWLData directory file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 299 of 365 Importing a SW Database Various functions are available to make easier the creation of SW databases Files are imported by pressing the Open button and selecting the desired format csv swl All imported stations will be added to the database sample csv CS Files csv MDB Files mdb CS Files csv SWL Files sw Layout grd All Files Using the Open but
43. 2000 FT 450 new DSP filters settings e V 4 2 4 Sub Transceivers now support Iransverter option New fix for Elecraft K3 s filters eV 4 2 3 New update for OH2 DX Summit web cluster New update for K3 Filters Winkey interface Underscore Space added eV 4 2 2 Fixes for Elecraft K2 amp K3 Update for the new DX Summit Web Cluster Browser included IE required ev 4 2 1 SteppIR Native mode supported control window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 347 of 365 eV 4 2 0 Minor changes for FT 2000 NRD 545 Support for FT 950 not tested Prefix database updated Logbook user default for Transceiver field Remote TRX data flow reduced during frequency changes Scanning AutoInformation OFF is now really OFF SteppIR Frequency segments set up to 10KHz for best matches on 80m hysteresis 1KHz new algorithm and stop bits 2 above 4800 bauds Auto Mode fixed Various fixes ev 4 1 9 Fix for Memory Channels INFO not beeing transfered e V 4 1 8 Fix for Winkey at high speed it was hanging new option for serial server CW Remote option Fixes FT 450 FT 2000 Support improved Levels follow the rig more controls Omni VII support for Split ev 4 1 7 Elecraft K3 added with minimal support More to be added in the future Support for LP 100 Digital Wattmeter Linear Reminder improved support for LP 100 user fields
44. 255 of 365 Prepare the following CW Macros Mi F1 TEST DE MY CALL M2 F2 HIS CALL DE MY CALL 5nn STX TU Now a typical sequencing is Type the call into the logbook CALL field in green Press Enter to populate the other fields date time Press F2 M2 to confirm the call and send INFOT report Type your report into INFOR Press F12 to save this QSO Press F1 for a new call Statistics In this current version of TRX Manager no detailed statistics are provided However you can get some useful information as follow e The CONTEST frame of the logbook always displays the number of QSOs for the current Contest e The DXCC Info window displays the DXCC and VUCC statistics for the QSOs of the current contest ONLY e From the Logbook s Explorer by checking the Contest option you can have a hierachical view of the database and various information for the current contest Dupes TRX Manager DOES NOT automatically removes the duplicate QSOs from the database before exporting to Cabrillo But you can avoid dupes or detect and remove the dupes as follow e While you log clicking Enter a RED square indicates a dupe and the DUPES window prompts for any other potential Dupe e At the end of the Contest you a detect the dupes using the Logbook s Explorer Check Dupes option and Refresh the display by clicking Dupes are listed by band Clicking a Dupe selects all the corresponding QSOs from the dat
45. 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 300 of 365 Fields of the SW Database Definitions and conventions of the different fields of the SW database are as follows ID Station ID required Frequency Frequency in MHz required Mode see notes Band any indication Day Day of week in English Time_ON Time ON of the program hh mm ss Time_OFF Time OFF of the program hh mm ss Type Type of station Aero BCL Program Program Comment Comment QTH Location Language Language Country Country Continent Continent Longitude Decimal degrees East West Latitude Decimal degrees North South Freq_Tx TX Frequency in MHz 0 for simplex CTCSS CTCSS tonality in Hz for a DCS code put a negative value Set 0 for none E3 Notes e Grid text box of the Edit frame is not a field of the database but is provided in order to make easier to enter Longitude and Latitude e Valid modes are CW LSB USB AM AMW AM Wide AMM AM Medium AMN AM Narrow FM FMW FM Wide FMM FM Medium FMN FM Narrow WFM Wide FM Only for ICOM receivers FSK RTTY DATA file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 301 of 365 CSV Files structure TRX Manager can export import CSV files to from the SW database The CSV format is a text file format which is compatible with Excel Data are separated by semicolons Format The first line of the file repeats in any order
46. 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 312 of 365 About transceivers for satellites Only few transceivers are compatible with satellite communications In addition operating the program may be slightly different according to the type of transceiver you are using If your transceiver does not sent back its data you can not use the VFO gt button and you must always use the gt VFO button to set the transceiver Otherwise and in most cases both the program and the transceiver display the same frequencies and using the gt VFO button is not required to set up the interface FT 736 You must always use TRX Manager for frequency changes TX and RX and for SAT mode switching ON OFF You must use the Trace mode of the program the Track mode of the transceiver is not compatible with the SAT interface Controlling the VFO during transmit is only possible in SAT mode Procedure 2 must be applied for the linear transponders satellites FT 847 You must always switch the SAT mode ON OFF from the program and you may either use the Track mode of the transceiver preferable or the Trace mode of TRX Manager but using both functions simultaneously is not desirable Controlling the TX VFO during transmit is not possible in Split mode TS 2000 The SAT interface uses almost all of the TS 2000 s SAT features e The M IN function also affects memory channels 1 9 of the transceiver e RX always uses the main receiver e Recalling a memory channel
47. 365 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 7 of 365 Getting help TRX manager features a very comprehensive help system Most windows have a help button g and many controls have touch help Index is the best approach to search for a specific information using known Keywords If you don t find you may try the Search function You may also print any section or all the topic using the Print button See also Welcome to TRX Manager V5 Getting started Features map Versions history Troubleshooting How to order Support and update policy file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 8 of 365 Installation and use Requirements TRX Manager requires Probably a transceiver or a receiver e A Personal Computer and any 32 bits or 64 bits version of Windows except NT3 51 an X VGA monitor minimum A free serial port for the radio interface or an USB Serial adapter Com 1 32 supported e Eventually an RS232 TTL Level converter but most recent rigs include this converter e A Connection to the Internet optional but recommended A DBCS Systems Sorry but TRX Manager is NOT compatible with any version of Windows using DBCS China Japan Taiwan Korea and Windows NT3 51 Disk space The necessary disk space to install the software is about 50 Mb it may depend on the software already installed At least 200 MB of free disk space are required to run the program RAM Recommended minimal req
48. 4 tab for the transceiver to be used with Winkey since CW Internal has the priority over any other settings of the CW Tab for a transceiver which supports keying via CAT e Opening the Keyer modules opens the Winkey s com port the port is closed by closing the Keyer module At startup TRX Manager displays the ROM revision code in the status bar Configuring Winkey Once TRX manager is set up for Winkey exit and restart Now please open the Keyer module from the Tools Keyer submenu If Winkey is properly configured the Winkey s ROM revision code appears in the status bar and the toolbars of the keyer module shows a Winkey icon as follow Keyer window and Winkey icon Please note each time you run TRX Manager Winkey is configured with the ee settings Consequently the first time you run Winkey from TRX Manager it is important you click the the Winkey Icon in order to configure Winkey file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 192 of 365 GRR ae m Winkey configuration dialog ENLARGE the window if this icon does not appear Please see Winkey s user manual for more information about the parameters Some of these parameters Weighting Dit Dah ratio Key comp Port are saved BY Transceiver TRX1 4 Prosigns TRX Manager s prosigns see Macro have the priority over Winkey s prosigns and can not be re defined TRX Manager s CW special characters set is not supported by Winkey From the Winkey s
49. 5 0 9 Monitoring new design new S Meter ev 5 0 8 Interface with HAM Cap by Alex VE3NEA IOTA Award Region selection added AI BI WI Summary for WAZ and WAS Awards Remote control Terminal shows the basic status of the distant rig Minor fixes Address always 0 for Telnet pse update both computers e V 5 0 7 K3 and K3 FP More tuning methods On TOP switch K3 FP Size reduced Width lt 1024 4m band added Log DX Spot filter eV 5 0 6 Ultra Fast Logging F12 or Enter option Help in English totally revisited new design partially done in French e V5 0 New distribution new license KX3 supported New graphic control screens for K3 and KX3 IOTA Award tracking Contest mode e V 4 7 2 Webcluster crashes fix for Windows 8 new version of comctl32 0cx new setup for patches additional link between CW Terminal and TT Terminal K3 VFO link added for IC 7800 F Follow button of the monitoring e V 4 7 1 K3 Level s TT Mode improved Log auto power improved minor fixes eV 4 7 0 Prefix database updated Logbook AUTO POWER function see Preferences Logbook Web Clusters and spots fixes and optimizations Remote control fix for the CW keyer remote file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 343 of 365 e V 4 6 9 QRZ Look up new format implemented DXCC Award fixes V UHF excluded band counter for current and dele
50. 990 ROM1 3 FT1000D ROMS and some receivers Split ON on refresh fixed Monitoring Up Down buttons QSX fixed SW Database S Meter threshold scanning selectable from the Toolbars Remote control Slave transceiver selectable from Transceiver Slavesubmenu Transceiver displayed in the tittle bars of the Monitoring and Remote windows Before or after Real mode is engaged standard control is possible from the Remote window button disables the real mode Various fixes and optimizations If you are using Remote control please update both Slave and Master eV3 8 4 Support for NGT CODAN transceiver UNICEF Monitoring if configured as remote interface macro commands available eV 3 8 3 TRX Synchro Update for Alpha amplifier supports ON OFF FCC_Call update for FCC s Web site Orion Rotators new option for Orion PX and Orion PX 2 4 most recents require PX 2 4 Winkey Speed displayed internal Pot was wrong TRX Command Sliders added Monitoring distinct Layout for each transceiver eV3 8 2 Monitoring FT 1000 920 only and Kenwoods B Follows Afunction see Lock Dial button Winkey Setting for Pin 5 PTT Sidetone Setup revised DTR RTS settings for Winkey DTR RTS PTT settings for each rig Warning if you use TRX2 10m and 80m sub bands same split for both rigs to define under Setup s LPT tab eV 3 8 0 DXCC window SFI button shows K Index status bar
51. An more sophisticated method of remote control The standard remote control mode of TRX Manager provides the same standard interface for all transceivers requires a low bandwidth is simple to use is very reliable and supports the most useful functions of a transceiver However if you control a TS 480 TS 590 TS B2000 TS 2000 a K2 Extended K3 KX3 or an ICOM you may find that a lot of functions are missing and not supported by the standard remote interface To bypass this limitation TRX Manager can operate the com port of a TS 480 TS 590S SG TS 2000 TSB 2000 K2 K3 KX3 Extended or any ICOM via a LAN or through the Internet this is the real remote control mode In fact you use the program almost exactly as if the port is open from the CLIENT station all data to from the com port of the transceiver are forwarded by the network This control mode is very similar to the use of a serial device server and may be even more efficient since TRX Manager filters the useless data avoids redundant commands and in some cases uses efficient macro commands The Real mode is only available for the transceivers listed above Keyers Rotators Wattmeters are supported and controlled using the same commands than in standard mode Requirements The minimal requirements are e a fast network gt 10MB s e operating the transceiver at the highest speed gt 19200 Bauds Configuration You must configure the program as follow 1 SERVER station e S
52. C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 181 of 365 a U U M a ee UR RST UR RST UR RST NAME IS MY NAME MY NAME MY NAME OTH LILLE LILLE LILLE HW j HIS CALL DE MY CALL K Sensitive image Move the mouse over the picture for more information It is suggested that only experienced CW operators use this interface it is also advised to plug a traditional key in parallel with the PC You also have to disable the internal electronic keyer of your transceiver Composing sending and storing messages Adjust your speed 1 to 50 words minute as you wish using the slider Compose your messages from the To be sent dialog box then click the Sendbutton CtrI K for an immediate transmission You may store the message in memory by clicking the Save button then the number messageM1 16 The Toolbar displays M1 8 by default To display M9 16 please right click the toolbar and check M9 16 To send a stored message click the corresponding button M1 16 or F1 to F8 keys You will be able to edit it and to store it again The Stop D button CTRL F12 stops the transmission sometime with a delay The detection of a TX interrupt command also stops the transmission immediately a file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 182 of 365 Ea Note If you move the mouse during the transmission speed will be slowed down or random Typing your messages Line mode Ty
53. CW sequence or a loop in connection with Voice Keyer Express PTT Time Out option all rigs From Preferences under Transceiver tab a PTT Time Out option is available after a specified delay in seconds PTT switching Under the Parameters Setup TRX1 tab PTT frame you have different options to control TX RX switching e CAT default is usually checked if the RX TX command is supported by the CAT RS232 protocol of your transceiver please see its manual This option sets TX RX by direct CAT control e if DTR or RTS if checked the program sends the TX RX signal to the DTR or RTS line of the transceiver s serial port In that case you have to disable the corresponding line of the RS 232 interface under the Transceiver frame see notes to make these options available e CW if checked the program sends the TX RX signal to the unused line of the CW interface s serial port i e if you key CW via DTR RTS will be the PTT line Of course if you key CW via the transceiver s serial port this option is not available Ea Notes e Generally RTS and DTR lines are not required by the RS232 protocol to control the transceiver but you may have the following cases 1 One line may be required to power ON the interface in that case this line RTS or DTR can NOT be used for PTT Switching see the documentation of your interface 2 If your transceiver requires the RTS CTS line for Handshaking Kenwood and TenTec you can NOT use RT
54. DongRle gt Internet gt Remoterig RRC 1258 MkII Radio modem gt K3 gt Antenna The character generated by paddle echo in the winkey window of the trx manager is linked to the tt terminal of the K3 window With pressed button keyboard from the TT Window the character is send as CAT command to the remote K3 With a latence from 500ms to 1000 ms the K3 is transmitting Using the internal loudspeaker of the winkey device is necessary to achieve zero latency from paddle pressing and generating CW character I muted the sound monitor from K3 to get not confused in sending CW file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 76 of 365 TenTec Transceivers General information for all models but Omni VI VI DSP Filtering TRX Manager implements two virtual filters Normal and Narrow for each SSB CW mode a Wide filter for AM Since TRX Manager uses the DSP you must check DSP under the Preferences Transceiver tab and fill in the default values for each filter If the protocol does not give the ability to set the roll off value of the DSP only the total bandwidth is set See also Modes and filters Memory channels The program can write the memory channels and upload memory channel files but it does not read the settings of the channels When you recall a channel from the program its content is transferred into the current VFO See also Memory channels Levels You may set most of the available levels AF RF
55. EDSP windows Transeiver EDSP submenu or tool bar buttons mS These windows work in conjunction with the Monitoring module Controls are as intuitive as possible RX EDSP TX EDSP and AF Filters commands are mode related Due to an incompatibility with rig menu settings the RX EDSP ON button allows you to enable or disable RX EDSP by CAT and not to switch it to OFF Filtre BF Shift Width shit TT O m m Pe E 200 Eae E m The Default button allows you to quickly send your EDSP Default settings Tools EDSP Defaults The Initialize button allows you to retrieve the control via CAT if you lose it remember that the FT 1000MP comes back to its internal settings each time you change a condition from the rig TRX Manager is only able to detect modes and TX RX changes Each time the program sends EDSP CAT commands to the rig the word EDSP will be prompted in the receive or transmit window When you close the RX or TX EDSP windows the program stops controlling the EDSP The TX EDSP window also allows you to control the FT 1000MP internal electronic keyer and displays some meter data Manip Meter oo e aeaa 1 iie Oo E la EE _ 3_ _Pley E s d cayiID m m Mce C_______ file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 47 of 365 For better results We suggest you follow these instructions before starting the CAT EDSP control ON eo Open the Tools EDSP Defaults dialog box Enter
56. Fully controllable via a computer they also have a front panel which takes advantage of the TRX Manager s computer aided traffic concept Consequently TRX Manager offers an alternative to the full control via computer E About TS B2000 TRX Manager is NOT conceived as a substitute for ARCP software and TS B2000 is not fully supported this is why TS B2000 does not appear in the list of supported rigs However TRX Manager may be used with TS B2000 for DXing in real time while Kenwood s ARCP software will be required for permanent settings or some specific operations Setting up your transceiver and TRX Manager It is recommended to set up the Transceiver for the highest practical speed It is necessary to boot TRX Manager and the Transceiver after each change of the communication speed It is also recommended to set e Transceiver s Auto Mode OFF FUNC LSB USB AUTO e Frequency Correction USB CW OFF Menu 37 TS 2000 e Beeper OFF Menu 12 TS 2000 From TRX Manager s Setup please select TS 2000 or TS 480 or TS 480HX or TS 590S or TS 590SG and check RTS The highest available speed is recommended 56700 TS 2000 or 115200 TS 480 590S SG Due to the extended control capabilities of these models TRX Manager may be configured for two modes of operation Setup TS 2000 TS 480 TS 590S SG 1 Auto Information checked recommended if Auto Information is checked the transceiver automatically sends notification of a
57. INC button activated Auto Checked the program implements if supported the incremental tuning of the transceiver Microphone s Up Down button which gives progressive tuning Whatever the range or the mode this selection provides fine tuning If your transceiver does not support incremental tuning the program uses a standard step 10Hz or 100Hz Auto Not checked the program implements the step you select under this menu This selection is saved mode by mode i e Auto for CW 10Hz for USB 12 5KHz for FM Round Off if checked the program rounds off the frequencies according to Step Auto he Step menu When the digits of the RX frequency display are highlighted the mouse wheel tunes the corresponding digits Variable Scanning By holding the left mouse s button and moving the mouse pointer on the right or the left of the cursor you engage a scanning feature for which the speed or tuning step is variable and is a function of the distance between the mouse pointer and the cursor The scanning stops when the mouse button is released lt lt 0030 bU U2 Progressive scanning Hold the mouse button By moving the mouse pointer during scanning from one side to another of the cursor you can tune your transceiver in a way that is almost as convenient as with the tuning knob file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 97 of 365 Tuning buttons For most transceivers the program implemen
58. If a LOTW report is recognized a dialog box prompts and allows you to choose how to update your database For all QSOs of the report the QSL_RCVD field will be updated to D by default for Digital and other selected fields may be updated too according to your options However if a QSO is already confirmed QSL_RCVD Y it will NOT be updated QSL_RCVD is updated to D for all values of QSL_RCVD Y excepted If the new digitally confirmed QSO has valid fields for CQ Zone ITU Zone State GridSquare Continent or IOTA your database will be automatically updated with these values If you open a report with adi as extension please make sure TRX Manager recognizes it as a LOTW report and displays LOTW Report found and NOT This action will add which may add the qso to the database For a full report of the update you may browse the Misc LOTW_Error txt text file 3 About the QSL_RCVD field In TRX Manager the paper QSL QSL_RCVD Y has the priority consequently e The QSO will be updated only if the paper QSL is not already received i e for all values of QSL_RCVD Y excepted e When you receive the paper QSL it is recommended you update the QSL_RCVD field to Y as usual e When you update your database from LOTW it is recommended you choose QSL_RCVD gt D for only digitally confirmed QSOs e When you export the log to any format including ADIF the D is converted as per your choice R or Y meaning
59. Manager en Page 24 of 365 Saving a layout Layout changes position and width of the columns may be saved by pressing the layout button H The layout is then saved as a grd file having the same name as the corresponding database this file will be recalled when opening the database sf Example You are working under TRX Log mdb When you press the layout button TRX Manager creates or updates the layout file TRX Log grd this file will be recalled each time you open the TRX Log mdb database Editing the records sorting Selecting a record Selecting a record is done by clicking any field of the corresponding line This record becomes the current record Direct editing In some cases records may be edited from the grid directly a click on any other record validates the changes direct editing Buttons For some fields a button appears when you click the field and provides various functions Dodecanese Dodecanese Egypt a column button Sorting To sort a column you have to select this column by selecting any record from this column or the header an action on 3 and A buttons provides sorting by ascending or descending values Navigation bar The navigation bar provides additional functions navigation bar ja these buttons jump to the previous next page record in the database ay Update validates the changes made from the Grid Cancel Cancels the changes made from the Grid be
60. Page 89 of 365 Split operation Various functions make Split operation much easier Quick Up Dn function The Monitoring s Quick Up Dn function allows you switching Split by 1kHz CW or 5kHz SSB increments very quickly 7 133 04 SPLIT 5 00 LSB QSX up down by in 1kHz CW 5kHz SSB steps Quick split by 1kHz or 5kHz increment TXW XFC TFES function The XFC TXW TF SET button Monitoring makes it possible to quickly set the TX frequency with the tuning dial of the transceiver or the mouse select SPLIT mode equalize the two VFOs A B click XFC and hold the left button set the TX frequency by rotating the tuning dial of the transceiver see below how to tune VFO B from TRX Manager using your mouse 5 release the left button PANE SUB VFOB Frequency tuning With some rigs it is possible to read tune the VFO B in real time while you are listening to VFO A by clicking the SUB Icon Monitoring the SUB Frequency becomes visible and is clickable digit by digit tuning 00 14 124 00 0 00 USB 400 14 500 SUB icon Tuning the SUB VFO The XFC TXW TF SET function and SUB VFOB frequency tuning can be used together First and if necessary press F6 to give the focus to the Monitoring Press and hold ESC Escape on your keyboard to listen to the VFOB frequency While you hold ESC you can adjust the digits of the VFO B display using the mouse buttons or the mouse wheel Ea Notes 1 This fu
61. Preferences Location dialog box Please check Internal Mailer if you use the TRX Manager s Internal EMailer recommended If you let the Internal mailer option NOT checked TRX Manager uses your default software to send electronic mails however your default software can NOT be used to send Notifications To set up the Internal emailer for your personnal EMail account you have to enter your email address xxx yyy the name of your SMTP server and the SMTP port If required you must check on the Authentification option and fill in UserID Login Password and Security mode None STARTTLS SSL TLS Please check with your Internet Service Provider how to set up your STMP Account Sending an email Internal mailer You open the mailer module from the E Tools Quick Mail submenu Fill in the email of the recipient and his name optional Indicate the subject and type the body of the message a signature may be added to the message Press Send a the message is immediately sent The name sent by EMail is the UserID of your registered version it appears in the title of the window Applications It is possible to send EMails from the Callbook HAMCall or LogBook windows The internal mailer can be used for the automatic notification of the IP Address of the SERVER station TRX Remote control restricted to registered users only The internal mailer can forward a DX Spot or a list of DXSpots via EMail as soon a needed newone a or t
62. QRZ window TRX Manager uses the Gridsquare field to compute beam heading if an image is found the image button G is activated and allows you to display it in your browser The copy button transfers the Name and address into the Windows clipboard or the full listing QRZ COM A new search may be performed by filling in the callsign field and pressing the search button FA From the Logbook If the Auto logging option is checked the transfer of the data to the logbook is automated when you introduce a callsign into the callsign field of the logbook and press Enter keyboard or the Info il button of the Logbook the transfered data depend on your options for the Fields to transfer In summary e Enter or fetches the data into to the fields of the Logbook auto logging function performs a search but does NOT transfer the data You must use to transfer the data is Note about QRZ COM The QRZ COM module connects to QRZ COM the first time you open it QRZ COM should display a Login success Please disregard any comment about a Cookie failure irrelevant for TRX Manager This function extracts the data from the HTML code QRZ com may change the code at any moment which may prevent any further extraction and this function from running There is no warranty that this function will be updated in the future If this happens it is recommended you select None as HAM Database and use the manual Internet look up instead or an oth
63. Recommended setup for the third party software is TS 450 TRX Manager automatically notifies its status changes using the IF string IF FA FB FR FT FN SP MD SM ID commands issued by the controller are processed ICOM amp ICPW1 mode It is best to select this mode to synchronize an external ICOM compatible device If you synchronize an ICOM IC PW1 linear amplifier it is recommended to select ICPW1 TRX Manager behaves like a basic ICOM transceiver IC 725 IC 726 or similar for the defined serial port A null modem cable must be used to connect a computer i e to synchronize a logging program while a normal cable must be used to synchronize an ICOM compatible device Transceiver Amplifier at a TTL level through a CT17 or compatible interface Supported settings are Speed 4800 57600 Bds StopBits 1 or 2 Parity None Protocol None Transceiver s address and controller s address generally EO or 00 must be specified file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 143 of 365 TRX Manager only notifies mode and frequency changes It only supports mode frequency and VFO changes If you need more advanced features please use the Kenwood protocol ACOM600S Please see ACOM Amplifiers K3 mode synchro with NaP3 If you select K3 TRX Manager behaves like an Elecraft K3 transceiver on its Synchro port This selection should be only used to synchronise PowerSDF IF Stage or NAp3 and TRX Manager LP Br
64. SO4R Single Operator Four radios Determination of the Doppler effect TRX manager does not implement the calculations of satellite data it uses a DDE Link with compatible satellite software Currently the following programs are supported NOVA http www nlsa com WINTRAK PRO http home hiwaay net wintrak SATSCAPE http www satscape co uk SATEL939 http perso wanadoo fr po f9nb PAGEF9NB htm WXTRACK http www satsignal net SAT_EXPLORER http www f6dqm fr Consequently you have to install one of these programs and know their use to establish satellite communications with the assistance of TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 307 of 365 Configuration The Satellite interface is launched from the Tools Satellite sub menu A good knowledge of the various way to establish satellite communications is required to understand all the elements of the interface See also e Operation e About transceivers for satellites The sensitive image below illustrates the use of each element Sensitive image Move the mouse over the picture for more information Referential Conventions The logic of the interface requires that the frequencies which are displayed by the interface are the working frequencies of the Satellite except during the adjustments and not those of the ground station which will be Doppler corrected indeed it is much easier to work on the frequencies o
65. Select button is toggle click it for a search and click it again to cancel the the search criteria The number of selected records is displayed on the tool bar 1699 records Quick search The small arrow on the right of the Select button makes it possible to quickly select QSOs with the current callsign To initialize the menu you only need to type the callsign or to click a QSO in the grid listing tab The Search Window The QSO tab provides searching for predefined fields Tien e a Searching by call sign You only have to type the desired callsign or a part of a callsign to search and press OK the only matching QSO s will be displayed Searching by date or QSL You have to check the corresponding check boxes and to fill in the field criteria in order to search You may also combine date with QSL or call sign by checking or unchecking appropriate check boxes Search by location Search can be performed by DXCC country or by State French Department for example file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 243 of 365 Search by Operator or Track Warning if these fields are checked but empty search will done on empty fields of the database Advanced searches SOL The SQL tab permits advanced searchesand reports using SQL language Printing the selection The current selection may be printed by pressing the print button of the LogBook Sorting Sorting by any field is poss
66. Split K3 and TRX Manager The relative position of the Main bandwidth indicator shows the IF Shift value but the relative position of Sub bandwidth indicator does not follow IF shift since this parameter is not available via CAT The Sub markers does represent the correct sideband and bandwiths however YAESU FT 950 5000 and TRX Manager Main VFO markers represent supported the correct BW and IFShift in SSB CW FSK AM FM use standard values However Sub BW Main BW by default TRX Pan and TRX Manager with other transceivers Bandwidth markers use standard values SSB 2 4kHz CW Data 500Hz AM 6000Hz FM 12000Hz MAX AVG Allows integration of maximum average values of the signal for the number of Samples defined in the preferences PEK PEAK freezes the display on maximum values If QSY Detect is checked options integration is disabled to NOR during rig tuning BPH Background Peak Hold allows signal peaks beeing displayed in background Full screen modell click to toggle Full Screen mode In full screen mode please type Escape keyboard to go back to the normal screen and or Z for zooming or use Left Zoom and Right Screen mode mouse clicks outside of the grid Spot After tuning to a signal clicking the spot button will center it in the passband It is designed mainly for CW and AM but works pretty well even in SSB If there are multiple strong signals in the passband it will center the strongest one Peak
67. Transceiver LPT Select 17 GND 18 e _ nD Parallel interface positive keying not isolated A 5 System priority An important parameter is the priority you grant to the CW transmission compared to the other programs Indeed Windows is a pre emptive multitasking system that means that it shares the CPU time to the various programs to enable them to be carried out simultaneously at least seemingly This principle is not very compatible with the generation of CW code Therefore TRX Manager sets by default the High priority option which slows down execution of the other programs loaded in memory Please check the Normal option if you encounter crashes or check the Real Time option to stop all the other programs Of course TRX Manager resets to its initial priorities when the CW transmission is ended During the CW transmission sound is disabled the same as when the Web Cluster automatically loads The mouse remains active but it is advised to leave it motionless in order not to slow down the keying B KEYING VIA CAT INTERNAL CW KEYER Direct Keying via CAT is possible for some transceivers by checking the CW Internal option under the tab of the corresponding transceiver TRX1 4 This option is available with TS 570 870 2000 590 990 K2 K3 KX3 OR for Remote operation from CLIENT In these cases you don t need any additional interface Please note the CW Internal options TRX1 4 tabs have the priority over any oth
68. UPDATE Fiennes inser L oF k seum wen TRX Manager from a SmartPhone Android Implemented controls are simple and easy to understand The interface is compact enough to display on small screens e CONTROL PANEL opens closes a frequency mode settings entry box e STATUS UPDATE is an important button which synchronizes the display of the Web Interface and the real parameters of the station It should be noted that often a delay of a few seconds after a command is sent and confirmation received from TRX will occur auto refresh checked and a delay of 5s generally solves this problem e DISCONNECT manually disconnects in case a password is requested e SPOTS opens closes the DX Spots display if available Update of the display is automatic after the most critical commands if auto refresh is checked It may also require in any cases manually clicking the STATUS UPDATE button The layout of the Web Interface may differ according the remote control options Q Tip On iPhone the free application Vanilla Surf may give better results than Safari making possible for the user hiding the top and bottom interaction lines Troubleshooting No connection possible please do a quick test of the Web Server as indicated in the Quick Start section Don t forget to activate the Web Server by clicking the OPEN button If this test is successful either the addresses are wrong or your router
69. You may also use the Refresh button to refresh the fields with the last decoded values file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 205 of 365 However this algorithm is not infaillible and you can select the strings manually with an R Click if necessary disable the continuous scrolling using the Scrolling button Je A Right click opens the LOG context menu Press the Log button 5i CTRL S or F12 to log and save the QSO or the Paste To Log B button Ctrl P to log without saving the QSO in order to let you to complete all fields from the Logbook An alternative is to use the SPOT function of the Logbook MMVARI must be selected as Digital Interface Preferences e toggle the DIG fia button of the Logbook ON This engages logging using the MMVARI s fields e click the Spot button of the logbook TRX Manager reads the MMVARI s log fields and fills in the corresponding fields of the logbook You can complete the log with the necessary information using a CD Rom or Internet e from the Logbook press the Log button 5 or Ctrl S or F12 to save the QSO 8 Related Topic e Logging a new QSO Q Not enough digital modes The MMVARI engine provides the most current HAM Digital modes If you need more digital modes you can run the Fldigi interface simultaneously with the MMVARI engine However you must select Fldigi as DIG interface to activate the link between TRX Manager and Flidigi You can log either from M
70. all Transceivers file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 106 of 365 Displaying the channels You can view all the content of your memory using the Display Memory Channels submenu or the following tool bar button You only need to click a channel number to recall the desired memory channel The tool bar duplicates main tool bar buttons creating or saving or scanning a the memories the Clear All button z clears all memory channels in one click if supported Kenwood and ICOM only But this window also hides some powerful functions e Sort by number frequency mode or information is provided clicking each column header e Channel status for scanning if is displayed the corresponding channel is included e Pop up menu right click with following submenus COT 1 840 00 02 3 558 00 Pop up menu Recall Memory channel recall Editing Editing the channel VFO gt M Memorizes the VFO into any channel M gt VFO Recalls the channel into the VFO Skip Changes the status for scanning Hide Hides Unhides the channel see the manual of the transceiver file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 107 of 365 Scanning the channels A scanning by soft is possible using the Transceiver Channels Scanning a submenu The software provides a signal level floor S Units for busy channels and the scanner pauses and resumes after a preset Pause delay With some rigs y
71. and Web Server may be used simultaneously warning Making your IP address public exposes you to malevolent intrusions Quick Start Before you configure the Web Server it is recommended you perform a quick test using the computer where TRX Manager is running and the initial default parameters Open the WebServer from the Transceiver Web Server submenu Keep the default parameters Port 80 checked Password unchecked Activate the Web Server by clicking the OPEN button Using the same computer from your Internet browser type in this URL in the address bar http 127 0 0 1 and click the GObutton or click Sa 5 The Web Interface opens in the browser and you can familiarize with the controls F See also e Smartphone instructions by PDA PDF PO NE Note 127 0 0 1 is not a local address but a standard address only used for a loopback connection on a same computer Do not use this address later for external access Internet or Local Setting up your router and your firewall To allow access from the Internet setting up the router if you use one is mandatory in order to forward all incoming requests for the specified port to the computer where TRX Manager is running Below is the configuration of a Linksys router for the port 80 TRX Manager is installed on the computer which has a local address of 192 168 1 100 Access Applications Setup Wireless Security EEPE E amp Gaming Port Range Forward
72. answer provided by the transceiver makes it possible to control if the command were accepted or not You can try yourself to exchange data with your ICOM from the CAT Commands window Tools 3 Example To set the transceiver on 145 123450 MHz it is necessary to send FEFEXXYY055034124501FD where XX is the transceiver s address and YY the PC s address JST Transceivers and receivers The JST protocol is based on string commands It is efficient but during a communication REMOTE is displayed and all buttons and dials are electrically locked The different JST transceivers use common commands except for the frequency Each command require a control item a control information and a carriage return 3f Example Setting 100 KHz NRD 545 requires the following command FO000100000 CR file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 84 of 365 Main Transceiver Monitoring overview The Monitoring is the main module of TRX Manager The monitoring engages a constant communication between the Main Transceiver and the computer and provides real time functions In practice the Monitoring window should be always open even if minimized ea ole 7 02882 7 02882 UTO CW 0 00 CW NOR 150Hz B 7 022 04 C1 7 012 01 gt Ore RECEIVE CW The Monitoring window looks different according to the transceiver you are using RX Frequency Left and TX Frequency Right VFO A Main and B Sub are displaye
73. attached files otherwise your email may be deleted by the virus filter e Due to spamming email adresses may change frequently please see the web site for the current email adress a Mailing list A Forum in English is devoted to TRX Manager Registering the forum list is highly advised in order to receive information on the use of the program or its evolution The instructions are available on the http www trx manager com support htm page Update and upgrade policy Upon purchase of TRX Manager V5 X you are eligible for 36 months of free downloadable updates and upgrades The purchase date is based on the day your order is processed When that 36 month period is up you may sign up for another 3x years of downloadable updates 3f How to install an update To update your copy of TRX Manager V5 X you have to download a patch trmupxxx exe from the Whatsnew page of the TRX Manager s web site install it by running the exe file while making sure the target folder is correct Please note that you cannot register updates or upgrades you must have a current registered program See also Installation reinstallation Upgrades from early versions of TRX Manager prior to V5 0 are not available for download a full version of TRX Manager V5 can be obtained at a lower price for registered users The update upgrade policy may be modified especially in the case of significant changes in the Windows operating system i e new Windows system
74. best way to set up a band decoder is to use an RS232 compatible device now many exist on the market Drivers not found or not installed Please login as administrator and reinstall the program don t forget to reboot your computer to complete the installation file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 133 of 365 Single Operator Four Radios SO4R Under TRX1 SO4R check box enables support for Single Operator Four Radios operation SOAR has the following optional effects e Sends the Transceiver number to the LPT port parallel band decoder e OLE Band decoder Synchro functions follow the Operating Transceiver while if SO4R is NOT checked these functions are only activated for the main transceiver e Support for the launching of registry files at startup see below LPT Port in SO4R Mode Setting up the parallel port To use the parallel port in the context of the SO4R mode you have to set up the band decoder for a parallel port the RS232 band decoder is not usable for this application Choosing and setting up the parallel port is made from the BAND DCD tab of the Parameters Setup dialog Available informations on LPT port If SO4R is checked TRX Manager sends the Operating transceiver s number as follow e Pin 14 High TRX1 Low TRX2 High TRX3 Low TRX4 CT WL TR format e Pin 2 9 depending on the a b c d flags of the band decoder the corresponding pins are activated at a high level
75. check the LPBridge Serial server option K2 K3 This option is not available for all rigs if this option does not appear TS 480 2000 590 or is grayed out TRX Manager does not support it for the selected rig As implied in the introduction this option can degrade the reliability of the CAT control and it is not the normal mode of operation for TRX Manager Using TRX Manager with dual control disabled The behaviour of the program may be very different from one transceiver to another and depends on the way you connect the remote transceiver to the local computer The common characteristic is that with dual control disabled polling are disabled this does not mean that it is not possible to retrieve the state of the distant transceiver e On Icom Kenwood recent Yaesu the rigs are interrupt driven if your connection is bi directional a number of key functions will be updated at the conclusion of any tuning commands including frequency There is almost no difference with the dual control mode except that any protocol is ignored The recent rigs send automatically any change of their status no polling required e On Old Yaesus the full display is updated at startup and if necessary by pressing the Update button see below however the update function still requires a very fast bi directional connection If you can not update the display properly it is advised to set up TRX Manager for the generic Yaesu transceiver under Setup TRX
76. configurable from the Scanning dialog this button Bi oos pE A E a oe Scanning dialog From the Scanning dialog you may define the Lower and Upper scanning limits MHz the Center frequency MHz and the scanning Range KHz a comment for the scanning range caption by checking Scan from to enable the scanning range or disable it for a continuous scanning scanning memories by clicking M then the memory number 1 10 recall a particular scanning frequency amp range by clicking the corresponding memory number a particular step or setting up the program to calculate it according to the mode and the frequency in use by clicking Auto e the behavior of the Tuning by digits function see above By clicking Scan scanning starts immediately from the Center frequency If you click OK Scanning range will be effective only if the current frequency is within the scanning range Clicking the Tuning knob stops scanning Pi Notes file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 100 of 365 If you own a FT 990 890 840 900 1000D 980 767GX the best choice for slow scanning is AUTO That option allows you to have the benefit of the Internal scanning function of the transceiver The scanning step is the one defined by the transceiver With these Yaesu transceivers the Auto mode Internal scanning prevents the receiver from being chopped off during scanning If you own a FT 1000MP you can try to configure t
77. conflict between com ports or USB adapters A conflict with IRQ5 usually used by the sound card is not detected by Windows If you use an ISA PC board check the DIP switch related to addresses and IRQ are correctly configured Serial to USB converters USB to Serial converters built with FTDI chips are strongly recommended they are very reliable and provide very fast communications The cheap converters built with PROLIFIC and all Clones chips are prone to malfunctions and slow communications with TRX Manager Serial port on mother board You may check that the BIOS Setup program of your PC reflects the correct parameters for the serial ports the same ones as those displayed by Windows in the device manager Note that in some cases when something wrong happens at a com port shortcut defective cable or interface your Bios disabled this com port without warning In practice the following parameters are most common for COM 1 and COM 2 port on mother board COM 1 IRQ 4 address 03F8 03FF COM 2 IRQ 3 address 02F8 02FF Particular case Windows ME The software functions properly under Windows ME However this operating system leaves the DTR and RTS lines of the com ports in a high state at each startup This is important to know for it can cause an unpleasant effect on the CW and PTT lines at the startup of the PC Running TRX Manager and opening the concerned modules will set the DTR and RTS lines to the state required by TRX In
78. control VFO gt to copy or retrieve the current frequencies of the transceiver into the interface gt VFO to copy or set the transceiver s frequencies and modes from the interface also sets the rotator to the current direction of the satellite M IN to copy the current settings into a channel the channel s number and label are defined from the bottom of the window TX and RX buttons to compensate TX or RX TX and RX RX TX in the same band while TRACE ON this is possible provided you set your transceiver in Split mode the FT 847 does not support this use Using the memory channels Twenty memory channels provides setting for satellite please set the configuration and 1 define a Name and a number 1 20 2 press the M IN button Recalling a memory channel is done by a single click in the list from the memory tab Possible problem Q With a Satellite transceiver TRX Manager does not control Main and Sub VFOs for RX and TX respectively but VFOA and B Why A This occurs if you do not switch the program and the transceiver into SAT mode While in normal mode SAT not engaged TRX Manager does not control Main and Sub but VFO A and B allowing the control of both RX and TX in the same band i e for packet operation with ISS In order to control Main and Sub VFOs for RX and TX you must toggle the program and the rig into SAT mode See also Configurationand About Transceivers for satellites file C Help index htm
79. conversion utility DXLog and EasyLogconversion utility Support for Alinco Support for FT 747 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 357 of 365 CW Sequencer extended macros automatic switching into TX TX Interrupt function and improved interface with VKE Help with Index Scanning Stop option for immediate stop of the scanning eV 2 3 0 FT 767GX support for CTCSS Update for the ILG Radio data files pure Text PTT switch via RTS or DTR line New logging mode classic Spanish interface by Arturo EASAKT Commands panel new XFC function a must if you don t have a dual receiver SWL support for AMW AMN FMW FMN Support for the EA4TX s ARSWin rotator interface Control of two transceivers fixes faulty operation of some modules after the transceiver has been switched ICOM updated for IC 756PRO TenTec updated for Omni VI and Omni VI Internet browser CW Interface CD Rom configurable path Support for FRG 9600 updated Screensaver and desktop s bitmap eV 2 2 6 Kenwood bug fix Auto mode DXCC Window bug fix for 6 2 0 7 m new Display Windows submenu ev 2 2 5 LogBook Transceiver type saved in Operator field see Preferences Ability to disable the RTS line Setup Commands panel Grabbing of the VFO knob with the mouse Web Cluster new design optimization of the CPU usage eV2 2 4 Ability to co
80. country code see updating the DXCC codes P Phone C CW D Data G Status for GridSquare The program displays the DXCC for the selected country in the form of squares color The square corresponding to the current mode and bands is in evidence In addition the G row indicates if the 4 digits GridSquare has been worked confirmed before A click in a colored square shows up the worked or confirmed QSOs for the specifc band and mode Then and if necessary a click in a row edits the corresponding QSO in the Log 5 DXCC FY 20m Phone nmam mm Eo Date_ON Cal Name Band 2 17 02 96 FY5FJ RICH 20m E 06 03 95 FY5GJ BRUNO eom ee Note QSO with QSL_Sent I are ignored DXCC Summary A summary of your DXCC award may be calculated and displayed for all bands or a specific band from the Display Awards Summary DXCC submenu The report is calculated for the current entities and for the deleted entities you real report is the sum of the both reports However the calculation of the bandpoints Bands column sums both curent and deleted entities The Detail tab displays the detail of the summary for each DXCC country A click of a drop down button for a specific By country shows up all the worked or confirmed QSOs for that country The Refresh button allows you displaying and printing a customized report according to your selection for Status Mode and Sort order Country or Prefix file C Help index htm 31 10 2
81. distinguish QSOs worked with deleted countries from those worked with active countries All QSOs will be associated with an active country However you may fix that limitation by manually forcing the DXCC code or ADIF code and introduce the code of a deleted country file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en See below ADIF codes for the deleted countries Code Deleted countries 2 ABU AIL IS 8 ALDABRA 19 BAJO NUEVO 23 BLENHEIM REEF 25 BRITISH N BORENO 26 BRITISH SOMALI 28 CANAL ZONE 30 CELEBE MOLUCCA IS 39 COMOROS 42 DAMAO DUI 44 DESROCHES 55 FARQUHAR 57 FRENCH EQ AFRICAY 58 FRENCH INDO CHINA 59 FRENCH WEST AFRICA 67 FRENCH INDIA 68 SAUDI KUWAIT N Z 81 GERMANY lt 1973 85 BONAIRE CURACAO lt 10 2010 93 GEYSER REEF 101 GOA 102 GOLD COAST TOGOLND 113 IFNI 115 ITALIAN SOMALI 119 JAVA 127 KAMARAN IS 128 KARELO FINN REP 139 KURIA MURIA IS 151 MALYJ VYSOTSKIJ I 154 YEMEN ARAB REP 155 MALAYA 164 MANCHURIA 178 MINERVA REEF 183 DUTCH BORNEO 184 NETHER N GUNIEA 186 NEWFOUNDLAND LAB 193 OKINAWA 194 OKINO TORI SHIMA 196 PALESTINE 198 PAPUA TERR 200 PORTUGUESE TIMOR 208 RUANDA URUNDI 210 SAAR 218 CZECHOSLOVAKIA 220 SARAWAK 226 SAUDI IRAQ N Z 228 SERRANA BANK 229 GERMAN DEM REP 231 SIKKIM 255 ST MAARTEN lt 10 2010 258 SUMATRA 261 SWAN ISLAND 264 TANGIER 267 TERR NEW GUINEA 268 TIBET 271 TRIESTE 307 ZANZIBAR 488 WALVIS BAY 493 PENGUIN ISLANDS
82. drive D Database in D HAMO The Auto Log check box allows you to automatically perform a search when transferring a new spot into the Log Book 3 Note If you have enough disk space you may copy the Database folder HAMO by default on the root of your hard disk and declare this disk as the CD drive Callsign search Calling for a search may be performed from the Log Book window by pressing the HAM DB button and also by right clicking on a spot displayed in Web Cluster or DX Cluster or Azimuthal projection windows Features When you call for a search from another module if the required callsign is in the database it will be immediately displayed If an image file is found the image button is activated and allows you to display it If a valid EMail address is found it is possible to send an email by pressing this button The copy button 5 transfers the Name and address into the Windows clipboard First name City and State and other fields if available may be transferred into the Logbook s corresponding fields by pressing of the HAMCall window A new search may be performed by filling in the callsign field and pressing the search button Note The Grid Square field is updated with the value of the corresponding field of the Hamcall s database TRX Manager uses the Latitude or Longitude from the CD to compute beam heading From the Logbook file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 287 of 3
83. frequency resolution when zoomed into narrow spans e Smooth OHz spike With high quality sound card like EMU202 there is no visible spike at OHz This setting is only required with standard sound cards displaying a prominent spike at OHz e Colors and other display options Design preference for the display Band Mode SW Always Band Mode Switch is always visible MAX AVG Samples allows setting the number of samples for integration of MAXimal AVeraGe values of the signal 0 instantaneous 3 is usually appropriate e QSY Detect If checked this option resets integration to zero MAX AVG 0 during QSY to speed up the display e Priority Real time not recommended By default TRX Pan uses the Windows s High priority during capture of the data If Real time is checked TRX Pan takes the priority over all other applications during the capture This may improve synchronization but other applications and sometime the system itself may hang up a little e High Res Zoom if checked TRX Pan automatically adjusts Sample rate to match the current zoom level and to give the best possible resolution please note some values of sample rate may be NOT supported by your sound card this function may be not compatible with the use of other audio applications at the standard sample rate if you get any error message please uncheck this option e Flip I Q on 6m Flip I Q on 6m K3 and other rigs with a reversed conversion scheme on 6m e CW
84. in that case 6 Wait until TQSL ends and click UPLOAD to upload the certified file LOTWEXPORT TQ8 created by TQSL to the ARRLs LOTW 4 Ore Ea Exports only QSOs with Export field checked QSO are unchecked after you click SIGNS TQSL The LOTW button opens the LOTW WebSite using your login and password file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 259 of 365 E Note 0 If TQSL is set up for administrator mode you must run TRX Manager in administrator mode or set OFF UAC to launch TQSL from TRX Manager otherwise you get a TQSL Error 1 the TQSL icon does not appear if TQSL is not properly installed 2 if you periodically submit your QSOs to the ARRL s LOTW you may choose exporting from date to date or you can keep the Export Field for that use so that only the necessary data is exported you may also set up the program to update the QSL_S fields after Exporting 3 you should use the LOTW button to test the validity of your login and password before the first upload The DEMO version does not save this information 4 the Upload complete message at the end of the process does not mean your file has been accepted Updating your database from LOTW The ADIF format is required to exchange data with the LOTW When you receive the status report from the LOTW in the ADIF format click the Open button of the Logbook om choose the ADIF adi or LOTW txt format and select the corresponding file
85. interactivity with the transceiver it is recommended to simultaneously open the Monitoring window 7 081 43 8 7 6 5 9 i 3 1011 1 K3 virtual front panel KX3 is different Colors follow Monitoring s Configuration As the Elecraft K3 KX3 are still in development some of the functions may be inactive moreover other functions may be added in the future depending on the firmware development Some functions require special comments 1 2 Up Down buttons allows step by step frequency changes and to navigate through the K3 s menus 3 SUB swich allows you to toggle the VFO Knob from A to B VFO control 4 This button allows polling the K3 for instant update of the display if it does not update automatically 5 The two combos allows you to select a preset DSP bandwidth for Main and Sub receivers The SHIFT WIDTH button toggles to the HI LO Cut mode Please note HI LO Cut mode in TRX Manager is only a simulation which uses the only available CAT functions WIDTH and SHIFT Consequently difference may appear with the display and behavior of the K3 6 This button allows you to center the bandwidth IF Shift 0 7 MENU and CFG buttons open a list from which you click the desired sub menu TECH MD and RS232 sub menus are NOT displayed Items are sorted by alphabetic order Click OK to exit the menu mode Settings up the menu entries are done using UP DN buttons or dedicated buttons if available Warning not all menu parameters are s
86. is not properly configured Please consult the manuals of your devices there are 3 main areas to check 1 the router for correct port forwarding 2 windows firewall 3 virus software The Web Interface displays the first time but control is never possible Probably the specified base address is wrong especially for internet access or port is wrong file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 179 of 365 Disabling Dual Control for experts TRX Manager by default features a dual control of the transceiver any action on the rig is detected by the program and the new state of the transceiver is displayed by the interface It uses the full communication protocol and checks that any action from the program has been accepted by the rig before displaying it on the interface In some cases this dual control is not desirable especially when your transceiver is remotely controlled not using the remote control feature of TRX manager which requires two versions of the program running on two computers but through a serial device server or any system which emulates a remote com port virtual port In such cases not only is the dual control not essential but it requires a very fast connection and increases the flow of data Disabling the dual control reduces the data flow to the strictly necessary bytes to control your transceiver To disable the dual control you have to uncheck the Dual control option Setup TRX or to
87. it OFF manually gt See also e Synchronization RS232 Amplifiers Band Decoder e Band Plan Modes and filters Setting up your transceiver For each Transceiver from Setup TRX1 4 you define the type of Transceiver the Serial Port and select the communication Speed For some transceivers DTR or RTS case must be checked but more often this option is only required to power on the RS232 interface and not to support a communication protocol If you use an ICOM please fill in its address fill in the number of memories and check COO if the channels are numbered from 00 For a TS 2000 480 590 K2 K3 KX3 or Remote transceiver if you choose the internal CW Interface check CW Internal CW via CAT port For these transceivers any other settings made under the CW tab will be ignored while Internal is checked file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 34 of 365 PTT options are required in case of you don t use PTT TX On Off via CAT or if your transceiver does not support PTT via computer TX Interrup settings are rarely used Under TRX1 tab you also find the SO4R option Single Operator Four Radios which provides various switching options via the parallel port or automatic selections depending on the Operating transceiver Ck Buffer is usually NOT checked If checked the program checks for an empty buffer before sending any new command This may reduce the number of collisions and errors but the program may a
88. later on to recall it using the Openbutton 2 i Search for SELECT FROM LOGBOOK WHERE COUNTRY lt gt DELETED AND BAND lt gt SAT AND BAND lt gt 30m AND BAND lt gt 70cm AND QSL_RCVD Y ORDER BY DATE_ON E Notes e The wording of the fields must strictly respect the names displayed in headings of the grid Listing e The DISTNCT clause enumerates and counts the different values for the specified field The records associated with each value are not visible Status of the WAS The WAS rewards QSOs made with the US states Enumerating SELECT DISTINCT STATE FROM LOGBOOK WHERE QSL_RCVD Y AND DXCC 291 OR DXCC 110 OR DXCC 6 AND STATE lt gt ORDER BY STATE Valid QSOs for the WAS SELECT FROM LOGBOOK WHERE QSL_RCVD Y AND DXCC 291 OR DXCC 110 OR DXCC 6 AND STATE lt gt ORDER BY STATE lt FONT gt Enumerating a DXCC with QRP condition 10 w SELECT DISTINCT DXCC FROM LOGBOOK WHERE QSL_RCVD Y AND TX_PWR lt 10 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 247 of 365 Enumerating the DXCC Millennium award The DXCC 2000 Millennium Award rewards QSOs made with more than entities of the ARRL DXCC List within the Year 2000 Contacts may consist of any combination of bands or modes SELECT DISTINCT DXCC FROM LOGBOOK WHERE QSL_RCVD Y AND DATE_ON gt 01 01 2000 AND DATE_ON lt 12 31 2000 ORDER BY DXCC file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manag
89. latitude and longitude between W2 and W6 Advanced You may also define special callsigns from the Prefix table by adding the sign to the Prefix i e K5D TRX Manager searches for a strict match with this particular callsign before browsing the prefix database However a recommended alternative is to create an entry in the special callsigns database see above Warning for each prefix you must assign a reference to an existing DXCC prefix of the DXCC table The DXCC table You do not have to edit this table except when a change is made by the ARRL in the DXCC country list In this case it is recommended to wait for a program update However you may wish to edit this table to make the change yourself in the DXCC country list This table includes a DXCC field or index the DXCC country name and the ARRL code or ADIF code Loading a customized prefix database According to your needs you may prefer using your own customized database while keeping the original Prefix mdb This is possible by opening an other Prefix database it must exist from the Preferences Logbook tab Special cases Russian callsigns are not fully editable Given the complexity of the Russian information system the program performs specific operations when a Russian callsign is introduced file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 222 of 365 Azimuth rotator and maps Azimuth information Each time you type a new callsign in the DXCC
90. mode what makes setup very flexible but not simple to understand See also Synchronization with PowerSDR IF Stage or NAP3 using the K3 Synchro mode K2 A special window fu Transceiver Levels provides emulation of the Elecraft K2 s front panel The display of the window reflects the display of the rig with some limitations To use this window suitably and to have the best possible interactivity with the transceiver it is recommended to simultaneously open the Monitoring window li Elecraft K2 Prata AGCLIS xP i SPOT cwrv ari c K amen xe mcr a RAS ef eee f MB Tea acco sus A combo box provides a direct access to the menu _Medetn ate aB eegrere lt alert ee E3 Notes e The AF GAIN and RF GAIN controls cannot be emulated e During edition of a menu or a frequency direct entry the TRX Manager s display is not updated by the transceiver file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 70 of 365 K3 KX3 In case of the RIG is OFF while TRX Manager is started once the rig is powered ON you may have to press the Update A button of the to re initialize the communications Monitoring s Update button Levels window A special window H Transceiver Levels provides emulation of the Elecraft K3 s or Elecraft KX s front panel The display of the window reflects the display of the rig with some limitations To use this window suitably and to have the best possible
91. mode In that case from CLIENT you use your keyboard for CW Keying 8 See also e Real control mode file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 169 of 365 Audio transmision TRX Manager does not support audio transmission many solutions to transfer the audio from SERVER lt gt CLIENT has been described by users on the TRX Manager s mailing list The main possibilities are the followings Real time audio link This solution requires a V UHF link a phone line or wireless headphones This solution is probably the best suited for DXing because of the quality of the audio and the lack of delay during the transmission It is of course not practicable over long distances such as through the Internet TCP or UDP audio link This solution involves telephony VoIP software More popular software for HAM Radio and DXIng are Skype Mumble IP Sound Rem Audio While Skype is very easy to use widely distributed and does not require a static IP and port forwarding IP Sound has some advantages it is a stereo bidirectionnal software so dual RX is possible and you can monitor your audio also you can choose the more suitable codec however it uses the less reliable UDP protocol and it is discontinued Rem Audio is promising The main drawback of audio processing via TCP or UDP is the delay from 0 5s to 2s of the transmission which makes tuning a station in SSB or CW acrobatic This solution is perfect for bro
92. name Preferences Location PWR the power Preferences Logbook TRX MANAGER ID your favourite program HIS CALL DE MY CALL HIS CALL the callsign of the station in Qso HIS NAME the first name of the station in QSO HIS QTH the QTH of the station in Qso DATE current date Windows format Date tab TIME current time STX serial number contest MY GRID your GRID Locator MY STATE your State 3 Note Please do not edit the text inserted inside square brackets This may prevents the program from being able to understand the macros Quick macros When using the character mode insertion function is not available however you still can use the following special characters u MY CALL MY CALL MY NAME MY QTH RST HIS CALL HIS NAME VE VA AS _ Space TRX MANAGER Please see this strange QSO with Gerry VE6LB de u tks fer call ur rst name qth how dr K which means file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 188 of 365 VE6LB DE F6DEX TKS FER CALL UR RST 599 599 599 NAME LAURENT LAURENT LAURENT QTH LILLE LILLE LILLE Extended macros CW Keyer only These macros allow you programming of the CW sequencer These macros use the following format X Y with X command Y Parameter Value for X N retries the message the specified number Y of time
93. not forget to save your memory before loading a new file CSV files FTBasic CSV files use the format defined by FTBasic In addition CSV files may be opened from Excel Please note the following conditions e field separator may be comma or semi colon e decimal separator MUST be period file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 109 of 365 Files format When you save memories from the Transceiver menu the software creates a file with the name of your choice and extension mem as default It is a text file It is compatible with any transceiver supported by TRX Manager The content for each line is 13 data s separated by comas or in this order frequency in MHz 0 gt Clear 1 gt Skip Clarifier value in kHz status for tx clar status for rx clar Status for RPT Status for RPT status for Reverse Status for SCAN 0 include 1 skip except FT 920 Status for HIDE 2 unhide 1 hide tuner FT 920 only Status for mode same format as band dat status for filter 0 gt 2 41 gt 2 0 2 gt 500 3 gt 2504 gt 6 0 Channel information label repeater offset KHz CTCSS frequency Hz Encoding 0 no 1 yes Decoding 0 no 1 yes Group TS 2000 only BEACONHF MEM and BEACON28 MEM are two files delivered with TRX Manager with HF beacons You may create or edit the file under MS Excel and save it as CSV which matches the mem file format file C Help index
94. of 365 Operation Once your transceiver or your two transceivers is configured in SAT mode SAT engaged from TRX Manager and the DDE link is selected you may apply the following procedures Procedure for Satellites with fixed frequencies If you know the single pair of working frequencies of the satellite please fill in the interface with these frequencies and modes As soon as you press the DOP button the software applies the appropriate Doppler compensation to the RX and TX frequencies of your station With this type of Satellite you should not use the VFO of your transceiver or the other modules of TRX Manager to modify the frequencies while the Doppler compensation is activated But you may use the Up Downbuttons small and differential corrections by step of 50 Hz to the RX or TX frequencies to apply Procedures for a linear transponder satellite Such a satellite is characterized by a receive band and a corresponding transmit band where either TX RX CONSTANT or TX RX CONSTANT Reverse mode To support linear satellites Satellite transceivers and TRX Manager implement a Trace mode or Track which makes possible to simultaneously shift the receive and transmit frequencies Two procedures may be used procedure 2 is preferable if your transceiver does not send back its frequencies and modes to the computer such as FT 736 or with two different transceivers Procedure 1 First select Trace OFF Trsp
95. pre defined comment Next click the Uploadarrow t Your information is sent to the WOTA server and reflected in the List E WOTA F6DEX severi weeds 7001 _ sit Comm Grid TH Listening FMI6S5E PERQ Peurto Rico EN 1 Allen CN87UT SNOHOM JO10NP 59 Marcq en calls welcome i Lake QRP only 10 Yy out Ale E Verviers B Gi El Dorado Tuning WA Pierce QRT EN51XL C 21 2122 US Testing with FEDEX FNM30DP 14 1910 US Rick in Coconut Creek Fl iF 10 1204 Cy Calls welcome EL49 A lberia 146 7600 amp FN41GX Providenc g IRV KP52BP KE2QR gt FEDEX Laurent think thi Displayed data Stations connected to the server are displayed in the upper window of the WOTA panel Messages are displayed in the lower window Use the splitter bar to adjust the size of each window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 364 of 365 Double click on a Callsign in the upper window to QSY or select a Callsign and open the context menu for additional options If you click on a Callsign or cursor through the upper window data specific to that station is displayed in the status bar Icons give the status as follow see WOTA web site for more information ne Tuning F Listening amp Running You may list all connected stations at any time using the Listbutton 4 However the List command requires you upload at least one status SE WOTA F6DEX server wotadb org 1001 Context menu provides various functio
96. rate Stop Bits 2 default Rarely Stop Bits 1 is required recommanded by ICOM Dual Control usually checked unchecked only if you connect your ICOM to your computer through a serial server e Polling Unchecked is the default This option is not recommended and NOT required in most cases provided that the TRANSCEIVE option is selected see Cautions below From your ICOM radio you have to check e The baud rate some transceivers feature an AUTO BAUD or AUTO SPEED function However it is recommended to NOT use this feature and to set the speed from the transceiver to the highest available value However some models may not run properly at the maximum available speed 19200 in that case please select 9600 bauds e The number of bytes for the frequency except for the IC 735 exchange of frequencies is done in 5 bytes check that your ICOM is not setup for a frequency in 4 bytes e The TRANSCEIVE function or CdE on TenTec when the transceive function is ON any changes in the operating frequency or mode on the radio is automatically transferred to the computer Make sure to set the Transceive function as ON Setting methods differ according to radios Refer to the instruction manual of each radio Warning After the use of some other software this function may be set as OFF Cautions The use of TRX Manager with several ICOMs inter connected in a network to the same CI V bus is not advised indeed the collisions bet
97. relay standard reed DIL is switched by the 12v The whole unit can be assembled in a DB9 or DB 25 connector DTR RTS REED RELAY 12V Serial interface using a reed relay file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 184 of 365 DTR 1K res DB9 DB25 2N 2222 or equiv Transceiver GND GND Serial interface using a transistor positive keying not isolated On a DB25 serial port connector pin 20 is DTR pin 4 is RTS and Signal Gnd is pin 7 On a DB9 serial port connector pin 4 is DTR pin 7 is RTS and Signal Gnd is pin 5 A 3 PTT Switching If the CW Port is not the Transceiver Port TRX Manager also puts a PTT signal on the unused line of the CW port not related with PTT switching which is always on TRX port I E You key the RTS line a PTT signal is available on DTR line for PTT switching A more sophisticated PTT switching via the normal TRX Manager s PTT Lineis also available by using the Auto TX feature A 4 PARALLEL PORT How to choose the parallel port The CW interface keys the Select line of a parallel port You must choose a free LPT port because the CW Interface can not be used with any other device i e a printer rotor However it is compatible with the band decoder of TRX Manager The program keys the Select line Pin 17 while state of Strobe Pin 1 is low The CW interface is compatible with the interfaces of the other popular programs 2N 2222 or equiv Strobe 1 1K
98. serial ports e An external device Tokyo HP SPE ICOM PW1 amplifiers ACOM600S Antenna Tuners e The SteppIR controller supported with a specific setup By default synchronization follows the Main transceiver only However if SO4R is checked synchronization follows the Operating transceiver provided Synchro mode has been enabled for this transceiver From Setup you can choose to synchronize up to 8 different controllers i e a SteppIR beam under Synchro 1 and a software under Synchro 2 Synchro A tab However controllers 2 to 8 Synchro B tab require to be set up with Kenwood protocol only See also e Amplifiers e Band Decoder Settings 1 Synchro A tab of Setup Synchro 1 or Synchro 2 must be set up with the desired Protocol ICOM ICPW1 Kenwood SteppIR K3 Serial port and Speed Ponos ees S o Synchro for SteppIR native mode selected for Com1 19200 bds Synchro A 2 If more than 2 controllers are required you fill in Synchro B tab for up to 6 additional com ports using the Kenwood protocol 3 Synchronization is ONLY activated and effective for the transceivers for which Synchro option is checked under Preferences Transceivers Rotator RES 0S Synchro option if required must be checked for each transceiver Preferences 4 By default the Synchronization is only activated for the main transceiver If SO4R is checked Setup TRX1 synchronization is also effective for the su
99. set auto mode OFF Monitoring or from the Preferences Transceiver Band Plan tab if you don t like this function 2 An other frequent question is related to the configuration of the screen at startup Frequently asked question How to do so that the windows which have been opened during a session open automatically at the next session Answer TRX manager can save the position and the size of each window from one session to another To activate this feature you must check the Previous session option under the Software tab of the Preferences This option should be checked only after you make sure the program correctly communicates with all your devices in order to avoid a repetitive look up at startup E TRX Manager Preferences Activating the Previous session option 3 About Time and Date Frequently asked question When in edit mode Normal QSO mode the Log time is 24 hour Zulu format but when switching to List mode the time is displayed in 12 hour am pm mode Answer TRX Manager follows Windows Regional Settings for Time date etc See also Graphical interface and preferences Use with old computers TRX Manager is still compatible with old computers running Windows 95SP1 98 and Pentium II III 500M 1GHz class processors On these computers you may notice that the program seems to slow down the PC This is possible because TRX Manager is a real time control program it constantly exchanges data with the devices under cont
100. the DXCC codes as well as CQ and ITU zones 3 Note e The export field for any imported QSO will be filled in with NO unchecked e Imported QSO s will be added to the current data base LOTW report files excepted file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 257 of 365 Exporting TRX Manager exports to the CSV Excel CABRILLO and ADIF Amateur Data Interchange Format formats Exporting is launched by clicking the Save 5j button of the Logbook the choice of the log format is made through the Windows common dialog box save as Once you have selected the file to export the Export dialog prompts and allows you to choose the QSO s to export by Export or QSL_Sent field status Date and Operator the required conversions for QSL fields D and which action to take after exporting no action uncheck QSO s update of QSL fields You may also use and edit the last SQL Query SELECT to choose QSOs to be exported The Export button launches the process taf Notes e When exporting to a ADIF text file ADI extension if the file already exists it will be deleted and replaced with the new data e When exporting to CABRILLO you must have CONTEST mode enabled TRX Manager uses the current contest settings file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 258 of 365 Logbook Of The World TRX Manager can create files for submission of your logbook to the ARRL s Logbook of the world LOTW as we
101. the corresponding information is lost However TRX Manager creates a special ADIF field so that you can export import from to TRX Manager without any change of your database Choosing QSL_RCVD Y here is possible but prevents from further update of other fields and is generally not required since you always have to possibility to change D to Y while you export your QSOs to ADIF Anyway for TRX Manager a digitally confirmed QSO is confirmed file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 260 of 365 Possible problem A valid Bandfield is required If your Band field is empty please run the Tools DXCC Update function This function will format the Band field according to the Frequency field Installing the LoTW users list You must use a text formatting list with only one call per line and no comment You may compose a list yourself or download a list from the HB9BZA web site select text 1call line no comment and may be other sites From the LoTW dialog 7 Logbook click LIST and select the list using the text format txt TRX Manager creates a database lotwusers mdb with known LoTW users and is configured Now a will be added in front the DXCC Status for each DX spot if the corresponding station is user of the LoTW El4ll 28 0200 WCNC ireland ST2AR 28 4836 big big signal NCNC Sudan Z21DXI 28 0050 TEST NCNC Zimbab MM3T 28 0180 NCNC Scotland ST2AR is user of LoTW E3 Notes e Available li
102. the exact same settings that your current EDSP settings are Click OK Open RX or TX EDSP windows Click the Default button You are ready to use the EDSP control Possible problems When testing the FT 1000MP we found some malfunctions or incompatibilities in either the CAT commands or with some menu settings it may depend on your ROM version CAT RX EDSP OFF command doesn t work if RX EDSP is ON and gives undesirable result TRX Manager does not use this command CAT RX EDSP AM SSB W SSB N doesn t work if RX EDSP is OFF and gives undesirable results CAT TX EDSP OFF command has a bug but we found a fix CAT FSK AF filter not working CAT AF audio equalization bank 4 not working Note that you may experiment yourself with the EDSP CAT commands by referring to the Yaesu manual and using the CAT Commands window In some cases you may have a loss of audio especially with RX EDSP settings Don t panic you just have to switch EDSP ON OFF from the rig The TRX Manager s interface should help you to avoid these conditions and to enjoy CAT EDSP control file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 48 of 365 Operation with FT 757GX This section applies when using with the FT 757GX Transceiver only and not the FT 757GxII The FT 757GX has very few number of CAT control commands Notably it is not possible to read the transceiver status selected frequencies modes and it is not possible to set the mode from t
103. the large number of commands available and their diversity only the most used commands in real time are supported by TRX Manager essentially from the Monitoring and the Levels windows see below Additional commands can be programmed using macros Please see your manual for the available commands Modes and filters You have to set up the Filters FIL1 N WID NAR by defaut for each Mode from the Preference transceiver dialog box See also Modes and Filters From the Preferences Transceiver dialog you may also enable the AUTO PBT function see below If your transceiver supports the PBT and DSP Width functions TRX Manager provides two very convenient functions Auto PBT IF Shift From the Preferences Transceiver dialog you may set up the default values of PBT Inside and PBT Outside for each mode These values ranging from O to 255 apply for both the Outside and Inside PBT commands and allow defining an IF Shift i e SFT 150hz for a value of 110 but to be tested 128 are the factory default values click D to reset factory defaults ICOM PBT Jv PBT rafe fre Jis fis olro fa a aa namo m ee e Default values of PBT Inside and PBT Ouside for each mode Graphical display The Monitorings window displays the PBT Inside and Outside bandwidths values approximated SFT 106 FIL1 3 0kHz PBT Graph Display af Note about the speed of communication ICOM transceivers automatically communicate frequency
104. the name of the fields separated by semicolons At a minimum ID and Frequency fields are required Each line forms a record each value is separated by semicolons The values follow the same order than the first line It is recommended that you create a CSV file using TRX Manager in order to examine its structure Saving a database to the CSV format Press the Savebutton fl of the tools bar and select CSV as the format of the file to create Opening a CSV file under Excel CSV files may be opened from Excel by selecting csv as type of file Warning a double click of a CSV files launches Excel but with an incorrect configuration you must use the Excel s File Open submenu for opening of a csv file Creating CSV files You may create a database from Excel and then import it into TRX Manager using the CSV format please take care of the following conditions The first line of the file comprises in any order the name of the fields but with the same naming as for the TRX Manager s SW database At least ID and Frequency fields are required 14 15991 ID FREQUENCY MODE QSO 20m 14 15991 USB 20m QSO russe 14 16187 USB 20m Please take care to remove all semicolons and commas from the strings theses characters may be considered as separators Importing a CSV file into TRX Manager Ta Importing CSV files is done from the Open a button and selecting CSV as type of file All imported records will be added to the current database f
105. the server every 2 minutes If auto connection at startup is selected see below the REC button allows an automatic reconnection almost as soon as the current connection is lost The main status bar of the program displays the system messages especially errors related to telnet connections 9 Addresses of DX Cluster servers Various DX Cluster servers are accessible by Telnet You can check the Internet for up to date addresses Auto connection and logon at startup Automatic connection and logon to the DX Cluster is configured under Parameters Preferences Terminal Auto Connect Your choice of Telnet 1 or Telnet 2 is selected by the check box next to 1 or 2 under Auto Connect If you only specify the Host IP TRX Manager connects Host logs in after the string Login is received and uses your registered UserID as CallSign For more flexibility in the event you need to use a ssid after your call or a different callsign or if the cluster uses a different string other than login to ask for the userid the command window connect string basically follows this format DX CLUSTER IP TEXT GREETING FROM DX CLUSTER YOUR CALLSIGN file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 267 of 365 In order to configure TRX Manager please examine carefully how you cluster ask for an userid Below are examples 1 This cluster send this string Please enter your call The syntax is dxcluster no ip org Please enter your call M
106. the testers Adriaan PE1KEL Digi Modes Adrian 5B4AIY Juma TRX2 Art AB4RL Argonaut V Arturo EA5AKT Spanish translation Barry AE4RG FT 920 Barry W4WB FT 817 Ben N6FM Satellite IC 7000 FT 450 Bertrand F5NTS VR 5000 Bill WD8ARZ FT 1000MP Bill WB6JAR Web Server Bob KI2L FT 2000 Bruce K6ZB IC 7600 Burkhard DL1Ik TS 590 Charlie W2TV Terminal amp DX Cluster Chuck WS1L Orion Dale WB9ADB IC R75 Dave N7BHC FT 100 David GW3WCV TS 590 David Sayles NRD 535 Denis F6GKQ FT 990 ROM 1 2 Dennis WN4AZY IC 735 Didier F8BKD DXCC Award Don WB8MKH TS 790 Doug VA3CR FT 1000MP Dx Atlas Doug WA2DX FT 2000 Dwayne VE7AJI FT 980 Dwight K2YT Omni VII Eike DM3ML German translation Erik SMOEEH Remote Farley N4AAN TS 680 Frank W6NEK FTDX 5000 Fred KE2QR George G7MKT FRG 100 George K3GV Telnet G rard F6CVM K3 Glenn KG7IL FT 757GXII Greg AB7R Elecraft K2 Hal K4HW IC R9000 Henry WP4SK FTDX9000 Howard VE2AED TS 870 Isaac 4Z1AO TS 850 Jan LA1XJA IC 9100 Jean Luc F8PKC FT 767GXCW Interface Jeffrey KC2GUC JST 245 Jim N4ULE Jupiter Jimmy WB8NBI TS 570 Joe K1JN FT 1000MP Joel Allamy VR 5000 John VE3NFK Translation OS Log Book FT 817 TS 2000 K3 and a lot of other tests during many years John N3WT Winkey John KI4JPL Orion Kees NRD 535 Lance W7GJ CQ Sequencer andTX Interrupt Lou KF6LOL FT 857 Lutz W4 DH7
107. this option stays compatible with FT 990 1000 D MP and does not require a bi directional connection Functions A It may be necessary from time to time to poll the transceiver for it s complete status by pressing the Update button 2 of the Monitoring panel t i Update button file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 180 of 365 CW Interface Sending CW TRX Manager provides a small terminal Tools CW Keyer for transmission but not the reception of Morse code You may use e The TRX Manager s CW generator TRX Manager keys the RTS or DTR line of a serial port or the Select line of a parallel port A specific but inexpensive switching interface is required between the com port or LPT port and the Key line of your transceiver e A Winkey Keyer e The Internal electronic keyer CAT of the TS 480 570 590 870 990 2000 K2 K3 KX3 transceivers You configure the CW Keyer to be used from the Setup dialog Related Topics Elecraft TS 2000 570 480 590 TS 990S Winkey CW Skimmer Interface From this terminal you compose messages send them immediately or store them in memory send CW messages in line mode the message is sent after the Enter key has been pressed send message in character mode each character is sent immediately after being typed have a quick access for logging can use macros Support is provided for special characters CQ sequencing control of the TX line Interface file
108. this selection whose QSLS field is R or Blank and QSL_Print field is not N However please note that depending on your selection or the syntax of your SQL query in some cases you may have unpredictable results anyway avoid a selection by QSLS Settings In view of the variety of available format there is no defined label format A graphic wizard allows you to adjust the label size to match your paper printer Adjustment can be made to margins spaces between labels size etc The font size will be adjusted so that the printed information matches the label size The QSL option allows you adding the QSL status PSE QSL or TNX QSL The Message check box allows you to add or not the message field from the Logbook The QTH check box allows you to add your QTH or any other text to your UserID Please note that you can set the QTH from the Preferences dialog box under Location The Color check box allows you to print the recipient callsign in red One or two trials may be necessary to set all the parameters and the selections is Note Adjustments are made from the printing zone of the printer You have to adjust to the proper margins of the printer The Label Printed information includes the callsign the QSL Manager if available your UserID followed by your QTH optional QSL status optional date and time frequency mode report sent and the message optional If QSL_Print A a label with the address will be printe
109. time Logbook normalmdb Edit mode pm 10m 100 jf Agalega St Brandon 3B6 7 1 Band f F E gt d 3B7RE 10m Cw R 599 5 559 12 05 19 g Aland Island OHO 1 QHONJ 10m SSB R 59 59 28 11 198 Algeria 7x 1 7x0AD 10m SSB R 59 5 59 08 11 1996 Amsterdam amp St Paul Is FT Z2 1 FTSZH 10m SSB A 59 50 20 12 1998 Angola D2 1 D2BB 10m SSB R 59 59 30 09 2000 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 245 of 365 When you click a QSO a Worked Confirmed it is displayed under the Edit tab and you may modify its content The Contest and Dupes options allow displaying the QSOs of the current Contest and or the duplicate QSOs or Dupes same Call Band Mode When Dupe is checked clicking a QSO from the Explorer selects the duplicate QSOs from the database in Select mode and they are displayed in the Listing tab for editing Please don t forget to press the Select toolbar s button to reset the current selection and to display the whole database again Save to File function The Save button box saves the report to a text file The First QSO check box limits the listing to the first QSO of each search criteria fj essai txt Bloc notes FEDEX HAM Station Report by Band Country Created by TRX Manager on 22 03 01 19 01 21 Band 10m 33 Country Agalega St Brandon 5356 7 1 3B7RF 10m CW 12 05 98 16 41 00 Country Aland Island OHO
110. to be zero Offset is only used in SSB to calculate the carrier frequency Offset 85 in FSK e If you select Plan TRX Manager does nothing else than setting the mode according to the band plan Logging a QSO You can use the Fldigi user interface to fill in the various fields required for logging and log this QSO into the TRX Manager s database as follow e toggle the DIG Rial button of the Logbook ON This engages logging using the Fidigi s fields e click the Spot button B Spot of the logbook TRX Manager reads the Fidigi s log fields and fills in the corresponding fields of the logbook You can complete the log with the necessary information using a CD Rom or Internet Press the Log button nhi or Ctrl S or F12 to save the QSO See also Logging a new QSO Ea Notes file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 199 of 365 II you log a QSO from Fidigi by clicking the Save button it is not transferred into the TRX Manager s logbook As soon as you introduce a callsign into Flidigi it becomes the TRX Manager s current spot The following fields are transferred from Flidigi to TRX Manager Callsign Mark frequency RTTY carrier frequency other modes Modem mode RSI In Out QTH State Province Locator Notes Exchange contest mode Serial number contest mode Normalizing the Tone From the Transceiver s menu the Normalize function B helps to center the current station file C Help index ht
111. to read data sent by a third party program such as E Meter by N8LP e ACOM data sent by TRX Acom e LP 100 ALPHA W2 data sent by a digital wattmeter LP 100 amp LP 100A or ALPHAPOWER 4500 or Elecraft W2 to configure under Setup TRX1 Power and SWR are displayed A white bargraph shows power by scale automatically adjusted to 25 250 2500W LP100 See also Linear Reminder file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 93 of 365 Repeater settings For transceivers which support the corresponding commands by computer TRX Manager provides control of various parameters needed for repeater operation These parameters can be set either from the o Frequency window F2 or the Channel window Available parameters The parameters that are supported by the program are the following e Shift Shift and signs e Encoding Decoding CTCSS tones e Encoding DCS codes 3 Notes e The available parameters vary a lot from one transceiver to an other and it is not possible to provide a comprehensive list of the supported functions for each rig e In many cases and or if the Repeater Offset is not supported as is the program offsets the TX frequency using the Split mode e If DCS encoding is supported by your transceiver please check DCS to make visible the DCS Combo box and select the value of the DCS code Default settings by band The Preferences dialog box under Transceiver tab makes it possible to set the default parame
112. to set up TRX Manager with the same CAT speed 38400 and RTS checked if selected on your transceiver Polling Not checked default is the best way to control these transceivers by taking advantage of the automatic notification of status changes of the rig Only if you encounter erratic communications as with some of the early rigs tested you may test a periodic polling by checking the Polling option If polling is checked the auto information function is disabled and a constant but limited polling is engaged the Levels window does not automatically update in that case is Note about the auto information mode polling disabled Auto information polling disabled avoids any periodic pollings allows a very stable and smooth operation from a computer It is also highly useful in remote mode using a serial server by minimizing the commands send by the computer Using a serial monitor you can check that TRX Manager never sends unnecessary polling commands During operation and if necessary if it happens that the rig stops sending status changes you may press the Monitoring s update button B at any time to re activate the auto information function and update the display A Possible problems Shift of the frequency when selecting a CW spot If you notice a shift of the frequency Pitch BFO when you select a Spot after a band mode change i e CW 40m gt USB 20m please use the CW FREQ DISPLAY transceiver s menu to cancel this shift
113. track properly or COMM ERROR is displayed please try switching On the Transceiver Interface using the ON button or the Controller s Power button to resume normal operation e If COMM ERROR appears too often please try to uncheck REAL TIME and to increase the polling interval up to 3000ms e Defaut for Stop Bits is 2 In some cases it appears working better with Stop Bits 1 stepptr Limitations The SteppIR controller firmware is limited to due to the lack of memory space on the processor buffer THEREFORE some functions like HOME or CALIBRATE do not always work as expected PLEASE note the appropriate information in these instructions e If the controller opens Setup while you press Home or Calibrate on screen please switch Power Off On on controller to resume a power OFF ON sequence is always recommended before you start any communication e If Calibrate retracts elements and stops here press Interface to re enable the transceiver interface e Interface does work between 8 55MHz and 9 15 MHz see options depends on firmware e The first time 12v is applied to the controller AMATEUR and GENERAL FREQ settings may be shifted depends on firmware workaround is to select AMATEUR mode before you select GENRERAL FREQ The null modem cable must ABSOLUTELY have no connections other than pins 2 3 and 5 SteppIR put signals used for test and alignment on the other pins and USE OF A STANDARD FULL HANDSHAKE NULL MODEM CABLE WILL FA
114. usable for a given mode depending of your transceiver ex SSB FILO 2 SSB CW FIL2 4 This may be improved in next versions of TRX Manager e DSP the two DSP sliders of the Remote TRX window control the DSP sliders of the remote transceiver The labels display the functions under control By clicking the labels you can center the controls e VFO B provides direct manual scanning of VFO B a compatible transceiver is required recent Kenwood recent Yaesu Elecraft The Remote window supports drag and drop Logbook Whatever the remote mode you are using TRX Manager always uses the CLIENT s Logbook When you press OP the CLIENT s Logbook populates the Remote frequency and mode The SERVER s logbook is never used Rotator The Remote interface controls the Remote Rotators Rotator 1 or 2 are selected on SERVER depending on the Preferences of the SERVER station You may enter either an azimuth or a gridsquare 4 6 digits A gridsquare may be more accurate if the remote station is far from the CLIENT station with a very different location e When you click DX Spot on the CLIENT computer the location of the DX station is calculated and sent to the corresponding text box of Remote interface By clicking ej coordinates are transferred by GridSquare 4 digits to the SERVER station If the remote rotator supports feedback the current azimuth of the remote rotator is displayed e If necessary press to force or to initia
115. variety of reports but requires some training Also the computation of the most current awards DXCC 5BDXCC WAZ WAS VUCC DDFM PH DDFM CW Mixed except DDFM is made easy by the preprogrammed SQL search from the pulldown menu 5 Logbook normal mdb New QSO e 22 1 St Brandon 3B6 3 m amp St Paul ls FT 2Z 1 P2E 2 10 OMR 17m SSB 01 03 96 17 02 00 Azerbaijan 4J 1 Azores CU 2 CUIAX 17m SSB 09 10 94 13 00 00 CU2 DL3KUD 17m Cw 14 10 95 14 14 00 Balearic Island EA6 1 Displaying WAS Award for normal mdb 21 items item 17 Unknow states 17 QSOs gt 20 confirmed states may be more since unknow states are confirmed AL 1 1 Qso etc file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 220 of 365 Prefix and Special Callsigns data base editing Any modification of the Prefix database or of the Special Callsigns database may be performed by opening the Prefix database editor Edit Prefix base sub menu ase Ji E Note Please close the SWL and Logbook windows before opening the prefix database from TRX Manager See also e Database grids Editing the prefix database is a rather delicate and a risky operation see below The recommended alternative is to edit the Special Callsign database Editing the Special CallSigns database In the particular case of you can not wait for the next update and or you only need to define a special callsign as a refere
116. work and can not be recognized by TRX Manager Supported TNC TRX Manager supports TNCs with TAPR KAM PK232 or TF TNC2S TNC3S PROM Hostmode are not supported Supported rotator interface TRX Manager supports SARTEK Orion PA PX HyGain Prosistel Yaesu Kenpro EA4TX s ARSWin WinRotor Green Heron AlfaSPID MicroHAM and KCT rotator interfaces It is possible to control up to two rotators See also Rotator control Parallel port The TRX Manager s band decoder emulates a Yaesu radio on pins 2 5 of a parallel port other band data formats are possible Parallel port can also be used for CW keying and is programmable for the control of an external device such as amplifier or for SO4R information Windows 8 10 64bits and later Under recent versions of Windows 64 bits the LPT driver third party does not work Please note until now that no fix is available and that a such fix is unlikely Supporting LPT ports is more and more difficult under Windows Other devices TRX Manager supports SteppIR beams Synchro Alpha amplifiers TRX Synchro ACOM amplifiers and Winkey CW Interface Digital Vector Wattmeter LP 100 and LP 100A ALPHAPOWER 4500 series Elecraft W2 are supported file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 10 of 365 Installing TRX Manager TRX Manager is installed by a program which copies the required files and registers the system resources Preparing your system for instal
117. you access it from the Parameters Registration submenu You just have to confirm your data and acceptation of the license agreement It is then necessary to start the program again to validate the registration Q Good to know TRX Manager accepts registering up to three personal callsigns see License agreement You can choose the callsign to register from the Registration dialog but you may also change the current registered callsign at any moment from the Preferences Software Location tab for the current use of the software logging spotting If necessary you may request a new file registered to your new callsign or to a special personal callsign free of charge during the 3X years of free downloadable update sf IMPORTANT NOTES All the files are strictly personal Personal data are displayed in the About and Registration dialog boxes TRX Manager prints the Callsign on QSL labels TRX manager sends your Callsign to a dx cluster as a name with an EMail The Evaluation version Demo or a patch can not be registered you need to purchase a license file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 338 of 365 Support and upgrade policy Please don t hesitate to visit the TRX Manager web site at http www trx manager com for keeping you informed about improvements and new features of the program Please see How to Order and contact PDA for any information on delivery delays the status of your order etc
118. you don t use assisted tune ia Don forget to set up your Wattameter from Setup TRX1 tab WattMeter frame From Setup TRX1 tab you set up the wattmeter LP 100 LP 100A ALPHA ALPHAPOWER 4500 ELECRAFT W2 and the corresponding com port If you select OLE as WattMeter you may use the OLE link with the programs distributed by Telepost Inc file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 153 of 365 Linear Reminder Assisted Tune The Linear Reminder module measures the Gain of your amplifier and offers a computer assisted tuning method This last function mimics the alternative tuning method offered by some high end linear amplifiers generally called Nominal Gain tuning method It is however absolutely necessary to understand the principle before using it safety and with efficiency These functions are only available if e A digital wattmeter is set up from Setup TRX1 by using a serial port OLE and Remote not supported e Your transceiver allows keying up down PTT via CAT control e The Monitoring window is open The following requirements are recommended but not mandatory e Control of the Drive power by computer if your transceiver does not support setting of output power by computer please take care to NOT change the power output between sessions or measurements e Operate Standby controlby using a relay inserted in the PTT Line if you don t use this function see Overview you will have to indicate the state
119. 0 MSRD2x35 d11 3 50 3602 0 MSRep135 d11 3 50 3602 0 VB5DB d11 5 00 3724 VBAJet32 d11 5 0 7122 2147023067 80070725 Automation error This error may occur under Windows 95 98 It is caused by the installation of OLE Automation system files not compatible with your operating system The following table lists system files required by TRX Manager under Win XP and Win 9 X version 2 40 is required under Win9 X while version 3 50 is required under Win XP Version 2 40 is installed by TRX Manager under Win 9 X only DLL gt For Win XP 9X OLEAUT32 DLL 3 502 40 ASYSFILT DLL 3 502 40 STDOLE2 TLB 3 50 2 40 OLEPRO32 DLL 5 05 0 A repair tool is available from the TRX Manager s support page Please reboot your system after the installation Other runtime errors or crashes You may try reinstalling TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 31 of 365 Unregistered copy This message may happen after the installation of a new software very rarely but ALWAYS if you upgrade your system e g from W7 8 to W10 In that case you need to reinstall TRX Manager using your personal Setup file labelled SETUP_TRX5_XXXxX delivered just after your purchase You don t need to uninstall TRX manager please just reinstall TRX Manager on top of your current copy This process will preserve all your personal files and settings After the installation is completed don t forget to Register using the Parameters Registration sub
120. 0001 With NAP3 K3 All SSB Offsets Zero With NAP3 TRX Manager offsets for CW and DATA modes have to be set here CW 550Hz Global Offset 6000 to be determined prperecerterrererrrrrsrrerrry Sevevevevcceceesceseecccoeed ASIO E MU0202 USB v ASIO E MU 0202 USB 192000 x 002048 v a NAP3 Setup IF panel Note recommanded Rig timing with TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 145 of 365 High Precision S Meter A high precision S Meter is installed with TRX Manager It is a separate application a TRX Meter TRX Meter exe running with TRX Manager via OLE Features The TRX Meter program makes it possible to calibrate a digital S Meter very precisely to do so will be require a RF generator If you don t have a generator it is still possible to calibrate this S Meter so that it reproduces the same indications as the transceiver This program also makes it possible to plot directive patterns of antennas automatic remote control of the rotor is supported from V2 4 5 of TRX Manager It should be noted that the calibration described here does not have any effect on the main S Meter of TRX Manager which may be calibrated basically from the Preferences dialog box under Transceiver by simply moving a slider Running TRX Meter Please run TRX Manager with OLE enabled Setup and run TRX Meter exe The main purpose of this application is to perform measurements it is pr
121. 015 TRX Manager en Page 211 of 365 DXCC Summary FEDEX I Agalega st Brandon 3B6 7 a d Moce C31LU AEE 12 10 99 C310F Cae E Please see how to update the DXCC codes to understand the program s limitations More reports This DXCC information has been conceived as a real time help to DXing A summary is provided however for getting most comprehensive reports you need to use the Logbook s Explorer Compatibility with the other logging programs Each logging program implements its own algorithm to find the countries and to compute the DXCC score In fact when you import or export your logbook there always remains some errors which are difficult to fix To avoid these errors it is advisable to add an identifier in the doubtful cases The use of the ADIF format during the transfers provided that it is fully supported completely avoids such errors file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 212 of 365 Updating the DXCC codes To calculate the DXCC Award status TRX Manager uses the DXCC field and not the country or the callsign fields That means this function is only working if your QSOs have been logged from TRX Manager or imported from a log program using the ADIF format which fully support the DXCC country code such as LOGic E Note DXCC codes lower than 0 are provisional until the release of the official ARRL DXCC code and are not exported Updating a logbook DXCC Update
122. 1 OHONT 10m SSB 28 11 81 13 20 00 Country Algeria 7X 1 7XOAD 10m SSB 06 11 98 11 34 00 Country Amsterdam amp St Paul Is FT Z 1 FT5ZH 10m SSB 20 12 98 10 28 00 Printable report Explorer txt 9 Tips e When you work with the Logbook s Explorer it is advised to close the Monitoring and windows in order to improve the speed of the program e Sorting by Award takes less time e Sorting is processed by alphanumeric order which is not convenient for some numeric fields such as CQ or ITUzones It is recommended to fill in these fields with two digits i e Zone 01 and NOT Zone 1 Note that DXCC Update is reformatting ITUZ and CQZ fields with two digits file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 246 of 365 Advanced searches and reports The Advanced soL tab of the Log book s Searchdialog box th allows you to select records using SQL queries Some SQL queries are preprogrammed for the most current awards Below are also some useful examples of SQL queries which can be copied and pasted into the SQL editor Easy way to search Clicking the Select j button of the Logbook s opens the Search dialog box Select the SQL Adavanced tab Choose a preprogrammed query or start a query under the QSO Gd tab and click the SQL a tab to recall the corresponding query using the QSO button for editing In addition the Savebutton allows you to save the query on hard disk as text file SQL extension and
123. 1 TS 850 TS 870 TS 940 TS 950 TS 990 TS 2000 ICOM IC 703 IC 706MKII IC 706MKIIG IC 718 IC 725 6 IC 735 IC 746 IC 746PRO IC 7400 IC 7410 IC 751 IC 751A IC 756 IC 756PRO PRO2 PRO3 IC 765 IC 271 IC 471 IC 275 IC 475 IC 775 IC 781 IC 820 821 IC 910 IC 9100 IC 970 IC R75 IC R7000 IC R7100 IC R amp 500 IC R9000 IC 7000 IC 7100 IC 7200 IC 7600 IC 7700 IC 7800 7850 7851 IC PCR1000 TENTEC Omni VI Omni VI Omni VII RX320 Argonaut V Jupiter Eagle Argonaut VI JST NRD 535 NRD 545 JST 145 JST 245 ALINCO DX 77 ELECRAFT K2 K3 KX3 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 4 of 365 Other brands CODAN NGT RACAL 6790 OMNI RIG s Library by VE3NEA See List of supported rigs JUMA TRX2 ACOM 600S ACOM 2000 Only the following Transceivers are supported as Sub Transceivers All ICOM Kenwood and Elecraft transceivers Yaesu FT 450 FT 736 FT 840 FT 890 FT 900 FT 950 FT 990 F 1000D FT 1000MP FT 920 FT 817 FT 847 FT 857 FT 897 VR5000 FT 991 FTDX 1200 FT 2000 FTDX3000 FTDX5000 FTDX9000 FT 450 NRD535 545 RX320 ARGONAUT JUPITER ICPCR1000 CODAN RACAL OMNIRIG EAGLE Please note some of the above functions do not run with all transceivers Distribution TRX Manager is not a free software You may test TRX Manager for a 30 days evaluation period to determine the compatibility with your system and the various elements of your station Please check the license conditions before using and copying the software and see how to order
124. 2 13 amp es 16 80 b 40 30 aaar a Command wejaje ea SteppIR Window DATA OUT AUTO engages an auto tracking mode the antenna follows the operating transceiver In some cases of operation i e reversing TX RX while Split is ON you may find necessary to unchek the Auto button to disable frequency tracking however Auto OFF keeps the controller connected gt gt allows a manual update of the controller including outside of the defined frequency range Additional options are provided from the Options dialog e Set OFF VOX allows setting OFF VOX while tuning for SSB and or CW only if your transceiver provides the corresponding CAT commands e Correction for 8 50MHz to 9 20MHz fixes a firmware s bug which does not accept frequencies between 8 50 and 9 20MHz allows acceptable tunings for SW listening 8 5 8 85 8 5MHz 8 85 9 2 9 2MHz This problem has been fixed by SteppIR for the most recent firmware e Polling interval ms delay in ms between status commands 1200ms is the default If your interface locks up frequently please try to increase this value a Notes e If the current frequency of the antenna is not displayed press the ON button to wake up the controller e If you use STPIR mode and connect the cable to DATA IN frequency updates are processed by the controller but the SteppIR window is NOT usable commands are inoperative e In native mode connected to DATA OUT if the controller does not
125. 2 is the default e TCP a valid and unique port for the TCP connection 1001 is the default e Packet see specific settings below 1 3 Optional settings 1 Watch dog SERVER disconnects if no frame is received after the specified delay This may be useful if your connection is lost and SERVER still connected this also resets the password usage for a new connection It is mandatory you set up CLIENT with the same option and the same delay 2 Password for connecting the SERVER computer 3 Check and set the EMail address for automatic notification of the IP Address The IP Address of the SERVER station will be automatically sent after the specified delay Please take care to properly configure the internal emailer of TRX Manager this option is only available with a registered version of the program 1 4 Packet control only e Address of the server station 0 to 9 the SERVER station must have an address so that several stations can be operated remotely on the same packet frequency e Auto Information if checked the remote transceiver will notify and confirm to the client station each change of frequency mode and S Meter readings e To save resources on SERVER computer please let Traffic Display unchecked the Terminal will not display any data coming from the CLIENT station e Terminal TNC tab set the function buttons 9 and 10 S1 S2 The Terminal will be automatically launched and the corresponding S1 S2 messages will b
126. 25 of 365 Please type the CAT command in the corresponding text box If Off is checked the macro will be an On Off button and two CAT commands are required If Off is NOT checked it will be a command button and only one CAT command is required The Caption field allows you to display a short name for the function The Test button if available allows you testing the function immediately Depending on the type of transceiver ICOM or Kenwood Yaesu the Syntax is very different You have to use the correct syntax by referring to the Transceiver s manual see also CAT Programming Ea Multiple commands Multiple commands in a chain are possible the multiple commands are separated by a slash ICOM Others and or a delimiter Yaesu Kenwood Elecraft Kenwood recent Yaesus The command is typed in using the format required by the manual the last end delimiter is NOT required Embedded commands are supported i e Mode USB MD2 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 126 of 365 Elecraft See kenwood I E a useful macro Up2 Split SWT13 SWT11 UP4 UP4 SWT11 FT1 ICOM Command is typed in using the format required by the manual but without Preamble Addresses FEFEXXYY and without the End of message code FD only the command the sub command and the data area are required i e Comp ON 164401 Comp OFF 164400 Multiple commands in a chain are possible the multiple commands are se
127. 32 input you need an RS232 USB converter Make sure your converter supports RTS DTR CTS CTS as required for CW PTT keying TX Interrupt or by some protocols Once your RS232 converter is recognized by Windows in order to set up TRX Manager you must determine the number assigned to the com port created by the driver You have to go into the Device Manager and expand the Ports line to see the list the com port number may be different depending on which USB device is connected to your computer TRX Manager supports com ports from 1 to 32 If a com port has been created outside that range you can re assign the com port number between 1 32 from the device manager Q How to choose your Serial to USB Converter file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 9 of 365 USB to Serial converters built with FTDI chips are strongly recommended http www ftdichip com they are very reliable and provide very fast communications The cheap converters built with PROLIFIC chips and all clones are prone to malfunctions and slow communications with TRX Manager A multi ports PCI card internal to the computer is a very good solution which minimizes RFI and a cheaper alternative to 4 separate USB Interface Cable See also Serial Port and USB If you use the integrated USB interface of your transceiver don t forget to power your transceiver before running TRX Manager If your interface is not powered the USB interface does not
128. 363 of 365 WOTA TRX Manager supports WOTA Please refer to the WOTA web site located athttp www wotadb org and the FAQ page before using this facility As stated on the site Who s On the Air Database WOTA is a great solution Find out who is on the air the band and frequency they are operating on and their location by Country State County Grid Lat Long TRX Manager implements the WOTA protocol Most of the data is derived from the Location tab on the Preferences panel Review the fields for accuracy If you are operating in the United States the QTH field should contain your county The specification includes a messaging protocol You can send messages to other operators point to point or to a group broadcast to all subscribers of that group TRX Manager lets you subscribe to multiple groups Quick launch Open the WOTA window from the File WOTAsubmenu and connect to the WOTA server by activating the connection button When the status bar indicates that you are Connected the upper window will fill with stations connected to the WOTA server If upload is NOT disabled according to the state of the NO Uploadbutton ix you status will be uploaded almost immediatly and your Callsign will appear in the list The list will change as stations modify their data frequency comments operating state etc You may sort the list by clicking on a column header Use the Comment field to set a comment Use the Select button to use a
129. 65 If the Auto logging option is checked the transfer of the data to the logbook is automated when you introduce a callsign into the callsign field of the logbook and press Enter keyboard or the Info button of the Logbook the transfered data depend on your options for the Fields to transfer In summary e Enter or fetches the data into to the fields of the Logbook auto logging function T performs a search but does NOT transfer the data You must use to transfer the data Possible problems The program was tested with the 2013 version Because Buckmaster may change the data format without warning being able to run an older or newer version is not guaranteed The program doesn t transfer the firstname into the logbook Please note that feature is only available for the US callsigns For other callsigns the database doesn t distinguish between firstname middlename and name file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 288 of 365 FCC Database look up TRX Manager provides automatic callsign look up from the license records of FCC Federal Communications Commission of the USA The FCC s listing available for public download is updated every week and thanks to this utility you can have very up to date information Using this feature requires the installation of the FCC database How to install the FCC database FCC offers free download of the full listing of the license records However this listing needs t
130. 65 the groups group messaging you subscribe to a Group filter and a Band filter use DX Cluster settings options to delete spots older than a specified delay or spots with a specific string in Comment echo for your own messages a favorite URL Receiving amp sending message Messages are displayed in the lower window TRX Manager plays the DX Tracking WOTA WAV file when a message is received Use the message dialog box to send a message Type a Callsign or a Group in the QSP gt field There are a few ways to open the message dialog box e click the qsp 4 button e select a station from the upper list single click and select QSP me from the context menu e double click on a received message e cursor to a received message using the up and down keys and press ENTER You can remove incoming messages by selecting the message and pressing the Delete key Group messaging You subscribe to groups by listing them in the WOTA s Preferences dialog box TRX Manager sends them to the WOTA server when you Connect For example if you specify ALL WOTA TRX you will receive messages sent by any other users who selected a member in that group The WOTA organization recommends you subscribe to SOS ALL Additionally please subscribe to TRX This group will be of interest to those of us using TRX Manager Note you can create any group and you can change your subscriptions any time during the session but you must use the Upload arrow t to s
131. 7 of 365 is Note if a DSP WIDTH command is sent from the program using the DSP WID slider the transceiver will no longer responds to changes using the BW DSP POT on the front panel until the next power off on cycle Press the DEFAULT button of the levels window to regain control from the DSP POT From TRX Manager please note DSP slider s range is variable for each mode AM SSB CW RX320 Setup Please select RX320 from Setup and check RTS and DTR Communication Speed must be set to 1200 bauds Unlike conventional tabletop or portable radio receivers the RX 320 contains no front panel controls The receiver hardware relies entirely on an external controller to provide radio like functionality In fact the receiver is controllable via its DSP The DSP provides control over MODE FREQUENCY BFO FILTER AGC MODE SPEAKER LEVEL and LINE OUTPUT LEVEL In addition the DSP can respond to requests for SIGNAL STRENGTH S Meter Current use DSP The roll off value for DSP is fixed to 200 Hz BFO CW The BFO may be adjusted by using the Pitch function of TRX Manager Edit Pitch or from the Preferences Transceiver dialog The default value is 600 Hz AF and Line levels These levels are adjustable from the Levels window Sub receiver level Line level AGC AGC is adjustable from the Levels window 1 Slow 2 Medium 3 Fast Off not supported Argonaut V Please select Argonaut from Setup and check RTS and DTR Communication Speed
132. 814 FT 847 Preferences Transceiver Options for Power Tuner Linear for each band if available Propagation predictor does nor work in december fixed e V 3 1 0 QSL Labels TNX QSL or PSE QSL option Link with DXTelnet Sound announce for a New ONE Preferences WAV Programmable Band Decoder file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 355 of 365 TS 570 870 more controls Levels window TS 570 870 2000 CW Interface may key the rig via CAT CW Interface Keying has been improved Parallel port supported TRX Synchro now supports Kenwood transceivers Various fixes e V 3 0 2 Monitoring Auto Mode is an option Preferences Transceiver Band Plan Interface with DX Atlas Various updates of Prefix mdb Preferences Transceiver selection of either 455 KHz AND OR 8 9 MHz filters now possible FT 1000 MP TS 450 690 850 950 Web amp DX Clusters windows context button for direct logging Terminal File upload fix for files gt 1 K e V 3 0 1 Web Cluster change of the POST method for DXSummit bug fixed Error 67 ICOM fix related to VFO selection Minor fixes for TS 2000 CD Rom fix of the Copy function TS 2000 Clarifier wrong value Interface for WinRotor FCC Module Crash with non US Call fixed Memory Channels support for FTBasic s file format eV 3 0 0 New version reinstallation required Active resizing of main windows
133. ACOM Antenna selector please check Antenna Switch in Setup if you don t use it it is preferable to let this option unchecked since it adds useless control commands between amplifier and computer ACOM antenna switch is fully supported either using the TRX Acom s antenna table if enabled in Setup or amplifier s memorized antenna positions Other available options with antenna table checked are e TX freq default If checked the TX Frequency defines the current segment e Hysteresis 25kHz Default from the edge of each segment to prevent from undesirable antenna changes e Remember changes by HAM BAND By default TRX Acom memorises an antenna change for the corresponding segment and during a same session If this option is enabled the memorization of an antenne change from buttons 1 10 applies for the whole HAM Band file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 159 of 365 Remote Control Remote control overview TRX Manager lets you operate any transceiver by remote control through a LAN through a local area network or the Internet and even via Packet TRX Manager also offers remote operation of rotators and CW keyer Although many software solutions or alternatives exist to control a remote computer including the TRX Manager s Web Server the standard TRX Manager s remote control mode minimizes the information being passed on the network and thus gives faster real time control with minimal latency which a DX
134. Buttons g Engages the character mode the transmission starts immediately after you start typing your message The Enter key quickly terminates the transmission EOD Space bar CR Word mode message is transmitted word by word each time you press the space bar This mode is convenient for FSK and PSK since character mode is not usable in these modes A Clears the text boxes Pastes the current callsign highlighted string in the upper text zone to the logbook and creates a new entry but does not save the QSO Double clicking the Callsign has the same effect and is faster iss Stops the transmission 1 16 Type a message in the lower text box then click Save and the message number CW Macros are supported Press 1 16 to recall a message Limitations e In TEXT Mode CAT control may be partially disabled depending on MCU version e The message length is limited to about 100 characters at 20 wpm in CW depends on speed and mode above this limit the K3 may truncate the message abort transmission or behaves abnormally e The TEXT mode is not compatible with LP Bridge LPBridge option checked or not e Full editing is not supported by the lower text zone only BackSpace is supported e To STOP the transmission you may also press your CW paddle See also e True FSK PSK Keying from the MMVARI module Filters TRX Manager implements two virtual DSP filters Normal and Narrow for each SSB CW mode a Wide filter for AM S
135. C module the Quick Memories CW Interface and the DX Bar By default at startup the Main Transceiver is the Operating Transceiver The Operating transceiver can be selected at any time and very quickly using the OP button available from the Monitoring or Sub Transceiveror Remote control windows i e this OP function provides logging from a Sub Transceiver The Preferences for the Rotator by band follows the Operating transceiver Some modules also provide independent selection of the Operating Transceiver In addition depending on the state of the SO4R option under Setup TRX1 tab OP function also links the Band Decoder OLE Synchronization with the Operating Transceiver Q Selecting the operating transceiver at startup using a command line switch A switch TRX1to TRX4 can be added to the command line to start TRX Manager with a specific main transceiver The command line must look like this C Program Files TRX Manager exe TRX2 to start TRX Manager with TRX2 as main and operating transceiver Frequency range TRX Manager covers the frequency range from 0 1 to 2000 MHz with the following accuracy below 160MHz 10HZ 1Hz from 160MHz to 1600MHz 100HZ 10hz above 1600MHz 1KHZ 100Hz Accuracy may be higher with some transceivers file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 36 of 365 Troubleshooting guide Serial port The program doesn t communicate with your rig or your TNC
136. CAT Control you may not change anything from the transceiver as frequencies mode You have to press CAT or F9 again to leave the CAT control mode When you run TRX Manager for the first time after the XCVR was OFF you may have to press one or more times the CAT button before the CAT Control starts or wait a few seconds The CAT control is only effective when the CAT button looks as if is depressed Memory channels Through the CAT system the FT 980 is provided with 16 memory channels not 12 However when the software is reading the memory channels content for the first time after the FT 980 was OFF the reading is false You must change the memory content through the software to reestablish a correct reading Split and QSX The split modeuses a memory channel During the split operation TRX Manager uses the current memory to store the TX frequency this frequency may be recalled from the QMB IF Shift IF Width One interesting feature of the FT 980 is that IF shift and IF width may be controlled from the PC You have to drag the two corresponding sliders monitoring and move them to change the shift or the width The w and s buttons centers the settings A graphic readout is provided to see the current bandwidth and IF shift Width Note the following bug of the FT 980 Yaesu CAT control system when you run TRX Manager for the first time after the XCVR was OFF the Width is not updated HAM and GEN VFO By default TRX M
137. CTCSS Tone Only TS 850 TS 950 and recent Kenwoods provide the selection of a CTCSS tone TS 450 and TS 690 provide On Off setting of the tone but curiously not the TS 850 TS 790 TRX Manager uses Offset RPT for channels 00 29 and Split frequencies for channels 30 59 While there is no way to set up the repeater Shift by computer you have to enter valid Shifts i e a negative value for a negative Offset to initialize the program and for compatibilty between data S Meter and Band Scope may sometime not work properly Tuning steps TS 450 TS 690 and recent Kenwood provides automatic selection of the tuning step fill in the Fine Tuning frame under Preferences Transceivers for Phone and CW Data Filters and advanced functions With TS 850 TS 950 and recent Kenwoods you may couple the filter selection with the variable bandwidth filter see Modes and filters Many levels and functions are adjustable from the Transceiver Levels panel CW Keying viat the CAT Port With TS 480 570 590 870 TS 2000 direct CW keying via the CAT port is supported see CW Interface file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 61 of 365 Use of the channels The Kenwood transceivers generally defines two frequencies for each channel the receive frequency and the transmit frequency Split TRX Manager takes this into account the channels editor allows you to enter the Shift between the two frequencies whatever you have to
138. Contact and support If you can not solve the difficulties related to the use or the configuration of TRX Manager excluding hardware or Windows configuration problems please see the Troubleshooting section and the TRX Manager s support page you can ask your questions by email Answering is done as soon as possible within 1 5 days giving priority to registered users Thank you to understand that a delay of one week or more is possible around Christmas and Easter or during the summer holidays season Please provide as much information as possible about the transceiver interface PC and version of the program see the About dialog box you are using The more information we have about your system the easier it will be to help you Q How to explain your problem Please understand that my program is not working is an inefficient indication which costs you an email for nothing We need at least to know what happens error message what is not working what are the conditions and the steps to reproduce the problem DA You may also send in your email the full listing of your configuration using the Parameters My Configuration submenu Also if you d like to make a suggestion or a comment about TRX Manager please don t hesitate to contact us All remarks good or bad will be welcome Please note that an update for a specific transceiver or device is possible Es If you send an email please e Only use the TEXT format and ZIP
139. DMZ Port Range Application Start End Protocol IP Address Enable T Manag 80 to 80 Both 192 168 1 100 7 Setting up a Linksys Router Note this setting does not affect Web activities for other computers of the local network since it only affects incoming requests not outgoing data It may be necessary to set up your firewall to allow for external requests on the specified port file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 177 of 365 Setting up the server Port two cases are possible 1 Port 80 checked the port in use is the port 80 default port for the Web This is the easier way to use the Web Interface but for security reasons it is recommended you use another port 2 Port 80 unchecked you type in the port of your choice i e 8500 but you must also specify the base address of the computer it is a local address for local access only and the Router s Internet IP for Internet access Note The specified address and port are coded in the head s Base tag lt BASE ref gt of the html page If the address is wrong the interface may display the first time but control will not be possible Generally the Internet address of the router works even with local access Password there are two choices 1 Password not checked in that case control is available to all users at the same time There is no logging and no log of users 2 Password checked you type in the Password any length and
140. Download e Afreet Software Inc www dxatlas com Installing DX Atlas DX Atlas must be properly installed in that case TRX Manager automatically detects its installation and there is no special settings to do the DX Atlas s icon appears in the External menu and in the External tool bar If this icon does not appear please reinstall DX Atlas Using DX Atlas Please press the DX Atlas button 2 from TRX Manager in order to display the interface foreground Since the OLE interface does not provide a minimize button click any part of the TRX Manager interface in order to put DX Atlas background In addition the drop down button also allows you bringing the interface to front or unloading DXAtlas in order to save resources Unload k The DXAtlas button of the main toolbar runs in relation with the DXCC Window pressing this button shows the path to the current direction A right click on a spot from the Web Clusteror DX Cluster window also displays the position of the station in DX Atlas without using the DXCC interface Web Cluster 24 9470 14 1200 18 1400 3100 0400 24 9370 Path from your station to the DX file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 230 of 365 From the DXMap you can click on the DXAtlas button on its toolbar which then shows the path between the spotters and the DX spots This can then be used to show the propagation between your QTH and the DX You can also rig
141. FFT to create a notch The same context menu allows deleting all the notches SE 1500 Set notch on here Delete all notches Set TX Carrier on here An R Click on the FFT opens a context menu DX Spotting TRX Manager can detect a spot with RTTY PSK31 PSK63 in the comment field and set the digital mode and offset accordingly To enable this function you must select under Preferences Software DX Spots e a mode for RTTY LSB USB FSK FSK R FM and PSK LSB USB DATA FM recommended modes e an offset for AFSK Mark frequency 2125Hz by default and PSK 1500Hz by default Comment by FH Bal Be ee PSK ise Tes AFSK OFFSET PSK Hz IV Auto OSX recommended settings with most transceivers Ea Notes e Offset in FSK Data or FM mode is supposed to be zero Offset is only used in SSB or AFSK to calculate the Carrier Frequency Offset 85 in FSK e If you select Plan TRX Manager does nothing else than setting the mode according to the band plan Logging a QSO The interface displays the logbook s most often used fields The Log frame is switchable using the Log s toolbar button TRX Manager automatically populates and memorizes the most used fields Callsign Name QTH RST Loc for all the channels e If the fields are empty if necessary use the Clear button KS to clear the fields they are filled in in real time with the last information decoded for the active channel gt e
142. Flip and USB Flip Flip I Q for CW and USB vs LSB Required JUMA TRX2 DC Receiver with Phasing e Offset in KHz by mode Compensates for the carrier shift used in the transceiver for SSB and CW modes begtween TX and RX If you use a K3 these parameters are NOT used since TRX Manager and LP Bridge track the K3 s IF e Global Offset is required for all radios It corrects for the intentional IF frequency offsets designed into most SDR hardware such as SoftRock or LP PAN e MouseWheel and Steps Mousewheel allows fine frequency adjustements with various steps for each mode Using TRX Pan Connect your SDR to the Audio input of your computer MIC or LINE input depending on sound card adjust Computer s MIC or LINE gain For an EMU 0202 recommended gain are e 16 bits 50 computer and 12db 9 O Clock sound card for each channel e 24 bits 25 computer and 12db 9 O Clock sound card for each channel 3f Under Windows 7 8 or Vista If your sound card supports sample rates higher than Windows default 44kHz i e EMU 0202 supports 96kHz and 192kHz and since TRX pan only supports Windows drivers you have to configure the Windows recording format accordingly i e for the highest sample rate to be used with TRX pan otherwise you may be not able to run TRX Pan using sample rates higher than 44kHz Please left click on the Volume icon of the task bar a pop up menu will appear Select the Recording submenu and a newSound form will p
143. From TRX Meter press Plot The directive pattern of an antenna is drawn from different measurements of the signal strength done by step of 10 in azimuth For each azimuth set your rotator very precisely and press the corresponding button to make a measurement If your rotator is under the control of TRX Manager this process may be fully automated press the Rotor button in order to control your rotator and press Auto to automate the measurements After each rotation of the rotor the program waits the specified delay and performs the measurement The program does a full clockwise rotation 360 from any azimuth it is important to set the rotator fully counterclockwise before beginning the process It should be noted that because of inaccuracy of the remote control of the rotator manual control gives more precise plots The measurements may be saved as ASCII files plo as extension the directive patterns may be saved on BMP files a Directive Pattern This application has been written to the request and with the assistance of Funkamateur Magazine Werner DL2RD file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 147 of 365 Linear amplifiers Linear amplifiers Overview TRX Manager makes the use of linear amplifiers easier by providing various functions to automate real time operation 8 Related Topics ACOM2000A ACOM600S control Alpha 87A control TRX Synchro Manual amplifiers Linear reminder Synchronizatio
144. IL file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 142 of 365 Synchronizing a third party device or a software The principle is the following for the serial port selected under Synchro A B tabs TRX Manager behaves like a Kenwood or ICOM or K3 transceiver whatever the rig under the control of TRX Manager You must connect this serial port using a null modem cable to the unit or the software configured for Kenwood or ICOM protocol The corresponding unit or software must have support for Kenwood ICOM K3 protocol If the controller is a software running on the same computer you need one additional free serial port a null modem cable or you can use a serial port mapping software like VSPE See also Linear amplifiers Tip ETERLOGIC s VSPE Service Virtual Serial Port Emulator can be used to create a PAIR of virtual ports VSPE can be started as a service using NSSM Non Sucking Service Manager Synchronizing a software The logging program must have support for Kenwood or ICOM Transceivers and you need two free serial ports on your computer a null modem cable You may also use a different computer or while often more critical a port mapping software which creates at least two virtual com ports and a virtual null modem connection see Eterlogic VSPE The principle is the following for the serial port selected under Synchro A tab depending on your selection Kenwood or ICOM and or Synchro B tab Kenwood TRX Ma
145. K CH Preferences divided into two parts to solve a lack of memory on some PCs Monitoring fix KEY button staying grayed out when PTT set via RTS DTR eV 2 5 0 Web Cluster compatible with Asia Web Cluster Prefix databaseupdated especially for the Russian callsigns provisional DXCC codes for 4W and FK CH LogBook s Explorer Tree view and support for other awards LogBook changes design context menu to check in received QSL Card QSL Labels Callsign may be printed in red option DXCC Windows shows azimuth FROM the station Logbook new field EMail Quick EM ailer TRX Remote control automatic notification of the IP Address via EMail S Meter fix of value in pV above 30 MHz TRX Meter High precision S Meter FT 1000MP fix for Reverse modes incorrectly supported HyGain DCU 1 rotors supported DX Spots configurable icon Needed for Mode or Band under Preferences Terminal CW Interface Setup Dash and Space adjustment factors SW database Delete button SWLToDBF fix automatically deletes invalid entries FT 920 addition some commands of the internal electronic keyer Tools Int Keyer ev 2 4 4 FT 1000MP EDSP s preferences moved to Tools EDSP Defaults DX Spots manual filtering by band is possible Preferences under Terminal QSL fix Band is printed if the frequency is not specified eV 2 4 3 NCDXF Beacons wrong frequency on 10m e V 2 4 2 Comma
146. K or PSK is selected from the K3 KX3 and rtty L or bpsk 31 63 is selected from MMVARI respectively keying is generated by the transceiver Operation is similar to MMVARI but PTT keying is done by the transceiver in break in mode In that case please make sure to normalize your tonality before transmitting and to CONFIG FSK POL 1 by using correct Offset values matching the Pitch of the Transceiver e g if 1445Hz is selected as Mark frequency in FSK K3 KX3 1525Hz must be defined as Carrier Offset In PSK the recommended Pitch Offset is 1010Hz In true PSK or true FSK modes the transmission is supposed to be related to the main channel only It is generally easier to align the signal in LSB rtty L or USB bpsk than with the narrow filters of the FSK or PSK modes Once the signal is aligned and decoded use the Mode menu of the MMVARI window and only this one to toggle to FSK or PSK the signal s alignement will be preserved and normalized Unfortunatley with the current firmware of the K3 KX3 it is not possible to select the speed in PSK 31 63 You must use the DATA MD button and the VFO A to select 31 or 63 Q Protection of the Final of your transceiver If DIG power option is selected in the Preferences TRX Manager limits the RF power in DIGI mode to a fraction of the Preferences Power by band if Auto settings is selected in Preferences Transceiver Misc tab or to a fraction of the maximum power of your transceiver T
147. K3 is switched to B Set and you can tune with VFO B for quick search of the current operating station like if you own the second receiver Data modes Mode selection From the Monitoring window you have a direct access to PSK and FSK while the Dat button allows you to cycle between the other data modes of the K3 Decoding data and sending modes TRX Manager provides support for sending receiving FSK CW and PSK using the embedded functions of the K3 from a small terminal included in the K3 window not to be confused with the standard CW Interface no specific setting is required to use this little interface The TT button 10 of the K3 window allows you to toggle TRX Manager and K3 KX3 in TEXT Terminal mode You must enable the K3 KX3 s Text Decode mode first KX3 K3 s TEXT DEC function if TT is checked from TRX Manager all text decoded by the K3 KX3 is forwarded via the RS232 port and displayed by TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 72 of 365 F6DEX DE VE3NFK BI TKS DR LAURENT BT UR RST 5N N SNN BT OP JOHN JOHN BI QTH ONTARIO ONTARIO BT HW F6DEX DE VESNFK ARK NB NAS Level Adj ve3nfk de f dex Keyer interface TEXT to Terminal TT mode You may use this little terminal for sending text either in CW PSK or FSK Just type your message and click Enter or use character word mode but please don t forget to turn ON VOX since TRX manager does not do that for you
148. LK Orion Lynn KBOLRB FT 847 Magnus SM6VFJ Swedish Marc Andr VE2JFK FT 890 Marek SP7DQR Translation in Polish Marko OH7KD ACOM600S Michael G40OTY FT 736 Mike KM4ID FT 767GX Mike KS4JU FT 847 Mitch DjOQN FT 2000 Morris G3TRV JST 245 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 361 of 365 Nikos SV3KH George SV8RX Remote Olivier F14988 NRD 545 Pavel OM3TJT DX 77 Peter P Geremia FRG 100 Peter K Austria TS 990 Philippe F1ETA RACAL Pista HA5AO APLHA 4500 IC 756P2 Pierre F6HAC FT 890 TS 950 and a lot of other tests during many years Ricardo PY6SB FT 890 amp S W Listening Rich KOFUN Ten TecFT 817 TS 2000 Richard N1VXW IC 756PRO Rocco WU2M EDSP Roger KR4WS Eagle Rune LA7THA ACOM2000 Spiros SV8CS IC 756 IC 821 Remote Stan LZ1IU ACOM2000 St phane HB9VJF FT 757GXII1 Stuart G4XSH FI 747 Stu N7QJP FT 847 Thierry F5SIB FT 1000MP Tim N9IW K3 Tom K2ESE Joystick FTDX5000 Tom VA3TY RX320 Tony K2YPT CW Interface Uwe DL4ZBB IC 7700 Van W4GIW k3 Vic N5YY FT 450 Vincent NOUA IC 756PRO2 Werner DL2RD HP S Meter Without their contribution by exchanging e mails and software via the internet TRX Manager would not have the great success that it does file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 362 of 365 TRX Manager s CD file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page
149. M chip is available from Yaesu USA and is very easy to install just a thought file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 46 of 365 FT 1000 MP EDSP and Keyer Controls This section applies to the FT 1000 MP EDSP and Keyer controls When writing this section of the code with help of Rocco WU2M we thought it would be possible to control all of the EDSP menu settings via the CAT commands In fact the problem was more complicated and we have to explain below the logic of the EDSP CAT commands to allow you to understand how to use them from the program General information and limitations When you change the Mode Filter or you key the rig RX TX the FT 1000MP processor calculates new EDSP conditions by reference to the menu settings Since It is not possible to access the menus via the CAT commands after you send an EDSP command from the computer these settings are lost as soon as you change a parameter like Mode Filter or RX TX Please don t be surprised but note TRX Manager has been written to reset the transceiver to the program s settings provided you KEY the transceiver from the program To use EDSP from TRX Manager you have to switch EDSP settings to ON from the rig before changing them from the program you may switch some of them to OFF via the CAT commands RX EDSP and TX EDSP windows You have to switch EDSP ON in order to control the EDSP via the program EDSP control is possible from the RX and TX
150. MVARI using the MMVARI s Logging functions or retrieve the Fldigi s logging information using the SPOT button of the logbook see Fidigi file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 206 of 365 Digital mode Settings You access the MMVARI or Fidigi settings from the Preferences Transceiver dialog ial DIG tab The Preferences layout sound cards and other current settings are specific to each Transceiver 1 4 General settings DIG Interface e DIG Interface You select the digital software MMVARI or Flidigi With MMVARI this option is not mandatory because MMVARI is embedded in TRX Manager However it is mandatory to activate the link with Fldigi It also affects the SPOT Spot function of the Logbook when DIG al is checked Logbook the Log fields are associated with the selected digital software MMVARI or Fldigi e Dig Power Digital power If this option is checked TRX Manager limits RF Power to a fraction of the reference power default power by band or Max power of the transceiver e CAT DIG PTT You can specify CAT commands for RX and TX macro commands as required by some transceivers in data mode when the ACC port or the USB port is in use Kenwood RX TX1 If selected this function replaces the PTT keying function of TRX Manager e Carrier offset Default carrier offsets for FSK or AFSK default 2210Hz and the other modes default 1500Hz Generally the carrier offset is the center frequency of the
151. NOT possible since TRX Synchro uses the same settings as TRX Manager However in the case of the SteppIR beam or the Alpha amplifier serial ports are independent from those of TRX Manager Protocol Various modes of operation are available by selecting the Protocol e Synchro in this mode the second transceiver follows the transceiver under the control of TRX Manager only available with FT 8X7 890 900 920 990 1000D M ICOM and KENWOOD ICOM and Kenwood follow Split TX Frequency and PTT optional e Dual Receive in this mode the second transceiver is independently controlled The TX and RX buttons sets up the Transceiver under the control of TRX Manager with the current Frequency and Mode of the second transceiver only available with Yaesu FT 8X7 ICOM and KENWOOD From TRX Manager a Drag and Drop of a frequency to the status bar sets up the second transceiver with the corresponding frequency and mode How to drag the VFO B of a TS 2000 to the VFOA of an IC 703 Warning when transmitting there is no function to protect a transceiver in receive mode You must switch it OFF manually file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 326 of 365 e SteppIR in this mode TRX Synchro controls a SteppIR beam using Kenwood protocol WITHOUT REGARD as to which transceiver you are using TenTec Yaesu Speed is fixed at 4800 bauds and com port is selectable There is no specific algorithm TRX Synchro follows any frequency change
152. OFF and Reverse if required Fill in the interface with approximate values of the RX and TX frequencies Copy the values into the VFOs gt VFO Now please try to listen to your signal by adjusting the VFO of your transceiver or from TRX Manager As soon as you can copy your signal press Trsp to capture the working frequencies of the transponder These frequencies are calculated by TRX Manager locked on and displayed by the interface URWNe if your transceiver does not send back its data or if you are using two transceivers fill in the RX and TX frequencies manually and press VFO gt again before pressing TRSP Procedure 2 1 First select Trace OFF Trsp OFF and Reverse if required 2 Choose a clear RX frequency and copy this frequency into the RX box of the interface click gt VFO to set your transceiver and the interface 3 Fill in the TX box with the CONSTANT of the transponder but ADD the sign of the constant either or to the Ta 289 value in MHz I E 285 or 285 few _ El 4 Press the TRSP Transponder button TRX Manager calculates the working frequencies of the satellite The Satellite s working frequencies are then calculated by TRX Manager locked on and displayed by the interface Your TX is set by TRX Manager to the ground station s TX frequency by applying the Doppler effect and you can listen to your signal You may also tune your rig and click VFO gt Operating in trans
153. OP Cw SPEED Band Dec BWIJJJ I DSP 0 1 JJJ Value 0 255 CH 1 99 Dw 0 1 TRXO DwW1 DSP Channel Dual watch LPT RIG Tone FR Frequency in MHz TRXO FR14 250 somffffffff CALLDX COMMENT m MODE 0 6 A AUTO fffffFFF RX Freq in MHz SOA14 200 F6DEX TRX FTmffffFfFfFfFf m MODE 0 6 A AUTO ffffFFFF TX Freq in MHz FR 14 205 Default mode FTX 14 20 UP 1 CCW or UP5 SSB Split mode MD Mode 0 6 TRXO MD2 TS O Up 1 Down 2 Stop FL Filter 0 4 TRXO FL3 SP 0 1 TRXO SP1 SU 0 1 TRX0 SU1 TX 0 1 TRXO TX1 AUO 1 TRXO AUO VF 0 2 TRXO VFO AB 0 1 TRXO AB TU TRXO TU1 TT TRXO TT ANO 1 TRXO ANO CA 0 1 TRX0 CA VM TRXO VM TRX0 RO Azimuth 3 digits TRX0 RO0030 ST TRX0 ST RPO 1 2 RP1 Polling for rotor 1 2 Pw Power 0 100 TRX0 PW30 AF Volume 0 255 TRXO AF25 RF Level 0 255 TRXO RF25 VX 0 1 TRXO vX1 KY string TRX0 KYCQ CQ CQ KB 0 1 TRX0O KBO BS 0 13 Band Decoder RG Rig number 1 RIG1 2 RIG2 TRXO RG1 TO ENC DEC TONE CTCSS if valid DCS if valid TRX0 1 0 100 0 file C Help index htm not available 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Rptshi ft Rptoffset Connect Scanning STEPPIR WATCHDOG BAND PASSWORD UPD LVL CAT Cmd CAT Status Type TRX Meter OLE Data Message LINEAR These commands are not generated by the program and must be introduced from the keyboard
154. PTT via CW Interface Setup fixed Improved support for FT 2000 Winkey in remote mode Speed fixed QMB History function eV 4 1 0 NRD545 Fix for Notch html HELP system chm files IC 7000 support for NFi amp NF2 IC R8500 SUB support for NB amp ATT CD ROM X XX suffix removed Transceiver Preferences PTT Time Out option Recorder Option to key rig automatically while playing eV 4 0 9 Fix for Error 91 on exit E5 prefix ZK1 added eV 4 0 8 Winkey Slider range matches Pot range QRZ COM Fix for Name and Grid added Master polls Slave every hour Wota minor fixes eV 4 0 7 Support for FT 2000 Update of the Prefix database eV 4 0 6 Fix for LPRotor New DXCC entities Montenegro and Swain Isl eV 4 0 5 Updated support for LP 100 N8LP Synchro Kenwood mode RX and TX command added Satellite support for Sat_Explorer eV 4 0 4 Support for IC 7000 improved Memory channels labels bank A E eV 4 0 3 New specifications for WOTA Who s on the air new options NRD545 Range from 0 1 to 2000 MHz eV 4 0 2 Support for WOTA Who s on the air eV 4 0 1 FT 840 890 900 Fix for use as Sub Transceiver Terminal Two Telnet terminal available remote dxcluster Band Plan Fix for Type in Preferences Remote Fix to stop Scanning FT 817 857 897 Fix for BandScope CTCSS DCS eV 4 0 0 Support for Windows 64 bits
155. Preferences DX Spots 4 if TRACKING LIST is checked under Preferences DX Spots and the callsign is listed is in the DX Tracking List 3 Example DXCC IV Spot status M Dx lt 5000Km OP Show all Needed for f Mode Band Ser 0TA av Tracking List Spot Status is checked default TRX Manager computes the DXCC Status for all Spots DE lt 5000km is checked recommended All spots coming from a spotter outside of a 5000km range will be excluded Show All is Not checked recommended The DXCC Spot filter is enabled Any unneeded DX Spots for the Band and the Mode are rejected Nedded for Band is checked recommended green icon Needed is computed according to the Band IOTA and TRACKING LIST are checked All Spots with a IOTA reference and any spot of the DX TRacking List will be displayed whatever their DXCC status file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 271 of 365 Alarms Different alarms are possible see sound announces for each spot B P for a new one a or needed spot A r for a tracked spot For each alarm you have to define the Wav file to be played from the Prefrences Wab tab and to place this file into the TRX Manager Wave folder Make sure the Toolbar s Sound Toggle K of the Terminal is ON in order to enable the sound announces or alarms DXCC Award status If Spot Status is checked in the Preferences Terminal in addition to the assignment of an icon to the new or confir
156. QSO to duplicate a QSO for the same Freq Mode Date Comment but a different CallSign Quick Logging mode updating the Export Field for a QSO updating the QSL field when the QSL is received to force a DXCC code gt 30 03 03 00 18 00 E 30 03 03 00 27 00 E 04 05 03 21 17 00 E 10 05 03 21 03 00 18 05 03 13 23 00 Tezo feencr i E 23 05 03 23 14 00 j Bano Bman A right click opens the context menu weer ic awe vvv DES TO Oe oe The QuickLog window Duplicate context submenu A multiple selection function is provided for deleting logging OFF QSL Y and exporting status by selecting one or more QSO using CTRL Click file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 241 of 365 20m 17m 15m EFV Lra 12m Press ctrl click to select more than one QSO 9 Quick Edit from the QSO Before window The QSO Before window may prompt to show your previous QSOs with a given Callsign from the DX Cluster DXCC Window By just clicking a row the corresponding QSO becomes the QSO current in the Logbook and is ready for editing file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 242 of 365 QSO Search Sorting Various searches or selections of QSOs can be performed using the Select function menu FA of the Logbook e Quick search for the current callsign e Access to the Search window e Selection of valid QSOs for some pre programmed Awards see also Explorer The
157. R ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER OR TRANSCEIVER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 336 of 365 How to order TRX Manager af TRX Manager is sold py PDA Inc de a personal Database Applications Inc 1323 Center Drive Auburn GA 30011 3318 USA Tel 770 307 1511 Fax 770 307 0760 Emailpda hosenose com Secure server from http www hosenose com trx manager The price paid includes the license and the delivery of the files required to install and register a licensed version based on your callsign your name and some other personal data Please check that the software is compatible with your system and your station before ordering since once the license is notified it is not refundable Please do not email the author but contact PDA for any information on price delivery delays the status of your order etc A Backup your registered copy TRX Manager is a DOWNLOAD ONLY product After your order is processed you will receive an email with a link to your personalized download We STRONGLY RECOMMEND burning your download file onto a CD for backup purposes Necessary information to register The following information is required for registering CallSign optional Full name mandatory Full p
158. RTTY you select rtty L and LSB AFSK For more information about the modes in MMVARI please see the MMVARI Website HAMSoft Q Maximizing TRX Manager from the MMVARI window It may be sometime difficult to maximize the MMVARI window and or the TRX Manager window minimized in the task bar This is caused by the communication loop which slightly reduces interactivity If this happens you can use respectively the TRX toggle Maximize of the MMVARI window or the External MMVARI submenu of TRX Manager Transmitting First it is required to set the transmit audio level to avoid any degradation of your transmission and poor performance You can adjust the digital level from TRX Manager Preferences Transceiver DIG Tab TX settings and if this is not enough you have to adjust the output level from the Windows sound control panel MMVARI Control Panel submenu and or the MIC Data gain of your transceiver Overloading the sound card may cause malfunctions and sometime no audio out A good practice is to normalize the Tone and your transceiver before transmitting using the NOR eS button mandatory in true FSK or true PSK modes If NET is checked the TX tone follows the RX tone according to the selected mode However AFC may cause the RX Tone fluctuating consequently it is possible to adjust the TX Tone to a preset value in that case by unchecking NET this supposes that the RX Tone is normalized file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 T
159. RX Manager en Page 202 of 365 You compose your message from the TX Text Box at the bottom of the window and then click TX to send and TX OFF to toggle back to RX If TX is engaged you can type the text and it is sent immediately MMVARI stays in iddle mode until you click TX OFF An alternative is to use the Send button CtrI K This button allows an immediate transmission of the text and toggles back to RX automatically at the end of the transmission At the end of the transmission you can send a CW ID using the CW ID button If necessary the STOP button stops any transmission immediately The Tune buton RX TX Toggle sends a single tone for tuning 3f Particular cases Kenwood If you use a Kenwood transceiver when transmiting audio through the ACC port or the USB port it is mandatory to set up MMVARI to use specific PTT CAT commands CAT DIG PTT checked RX Macro RX TX Macro TX1 RX Macro TX Macro IV CAT DIG PTT THI The TX1 command mutes the microphone and opens the audio input of the ACC port while the normal PTT CAT command mutes the ACC port and opens the microphone input 9 True FSK PSK keying with a K3 or KX3 TRX Manager takes advantage of the K3 KX3 true FSK PSK keying capability via CAT commands if the K3 KX3 FSK PSK option is selected Preferences DIG You only need a cable between the Line output of the transceiver to the MIC Line input of the computer absolutely no other wiring is required Provided FS
160. RX Manager s settings Checking the DTR and or RTS check boxes of the PTT frame may be required to power on the interface RTS checked is also required for Kenwood and TenTec transceivers In fact except if you use one of theses lines for Transmit Receive switching it is preferable to let these cases checked and in case of any communication problem please let CAT checked and check DTR Enabled and RTS Enabled Default settings for a K3 RTS and DTR have no effect If you don t know how to use the TX Interrupt feature please let the TX Interrupt Enabled check box NOT checked Ck Buffer is usually NOT checked If it is checked the program checks for an empty buffer before sending any new command This may reduce the number of collisions and errors but this can not solve a communication problem Moreover this function is not supported by some comm drivers like Prolific and this may lock up the program Handshaking is only required with Kenwoods some TenTecs and some serial servers It is NOT required with other brands and may lock up the program at startup Should this happen you have to use the TRX Tools program distributed with TRX Manager to reset all your configuration to DEMO TRX1 4 DEMO If the monitoring display doesn t reflect the transceiver status check the dual control option Setup Except for special cases this option should be enabled checked If you com port does not appear in Setup you can try to type the por
161. Rotor Of course anything is possible but please think first that a programming fault is the less likely Please read all almost 99 of the possible situations are covered in this guide and the TRX Manager s support page Sometime the synchronization between the transceiver and the display is lost It is generally enough to update the synchronization using the Monitoring s Update button This button has different layout depending on the transceiver you use generic 2 Kenwood wW ICOM Mio Elecraft DA Otherwise review all your configuration by opening the My Configuration sub menu All your current configuration is displayed and allows you to review all your parameters and settings You can save this information into the clipboard by using the copy and paste button If the program locks up at startup you can use TRX Tools exe available from the TRX Manager s Start menu to reset all your settings TRX1 to TRX4 to DEMO or ALL DEVICES TO NONE 8 Related Topics e Troubleshooting general e Support page Step 1 cockpit check list Please check that your Transceiver and its RS232 TTL Interface are powered up Some RS232 TTL interface are powered up through the DTR line of the com port DTR must be activated If you use a transceiver with an USB port make sure the transceiver is powered up Although TRX Manager may start with the Transceiver in OFF if your transceiver is not powered up the USB interface does not work a
162. S Meter A peak S meter displays values is S points and db above S9 MouseWheel tuning Keyboard shortcuts A B and F S allows you tuning Main VFO A or SUB VFO B and choosing Fast Tuning F 10XStep or Slow Tuning S Normal Please note mousewheel tuning from TRX Manager is always faster than from TRX Pan file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 330 of 365 Waterfall Off 1 4 1 2 allows you splitting the screen to your convenience Macro buttons The button just right to the Stop button during analysis only opens the Macro button frame A right click on a macro button opens the configuration dialog please note OFF option allows configuring a toggle with two commands If Band Mode SW Always is NOT checked Options Band Mod Switch only appears as you press the button otherwise it is always visible below the main frame Calibration If necessary click CAL Calibration TRX Pan resets MAX AVG PAK integration to zero during Calibration Click Close to quit Calibration Note To use CAL TRX Pan should be actively analysing and should not be in Full Screen mode From the Calibration screen adjust e Phase and Balance by using a strong carrier about 10KHz from central frequency to minimize Image Frequency s level A rejection of 50 to 60db can be achieved e Range and Ref until the spectrum fills in the screen or to set the maximum and minimum levels you want to display in dBm TRX Pan rememb
163. S for PTT Switching or CW Keying e Whatever the option you choose for PTT switching the TRX Manager s CW interface sends a TX RX signal to its unused line DTR if you key RTS RTS if you key DTR for compatibilty with Rigblaster or other similar devices See also CW Interface settings for more information e If you must key the transceiver s PTT line via DTR or RTS but using a different com port that the one used for CAT control please check the CW Option PTT via CW Port In that case you must set up the CW interface even if you don t use it and open the Keyer module in order to activate the corresponding com port see CW Interface settings for more information e Under Windows ME please see the Troubleshooting Serial port section for more information about the DTR and RTS lines file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 137 of 365 Example 1 CAT on COM 6 PTT Keying using COM6 s RTS IC 706MKIIG j M Start GN Cw Intemal Interface s RTS line is not used and free for PTT Switching RTS line is used to switch PTT DRS line is used to detect a TX Interrupt condition advanced Example 2 CAT on COM 6 PTT Keying using RTS Line of COM13 CW Port cont e C vy Wal Et Iv Start GN x J e ef ay or PTT Keying is selected using the CW Port p CW Port is COM 13 CW Keying uses DTR PTT Keying is done by RTS on COM13 How to toggle from RX to TX PTT Switching PTT ON OFF is pos
164. SEGMENT is checked for Expert band data are defined for each segment of the band plan under Preferences Transceiver Band plan Es 10m and 80 m sub bands By default the program splits the 10m band in two sub bands You may choose spliting of the 80m band and or define the limit for each subband The choice of the sub band applies to many parameters such as band decoder antenna rotor file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 131 of 365 COMMAND FORMAT Parallel port You use a BCD Binary Coded Decimal format on 8 bits which allows controlling pins 2 to 9 of the parallel port The default format emulates a Yaesu radio on pins 2 5 you can always return to the Yaesu format by clicking the Default button You may program pins 2 to 9 by modifying the strings assigned to each band Each character of the string represents the state of a pin from 2 to 9 as follow 0 low state 1 high state not used a d see SO4R Examples 1100 pins 2 and 3 are at a high state pins 4 and 5 are at a low state pins 6 to 9 are not programmed 10010000 pins 2 and 5 are at a high state other pins are at a low state 1000abed 0100abed 0100abed 1100abed LPT Band Switch default BAND Checked The length of each string is limited to 8 characters The band decoder can also be used to send the Transceiver Number to the LPT port see also SO4R by configuring the BCD code with with a b c d paramete
165. SH SHIFT Repeater Shift 1 0 1 TRX0 1 OF OFFSET KHz TRX0 600 0 RC 0 1 Packet connection RC1 enables 1 S2 buttons TRXO RC1 IP disconnects user only SG 0 1 SRX X H HOME I INTERFACE S SET O AUTOOFF 1 AUTO ON C CALIBRATE N NORMAL B BI DIR R 180 3 3 4wW P POLL WD 0000 3600Watch dog delay BDJ J Band 0 13 PAXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Password caps ON UL Cupdate levels CM Creserved DT reserved TY Creserved TRX Command ME reserved OL reserved MG Creserved MA Creserved LI O OFF 1 ON 2 OPER 3 STBY The parameters are as follows OFF 0 ON 1 VFO A 0 VFO B 1 VFO C 2 CH LSB 0 USB et CW 2 AM 23 FM 4 RTTY 5 PKT 6 6K 4 2 4K 3 2 0K 2 0 5K 3 0 25K 4 Band 0 gt 13 Gen gt 70cm CH 1 99 p LPT Port 1 4 i 0 1 State for pins 2 to 9 for LPT Port p O low state 1 high state no change RP 1 2 Rotor interface number see Setup 0 Current rotor interface file C Help index htm Page 171 of 365 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 172 of 365 Real remote control mode a For experts The function described below is only available for the TS 480 TS 590S SG TS 2000 B2000 Elecraft K2 K3 KX3 and ICOM transceivers Before reading this section it is recommend you are familiar with the standard remote control interface of TRX Manager IP connections and how to configure a network
166. SS as required file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 51 of 365 4 Load FT 817 857 897 Memory as described in the manual Loading FT 817 897 Memories from TRX Manager Memory Files 1 Setup a Block of Memories on TRX Manager or Recall a Memory File I find it helpful to store Memories in Blocks of 20 so I may load an FT 817 857 897 Group as required i e SWL Group St Louis Repeaters Chicago Repeaters QRP Frequencies etc Turn off the Commands and the Monitoring Panels Activate the Memories List Panel Recall the desired Memory Edit as required Load FT 817 857 897 Memory as described in the manual Te Gy These techniques provide you with a relatively quick way to load the operational data to the FT 817 857 897 Loading the Memory Tag on the FT 817 857 897 still has to be done manually file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 52 of 365 Operation with the FT 847 FT 736 FT 212 412 This section applies to the use with the FT 847 FT 736 FT 212 412 transceivers Note that unlike other models the FT 847 requires a null modem serial data cable Check the menu 37 on the 847 and adjust the CAT rate at the Setup speed 4800 9600 or 57600 bauds The FT 736 212 412 require a standard interface and cable CAT Control Mode To be under CAT control you must press the CAT button located on the toolbar or the F9 key The CAT control is only active when the CAT button looks as if it is p
167. T 767GX 100 Hz 4 Fine QSY Down Incremental 6 Fine QSY Up Incremental 7 2 5 KHz FT 980 FT 767GX 5 KHz 9 2 5 KHz FT 980 FT 767GX 5 KHzHz 2 100 Khz GEN 1000 KHz 8 100 Khz GEN 1000 KHz QSY down mouse wheel as well as _ and Right arrow QSY up mouse wheel as well as and Left arrow These keys can not be used as accelerator for an USB Knob please use instead in conjunction with the INC function I key and PgUp PgDn Range SW Grid F8 window Key Effect Space Manual scanning or stops the auto scanning Log Book F11 window Key Effect CtrI S Saves the current entry Ctrl D Clears the fields Enter Updates the fields Ctrl C Give CALL field focus Ctrl N New QSO Toggle CTRL S or F12 Saves the current entry F1 F8 CW Messages M1 M8 if F1 F8 gt CW MSG checked under Preferences Logbook If F12 Enter Save is checked under Preferences Software Logbook tab pressing F12 populates the fields like Enter and saves the QSO in one click Please note F12 automatically fills in the field ONLY if the cursor is in the CALL field See also Logging a new QSO CW Keyer and Logbook Key Effect F1 to F8 recalling message M1 to M8 Ctrl K sending message CTRL F12 stops the transmission CTRL Q CQ Cycle CTRL S or F12 saves the QSO Ctrl P paste the QSO without saving it End VA Home VE Pause AS BkSp Error f
168. TRX Manager CLIENT does not read your Wattmeter directly it communicates with the SERVER instance of TRX Manager to read your wattmeter This why configuring SERVER is important From CLIENT if a digital wattmeter is connected to SERVER Remote will be selected as Wattmeter Power and SWR will be displayed in the Monitoring window if you select Remote from the meter combo box please note the linear reminder window does not support the Remote wattmeter Rotator You select Remote as the type of Rotator 1 or 2 whatever the rotator configured on the SERVER computer CW Keying From the CLIENT station the 3 possible choices are 1 If you choose Remote as the type of Transceiver you may select CW Internal under the TRX1 4 Tab recommended in order to allow CW operation from the CLIENT s Keyer window whatever the type of keyer connected to SERVER In that case from CLIENT you use your keyboard for CW Keying and only your keyboard 2 If CW Internal is not checked Winkey can be selected from the CW tab if you want to use a local Winkey device for CW keying In that case in addition to the Keyboard you may use a paddle for CW Keying from CLIENT to SERVER Warnings CW is sent word by word The latency of the communication may be a disconcerting factor with a paddle Paddle EchoBack must be checked see Winkey configuration 3 If CW Internal is not checked REMOTE is also selectable as CW port CW tab for special needs especially in real
169. TRX Manager en Page 1 of 365 TRX Manager en file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 2 of 365 Welcome to TRX Manager V5 iniii P A Welcome to TRX Manager an interactive software for HAM Radio Operators TRX manager supports almost all the functions of more than 130 commercial transceivers as well as many accessories rotators amplifiers antennas keyers wattmeters fully integrated in a comprehensive package for Radio Amateurs TRX Manager implements all these functions in conjunction with very fast monitoring and easier more effective SW Listening DX Spotting Logging Award tracking Satellite Rotator control and much more In addition it can even operate simultaneously with several other programs including PDA s LOGic logging program A control of a remote HF station by packet Internet or a LAN is also provided along with many other original features gt If you are impatient to use the program please see first e Features map e Getting started e On line help But please take time to learn more about all the TRX Manager s features Main Transceiver Large digital display of the transmitted and received frequencies Animated VFO knob S meter with memory Joystick control Easy and quick operation in split and QSX Automatic mode and filter switching Extended control if supported Volume DSP Keyer Transverter option Remote control of a rig via Packet or Telnet standar
170. The Misc tab provides setting of the TS 2000 internal TNC The Misc tab also provides RF Power setting and Antenna selection Satellite mode TS 2000 The SAT module opens from the Tools Satellite submenu TRX Manager switches to Satellite mode by clicking the satellite SAT button Satellite interface le 40 40 4 0 668k RA EJ R jes LRS Once in Satellite mode you can set up the Downlink or Uplink frequencies from the Edit VFO F2 key or Edit Split F3 key submenus Setting up the satellite name is possible from the Edit Info Ctrl I submenu See also Satellite Interface Internal TNC TS 2000 TRX Manager supports the TS 2000 s internal TNC and processes Packet Cluster data PCT Mode e PCT Mode the DX Spots are VET under the DX Cluster tab of the Terminal window e TNC Mode Terminal the button of the Terminal s toolbar switches the TS 2000 into TNC mode Please note PKT disables the CAT control until you toggle PKT OFF PKT also disables the Terminal port of TRX Manager About PCT Mode While PCT mode is enabled the commands of the menu EX do not work some controls of TRX Manager may not work properly while PCT mode is activated especially the linear amplifier control command Remote control Like all other transceivers your TS 2000 B2000 480 590S SG may be controlled through a LAN or the Internet using the standard remote control mode of TRX Manager but with limi
171. Toolbars command If you don t have TRX Tools you may reset the Toolbars by deleting the Toolbar folder Depending on your operating system the Toolbar folder may be located under 1 The installation folder of TRX Manager 2 The user AppData TRX Manager folder Some of the Toolbars disappear Exit the program and Reset the Toolbars The Toolbars buttons are not visible distorted or black Under Vista Windows 7 not frequently used items may appear black while using the Aero interface the work around is simple please just define any color of your choice for 3D Objects and Menus in Windows Appearance and reset the Toolbars see above A rare incompatibility may also exist with your Video adapter please try 16 or 32bits color video mode The labels are truncated This may occur if the little font is selected under Properties for display Windows because the program is optimized for the large fonts It is recommended you set Windows to use the large fonts truncated labels in little fonts file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 32 of 365 Somes of the windows are truncated or with wrong positions This may happen under XP or Vista if the size height of the titlle bar is too large It is enough to reduce the size of the title bar from the System s graphical preferences This may also occur after you change reduce the screen resolution Please run the Windows Reset submenu for each layout in orde
172. UB VFO tuning suppoted from the Monitoring Various small fixes e V 5 3 5 KX3 amp K3 FIX for the DATA TEXT terminal faster end of transmission e V 5 3 4 KX3 FIX for the display in TEXT mode e V 5 3 3 SMIRK Contest added ev 5 3 2 Minor fixes for ICOM Elecraft rigs temporary fix for Spotting from LOGic Band decoder RS232 controllers supported macro commands to the band decoder supported e V 5 3 1 Rotor control fix no display in some cases Sub Transceiver new design with s meter more function buttons depending on rigs e V 5 3 0 FAST digit tuning option see this section of the help for more information Logbook Distinct fonts for the Logbook s Listing saves the font correctly Major revision of the Remote control now please use only the Transceiver Remote TRX window new remote control window UDP protocol added simplified and improved operation note all previous settings are lost fix for the display of Rotor2 DXCC Update update the QSL_Sent field with the default QSLS field preferences Contest Fix for the WPX contest New menu Parameters My Configuration e V 5 2 9 CQZ Summary Tools DXCC Update command formats CQ Zone with two digits Synchro fix for Kenwood command SM not correctly formatted TS 590 improved auto A B filter switching file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 341 of 365 eV 5 2 8 Synchro mode 6 additiona
173. V 1 8 or later e FT Saver scr or TRX Saver scr installed in the System folder by the installer Configuration To configure the screen saver you have to open the Windows Display Properties dialog box and under screen saver to choose FT Saver It is not possible to define a password or any parameter Desktop wall paper TRX Manager installs a background bitmap for your desktop in the Windows directory as TRX Dektop bmp You may choose this bitmap under the display properties dialog box for Windows file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 325 of 365 TRX Synchro A little application TRX Synchro also accessible from the Transceiver submenu is distributed with TRX Manager this program can control a second Transceiver and various original functions Bi Note This topic is given for reference only Most of the features supported from TRX Synchro are now best supported by the TRX Manager s synchro function A notable exception is the Alpha 87A amplifier TRX Synchro 14 309 85 USB A TS 2000 controlling an IC 703 TRX Synchro can also control SteppIR Beams and Alpha 87A Amplifiers Conventions e If TRX1 or TRX2 or TRX3 is the main transceiver of TRX Manager TRX Synchro controls TRX2 e If TRX2 is the main transceiver of TRX Manager TRX Synchro controls TRX1 e TRX Synchro follows the Operating transceiver if SO4R is checked Using TRX Synchro and the corresponding Sub Transceiver is
174. WL Database Each time you press a Google Earth icon TRX Manager creates a TRX KML file and opens Google Earth The display depends on the context and may include a single station or paths to different stations Zoom level is adjusted according to the accuracy of available data Location is calculated from Long Lat Grid or DXCC Prefix CD Roms are the most accurate since they generally provide Longitude and Latitude at least for stations in NA if longitude and latitude are not available the Google Earth icon stays grayed out From the Logbook TRX Manager allows you to choose various options e To display either the current station the current QSOs selection defined by the SELECT function or all the logbook e For the current station position can be extracted from DXCC Prefix Grid QTH or Address in case of you choose Address or QTH you must edit the corresponding field according the to the format required by Google Earth standard street city state country e The file name of the kml file ha Pag r J i A hifi 7 i if Logbook normal mdb E dit mode s Gh 2 espo 9 log X E 2 I Select gt Display C Current station Selected QSOs All the logbook Grid GTH Address Logbook Selection of QSOs From The DX Cluster Web Cluster the context menu allows you to display the position of the selected station while from the toolbars you can display all spots posted within
175. X Manager may be configured for two modes of operation Setup 1 Polling NOT checked recommended This mode enables Auto Information and minimizes polling In fact no polling happen except in memory channel mode and at startup This mode is recommended because it is the more efficient and display is very fast It is also best suited for remote operation whetever the remote mode you use but especially using a serial server 2 Polling checked this mode sets OFF auto information and and enables a polling for critical data This mode is for testing purpose only and should not be used warning Please note that when a menu is activated on your transceiver commands via PC are ignored except commands related to this menu make sure to exit the menu after each change Switching On Off The button of the main toolbar or the F9 key alllows switching ON OFF the Transceiver In addition options for ON at Startup or OFF on exit are available from Setup TRX tabs Monitoring gt The Refresh button polls the transceiver in order to fix errors in the display and to reactivate the auto information mode The Levels button TF or the Transceiver Levels submenu opens the Levels window The SUB button toggles the active receiver If the sub receiver is active all controls and displays Levels window included are related to the sub receiver The TF Set function TFS Button is supported In addition if you give the focus to the TFS but
176. You select the mode from the Mode combo box and the valid combinations for the corresponding specialty awards are displayed in color The total of QSOs is displayed in the first row By clicking on the different boxes in the grid you can view the corresponding QSOs etm Jo m o am ttm ten i o gT s l i i 18 11 1995 T4SU 5 15m 03 02 1996 TIZJJP_ 15m SS c savoarisae vaive 5m sS c 01 03 1999 5A22PA 15m SS E fe 01 03 1999 TG9 K2NC 15m C c 25 12 1999 HR5 F2ID_____ 15m__ S T S Cy m ap aaa a c E E n ce ap Fa w 4 E T i E E f 0 a 4 a J m 4 E E E 4 _ S a CQZ Award Summary Q Tip Before you display a summary please launch the Tools DXCC Update function This function corrects the database for errors and formats the fields correctly Bi Possible problem TRX Manager does not count your QSOs for CQ Zone 1 to 9 Please run the Tools DXCC Update command to format your CQ Zones with two digits file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 218 of 365 DDFM and DPF awards TRX Manager can calculate the progression towards the DDFM award award of the departments of the Metropolitan France and the DPF award award of the French provinces in their various combinations Precondition As a preliminary it is necessary to update the DXCC codes so that the French stations are recognized Progres
177. a E See resi Efpvugewao s adm 0c 00 00 foon AM GEN 00 00 00 oot AM GEN 000000 AM GEN 00 00 00 AM Am 00 00 00 AM GEN 00 00 00 AM GEN 000000 AM GEN 00 00 00 AM GEN 00 00 00 AM 15m 00 00 00 AM 40m 00 00 00 Japan Gene Japan G en Sce of Greece of Greece of Greece of Greece CR 1 18 ae pel esl me 5 lt ce o MM SO oO baad Eisi badd bati og is os pO is mjn om Ti fae a a re oO D Sensitive image move the mouse over the picture for more information Preferences The only preference to set is the scanning delay which is defined from the Transceiver tab of the Preferences Please check the regional settings on your computer Number tab Dot is recommended as the decimal separator If Comma is selected as the decimal separator you may have difficulties selecting or entering frequencies Getting started Please press the Open button select CSV as file format and import SAMPLE CSV into your new database file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 293 of 365 Editing the SW Database Adding a station manually Please press the f button a station or a record will be added to the database with current frequency and mode of the transceiver now please edit this record to modify and complete the fields as indicated below Adding a record by drag and drop A drag and dropfrom the monitoringor a list of frequencies spots sound recorder
178. a CAT unchecked e if your transceiver allows switching PTT ON OFF via TRX Manager please check PTT VIA CAT e if your transceiver supports setting up RF Power via TRX Manager please check POWER VIA CAT and preset required RF Power values in Watts for TUNE and NORMAL 10 20W of input drive power are recommended by ACOM e select Tuning Mode FSK is preferable CAT values in Watts for POWER are indicative values only not always very accurate especially with ICOM transceivers and may require adjustments file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 158 of 365 You start AUTO TUNE by pressing START and you follow instructions on screen If your transceiver does not support RX TX and or RF Power via CAT you are prompted to do changes and settings manually During the Analysing step you can press OK if you estimate Drive power properly adjusted Then TRX Acom skips this step and immediately starts tuning TRX Acom follows ACOM s recommendations with an adjustment of RF Power up to display 7 FWD Leds ON 2 before starting Tuning Once a good Tune is found it is memorized automatically and your Transceiver comes back to the initial frequency and mode If any problem or abnormal behaviour happens during the procedure press STOP Watch dog If Watch Dog is checked in Setup and no command sent to the amplifier during the sepecified delay TRX Acom will switch to Stand By ACOM Antenna Selector If you use the
179. a new recording take care to define a new file name if not the recording in progress will be erased except in manual mode where the recording begins from the position of the cursor file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 306 of 365 Satellite Interface Satellite interface overview TRX manager makes satellite communications easier by automating Doppler compensation and cross band communications The program has been optimised for some SAT Transceivers but also works with two standard transceivers one for receive the other for transmit It is even possible to control both VFOs of the same transceiver however with some drawbacks All types of satellites and some unique features are supported and even provides interactivity with the manual control of the transceiver J Overview Intuitive interface Support of satellites with fixed frequencies Support of linear transponder satellites RX and or TX Doppler compensation Rotator control azimuth and elevation for some rotators Reverse mode Trace mode Trace Split RX and TX in the same band Automatic tracking of the transponder satellites even during a manual QSY Optimisation of the use with some SAT transceivers or two standard transceivers Possible use with an unique transceiver in Split mode Support for transverter up down converter Memory channels F See also Configuration Operation About transceivers for satellites Rotator control
180. a powerful logging program that allows you a comprehensive management of your log database For more information about LOGic please go to the PDA s web site at http www hosenose com Requirements To use this feature you need to install LOGic 5 1 or later Setup from LOGic From LOGic declare TRX Manager as the transceiver without selecting a COM port TRX Manager becomes a universal interface for all transceivers See LOGic s documentation and the PDA s web site for more information about the implementation of the link between LOGic and TRX Manager SS Select TRX Manager as driver no com port selected Please start TRX Manager first Although LOGic can automatically start TRX Manager at the beginning of its session it is recommended you launch TRX Manager before LOGic If you let LOGic launching TRX Manager automatically you will notice that TRX Manager does not open the Monitoring window This is normal and done to prevent any loss of the link during the time the communication loop engages In that case just press F6 to engage the Monitoring How to toggle from LOGic to TRX Manager You may maximise TRX Manager from LOGic using the max button of the LOGic s interface H Dn From TRX Manager a tool bar button amp or the External submenu allows you to call or to maximise the LOGic window This action also copies the current call sign into the clipboard use the LOGic s Copy Paste function to retrieve the c
181. abase and they are displayed in the Listing tab for editing You may remove a duplicate QSO or only blank the CONTEST_ID field in case of you prefer keeping it in your log Cabrillo exporting From the Logbook click the save button m and select Cabrillo cbr format No settings are required since TRX Manager uses the current contest s parameters If necessary you may edit the Cabrillo file cbr to update some the personal data before you send the file to the sponsor Limitations Contest mode may be improved in the future In this version limitations are as follow e Few pre defined Contests ARRL and REF however most popular Contest can be supported with a manual configuration e No QTC mode e No detailed statistics Dupes are displayed during logging but not removed from the database file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 256 of 365 Exporting and importing Importing and exporting the Log book overview TRX Manager is able to export data using ADIF Amateur Data Interchange Format and CSV formats Excel ADIF can be used to exchange with most other programs while CSV Excel delimited text format allows you to create various reports CABRILLO is suported and required to submit your contest log to the Sponsor 3 Note e Importing data using ADIF LogWindows and TRLog is supported ASCII formats Most other programs have the ability to export data in the ADIF format directly which can then be easil
182. ackup folder Monitoring up to 30 macro buttons more predefined macros eV 4 4 4 Remote Help updated Winkey now support Winkey2 and WK_USB K3 updated for MCU 3 76 improved keyer data interface QRZ XML QSL Manager added eV 4 4 3 Changes for K3 MCU 3 66 Interface improved Remote Slave connects Master option for Experts CW Skimmer help updated interface improved to display spots with relative frequencies e V 4 4 2 K3 possible wrong behavior with QSX function fixed Link Uplink button Monitoring 8 macros available ev 4 4 1 Support for Digital Wattmeter ALPHAPOWER 4500 series K3 Synchro mode Synchronization with PowerSDR IF possible Logbook special function for SWL eV 4 4 0 Fix for DXSpots with Split for ICOM with dual receive or dual watch ICOMs MIC and COMP level added to the Levels window e V 4 3 9 K3 support for CW OFS firmware 3 19 Linear reminder new options for OPR SBY using VOX or RF Power e V 4 3 8 Fix for Google Earth Google Earth updated e V 4 3 7 Support for IC 7600 LP 100 100A in Remote mode configuration fixed K3 Mode and Band switches added K3 Interface HAMCALL fix Tested under Windows 7 RC Update for DX Summit Web Cluster ICOM with Dual RX behavior of VFO modified TRX Tools available eV 4 3 6 Web Cluster STOP button added OLE Automation error at startup fixed K3 ESC shortcut for XFC M
183. adcasting in AM via the Internet but less convenient for DXing UDP is preferable file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Remote control Syntax Page 170 of 365 You don t need to learn this syntax the commands are generated by the program automatically In case you develop your own interface the commands available are described below Sending a remote control command Remote control can be sent 1 Using the Terminal IP Remote TRX PKT Terminal and the following syntax TRXi CMj e iis the address of the remote station Packet i 0 9 IP i O CM is the command as explained below j is the parameter of the command as explained below a delimiter 2 Using a macro button and the following syntax CMj where is a preample and CMj is the macro command The delimiter is NOT required If is ommitted the command is processed as macro command for the transceiver and must follow the protocol of the transceiver as explained in the macro commands section Remote control commands syntax CMj CM the command j the parameter of the command if available The remote controls available are the following ones Frequency Spot TX Frequency UP Mode Int Scan Filter Split Sub RX TX RX AutoMode VFO A B Tuner Tuner start Antenna CAT On Off VFO gt M Status Rotor Rotor Stop Rotor Poll TXPower AF Volume RF Level VOX CW KEYBOARD KS TRXO KS KW WPM TRXO KW25 Cw ST
184. ailable TRX Manager displays N A in the monitoring window Z Axis throttle This axis controls the AF gain if available Calibrating The joystick must be calibrated For each axis apply the joystick fully in each direction and press the corresponding Cal button Now center the action of the Joystick while pressing the Center button The backlash of the Joystick or neutral zone may be adjusted for each axis separately Please increase the value of the backlash the value has no dimension if you note a frequent frequency drift Lastly scanning steps are fully configurable for each axis Buttons The buttons have the following functions e button 1 trigger this button stops the scanning immediately e buttons 2 amp 6 centers the action of the joystick without opening the Preferences both buttons have the same effect button 6 is preferable since it is located on the base of the Joystick but button 2 may be more easily wired e button 3 scanning speed is divided by 10 e button 4 scanning speed is multiplied by 10 Problems and resolution 1 You note a frequency shift without any action on the Joystick e the joystick is not properly centered press the button 6 or the Center button of the Preferences Joystick e backlash is too low increase the backlash 2 You don t know the buttons number e open the Preferences Joystick and press any button of the Joystick its action will be displayed in the Buttons frame
185. ain channel to a new value You click the NOR button 8 to normalize the Tone and move the frequency of your transceiver accordingly AFC automatic frequency control is ON by default for the main channel recommended If the Mode and Speed and sideband for the main channel are correctly set the decoded text appears in the Window You can adjust the WIDTH of the FFT window to pre set values The FFT window adjusts itself so that the main channel is always visible and if possible centered It is generally easier to align the signal is SSB than with the narrow filtering of a Digital mode If you use the Mode menu of the MMVARI module and toggle LSB USB lt gt FSK TRX manager shifts the frequency to preserve the current alignement Shift is calculated according to the Carrier Offset values of the Preferences DIG tab in FSK Carrier Offset Mark 85 This function does not work with other mode or data mode or if you change the mode from the transceiver or the Monitoring Ea Available modes in MMVARI The current version of MMVARI 1 08a supports the following modes GMSK MBCS experiment HF FSK MBCS experiment V UHF NOT Baudot FSK W MBCS experiment V UHF satellite Not Baudot BPSK MBCS experiment HF USB bpsk Standard bpsk USB rtty L BAUDOT LSB rtty U BAUDOT USB mfsk L MFSK LSB mfsk U MFSK USB qpsk L Standard qpsk LSB qpsk U Standard qpsk USB Generally to run PSK you select bpsk and USB To run
186. al lookup can be done but a search is also possible from the LogBook a CD Rom window or the Cluster s context menu by clicking the corresponding icon Warning HamQTH may be sometime very slow to respond and in that case the search may fail From the Logbook If the Auto logging option is checked and there is NO other HAM base selected QRZ HamCall RAC the transfer of the data to the logbook is automated when you introduce a callsign into the callsign field of the logbook and press Enter keyboard or the Info button of the Logbook the transfered data depend on your options for the Fields to transfer e Enter or fetches the data into to the fields of the Logbook auto logging HO and T perform a search but do NOT transfer the data You must use the transfer button H of the HamQTH window to transfer the data If QRZ COM is selected from the Preferences and HamQTH checked auto logging is done using a compilation of the data extracted from QRZ Com and HamQTH com DXCC Activity The HamQTH windows shows various information extracted from HamQTH server such as DXCC and recent activities i extracted from the DX Clusters DXC or the Reverse beacons RVB Please see the HamQTH web site to understand these information If a valid frequency is available but the frequency field provided by HamQTH is often missing a click in the list set your transceiver Where applicable to speed up the display of essential data yo
187. all sign into any field 3 Note When TRX Manager is minimised the CAT communication stops You may wish to disable this ability to keep the benefit of the Automode feature the solution is to avoid minimisation of the TRX Manager s main window you may run LOGic with TRX Manager maximised in background a slight reduction of the PC speed is perceptible See the LOGic help files for more information about the use of LOGic file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 323 of 365 Logging from TRX Manager to LOGic You may link the TRX Manager s Logbook edit tab with the LOGic log form by enabling the Auto Export utility and choosing the LOGic format from the Preferences dialog under the Logbook tab This function uses the server mode of LOGic LOGic OLE Server Please note QSOs are transferred to LOGic as soon as they are saved from TRX Manager However editing or deleting a QSO from TRX Manager has strictly no effect on the LOGic s database file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 324 of 365 Screen saver A compatible screen saver Windows 95 98 NT 2000 XP is provided with TRX Manager This screen saver or watch screen is conceived to run simultaneously with TRX Manager it displays a signal analysis graph If TRX Manager is not running the graph changes are randomized A background bitmap for your desktop is also provided Installation The use of the screen saver requires e TRX Manager
188. ame configuration as for the standard interface but UDP protocol is recommended 2 CLIENT station 2 2 Setup TRX1 4 e Transceiver You must check select the desired transceiver TS 2000 Elecraft K2 K3 KX3 TS 480 TS 590S SG or any ICOM and check IP Port e Rotators Wattmeter Remote must be selected selected e CW Keyer 2 possibilities 1 REMOTE selected as com port from the Setup CW Tab CW Internal if available is equivalent You use your keyboard for CW Keying 2 WINKEY is selected and CW Internal is NOT checked in addition to the keyboard you can use your paddle connected to the Winkey device for CW Keying 2 1 Remote TRX Same configuration as for the standard control mode using the same protocol as the one set for the SERVER computer UDP recommended Operation 1 You connect the SERVER computer from the CLIENT computer using exactly the same procedure and settings than for the standard mode of control The communication is first established using the standard mode of control 2 You open the Monitoring window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 173 of 365 3 Once you confirm the link is established you click the REAL MODE button at the bottom of the Remote TRX ngon REALMODE gt gt gt 4 The green led lights and the Monitoring is refreshed Now you have full control over your remote transceiver via IP from the Monitoring window and all other windows of TRX Manager Q Operatin
189. ames setting up the delay carefully is required for the best efficiency of the transmission file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 276 of 365 Link with Telnet clients Running a Telnet client and getting the DX Spots into TRX Manager is possible provided your Telnet client supports TCP IP links Some programs can support TCP IP link with TRX Manager y Some programs can support TCP IP link with TRX Manager e AR Cluster http www ve7cc net e DXTelnet http www gsl net wd4ngb telnet htm e CW Skimmer Generally if you run the program on same computer all you need is your Local IP address such as 127 0 0 1 and the Internet Port number If you connect FROM your Telnet client you must set up the port number from the Preferences Terminal of TRX Manager Sequence for DX Telnet The following sequences provided by Fabrizio IK4VYX author of DXTelnet have been successfully tested Please 1 In the Site list select ACCEPT and click the Edit button at right under Site Name rename ACCEPT as ACCEPT_2 under Service port set to 80 check Telnet Service Type must be set to Other click the Edit Script button In the last line of the script remove the comment character in front of F RELAY so that from F RELAY becomes F RELAY PIN 2 Close all dialogs click OK and quit DXTelnet 3 Restart DXTelnet and select ACCEPT_2 in the Site list press Enter You will see a message saying waiting for inc
190. anager uses e HAM for DX SPOT frequencies e GEN for S W frequencies e HAM or GEN according to the frequency range for other settings Please note that the FT 980 CAT sytem doesn t allow you to enter or to change the clarifier frequencies file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 55 of 365 Operation with FRG 9600 This section applies for use with the FRG 9600 Receiver The FRG 9600 is poorly equipped in CAT commands The only available CAT commands are the transfer of a frequency or mode FROM the PC to the FRG 9600 It is thus impossible to read the status of the receiver frequencies modes or the S Meter at least in a digital way It is also not possible to up download the memory channels TRX Manager was modified to present the most complete possible interface with this receiver taking into account these characteristics But attention if the changes of frequency operated from TRX Manager are correctly displayed any manual modification of the state of the receiver is not reported Monitoring When opening the monitoring window the displayed frequency is equal to zero Select any valid frequency using the cursor or the keyboard to set the receiver Filters and modes The CW mode does not exist on FRG 9600 The CW selection involves the USB mode For the AM and FM modes it is necessary to fill in the Preferences under Transceiver tab with regard to the filters really available select narrow FM preferab
191. and mode changes but other parameters channel number Split mode VFO that are made on the transceiver are not transmitted to the computer The consequences are the following e After TRX Manager is started some parameters are fixed by default or unavailable The display progressively becomes available as commands are sent from the PC If necessary rotate the dial tuning to display the frequency e It is thus recommended to change the VFOs or to switch the SPLIT mode from the PC e TRX Manager does some polling of important data but gives a priority to the most critical data Mode S Meter TX State Consequently the other parameters like PBT DSP may refresh slowly Frequencies displayed Unlike most recent transceivers of the major brands the ICOM CIV protocol only notifies the changes of the frequencies and modes including filters of the selected VFO A or B Main or Sub provided the Transceive option selected in the menus All other parameters are obtained by periodic polling In addition it is not possible to determine which VFO is selected This protocol is very reliable and stable but some drawbacks are resulting from this logic e Updating of the parameters other than those automatically notified is relatively slow e When the VFO B or SUB is selected on the transceiver the display can be confusing Generally it is recommended to select VFO A or Main on the transceiver before starting TRX Manager and then to sel
192. andatory you set up CLIENT with the same option and the same delay e Password for the connection to the SERVER computer e Remote scanning CLIENT if this option is checked the Monitoring s Up Down button engage a scanning controlled from the SERVER station If your connection is fast enough this provides a smooth scanning If your connection is slow or unreliable it is preferable you let this case unchecked e Synchro If checked the Remote transceiver activates the synchro ports defined from the CLIENT instance of TRX Manager SteppIR synchro excepted 2 3 Packet only e Address of the server station 0 to 9 e Flow control CLIENT Packet the flow control reduces the amount of commands sent during the specified delay in seconds This option is useful if your connection can not handle the data flow m ee os ea R REMOTE CONTROL UDP 00 REMOTE CONTROL I iLi Setup m Remote TRX misc paN Setup 6 Remote TRX Misc Setup Setup TRX MANAGER IP PORT _ TRX MANAGER IP PO CLIENT 1002 CLIENT Ic SERVER n0 C SERVER 192 168 1102 1C V Watch Dogls 360 IV Watch Dogfs 360 Iv Auto Remote scanning Sync Password Password Pie 1X5 ee 1x5 Notify IP Address to Delay s i 0 Typical setup for SERVER and CLIENT using UDP protocol 3f Summary of the main steps 1 Configure TRX Manager from the base station SERVER a
193. annel CW decoder and analyzer How to synchronize with CWSkimmer TRX Manager provides different ways to synchronize with CW Skimmer Telnet Link CW Skimmer has a built in read only Telnet cluster server The clients can connect to this server and receive DX spots In addition when the operator clicks on the callsign on the Band Map in the Callsign List dialog or in the Received Text panel the CW Skimmer server sends an announcement message to all connected clients such as To ALL de SKIMMER lt 2014Z gt Clicked on TI8 DL4MO at 14012 9 TRX Manager uses this feature to populate callsigns and frequencies This way of use is OK with an external fixed LO SDR receiver or an external wideband SDR Receiver A Limitations The Telnet link may also be used with a IF adapter like LP Pan but with limited functionalities You can see CW frames on CWSkimmer and click to set a frequency however relative position of spots in CW skimmer are not properly updated while you change the frequency from TRX Manager or your rig OmniRig setup From the Setup dialog you must configure TRX Manager for OmniRig The drawback is that OmniRig has limited CAT functionalities Q Tip OmniRig is the recommended link between CWSkimmer and third party programs by Alex VE3NEA gt See also e Alex VE3NEA Web site e Omnirig Other brands Synchro port You use the TRX Manager s synchro port function along with a port mapping software or a null modem ca
194. anually in all situations See also e Overview e Settings e Assisted Tune Functions e AUTO Set ON OFF Alarm and automatic Relay Control after Band Segment changes Cross Band Alarm remains ON whatever the state of Auto but OPR SBY control is not activated if Auto is OFF OPR State OPR SBY of Linear Amplifier or Transmitter see below and Options if supported Tune F Full Power Tune power by default see Options Tune gt Reduced Power Tune as set up from the Power slider OK Tuned OK Button gt set OFF Alarm Options and Settings B ee w eee TUNED FOR 17 m 100 gt OFF 18 072 23 TUNE LOAD 76 66 BAND 18 21 Linear Reminder left RX right TX with LP100 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 149 of 365 OPR Standby Operate The Linear Reminder provides a Standby Operate function OPR This function requires a Relay inserted in the PTT line between the transceiver and the linear amplifier to be controlled itself using the LPT port or a recent Kenwood transceiver which allows controlling the state of the amplifier relay using a dedicated CAT function Automatic control of OPR SBY is provided to prevent from transmitting with a linear amplifier on certain prohibited segments or just after band changes forces standby after a band change or even above a critical drive power OPR controls and or visualizes the state Operate Standby of this function Note
195. as follow a TRX1 b TRX2 c TRX3 d TRX4 The purpose of a b c d flag is to indicate which rig is operating and can be set ON for each band of course only one pin will be activated at the same time the pin corresponding to the Operating transceiver abcd means the 4 rigs may be set on ObcO means only rig 2 and rig 3 may be set ON etc If you use rig 1 on all HF bands and rif 2 on VHF bands including 6m you may have a000 from 160m to 10m and ObOO for 6m to 70cm If you use rig 0 or rig 2 on all bands you will have abO0O on all bands but only one pin will be activated depending on which rig is Operating Example by Bob KI2L A multi radio LPT Keyer Interface One of the challenges when operating TRX Manager s SO4R in CW mode is that the keyer is designed for a single radio setup You have to move the keyer jack manually between radios not very convenient Bob designed a 4 rigs LPT keyer interface the design is simple replicates the LPT keyer once for each data line used in the band decoder that indicates which trx is in use These are pins 6 7 8 9 by default representing trx 1 2 3 4 respectively The emitter of each keyer transisor is however driven from the collector of the original LPT keyer interface file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 134 of 365 Strobe 1 Tip Select 17 GND 18 e _________________ GND Sleeve Traditional TRX Keyer Interface Strobe 1 Select
196. ase turn off export of any binary field such as GUID in LOGic file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 262 of 365 Terminal Terminal overview The terminal module provides text data exchange and processing of DX Spots through a multi mode controller TNC and or via Telnet 7 The Terminal features are Packet and Telnet DX Cluster interfacing DX Tracking customizable sound announcements Active double click from the Terminal frame Function buttons Remote control of a rig via packet DX Spots broadcasting DX Spots forwarding via EMail DX Mail F Please see also Setting up TNC parameters Telnet connections DX Spotting Link with Telnet clients Overview The terminal module opens from the main toolbar or using the File Terminal submenu SA 2 Terminal Disconnected ral Host wiesieexi2aiue alej ejo file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 263 of 365 The sizeable terminal window shows 4 tabs e The TNC tab is used to communicate with the controller e Telneti and Telnet2 tabs are used to establish Telnet sessions e The DX Cluster tab displays the DX spots if you are receiving data from a DX Cluster You type the text to send in the lower area TNC Telnet1 Telnet2 tabs As a default each carriage return sends the data inside the two last end of paragraph characters to be sent This module also provides text data exchange with the Win
197. atellite support for a transverter down up converter Kenwood bargraph for COMP ALC SWR Disabling the dual control updated for Kenwood and ICOM eV 3 2 3 Demo version fixed V 3 2 2 Spanish translation updated Fix for the Kenwood s internal keyers TS 2000 870 570 amp K2 Extended support for the Elecraft K2 transceiver e V 3 2 1 SW Listening Print button SAT Interface running two ICOMs on one com port supported Rotator control with Yaesu and HyGain the program polls the rotator for its azimuth Support for the GoList QSL Manager database Various fixes e V 3 2 0 TS 2000 Internal TNC and PCT mode Packet cluster data are supported Sub receiver supported Support for Elecraft K2 IC 746PRO IC 7400 Satellite interface Prosistel rotator supported e V 3 1 4 Log Import TRLog Ascii files supported Auto mode switching the mode from the rig now possible while auto mode ON Remote Dual function added Telnet Host field accepts addresses in the format xxx xxx xxx xxx yyy where yyy is the port number ev3 1 2 Remote control fully updated auto information mode CW supported LPT Port control FT 1000MP amp BandScope sub VFO supported Various fixes ev3 i 1 QSL Labels printing page by page printing Support for IC 756PRO2 IC 910 TRX Remote Settings moved to Preferences Remote Password Power control Shift option for TRX Synchro FT
198. ause a wrong display The Active Resizer check box resizes most windows It maintains the same proportions and locations of controls relative to one another This option optimizes the available space but slows down the loading of the program The Active Borders check box gives a raised 3 D border that appears only when the mouse pointer is over some controls BBC World Svc 0 198 j m Active Border OFF BBC World Svd 0 198 Active Border ON By clicking the follow upbutton E you can access more settings file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 20 of 365 FlatBorder Opaque Opaque TEST ME TEST ME L Setting time and geographical position You have to set up the parameters for Time via the Preferences submenu under Location By default TRX Manager uses the system time the system time should be equal to the UTC time If you prefer or if the displayed UTC time is not correct you also may use the local time with a convenient offset PC UTC Then you have to set Longitude and Latitude sexagesimal format while East from Greenwhich and North from Equator are positive values to get correct azimuths and distances Date and Time are displayed using the Windows regional settings Stop Sleep Mode If Stop Sleep mode is checked TRX Manager prevents Windows from going into sleep mode and running a ScreenSaver TRX Manager does not really disable these functions but moves the mous
199. ave to choose between UDP and TCP protocols E UDP or TCP file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en UDP has generally less latency but TCP is more reliable and easier to configure e In TCP mode through a public network Internet the SERVER router must be configured to forward all packets received on the specified unique port to the target computer This is ideal if you connect your remote station from various locations e In UDP mode through a public network both SERVER and CLIENT s routers must be configured to forward all packets received on the specified listening port of each computer CLIENT or SERVER Of course you must use the same protocol for SERVER and CLIENT e Packet In that case the Packet Terminal will be used for connecting the server make sure to choose a clear packet frequency Packet is now rarely used for remote control CONFIGURATION STEP BY STEP Setting up the remote station SERVER 1 1 Parameters Setup panel You have to set up the station according to the type of transceiver rotator and CW Interface in use Please re start TRX Page 162 of 365 Manager and please make sure your station is fully functionnal as per your needs before setting up TRX Manager for remote control 1 2 Remote TRX window Setup tab e SERVER selected e Protocol Packet UDP or TCP e UPD a valid listening port 1001 is the default for the SERVER and a valid listening port for the CLIENT 100
200. aximal wattage during the last transmission stays displayed during RX Linear Reminder FWD 821T SWR 1 20 1 00kT gt 2 5 Linear Reminder amp LP 100 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 150 of 365 LP 100 w WT buttons allows fast changes of the measurement mode see LP 100 s manual It is possible to scroll Alarm Set Pointvalues by double clicking the displayed value lt nnn Depending of your Options for PTT SWRI an SWR alarm stops the transmission ONLY if you key down TX via CAT and switches to STANDBY see OPR SBY function However please note the LP 100 s PTT loop is ALWAYS faster than your computer ALPHA W2 At startup Alarm set point is fixed to 3 0 It is possible to scroll Alarm Set Pointvalues by double clicking the displayed value lt nnn Depending of your Options for PTT SWR a n SWR alarm stops the transmission ONLY if you key down TX via CAT and switches to STANDBY see OPR SBY function RESET resets Autorange to 5W file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 151 of 365 Linear Reminder Settings The Linear Reminder module allows numerous settings and configurations From the Linear Reminder window cick to open the Linear Reminder s settings dialog C Settings dialog Preset values e TUNE LOAD USR1 USR2 preset values for each segment please select a segment by clicking it in the list and edit it by filling in the corresponding text box
201. b transceivers provided the Synchro mode has been activated for these transceivers Synchronization starts as soon as you start the program and for the whole session If the serial port is already in use an error message is displayed in the status bar file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 140 of 365 a Note Synchronization does not work if TRX Manager is reduced in the task bar Synchronizing a SteppIR antenna While an Y Cable may sometime be used to synchronize a SteppIR controller and a transceiver under the control of a logging program with mixed results TRX Manager allows much better control by implementing a special tracking algorithm and providing an exclusive connection between the controller and a dedicated serial port A free serial port defined under Synchro A tab and a null modem cable as the one supplied by SteppIR between the computer and the controller are required An RF choke is recommended on all cables connected to the controller since the transceiver interface is sensible to RFI The Synchro A 1 tab provides three choices e STEPPIR KENW This selection uses the Kenwood protocol Consequently you must configure your controller for KENW mode and preferably 19200 bauds You must connect the cable to the DATA IN connector This mode allows frequency tracking by generating Kenwood FA and IF commands e STEPPIR STPIR recommended Synchro 1 only for full support This selection uses th
202. bandwidth of your transceiver for the datamode If you use the LSB mode AFSk the carrier Offset is not very important provided the carrier frequency is within your passband If you use the true FSK or PSK mode of your transceiver make sure the carrier offset is matching the Pitch frequency of the transceiver in FSK Carrier Offset Pitch RTTYShift 2 af Note The RTTY PSK offset indicated in the Preferences Software DX Spots tab is NOT used in digital mode by Fidigi or MMVARI It is only used to calculate the correct frequency of a digital DX Spot in SSB Fidigi Settings e Host 127 0 0 1 is the default if you use Fldigi on the same computer than TRX Manager Otherwise you indicate the IP Address of the computer on which Fidigi is installed Using Fldigi via Internet is NOT recommended due to timing issues e Port 7362 is the default An Fldigi s command line allows using an other IP port MMVARI Settings Sound card e Sound card select your sound cards Input RX Output TX The Sound card indexes may change depending on the number of sound cards connected to your computer Consequently you may have to set again the sound cards during a session In thatcase it may be faster to select the sound cards from the MMVARI window 5c MMVARI Soundcard submenu Has e Sampling RX sampling frequency Hz 11025 is the recommended default If your sound card has been calibrated you can type the actual value i e 10098 e TX TX sampli
203. ble and two free serial ports Setting up CW Skimmer for a Telnet link Generally two cases are possible 1 You use a SDR receiver with a fixed central frequency under the Radio tab please choose SOFTROCK or 3kHz Radio option or any external SDR fill in the central frequency LO Frequency and the Pitch Some adjustements of LO frequency may be required to synchronize the programs 2 You use a panoramic adapter centered on the transceiver s local IF Frequency typical setup for a K3 LP Pan under the Radio tab please choose SOFTROCK IF option and fill in Pitch and Offset with the correct values Eventually you need to adjust the Offset parameter under TRX Manager s Preferences to synchronize frequencies between TRX Manager and CW Skimmer however 0 is OK in most cases Under the Misc tab UNCHECK Decode only in the CW Segment in order to allow CW Decoding for relative frequencies Now from CW Skimmer s Telnet tab configure CW Skimmer to enable the built in Telnet server and to allow Skimmer commands Please keep 7300 as Telnet port file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 194 of 365 CW Skimmer s settings Setting up TRX Manager Few settings are required since you connect CW Skimmer like any DX Cluster server from the Terminal Telnet interface Just check CW Skimmer under Preferences Terminal and fill in the desired Offset in Hz between TRX Manager and CW Skimmer Offfset can be used to compe
204. ce does not require that both programs are running on the same computer However if synchronizing Fldigi with TRX Manager is still possible in a local network with a noticeable latency this way of use is not recommended over the Internet Installing Fldigi This documentation does not describe how to install and operate Fldigi Browsing the following sites is recommended e Download http www wihkj com Fidigi html e Documentation beginners http www w1ihkj com beginners html e Documentation Users Manual http www wihkj com FidigiHelp 3 22 index html TRX Manager has been written for the 3 22 08 version of Fidigi Setting up Fidigi To set up Flidigi for operating with TRX manager you just have to check the XML RPC option under the Rig XML RPC tab of the Fidigi s configuration dialog You have to click The Initialize button the first time you set up Fldigi Flidigi s configuration dialog Do no configure any other Rig or PTT control mode Setting up TRX manager You set up TRX Manager for Fldigi from the Transceiver Preferences dialog under the ice DIG tab file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 197 of 365 TRX Manager s settings Settings are e Type Fidigi e Host 127 0 0 1 is the default if you use Fldigi on the same computer than TRX Manager Otherwise you indicate the IP Address of the computer on which Fidigi is installed e Port 7362 is the default An Fldigi s command line allo
205. ceiver manual to check the availability of certain commands via Computer especially the ability to switch to TX via the serial port VOX control etc Additional macro buttons and sliders are provided to support specific commands for your particular transceiver see also Macro buttons e Manual scanning Each digit of the display is clickable a left right click changes frequency Up down by one A while holding the left right button scans e A gets the current status of the remote transceiver most important parameters and updates the display While SERVER acknowledges any command after it is processed this button allows you quick checking and improves the reliability file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 167 of 365 e gt lt A Left click synchronizes the remote station SERVER with the local transceiver RX TX amp Split parameters A Right click synchronizes the local transceiver with the remote SERVER transceiver Mode amp RX only Auto automates the synchronization SERVER with CLIENT for RX Freq Mode amp Filter gt RX gt TX set an RX or TX frequency in MHz TX Keys down PTT RX Forces Receive mode OP Set the Remote transceiver as the Operating transceiver for TRX Manager see also definition of the Operating transceiver e Filters Five selections FILO to FIL4 are provided to select the predefined filters of the Remote transceiver However only 2 or 3 selections are
206. certain cases this problem could lock up the RS 232 interface s when starting your PC A little program ComFix exe available on the support page allows you to set Windows ME to counter this defect TRX Manager suddenly stops communicating If a communication error happens it may be enough to clik the updatebutton of the Monitoring to resume the communications file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 39 of 365 Test your device Transceiver TNC with another program Check the com port has not been disabled by the Bios program see above RFI Problems In some cases especially on 160m 80m 40m at high output power you may have a communication error when transmitting This is caused by Radio Frequency Interferences RFI between your rig and your PC You should find a hardware solution see any Handbook but please note this is a minor inconvenient TRX Manager has been written to automatically resumes any communication error except the first one Reinstalling a com port This is a solution of the last chance but that can be effective sometime The steps are Port on mother board for expert only e Remove the defective serial port from the device manager e Reinstall the serial port e Check you BIOS parameters USB Serial Interface or PCI cards You can check your equipment with an other software However if it passes this test your USB driver may still be faulty If you use an USB Serial int
207. checkbox Preferences under Software If these WAV files are not found by default TRX Manager plays the system sounds Exclamation or Asterisk The settings for these sounds are done from the Windows configuration panel Sound announce when receiving a DX Spot You have to put the WAV file to play DX WAV by default or Exclamation into the TRX Manager s folder then if necessary to fill in the corresponding field The WAV file will be played as soon as a new spot is received By checking Needed and or New One a file to be defined may also be played when a required and or totally new one country is announced on a Cluster Sound announce associated with DX tracking You have to put the WAV file to play GONG WAV by default or Asterisk into the TRX Manager s directory then if necessary to fill in the corresponding field The WAV file will be played as soon as a DX to track is found Sound announce associated with a QSO Before You have to put the WAV file to play QSOBefore by default or Exclamation into the TRX Manager s directory then if necessary to fill in the corresponding field The WAV file will be played when a callsign is found in the LogBook Sound announces for a particular message It may be interesting to define a sound announce for a particular message received in the Terminal or event such as particular callsign disconnection You may define up to five messages and their corresponding WAV files Each message m
208. click the column to sort or any field in this column e press Phor at to sort by ascending or descending values Quick selection by field For quick selection of stations matching a specific criteria displayed in the grid click the corresponding field and this button all records matching this field will be immediately displayed file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 296 of 365 Automatic identification of SW stations A powerful and easy to use function is the automatic filtering functioning with the Monitoring this function provides automatic identification of the stations around the current frequency when this button Tis pressed the program only displays stations whose frequency current frequency X X is adjustable from the combo Itis also possible to combine this automatic filter with a manual selection E Note e This function is available only if the monitoring window is open e Please make sure of the regional settings on your computer Number tab Dot is recommended as the decimal separator If Comma is selected as the decimal separator you may have difficulties selecting or entering frequencies Tip Now if the station is identified just press the Google Earthbutton if installed and you can have a view of the big antennas 7 050 7 100 D T Moc B a al i F L China Radio 7 215 AM 12345 13 00 00 14 00 00 BCL PPiitrans World Radio 7 215 AM ___
209. commands are separated by a slash Commands to the remote station SERVER When controlling a remote station using TRX Manager you can send commands to the SERVER station using TRX Command Macro commands same syntax as above sent to the SERVER station are ignored by the CLIENT station To send a command to a Remote serial port other than the transceiver in use please select RS232 Rem for the Command to field Customized sliders Same syntax as above but includes digits for the slider The command string includes as many joker as the number of digits required by the protocol Min and Max values are always decimal starting from 0 to 255 generally 3 Example file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 333 of 365 ICOM Command for AF gain is 14010000 to 14010255 Syntax 1401 4 digits required with Min 0 and Max 255 KENWOOD Command for AF gain is AGOO00 to AGO255 Syntax is AGO 3 digits required with Min 0 and Max 255 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 334 of 365 Distribution License agreement Ea Copyright TRX Manager Copyright 1999 2015 Laurent Labourie All rights reserved IDDN FR 001 180003 00 R P 1999 000 31400 TRX Manager is not a free software EVALUATION version Demo The functions of the EVALUATION version are not limited except it will not communicate more than 30 minutes with the interface of the transceiver You ma
210. configuration dialog you may merge up to 8 pairs of letters into a prosign One application of this feature is to send special European language characters i e ID means letter will be sent by merging I and D Following prosigns p amp gt are not permitted since they are used by TRX Manager TRX Manager s Winkey interface understand _ underscore as space making possible additional spaces between letters Advanced functions e BackSpace backups the input buffer pointer by one character This command is only meaningful if there is something in the serial input buffer otherwise it is ignored e CTRL F12 stops the transmission same effect than a paddle press e Pot button gives the priority to the Speed pot at startup TRX Manager takes the speed from Speed pot e Change Speed Buffered and Cancel Buffered Speed Change functions are supported by inserting macros into your messages S wpm to change Speed and B to cancel Speed change with wpm is the desired speed in Word per Minute e HSCW Speed change is supported by inserting macros into your message H Ipm where Ipm is the desired speed Use B to cancel HSCW Speed change This allows you to insert an HSCW burst in a regular CW message or to put HSCW bursts of two different rates into the same message file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 193 of 365 CW Skimmer Interface CW Skimmer by Alex VE3NEA is a panoramic multi ch
211. cons This feature may be activated from the Web Cluster sor the DX Clustertools bar The same window shows location for any spot you are listening and controls the rotator _8940 Km 28 0764 TI5N cq test load MAP centered on France Bitmap generated by LOGic Refreshing the map The Map may be manually or automatically refreshed after each download from the Web Cluster if the corresponding option is checked Preference submenu Available information and QSY For each spot the tools tip text gives the Call Sign and the frequency A left click transfers this frequency to the transceiver A right click on spot opens a pop up menu and displays DXCCand CD Rom QRZ Callbook windows Rotating the antenna Any left click on map draws a vector to aim the direction You only have to press the rotator button i to rotate the antenna Loading a map This projection will show up on any background of your choice Of course it would be interesting to choose an azimuthal map as a background but TRX Manager is not able to create the map You must use a separate program to create a map and you need to save the corresponding image as a BMP or JPG file then you load the map into the window using the m open file button a file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 226 of 365 The software stretches the BMP or JPG file so its size fits the windows but for good quality please create the map by approximately copyi
212. csv The Open button lets you load change a band plan by selecting the appropriate file Once your Region is selected your default band plan is saved under bandplan csv You may edit bandplan csv from Excel or edit the band plan from the Preferences dialog under Band Plan Please make sure you describe the entire spectrum with no error or frequency holes e Click a line to edit clicking the Save button saves the changes e The Add button adds an empty line 0 0 MHz LSB for editing ia Specific fields e Comment field will be displayed by the Monitoring e HAM check box defines the segments for which transmission is allowed TRX Manager does not prevent you from transmitting outside HAM segments but displays a warning message OUT OF BAND e Type indicates the type of transmission Phone CW Data BCL Air It is more accurate than Mode It allows precise DX Spots filtering and graphical display of the type of transmission by Icons in the Quick Memories module e The B DCD field is optional and related to the Band Decoder If the Band decoder s Segment option is checked under Setup Band Data this field provides the command required to control the band decoder for each segment Es 80a 80b or 10a 10m band option The Band Decoder offers an option to split either the 80m or the 10m band in two segments See Parameters Setup LPT and define the limit between the two segments ia Digital modes The band plan provides two
213. ction Stop scrolling for 5 minutes toggle When depressed the software stops scrolling It resumes after 5 minutes A Break signal this button sends the signal command CTRL C or Escape see SETUP to switch the TNC to the command mode TNC W Type ahead toggle If depressed each character is sent when typed This mode may be useful when operating CW or RTTY TNC Automatic QSY toggle after each new spot the software automatically QSY syour rig to the corresponding frequency and stops the screen saver Preferences Keying down from the TX or the program automatically disables this function only if the monitoring screen is active The drop down button allows you choosing the corresponding spots between A Needed or totally New One IF AF gain control is supported and according to the status of the Main toolbar s Tools DX Squelch button on AF is set to its previous gain for the delay specified under the Preferences Transceiver Band Plan tab amp DX Spot to send this button opens a dialog box from which you compose a DX Spot to send to the DX Cluster z Broadcasting toggle provides broadcasting of DX Spots received from a Telnet server via Packet A Clear buffer You should use this button to clear the receive buffer if you suspect a lock up 4 Search for text this button provides a search for a text string Please note that this function stops scrolling K Sound announce toggle Toggle to switch on off the
214. ctions of the sub receiver CTRL PTT Bands and Mode While the sub receiver has the control you may use the Edit VFO window F2 or the Up Down buttons the keypad and the slider of the Monitoringto set a frequency but the Command Panel is disabled To toggle from Memory mode to VFO and vice versa please use the C button of the Monitoring The Band Scope has the ability to scan the sub receiver Generally most of the commands or the modules affect the main receiver only Consequently when the sub receiver has the control some informations RX TX frequencies or functions may be wrong or may have inexpected results Memory channels operation TRX Manager supports the 301 channels of the TS 2000 including Labels and the memory Group numbers 100 channels for TS 480 110 channels for TS 590S SG e Reverse parameter of the Channel window is related to Mode CW R FSK R e Skip parameter skips a channel during a scanning Lockout 3 TS 2000 e Channel 300 is the Call channel it is not editable from TRX Manager e RX TX Split is converted into Repeater Shift in FM mode you may select the groups to be recalled in memory mode from the Channel window e Group numbers are displayed for each channel under the Scancolumn of the Channels window When you change a group number from the computer the TS 2000 s display takes this change into account but the change is not effective You have to boot TS 2000 in order to make the new group n
215. cy and Mode pollings are supported by all ICOM rigs RX TX polling is not supported by all ICOM rigs file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 174 of 365 Alternatives to the remote control function Alternatives to the remote control function While the TRX Manager s standard remote control mode A is economical powerful and simple to use and will work with almost any network connection there are a couple of alternate methods available which have been used successfully in conjunction with TRX Manager Depending on your particular needs these methods may be attractive to you The most viable methods are listed below B Using the real remote control mode of TRX Manager TS 480 2000 590 K2 K3 ICOM This mode gives you remote control exactly as if the com port is open from the CLIENT station and is very similar to the use of a serial device server or a remoterig device with LESS data exchanged However it requires an excellent IP connexion C The TRX Manager s Web Server is very easy to use and universal since its Web Interface works from any system but it has very limited functions and interactivity is reduced D Use of serial device servers including Remoterig device This method of remote control involves using a remote computer running a server software and or standalone hardware devices to make remote serial ports appear to be located at a local computer The method provides direct control of the remote rigs rotato
216. d file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 250 of 365 Q How to personalize the message The message to be defined from the Preferences or the Log Book may include the following joker which will be replaced by the Name Example Laurent F6DEX has made a QSO with Pierre F6HAC e The message is defined as 73 Dear de Laurent F6DEX e The printed message will be 73 Dear Pierre de Laurent F6DEX Printing updating the Logbook If appropriate you may indicate the position by its number in the sheet of the first label to print Start in order to use a previously started sheet this option only applies to the first sheet The Page by Page check box prints one page by one page The From Page option allows printing from the specified page number This option is useful in order to resume a printing session without a waste of label sheets in case of your printer crashes Printing is launched by the Print button Labels are sorted by Callsign Because errors during printing are possible updating the QSL Sent field is only manual preferably after a successful printing by using the QSL Y button This action will replace R or Blank by Y If QSLSDATE is checked the corresponding field will be filled in with the current date QSL Printing TRX Manager does not feature a QSL printing utility If you are interested by QSL printing please see ADIF2QSL on the Marek SP7DQR web site file C Help index htm 31
217. d below the RX Frequency The Monitoring or Monitoring screen is activated from the tools bar by clicking corresponding button z F6 This screen complements the display of your transceiver Layout varies from one rig to another depending on available CAT commands Tip A a real time module the Monitoring consumes some resources while you are using your computer for something else you may reduce this amount by minimizing TRX Manager Please read the Getting started Configuration and appearance The Monitoring s Configuration button or the Transceiver Colors submenu opens the Monitoring s configuration dialog box which allows you choosing different options for the current main transceiver e Three configurations for the S Meter Bargraph Analog Scope e Specific colors e Macro option if available provides display of eight user defined function buttons while the More Macros option enables up to 30 macros eel file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 85 of 365 e Frequency resolution HF 1Hz resolution is not supported by all transceivers if you note a wrong behavior please unselect this option S Meter Police C Bares A DropShadow C Scope S Gaear Merehana dan y i er Alb a TX Sub 838 A DropShadow Analogique 0 COLDRS aa MODE A Fo STATUS Al Carat Curseur INFO DX A Caract res Disc Filter C Tape
218. d or real Remote control using a Web Server Memory channels management Graphic band scope for band activity checking Advanced functions e Keyboard shortcuts e Compact and comprehensive display DX Bar e Control of up to 3 Sub Transceivers e Programmable Band Decoder LPT or COM Port e Support for SO4R Single Operator Four Radios operation e PTT Switching using an external line e Quick Memories e Programmable Band Plan e Drag and drop of frequencies between windows e OLE Link compatibility with LOGic Swisslog e High precision S Meter e Macro commands e Synchro for SteppIR beam ACOM 2000 amp ACOM 600S amplifiers third party program and other controllers via RS 232 e Linear Reminder for manual linear amplifier or antenna tuner e Support for CW Skimmer e Support for digital Wattmeters e TRX Pan a Spectrum Analyser for SDR e Digital Modes Interface with Fldigi MMVARI Engine embedded Short wave listening e Data base for Short Wave Listening file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 3 of 365 e Automatic identification of stations e Sound Recorder DXing Web Cluster interface Internet Data terminal Packet Telnet DX Cluster interface sound announcement DX Map Plot spots amp NCDXF Beacons interface with DX Atlas and Google Earth HF Propagation predictor Automatic DX Tracking Black lists Rotator control Satellite Interface CW Interface via Serial or LPT Port Wi
219. der Q Tip You may browse AppData Local TRX Manager from the Parameters Browse submenu TRX Tools exe distributed with TRX Manager lets you browse all the folders that TRX Manager uses including the Backup folder Ea Note If you own an older installation CD prior to 5 0 TRX Manager switches using the new folder structure Please note TRX Manager will automatically copy temporary and utility files located in the TRX manager s main folder to the new Misc subfolders located in ProgramData TRX manager and in AppData Local TRX Manager BUT TRX Manager does NOT move your personal files i e files created using the Open Save buttons your LOG or SWL database your MEM files and generally all files located in the TRX Manager s subfolders Consequently almost all files located in the TRX Manager s subfolders will NOT be moved and will stay in the Program files TRX manager s folder and TRX manager continues to write Program Files It is up to you but strongly recommended to transfer these files to the new location AppData Local TRX manager s subfolders and to configure TRX Manager accordingly Running TRX Manager under VISTA Win7 Win8 Win10 TRX Manager is compatible with Vista Win7 Win8 Win10 so please DO NOT use WIN98 or WINXP compatibility modes In the Compatibility tab for TRX Manager exe you have to keep this option NOT checked The Compatiblity mode can introduce unpredictable issues file C Help index htm 31 10 2015
220. der the Preferences Transceiver Band Plan tab Sorting the spots and particular functions Sorting the spots by any field is available You have to click the corresponding column header This feature may help you to find a callsign or to check for a specified band activity A right click on Spot opens a context menu and allows you to activate various functions instant QSY transfer to a sub transceiver if supported displaying DXCC displaying CD Rom QRZCallbookBuck launching DX Atlas Go List HAM Cap searching or direct logging e BlackList E this function opens the black list of spots and spotters The selected DXCall and or the Spotter may be added to the blacklist by clicking IP The blacklists can be edited The button deletes the current entry while the amp button clears the whole list 9 Tips Wen you click a spot the DX Spot Callsign is copied into the Windows clipboard and is available for being pasted into any other program See also Drag and drop drag and drop of spots are supported into a list of frequency the Logbook logbook the DX Map file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 273 of 365 DX Tracking List TRX Manager allows you to automatically track of particular callsigns through the DX Cluster spots or the Web Cluster spots it may be DXpedition stations special callsigns friends Initializing of the DX Tracking list is done from the DX Tracking dialog box
221. dge If TRX Manager is not installed on your computer LP Bridge allows interactivity between TRX Pan file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en and various transceivers You must fill in GlobalOffset Please note LP Bridge is not required for users of TRX Manager which features a specific Synchro mode for interactivity with other software or device N4LPAllows interactivity with N4LP CAT control software SDR e LP Pan IF Adpter if you use an IF Adapter like LP PAN connected to the IF output of your transceiver e SDR Fixed LO it is the case with an SDR like Softrock and a fixed LO Other parameters e Sound card resolution 24bits or 16bits While 24bits may slightly lower the noise floor 16bits consumes fewer ressource and in practice gives better results 24bits is disabled in this version e Apodization Also called Windowing in other SDR apps Select a filter or none Apodization smooths the signal trace but increases apparent noise floor Blackman Nuttall is the more efficient with 16bits None is preferable with 24bits e FFT Bins Accuracy Determines the Resolution Bandwidth RBW which is a measure of frequency resolution of the display 4096 default is usually adequate when viewing a large bandwidth at normal screen sizes More than 16384 bins slows down the display on older PCs Generally other software like PowerSDR operates with 4096 or 8192 bins TRX Pan can be used with up to 65536 bins for excellent
222. dified to reflect Active vs Standby VFO If it is important to identify VFO A vs VFO B you will need to monitor which VFO is active on the FT 817 857 897 Memory channels Direct FT 817 857 897 Memory Manipulation IS NOT POSIBLE There is no CAT Code to Read or Write to the Memory Banks of the FT 817 857 897 TRX Manager has a separate set of Memories which may be manipulated and saved to disk as described elsewherein the TRX Manager Help Files TRX Manager does provide several short cuts to loading FT 817 857 897 Memories as described in the Operating Tips Section and supports FTBasic s memory file which allows you programming the FT 817 897 using the Clone mode VFO C Channels Loading Procedure The limited access to VFO functions of the FT 817 857 897 requires some rather complex code to load the TRX Manager Memory Channels to the FT 817 857 897 Assuming you have loaded several memory channels on TRX Manager press the Up Arrow adjacent to VFO C The contents of the memory you are moving to will be loaded into the Active VFO Toggle from Active to Standby VFO The previous Active VFO Frequency will be reloaded Drag the Contents of VFO C to the Active VFO It will be loaded to the Active VFO Drag the Contents of VFO C to the Standby VFO It will be loaded to the Standby VFO and the Standby VFO will be toggled to Active VFO 7 The previous contents of the Active VFO are maintained in the Standby VFO Oo Ea This is actually quit
223. digital modes RTTY and DATA By default LSB is affected to RTTY and USB is affected to DATA Any other mode can be selected from the RTTY and DATA combo boxes e g if your transceiver does not support the digital modes you can select CW Or you can select LSB USB FSK PKT PSK DATA LSB DATA in RTTY USB DATA for the other digital modes depending on the digital modes supported by your transceiver The REVERSE option Transceiver tab affects the selected sideband in RTTY or DATA modes See also DX Spotting MMVARI file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 129 of 365 Automatic mode switching By checking Auto Mode automatic mode switching is selected by default at startup It is always possible to activate deactivate this function from the Monitoring window Auto or a Sub Transceiver panel for a particular session The Backlash field in Hz prevents from quick and unstable changes of mode near the limits of two segments Generally 1000Hz is enough Restoring the default Bandplan If the Auto mode is malfunctioning your bandplan csv file may have been altered You may have to select your Region again by opening one of the Region csv file or the IARU button This action erases any previous version of bandplan csv Miscellaneous settings Under the Rotator Misc tab of the Preferences you may assign a different Rotor and depending on your transceiver Antenna TX Power Tuner or Linear amplifier options fo
224. dows clipboard A right click opens a contextual menu copy may be selected in the upper area received data and cut copy paste in the lower area data to send Packet To send a break signal Ctrl C or Escape you have to press the following tool bar button y If lt Escape gt is the command the terminal displays to show that you have to enter a command If the DCD line of your controller or TNC is wired TRX Manager displays the connection status in the title bar and in some cases the connected station call If the DCD is not wired disconnected will be displayed without any other consequence Any disconnection generates the Hand sound system Telnet You have to enter the IP address or the name of the computer into the Host text box under Telneti or Telnet2 then click the go to e button in order to establish the connection See also Telnet connections Local IP E ee Special functions and features Different special features may be accessed from the tool bar the lower frame or by double clicking on the receive window Ta ay Open text file this button causes the corresponding text data to be inserted in the lower area Then the text may be edited and sent with one or more carriage return fel Save buffer this button saves all text data already received in a text file Fl Connect Toggle this button connects or disconnects the specified Host Telnet The status of the button indicates the status of the conne
225. dule using the Transceiver Monitoring sub menu or the corresponding button F6 With some Transceivers you must press the CAT button main tool bar or Transceiver sub menu to engage computer control If necessary you can also access more controls from the Levels window tt Transceiver Levels sub menu Internet TRX Manager uses Internet Explorer s settings Please configure you firewall to allow TRX Manager accessing to the Internet or your personal network User manual Now please read some of the help topics for this purpose a printable help is available for download from the TRX Manager s website Reading the sections related to the graphical interface and windows layout is particularly recommended file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 14 of 365 Some VERY frequently asked questions 1 TRX manager offers a great number of programmable automatisms some of them can be disconcerting One of the most frequently asked questions is related to the mode and filter settings including DSP or EDSP Slope Tuning Filters Frequently asked question The program is buggy It sends commands mode or filter DSP Slope changes to the transceiver Answer TRX Manager provides an auto mode function the mode change is done according to a programmable band plan Please see the section related to the modes and filters including DSP PBT and to the band plan for understanding the logic of the program and
226. e C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 238 of 365 Logging a new QSO Press the new QSO button 0 or Ctrl N to create a new QSO The button looks as if depressed and the title bar shows New QSO Please introduce the callsign and press the TAB button Use the TAB key to move from one field to another in the log panel Use the more button to access more fields The clear button A Ctrl D may be used to clear all the fields and to start logging again Use Ctrl C to give CALL field focus The Log button 5 or CTRL S or F12 saves the QSO in the database Es Real Time logging To log your QSOs in real time automatic update of Date Time and Frequency fields please make sure the Real Time option is checked Preferences Logbook Logging modes TRX Manager features several other ways of logging 1 Classic mode This mode is comparable with that proposed by other logging software s you introduce the callsign and you press the il button Ctrl Ins OR the Enter key This action has the following effects in sequencing order if the Copy check box is checked Preferences Logbook the logbook s fields are filled in using the most recently entered information if the Auto logging check box is checked Preferences CD Rom the empty logbook s fields are filled in with the data collected from the the CD or the HAM base the callsign becomes the current callsign and all windows are consequently updated D
227. e by some pixels to simulate an activity each 5 minutes unless a real activity is detected The corresponding mouse movement is not perceptible Language You can choose your preference language for the interface French English Swedish Spanish German or Polish from the Preferences sub menu under Software Help is tranlated in English and French only Spanish F displays the French help and Spanish E displays the English help TRX Manager itself is translated 100 in English 99 in French and from 50 to 90 in other the languages However many error message may appear in English only and sometime in French Since the software is conceived as a multi language software with your help it is possible to quickly translate each label into any language please contact the author It is also possible to improve the various translations thank you for your indulgence Distances The distances can be displayed in Miles or Kilometers Regional settings Windows Dates and Times are displayed according to the format defined for Windows please set these preferences from the Windows s Regional Settings Panel Date and Time property pages Using the period as decimal separator is highly recommended Please set this parameter from the Numbers property page file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 21 of 365 Windows layout TRX manager features various functions relating to the windows Fonts and colors
228. e squares making easy to see if a circuit along the terminator gray line is possible The SFI text box Solar Flux Index lets you set up the program according to the solar activity You may obtain the SFI from a DX Cluster SH WWV command or on the Internet http dx qsl net If you are connected to the Internet the sfi button updates this field automatically from the NOAA server and displays the latest announcement in the status bar of the program E Notes e Short Long Path buttons are activated e by clicking the DX Map you may obtain prediction for the corresponding zone e predictions are calculated for the current day of the current month Principle TRX Manager is inspired from R Fricker s algorithm written in 1985 The program cuts the path into Hops of about 4000 Km For each control point the program calculates the maximum usable frequency MUF for a reflection through F2 Layer Also the program calculates the maximum frequency for a reflection through E Layer this frequency is called minimum usable frequency LUF because the signal must go across E Layer before reaching F2 Layer Please note the result is only a prediction MUF is currently exceeded 50 of the time In addition the prediction is limited since only propagation through F2 is considered file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 228 of 365 More powerful algorithms now exist but require a large number of parameters The algorithm
229. e Band Scope History tab Each time you set a new spot or a new label the history list is updated and allows you to fast recall of any previously visited frequency The History tab allows you opening a context menu with various functions including PASTE to the Quick Memory Bank file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 120 of 365 DY a vote OMB LO a 4Li file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 121 of 365 Current Spot The Current Spot may be the name of the current channel in use the SW station being listen to or the last DX Spot set from a DX Cluster or a Web Cluster This information is bound to the current frequency and will be memorized with the channel the VFO or the quick memory It is displayed from the Monitoring or the Sub Transceiver panels It is also very useful to set this spot info manually Main Transceiver only from the Edit Info F4 submenu then TRX Manager immediately displays the status of your DXCC for the corresponding call sign the beam heading and if the QSO has been worked before Because TRX Manager keeps in memory the spectrum occupation this information will be automatically displayed for the 15 last spots by only moving the main VFO knob The Monitoring s Spot centering button amp provides a precise tuning to the right spot frequency 24 896 SPLIT 0 89 W 0 40K BPy2wiswi When used in conjunction with the DXCC w
230. e MIC gain or DATA gain of your transceiver file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 208 of 365 Awards DXCC Window TRX Manager searches for geographical and DXCC information from the prefix of a station This function is activated from the Display DXCC info F7 sub menu or the li button of the main toolbar The DXCC window e displays distances to from the station and azimuth for a given prefix e provides remote control of a rotator e displays the status of your DXCC award for the current entity e displays HF Propagation predictions F See also e Current Spot You can type the callsign in the corresponding text box of the DXCC window however in most cases TRX Manager automatically populates this field with the current spot the current logging information As soon as a valid callsign is introduced all information are updated Ez Multiple entities for a given prefix If there is more than one DXCC country for ONE prefix a combo box appears and allows you to choose between the different DXCC entities You only have to click one of the items to obtain the right information i DXCC FO FP Fr Polynesia OC Fr Polynesia OC A word about the DXCC algorithm TRX Manager implements a Prefix database of all official ITU prefixes and by default does not support certain special callsign granted for DXPeditions or other events which would require frequent updates 9 More about DXPedi
231. e a communication problem you will have to check DTR or RTS Enabled especially if your interface is powered on by the computer Handshaking will be automatically set by the program if you select some Kenwood speed above 4800 or TenTec Otherwise this option is not required and may lock up the program at startup if your transceiver does not support handshaking in fact this option only exists for a compatibility with some serial servers See also Troubleshooting If you use an ICOM please fill in its address fill in the number of memories and check COO if the channels are numbered starting from 00 Initially you DO NOT need to fill in the PTT or TRX Interrupt frames please let TX Interrupt NOT checked to make the software operating In the same way the IP Port option which provides a remote control of the com port but requires a good knowledge of the program remains unchecked Later on you can add an other Transceiver under TRX2 to TRX4 choose your Preferences language colors filters and other miscellaneous settings Terminal Rotator CW Synchro SO4R Av IMPORTANT Make sure of your settings especially Transceiver Speed and Serial Port are correct From Setup click the summary button to see the list of the selected com ports and check for the duplicate selections Running the Monitoring To check if the software correctly communicates with your transceiver close the Setup window and activate the Monitoring mo
232. e control to the sub receiver EL Kenwood This window is updated when opening Later the Refresh button W polls the transceiver and updates the display However if Auto Information is enabled the levels on the left are updated in real time AF SQL or AF RF controls By default TRX Manager provides controls for AF and Squelch levels By right clicking the cursor of the RF SQ Sliders you may toggle from AF SQL to AF RF controls AF and RF Gain levels Switching from AF RF to AF SQ Phone Tab From the Phone tab you can set up the parameters for RX and TX in phone CW Tab From the CW tab you can set up parameters for RX and TX in CW Please note e Text boxes allows you to set up two CW messages up to 24 characters unrelated to the internal electronic keyer of your transceiver file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 65 of 365 e A Memory function of the DSP filters is featured e The Pitch Shift button shifts Pitch and IF Shift simultaneously Please note that TRX Manager supports direct CW Keying of the Transceiver via the CAT port You have to check the Internaloption Setup TRX tab to enable direct CW keying via the CAT port see also CW Interface Scan Tab The Scan tab provides settings of the transceiver s scanner Conventions and functions are the same as those of the transceiver s manual It is recommended that you read this manual to understand the different scanning modes Misc tab
233. e followings e Fast loading of the channels and dynamic use of the channels with spots of a cluster e Fast loading of frequencies from the Monitoring to the S W database window e Adding a QSO in the logbook from any DX Spot window the Spot must be dropped into the datacontrol located in the lower area of the logbook window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 136 of 365 PTT Switching By default TRX manager uses a CAT command for RX TX switching and you don t have to configure PTT switching However if this CAT function is not supported IC 706MKIIG is a typical case PTT Line switching is possible via the RTS or DTR line of a serial port CAT or CW Port In addition TRX Manager provides a way to read the state of the transceiver s PTT line by using the DSR or CTS line of same serial serial port TX Interrupt option What is the use of these functions The PTT switching feature allows you if necessary to separately switch the PTT of a transceiver which does not support the corresponding CAT command Moreover in the case of use of preamplifiers or linear amplifiers it can be preferable to have a separate switching circuit so relays can be transferred before actual transmission is started You have to wire an interface see CW interface for some diagrams The TX interrupt advanced feature makes it possible for the program to detect a manual switch into TX and thus to stop certain functions such as a
234. e intuitive when after you experiment with it The Memory Channels may also be loaded to the Active VFO from the Memory Channel List Window It is also possible to Edit the contents of a Memory from this window FT 817 WILL NOT TURN ON Due to interaction between TRX Manager and the FT 817 if TRX Manager is running prior to turning on the FT 817 the Power Button on the FT 817 is disabled This is easily corrected Turn o anager or the utton not available wit i T ff TRX M far he CAT B ilabl ith FT 857 897 2 The CAT Button on TRX Manager may also be used to turn the 817 Off and On Narrow CW Filter There is no CAT Command to set Filters on the FT 817 857 897 The Narrow CW Filter Setting in the Parameters Preferences FT 817 857 897 Filters Screen does not any effect Operating Tips Preferences Use the Parameters Preferences FT 817 857 897 Panel to set the following e S Meter You may want to calibrate your S Meter with the S Meter on TRX Manager I found mine to be accurate by adjusting the slider three notches to the left of center e Repeater Offset Set to correspond to you local offset e Band Plan You may want to adjust the Band Plan to accommodate your use of the FT 817 857 897 i e 160 Mtrs US Plan Receive AM on Short wave Bands etc Loading FT 817 897 Memories from VFO Module 1 Turn off the Commands and the Monitoring Panels 2 Activate the VFO Panel 3 Set Frequency Mode Repeater Offset CTC
235. e native SteppIR protocol This mode allows remote control of the antenna from the SteppIR Window to open from the Tools SteppIR sub menu You must connect the cable to the DATA OUT connector and select any speed up to 19200 bauds from the Transceiver Interface menu any Mode may be selected if you use the DATA OUT connector Ck Buffer checked is recommended in that case the program checks for an empty buffer before each command the SteppIR s buffer beeing very small this reduces the number of collisions and errors but the program may lock up with some comm drivers like Prolific e STEPPIR DLL STEPPIR DLL is identical to STEPPIR STPIR native protocol data out but the driver is totally different and totally outside the main program This may help in some cases if your controller does not run properly with STPIR The Synchro A 2 tab provides the STEPPIR KENW and STEPPIR STPIR selections but with limited functionalities no graphical interface no SteppIR window Some options are provided from Setup and from the SteppIR window e REAL TIME NOT checked recommended updates the controller only when you STOP tuning after a 2s delay and avoids any RF noise generated by the stepper motors to happen during scanning REAL TIME checked updates the controller as soon as you tune the rig e BAND Synchro may be enabled for all bands ALL a specified range of frequencies RANGE or a specified antenna ANT 1 4 this last option requires your tran
236. e sent to the TNC 5 seconds after startup These messages may be useful for configuring your TNC or establishing the connection automatically S1 S2 buttons only appear once the SERVEUR mode and REMOTE Control are activated Setting up the base station CLIENT 2 1 Setup panel No setup is required under the Parameters Setup dialog to run the standard mode of remote control if you are using the Remote TRX window an Alternative Setup using the Monitoring for remote control is explained under Remote Control Operation 2 1 Remote TRX window Setup tab 1 CLIENT selected 2 Protocol Packet UDP or TCP same as the one defined from the SERVER computer 3 UPD a valid listening port 1001 is the default for the SERVER and a valid listening port for the CLIENT 1002 is the default TCP a valid and unique port for a TCP connection 1001 is the default TCP or UDP IP address of the SERVER computer Packet see specific settings below OUB file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 163 of 365 2 2 Optional settings e Auto connect if this option is checked recommended connection is established and the password is sent as soon as you engage the Remote Control Mode If this option is not checked the connection is manual by using the terminal mode debug mode only e Watch dog CLIENT disconnects if no packet is received after the specified delay and sends a WD frame to maintain the connection it is m
237. ecall of the most recently entered information The QSO Before check box pops up QSO Before window when you click a spot or when you log a new QSO Real Time mode in most situations this option must be checked when you enter a new QSO not continuously Frequency Mode and Date fields are updated filled in according to the current situation If Real Time mode is NOT checked the program ignores the current situation and each time you create a new QSO TRX Manager recalls the last entered Date Time ON OFF Frequency and Mode This option is useful ONLY if you enter QSOs from an old paper logbook or if you are using the program with the demo transceiver selected Ultra Fast Logging If checked pressing F12 or Enter depending on your choice populates the fields and saves the QSO in one click however only if the if the cursor is in the CALL field The F12 key is recommended in most case while the Enter key is only required for small keyboards or during a Contest See also Logging a new QSO Expert mode the Expert option removes real time message boxes confirmation for Save Clear in addition Frequency and Mode fields are continously updated In Contest mode Expert mode is used by default Appearance the Active Resizer option of the LogBook allows or does not allow the Logbook s Edit tab being resized up to fit all the window The Edit Color option changes the color of the QSL fields according to their values Y N R The LOGic ser
238. ecent version and then update your URLs by clicking Reset to Defaults from the Web Cluster Tab of the Preferences Software dialog e Perhaps you have just canceled a connection from your browser Internet Explorer you need first to exit TRX Manager enable the connexion again from your browser TRX Manager behaves like Internet Explorer file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 279 of 365 Web Cluster s spots Once a page of spots has been loaded the program offers various functions for each spot Significance of the icons and filtering An icon is assigned with each spot This icon can be seized with the mouse to initiate a drag and drop operation Moreover its appearance informs summarily about the status of the corresponding country QSL related to the DXCC Award E new one the country is not confirmed in any mode or any band needed new mode or new band the country is already confirmed but not in this band or this mode 1 vd confirmed on this band but not in this mode or this mode but not on this band 2 i confirmed IOTA detected 3 spot of the DX Trackink list unfiltered 4 If Show all is NOT checked default and Country is confirmed in this mode AND this band the Spot is NOT displayed If DE lt 5000km if checked Spots send from more than 5000Km are not displayed 1 according to your option Needed for defined under Preferences Terminal 2 opposite condition of your option Needed for
239. eck COO Setup Selection of the memory bank if possible like with IC 7000 is done from the Display Memory Channels window F The editing or the transfer of the channels from the PC to the transceiver is possible from the Edit Memorysubmenu or by a right click from the channel window Note that if you modify the contents of the memories from the transceiver there can be a difference with the contents displayed by the program It is therefore recommended to modify the contents of the memories only from the program In addition the transfer of the memories to the transceiver is very slow Ez Reading the memory channels content is not supported TRX Manager can NOT read the contents of the memories of ICOM transceivers It could be done but was not programmed in order to preserve the compatibility between the various models moreover data like the shift CTCSS tones etc could be read only from some ICOMs by a specific command which is not available on the other models Nevertheless TRX Manager reads the frequency and the mode of each channel when they are individually accessed from the program and preserves the values between sessions on hard disk If these functions are available on your ICOM TRX Manager memorizes the receive and transmit frequencies SPLIT mode tonality CTCSS repeater and T Squelch The repeater shift DUP is ALWAYS memorized as a receive transmit shift in SPLIT mode except IC 820 821 910 for which it is memorized a
240. ect the VFO from the TRX Manager only ICOM has recently introduced a command to poll set the frequency and mode of the unselected VFO 1A25 26 commands file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 42 of 365 In TRX Manager the main display of the Monitoring RX and TX is always relative to the selected VFO A or B Main or SUB Sub If available the VFO B or SUB frequency is displayed in the B frame of the Monitoring or by clicking the SUB 2 button in this case the VFO B or SUB is selected when the mouse passes over the digits to allow changes by right left clicks on the digits Once the mouse leaves this field the VFO A or Main is selected again The full update of the display can take 1s 1424200 14 245 00 MAN USB SPLIT 3 00 USB kHz VFOA VFOB B 1a A 00 fi RECEIVE PHONE CW gt When the mouse is over the digit VFO B SUB is selected Tips by Rich KOFUN When TRX Manager starts is assumes VFO A is active If the radio is set to VFO B the program will read this value into VFO A of the program This can be confusing The following prevents the problem 1 With the transceiver on Start TRX Manager 2 Select VFO A from the program This will insure the Radio is using VFO A 3 Turn the VFO knob on the radio slightly This may result in a Dialog Box indicating a Communications Error Invalid message format This only comes up once and is not serious 4 Select VFO B from the program 5 T
241. ected from the toolsbar of the DXBar window af al C 703 va Es Note On some systems or computers opening the DX Bar window prevents the system menu of the main window from working especially Maximize Exit In that case you must use the TRX toggle Maximise or the Exit button y of the DX Bar window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 118 of 365 Quick memories QMB The Quick Memories of TRX Manager are by definition simple and quick to use Using the Quick Memories is recommended in real time and especially to save DX Spots See also alternatives e Memory channels e Short wave database Opening the Quick memory window The Quick Memories window opens from the Display Quick Memories submenu E or Ctrl M Quick Memories demo qmb Cy cy VIF M VORLD RADIO TELLITE RA RTTY wkd up 1 5 NRJ m Mobile 3 Meteo 27 7700 FMV MARTIME 2 3 USB Industry aval OD WFM IARU BEACON CW HBO DL2SBY 8 1467 AM 14 1200 ernment 2 700 Anyi e BBC WOR oe AERO rc Using the QMB Quick memories may be added by Drag and Drop or by using the Paste fal button The Paste function memorizes the current frequency of the Operating transceiver as it is displayed in the Toolbar The STOP button in the bottom right hand corner of the Monitoring window stores the current frequency while the RCL button recalls the last entered Quick Memory Quick Memories store essen
242. ection To connect you to a distant computer you must know either its IP address or its full name and the Port number IP address is a succession of groups of digits separated by dots xxx xxx xxx xxx In general the full name of a computer is much easier to remember Port number is 23 by default for Telnet but may be embedded in the IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx yyy where yyy port i e 193 191 136 222 8000 allows connecting 193 191 136 222 through Port 8000 If the Port number is embedded in the IP address TRX Manager uses this port Otherwise TRX Manager uses the default port number which can be modified from the Preferences Terminal tab You enter the full name of the computer or its address in the Hostfield of the Terminal Telnet1 or Telnet2tab and you press the go button to establish the connection The Host text box maintains a history list of everything typed you are able to choose previously entered items by selecting them from the list To delete an item select it and press the DELETE key on your keyboard To display all items clear and 24 11 87 252 dx kadpkb ampr org J double click the text box Host hamgate comm sfu ca ndto modempool com 4lee lee k12 al us When the connection is established the button ag appears as pressed to close the connection you can press again this button or type Q in the transmission window of the Terminal At the bottom of the window a WD button activates a Watch Dog CR sent to
243. eed to press the following keys F2 1 4 2 0 0 Enter Setting up current filter CTCSS Tone Repeater offset is also possible from the VFO window See also Repeaters settings Mouse input The MHz frame of Monitoring allows a direct input of frequencies using the mouse Please e check MHz button e click each digit dot between MHz and KHz e click Ent to enter set the frequency CE allows you going back and cancel editing Mouse input keyboard file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 96 of 365 Graphic tuning In the lower part of the Monitor Window is an advanced mouse sensitive when highlighted tuning control The combo box on the right lets you to define the Range in KHz of the control shortcuts PgUp PgDn 18 100 18 120 18 140 Tuning by moving the cursor The cursor can be grabbed with the mouse it is divided into two parts the lower part tunes over the full range of the tuning control The upper part fine tunes around the current frequency lt lt 0 030 i Large or Fine Tuning Tuning by using the Mouse Wheel When the Monitoring is highlighted the mouse wheel can tune the frequency The Tuning Step is variable according to the state of the INC function e INC NOT activated the step is 1 1000 of the total range Range 100K gt Step 100Hz e INC highlighted the program uses the Step you define under the menu which opens when you right click the
244. eferable to close all the windows inside TRX Manager but keeping it maximized please note that TRX Manager when minimized does not communicate with your transceiver The TRX Meter s window displays the signal strength in S Units pV and dBm The max value of the signal is displayed in dBm and can be reset by pressing gt lt 2 TRX Meter 123456789 20 40 60 S Ur ts 1113 81 S9 26dB 50 uV S9 below 30MHz 5uV S9 above 30MHz See Table Calibrating From TRX Manager the s meter calibration slider Preferences Transceiver tab must be fixed and not changed The values read by TRX Meter are affected by this correction From TRX Meter press the CAL button Calibration must be done for each S unit from S1 to S9 and 10 to 60 For each button set your RF generator according to the corresponding signal strength value is indicated in uV then press the button to poll your transceiver the program is calculating an adjustment factor which will be applied to the read values You have to perform this calibration for each button when you press OK the program saves all the calculated factors as default values Please note that for a given transceiver adjustment factors may be different according to the band the pre amplifier etc It is useful to save these factors in separate calibration files cal as extension file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 146 of 365 Directive patterns
245. eferences for the Transceiver you use CLIENT the Synchro ports SteppIR excepted of the CLIENT computer can be activated for the Remote transceiver provided the Synchro option of the Remote TRX window is checked and the Remote transceiver is the Operating transceiver This may be useful for synchronizing with third party programs Commands to LPT or RS232 Ports Macro commands to any LPT and RS232 port can be sent to the SERVER station using TRX Command file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 168 of 365 ALTERNATIVE SETUP CLIENT REMOTE TRANSCEIVER CONFIGURED AS MAIN TRANSCEIVER Configuring the Remote transceiver as main transceiver CLIENT was the recommended setup in the previous versions of TRX Manager However thanks to the concept of the Operating transceiver this setup is no more required for remote control and the Remote TRX window is enough to control the remote station with the advantage of keeping full control over a local transceiver However if you don t have the use of a local transceiver at the same time as a remote transceiver you may prefer using the main interface for remote control Transceiver Under Setup you select REMOTE as transceiver WHATEVER the transceiver controlled from the SERVER station In that case the CLIENT station sees the remote station as a generic transceiver and you can control the remote transceiver using standard commands from the Monitoring The Remote TRX wind
246. efine a Wide SSB bandwidth of 2600Hz centered on 1500Hz while Low 200 and High 2000 define a Narrow bandwidth of 1800hz centered on 1100Hz However if your transceiver does not provide IF Shift function or Low High Cut functions High and Low values are only used to define the bandwidth BW High Low and the filter will be centered Suggested values DSP filtering Please understand that these filters are virtual and in most cases without any relation with the fixed filters eventually installed in your rig In CW especially with TS 2000 TS 480 and K3 it is important you introduce the exact value of thePitch Preferences under Transceiver in order to set the CW bandwidth correctly file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 124 of 365 Macro buttons The Monitoring Sub Transceiver and Remote windows have configurable Function buttons or Macro The Monitoring window supports up to 30 macros Not all transceivers support macros generally all Kenwoods and ICOMs Elecraft and recent Yaesus FTDX9000 and later support macro commands see also e TRX Command which allows sending powerfull macro commands via OLE to TRX Manager Displaying the macros From the Monitoring make sure the layout is configured to display macro buttons if Macro buttons are not visible please click the Monitoring s Configuration button to open the Configuration dialog Buttons options may differ depending on your tran
247. electable This is an issue of the K3 KX3 protocol not of the program This is often the case with sub menus file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 71 of 365 K3 KX3 s menu 8 BAND and MODE switch Click BAND or MODE to open the Switch On Switch select TOP to keep it on top You may of course use button to scroll through modes and bands like with a K3 KX3 Band Switch 9 Sliders with double function you may also double click the value for a quick and precise change press Enter to valid or Escape to cancel 10 TT Opens the Data CW Terminal 11 EQ Opens the Graphic RX TX EQualizer Please note e K3 REV 2 is splitted in two buttons REV hard coded which reverses the VFOs and 2 to enter a numeric entry Generally other buttons do the same functions as those of the K3 s front panel e VFO selection is definitely different on the K3 KX3 from the K2 VFO A is always a receive VFO If you re in SPLIT mode VFO B is the transmit VFO If the subreceiver is turned on it is controlled by VFO B whether SPLIT is in effect or not e KX3 Levels window appeareance is different but functions are very similar It is however recommended using the Monitoring s XFC which implements a similar function but much more convenient in practice First give Monitoring focus by clicking this window or just the F6 key then while you hold ESC on keyboard or hold the mouse down on Monitoring s XFC
248. en Page 154 of 365 Tune as far as other parameters for a given segment remain unchanged especially antennas and of course Drive power itself see note b 2 Determining the Gain e press OPR to engage the amplifier see note a e Tune from the Linear Reminder while using Tune gt or Tune F WITH amplifier running e Gain is displayed in dB e Stop tuning Linear Reminder FWD 820T SWR 1 20 1 00kT gt 2 5 Gain measurement The measured gain may be slightly lower than the real gain 0 2 0 5dB since the wattmeter is inserted behind the amplifier Also if your antenna is not 1 1 SWR and while the amplifier is not running your transceiver s protection circuit may slightly reduce its output power If you control the Transceiver s output power control by computer TRX Manager checks that all parameters stay unchanged If TRX Manager detects any change it displays DRV in red to indicate that it needs a new measure of the drive power Linear Reminder FWD 217T SWR 1 19 1 00kT R gt 25 Drive power value lost E3 Notes a If you don t have Relay control by TRX Manager please set up your amplifier to Standby Operate manually and press OPR to indicate TRX Manager in which configuration you are running your amplifier b If you don t have control of Drive power by TRX Manager it is probable you will have to repeat this sequence each time you Tune In that case this function is of no great interest file
249. end your changes to the WOTA server file C Help index htm 31 10 2015
250. ens a comprehensive context menu gt See also e Setting up TNC parameters e Telnet connections Preferences for DX Spotting Preferences Terminal amp Preferences DX Spots tabs Terminal tab e Load Spots forces TRX Manager to load DX Spots of the previous session at opening of the Terminal not recommended e Spot status recommended DXCC Status of Spots are computed displayed according to your current logbook database DE lt spots send by Spotters outside of a 5000Km radius default are ignored Max Distance of spotters in Km default 5000 Server data distance to Spotters calculated using server data if available prefix database by default BlackList enable disable the DXSpot and Spotter s blacklists Telnet port defines the default Internet port see also Telnet connections AF Auto QSyY If Stops Saver is checked TRX Manager disables your screen saver accordingly Auto connect see Telnet connections CW Skimmer see CW Skimmer interface DX Spots tab e Band Mode filters TRX Manager provides filtering by Band and Mode as follow If Auto is checked TRX Manager rejects spots outside of the frequency range of your transceiver If Manual is checked you can select specific bands If HAM is checked TRX Manager rejects spots outside of HAM segments as defined in Band Plan Filtering by Mode is provided please note TYPE of transmission Phone CW Data Beacon is used for this filter see also Band Plan
251. ents or just after band changes either by using VOX On Off or by setting up RF Power Full Minimum You can choose e PWR Power is set up according to the desired state of the transmitter OPR gt power by default according to Preferences SBY gt minimum power 0 5 W This is the recommended way if control using a relay is not possible provided RF Power control is possible via CAT e VOX TEST VOX or TEST on K3 is set up according to the desired state of the transmitter This is the way to go if all other options are not possible but VOX control is possible via CAT Ex Notes e Computers and RS232 communications are not perfectly reliable some situations may be unexpected This function does not exempt you from checking the state of your station e VOX or PWR may be not effective on several transceivers depending on supported CAT functions Minimum power is rarely OW but more often about 5W or more VOX control is not 100 reliable Alarm You may select the way an alarm prompts while flashing and or the Windows critical sound Digital Wattmeter Available options for using a digital wattmeter from the Linear Reminder module are e Scale of the wattmeter e PTT SWR Alarm Keys up the transmitter and or opens the relay inserted in the PTT line if a high SWR is detected higher that Alarm Set Point value e Tune Gain measures the gain of your amplifier see Assisted Tune for Experts Please let this option NOT checked if
252. equency are displayed You may also use the band scope in conjunction with the Monitoring s scanning but without pause on busy channels please see also how to change some parameters of the scanning The scanning algorithm Scanning is done by Steps not continously and Step size is defined by the Accuracy function and or the filter width If Step is greater than filter s width stations may be missed In order to minimize this situation TRX Manager adds a random value at the beginning of each scan Thus more stations will be detected over a repeated scan The TFS mode provides a graphic display of all stations detected over a long period of time In Auto mode scan is done in CW in order to select the narrower filter s and a fast AGC You may choose Manual scan to bypass these parameters file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 113 of 365 Band scope parameters Mode Auto by default The software scans in CW mode This is because in this mode generally AGC delay is switched to FAST by the rig You may select manual to scan with the current mode and filter selected but with a loss of precision Otherwise the mode determines which mode is selected when the scan pauses if Auto is selected the program switches to the mode defined by the band plan Accuracy In Auto mode the accuracy of analysis may be defined from 1 low to 8 high This parameter has an influence on the analysis delay In TFS mode and highe
253. er en Page 248 of 365 Printing the Log book Printing of the essential data is provided via the corresponding tool bar button j If a search is in progress Select button g pressed the corresponding selection will be printed if there is no search in progress a dialog box prompts for the selection of QSO to print by date and or by export field The printed log book is sorted by Date ON file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 249 of 365 QSL Labels printing Printing QSL labels is possible from the Logbook by pressing the button H of the toolbar which opens the Labels wizard Selecting the QSOs By default the program prints the labels of all the QSOs of the database whose QSLS field is R or Blank and QSL_Print field is not N The title bar of the wizard displays the number of correspondind QSOs for which a label will be printed However from the wizard in order to limit the number of QSOs to print you can specify a date range select the date From To and press Select to populate the corresponding QSOs Vert Date On V From 10 07 2015 WV To 11 10 2015 octobre 2015 V Pac 1 8 9 15 16 21 72k 23 28 29 30 4 5 6 7 9 Today 1171072015 Data range July 10 to October 11 2015 Using the Select function of the Logbook You may also limit the number of Labels to print by using the Select function of the Logbook In that case TRX Manager prints all the QSO matching
254. er HAM Database Please understand the following limitations QRZ com may limit you usage HAM 150 lookups per day non HAM 25 lookups per day See also QRZ Callsign Database Policy This function should be only used occasionnaly and does not replace an XML subscription which contrinutes to QRZ com file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 284 of 365 CallBook CD ROM The program allows you to perform a callsign search via the Radio Amateur Callbook Settings To declare the CD ROM type and drive you have to open the Preferences dialog box HAM Bases tab the directory folder where the files are installed may be RAC DATA or DATA depending on the version of the Callbook or the installation HD or CD The Auto Log check box allows you to automatically perform a search when transferring a new spot into the Log Book The program was written to read the version 8 of the DLL Because RAC may change the data format without warning being able to run an older or newer version is not guaranteed When you open the RAC window for the first time or if you are working with a different version of the CD ROM the program needs to update the RAC DLL RACCD32A DLL and to create or to re build the QSL Manager index database This database is not a copy of QSLMGR DAT but an index that provides quick searches of the QSL Manager information This action takes a few minutes Callsign search Calling for a search may be performed fro
255. er and a serial interface to control the FT 1000 Transceiver a CW Keyer a rotator e CLIENT will be the computer from which YOU control the remote station connected to SERVER through a Network or Packet Please note you can only control SERVER from CLIENT by using a computer keyboard mouse joystick no other interface or device or hardware is required or supported from CLIENT for remote control CW Paddle excepted see below and Remote Operation 3 About IP adresses and configuration of Routers and Firewall Through a local network you connect the Local IP address of the SERVER computer Through the Internet you connect the External IP address of the SERVER computer IP addresses can be displayed by clicking the MY IPs button UDP If your computers are connected to the Internet through a Router you have to configure your Router to route all incoming packets to the corresponding computers on the specified listening Port of each computer TCP Setting up the Router is only required on SERVER An unique port is used e You SERVER computer is preferably configured with a static IP on your network This way your router is configured only once to route all packets to this computer for the listening ports UDP and TCP e If you use a Firewall either from SERVER or CLIENT it must be set to not block TRX Manager Modes of transmission SERVER lt gt CLIENT Two modes of transmission are possible e Internet LAN You h
256. er settings of the CW Tab for a transceiver which supports keying via CAT This option has no effect for a transceiver which does not support keying via CAT and in that case TRX Manager applies settings of the CW tab C KEYING USING WINKEY Please see the specific section of the help related to Winkey file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 185 of 365 Other settings to choose from Setup For all configurations e Special characters related to the CW Characters set e TX Auto automatic switch into TX mode not available with CW Internal and Winkey options e TX Delay delay between TX mode and beginning of the transmission e CQ Delay delay for the CQ Sequencer file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 186 of 365 Auto TX In CW automatic switch of the station into TX is done normally by the Break In or the VOX of the transceiver In certain cases use of a linear amplifier or a preamplifier it can be useful to sequence the switch into TX by first issuing a separate command to close the PTT line before actual transmissions begin In this case TRX manager then operates as follows Switching into TX by the selected line CAT DTR or RTS Incorporating the TX Delayspecified in Setup Checking of the state of the transceiver If TX sending of the CW Pow he AUTO TX is Not supported by Winkey or a Kenwood Elecraft CAT interface Activation It is advised to not use this function i
257. er the Tracker Options menu Tracker model list When a satellite crosses from below horizon to above the horizon AOS the azimuth elevation and range rate will be updated automatically at the rate set by the Options Update rate menu If for some reason AOS is not available tracking may be engaged from the Tracker Test dialog SAT_Explorer No setting is required Please note SAT_Explorer only displays AL and EZ for visible satellites One the satellite software is properly configured and only at this moment you select it from the Program list box The name of the satellite being tracked will be displayed and a satellite icon then moves over the window as the data are received Es Important notes e If the satellite icon remains motionless the DDE link is probably broken Please click R Resume to reactivate e Under Wintrak this last action is required when you change the output or the satellite e The simultaneous use of TRX Manager and a satellite program requires a powerful system Please avoid using other programs in background If possible increase the update interval to 1 second or more if you encounter instabilities e The CW interface of TRX Manager Kenwood s Internal interface excepted does not work properly during satellite control or the satellite contro does not work properly Using your transceiver s in SAT mode Your transceiver must implement a SAT mode which allows receive during transmit However the
258. erface the following steps are mandatory Unplug the USB interface or the PCI card Remove the com port from the device manager If possible delete the driver manually Reinstall the driver to download from the manufacturer s web site Restart Windows Plug in the USB interface or the PCI card Results depend on the way each programmer uses the com port s APIs file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 40 of 365 Specifications ICOM Transceivers This section applies to ICOM radios and TenTec radios using the ICOM protocol Omni VI and Omni VI If your transceiver doesn t appear in the SETUP list please choose the ICOM option which should function with all ICOMs using a generic but limited set of commands Settings Controlling an ICOM via the CI V protocol requires a CT 17 interface or compatible such as the W1GEE s LCU 3 Some older transceivers CI IV standard require the conversion interface UX 14 between the transceiver and the CT 17 interface Using the LCU 3 interface requires checking DTR to power on the interface Using the RS 746 interface requires checking RTS to power on the interface From the SETUP dialog box of the program you must specify The transceiver s address such as defined by ICOM or that which you have yourself defined The PC s address E0 by default The number of channels maximum 99 The channel numbering please check COO if the first channel is 00 The baud
259. erface Azimuth EA4TX s ARSWininterface Azimuth Elevation DDE Link http www ea4tx com WinRotor Azimuth by FUNKBOX http www winrotor com RT 21 Green Heron Engineering Prosistel CD Azimuth Elevation www prosistel net N8LP s rotor interface DDE Link YO3DMU s PSTRotator and PstRotatorAz Interface DDE Link AlfaSPID by Alfa Radio http www alfaradio ca If available you must specify the serial port used and possibly speed Other parameters are e Reverse mounted option this option applies if your antenna is North centered with the stops at South in that case the program adds 180 degrees to the azimuth e Offset 0 360 support for beams mounted at an offset to minimize coupling with other beams on the same mast e Settings for the Satellite interface see below Then you still have to assign a rotator to each HAM band from the Preferences dialog box under Rotator See also the Band Plan section for the other preferences Antenna TX Power Tuner Linear 3 Your rotator is not in the list A software upgrade is possible for any other rotator if you are a registered user of TRX Manager 3f Particular settings KCT interface TRX Manager launches the MOVENOW COM program for which you must indicate the path in the Setup s panel DDE Interfaces ARSWin PSTRotator N8LP You must indicate the path of the EXE file interface in the Setup s panel If the interface doesn t work properly please exit the interface and l
260. erface will be tailored to your needs If you need to reset the usage patterns back to the original settings please open the Customize dialog box Display Toolbars submenu and under Options clickReset my usage data Customizing the modules Under the software tab Preferences you may set different options to customize the colors the font for some labels or lists and how the buttons are displayed for the different modules The Active colors check box determines whether the picture displayed for each toolbar s button is changed to grayscale when the mouse pointer is not over the button So SH OMe x Fr quence VFO Active Color OFF Fr quence VFO Active Color ON The Large Icons check box determines whether the pictures displayed for buttons are enlarged Please note these options have no effect on the main toolbar which is fully customizable see above Any toolbar can be docked in any one of the four sides of its container as well as be made to float Hold the mouse and drag the toolbar where you want file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 19 of 365 3252 ait 18 00 A E 252 21 00 10 527 i 21 15 10 527 AM 16 00 10 527 AM 19 30 10 527 AM 20 30 10 527 AM 21 15 V 0 558 AM 23 30 Fi 0558 AM 21 15 Fi You may choose to display the icons related to each tab by checking the Icons check box Preferences under Software Note on some PC the size of icons may be too large and c
261. ers these settings for each band e Levels to calibrate TRX Pan for 73dbm S39 A calibrated generator or simple generator such as the Elecraft XG 2 is required In the absence of a generator you can disconnect the antenna tune the transceiver for 10m and adjust the levels for a noise floor of about 130dBm to 140dBm with the K3 preamp ON depending on whether the rig has the buffer mod and or whether the LP PAN has the optional preamp TRX Pan remembers this setting for each value of FFTBins Ea Notes e TRXPan automatically ajusts levels according to the state of PREamp and ATTenuator K3 e Levels interacts with the sound card input levels If you experience clipping of the spectrum with strong signals reduce your sound card level and increase Levels to compensate e Levels varie according to the number of FFT Bins and sound card resolution You have to recalibrate TRX Pan for each value of FFTBins However TRX Pan remembers CAL levels for the various settings and Range Ref for each band file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 331 of 365 TRX Command Sending powerfull macro commands or direct commands to a rig or a device under the control of TRX Manager or not is possible using a separate program TRX Command exe running via OLE with TRX Manager The menu External allows you launching TRX Command gt Related Topics e CAT Programming e Macro buttons Monitoring Interface The TRX Command
262. es the display of a small button which makes it possible to set Date_ON finely 12 11 00 Programmable mode The stations to be recorded are introduced into the list by using the NEW button or by drag and dropfrom the monitoring the memories windows By default the beginning of the recording is defined in the current hour UTC and the length of the recording to two minutes A click in the fields Time and Duration makes it possible to open a dialog box for the adjustment of these parameters The recording is started by pressing the timer E button Scanning Mode The scanning mode a records during the pauses on stations while scanning Avoid however launching several scans at the same time The duration of the recording is adjustable The LOG recapitulates the various heard stations Manual mode The manual mode is standard but the various changes of frequencies are added in the log allowing access to the corresponding station quickly Caution the duration of the recording is not limited in manual mode The Log The Log recapitulates the various heard stations A clic sets up the cursor to the corresponding position in the WAV file A drag and drop from the LOG makes it possible to add the station to a list of frequencies Memories SW database file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 305 of 365 Files The recordings are in the WAV format TRX Manager associates each WAV file a LOG file When beginning
263. es with appropriate values OPR check box activates or not the relay for the selected segment Press to save the values e USR1 and USR2 labels may be modified by clicking in the corresponding labels If you left USR1 or USR2 blank corresponding preset values will not be displayed from Linear Reminder e V gt button reads the transceiver s frequency the corresponding segment will be automatically selected and highlighted while you are changing frequency of your transceiver e gt V button transfers the middle frequency of the selected segment to your transceiver e Tune F and Tune tunes at full power or reduced power depending on your options Q Tip Thanks to the V and Tune buttons you can edit the whole spectrum and test your values while you keep the Settings dialog opened don t forget to cool down your amplifier after a Tune Default power This frame define the default power for TUNE F e Preference according to your options defined from the Preferences Transceiver Rotator e Or any preset value of your choice in W If the preset value OW the program uses the current power as default Tune mode This frame defines the way you e Tuning Mode Tuning Mode FSK is recommended e Temporization for Tune in seconds file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 152 of 365 OPR SBY If Control Control by is activated the Linear Reminder provides a Standby Operate function which may help to preve
264. et TRX Manager automatically launching it at startup Please note TRX Manager supports only ONE DDE Rotor Interface at the same time Under Vista W7 running TRX Manager with administrator privileges or with UAC OFF is mandatory to establish the DDE link ALFASpid Rotators The AlfaSPID rotators may be controlled via two ways 1 The SpidLog selection requires the opening of the AlfaRadio s SpidLog program However the value of the azimuth is only transferred to SpidLog and TRX Manager can not aim the rotor directly 2 The SpidRotor 1 or 2 selection provides direct control via the RS 232 port controller required The 2 selection is required if your controller provides elevation control speed 600 bauds Otherwise the 1 selection file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 224 of 365 must be used speed 1200 bauds Checking the Reverse Monted option is required for rotating the antenna from 180 to 180 rather than from 0 to 360 ORION Rotators The Orion rotators differ by the syntax of the command to move the rotor as follow 1 ORION PA A CR NNN CR 2 ORION PX A CR NNN n CR 3 ORION PX2 4 ANNN CR Where NNN NNN n is the azimuth without or with tenth and CR is a carriage return Q Tip In case of one rotor controls two antennas mounted on the same mast but with different offsets you may define the same rotor twice with the same com port but with a different Offset under Rotator 1 and R
265. eter using the METER button of the Levels window Depending on the transceiver you are using you may display one or two metering values at the same time Reading VDD Noise Blanker Levels window clik the NB 2 1 number to set NB1 or NB2 Contour You can set up CONTOUR CO with a PEAK or a NULL using the HIGH LOW gain switches Default values may be set using the SET button CW Keyer Memory KM1 5 TRX Manager uses the type 1 mode Message TEXT You may set up macros to use the paddle mode file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 59 of 365 Reverse CW This section applies to FT 990 890 900 840 1000D 767GX 757GxXII These rigs do no feature a CW Reverse function For these rigs TRX Manager makes possible the reception of CW in LSB mode using split mode Written for fun you may find it useful or not How to use the CW Reverse function First it is necessary set up the correct CW Pitch from the Preferences Transceiver dialog range 400 700 Hz Then adjust the operating frequency VFO for the selected pitch press Rev commands panel or monitoring window adjust IF Shift 1 4 clockwise to center the signal only if a narrow filter is in use press Rev again to reestablish normal CW mode POM It is still possible to offset the transmit frequency with the QSX command Please don t forget to reset CW REVERSE before mode or frequency changes because the transceiver is switched in
266. ew QSO and or transferring a new spot into the Log Book In that case the program populates the available data in order to fill in the corresponding fields of the logbook The QRZ COM database can be used in conjunction with HamQTH if the HamQTH woption is checked Installation CD Rom The QRZ CD Rom is no more supported or sold by QRZ The program was written to read the version 11 of QRZ Because QRZ may have changed the data format without warning being able to run an older or newer version is not guaranteed If you have enough disk space you may copy the CALLBK directory on the root of your hard disk and declare this disk as a drive QRZ Possible problems e The program fails to access the CD drive this may happen if the drive is connected to a parallel or USB port and the drive is not recognized e Your CD Rom is outdated please try to use the most recent version Searching for a callsign The Display HAM DB ae submenu opens the module from which you can perform a manual search for a given callsign a A lookup may be also initiated from the Log Book window by pressing the HAM DB button or also by right clicking on a spot displayed in Web Cluster or DX Cluster or Azimuthal projection windows and choosing the HAM DB button file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 283 of 365 First name City State an other fields may be transferred into the Logbook s corresponding fields by clicking 5 from the
267. exporting function of TRX Manager is sophisticated enough to provide easy updating of your favorite log book via the ADIF format Amateur Data Interchange Format Main Log book features Introduction editing a QSO Automatic report of essential parameters of DX Spots Selection searching a callsign and sorting Advanced searches and reports using SQL Selective importation exportationto ADIF Support for the LogBookof The World Import from LogWindows TRLog files export to Excel CSV Basic printing of the log or of a selection of QSO s QSL labels printing reading CD Rom QRZ Callbook Buckmaster HamQTH database Callsign look up via the Internet automatic link with the fields not supported Searching if the station has even been worked before Sending EMails Auto backup of the log file Contest mode Logging from a digital modem software See also Database Grids Current Spot Opening the Log Book The File Log book submenu F11 or the corresponding tool bar button 6 opens the Logbook window The log windows shows e Two tool bars to select the different functions file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 236 of 365 oe Ease 3 ETE normal mdb New ci E O x I A Z g Select 1617 050s Edit 7 Listing pes Explorer Staion Name State gt gt gt od _ Country Cont JOTA Grid gt gt gt al al Date Conditi
268. f 365 All temporary and utility files for the program itself are located either in the TRX manager s main folder or in the ProgramData TRX Manager Misc folder depending on your version and option for Use AppData You don t need to save these files since they are restored by the setup engine file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 28 of 365 Uninstallation Easy and clean uninstallation is provided by using Windows utilities Automatic uninstallation The software may be fully uninstalled using the standard Windows s utility configuration panel Add Remove applet During the process the software may ask you to keep or to remove some of the shared files You have to select REMOVE ALL for a full uninstallation including not shared DLL or OCX files Whatever your choice is the software will not delete effective shared files if they are correctly installed But if you choose KEPP ALL the software will mark these files as SHARED and it will not be possible to remove them later Manual operations It may be necessary to delete the AppData TRX Manager folders manually because the uninstall applet doesn t recognize files created by the software You may also save the content of this directory if you wish to reinstall TRX Manager later If you don t think to reinstall TRX Manager you may whish to delete the whole registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software VB and VBA Program Settings FT Manager You can use TRX To
269. f the Satellite which are fixed For each one of these frequencies the interface also displays the Doppler compensation to be applied These corrections are applied according to the Step Hz defined in the interface Rotator control The TRX Manager s Setup must be filled in with the maximum practicable Elevation if supported and the incremental Step warning If your rotator is controlled through a DDE Interface ARSWIN the DDE Link with the satellite software may freeze for some seconds during rotator control DDE Link with the Satellite program The Satellite program must be launched and properly configured NOVA Please choose DDE Interface only as rotator interface or any other interface if you are controlling your rotator from NOVA The DDE Link is then activated file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 308 of 365 WINTRAK PRO Please check Output DDE Data Always under Options Program then select any Single mode output The DDE Link is then activated SATSCAPE Open the Control Radio dialog and check Enable DDE Link Satscape V1 87 is required if you use a previous version please set the uplink frequency equal to 1000 MHz whatever the frequency you are using The DDE Link is then activated SATEL939 Open the DDE Link by activating the Remote control aerials option and confirm the use of TRX Manager WXtrack Open the DDE Link by checking CX6DD WISPDDE Client und
270. f the receiver VFO A Main receiver while VFO B Sub receiver The Clone mode is not supported file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 45 of 365 Operation with FT 990 ROM 1 2 FT 1000 V5 FT 747 and FRG 100 This section is about the early firmware versions of FT 990 and FT 1000 the FT 747 or the FRG 100 The early firmware versions of FT 990 ROM 1 2 and FT 1000 V5 the FT 747 and the FRG 100 do not provide a real time transmission of data such as frequency mode You have to select FT 990 ROM 1 2 or FT 1000 V5 in the Setup dialog box to run TRX Manager or should this happen FRG 100 FT 747 i i update function TRX Manager was implemented to run with these transceivers with following differences e The real time monitoring doesn t run you have to press the Update button to manually update the monitoring display but the program does it automatically when calling specific functions such as memory reading QSX memory or QM writing and parameters setting e Itis possible to have a slight difference 10 to 20 Hz with the displayed frequency and the right frequency you have to press Update to accord them e The automatic band scope refreshing is not working However when controlling the transceiver from the PC you should not see a great difference In fact the program simulates a communication with the transceiver through a virtual com buffer Note that for the FT 1000 owners a version 6 0 RO
271. f you do not have a real need for it and the necessary electronic interfaces are constructed To activate AUTO TX you have to check the Auto TX option Setup under CW the switch is done then by the CAT RS 232 or the serial line DTR or RTS according to the selection for the PTT line made under TRX1 CW is sent after the specified TX delay CW tab Please note that using the Break In is then not possible and does not make any sense in this case Possible problems By safety TRX Manager checks that the transceiver is in transmit mode before sending CW also if you receive the message TX ERROR it can have several causes you choose to switch into TX by the CAT but your transceiver does not have this function your transceiver does not return any data indicating the TX mode the TX Delay is too short the monitoring module is not under operation When TX ERROR is displayed the CW interface is deactivated you must close it then to start it again You will have also to choose a switch into TX by DTR or RTS line and or if necessary to increase the value for TX Delay In addition it is possible that this function is unusable with some transceivers taking into account the variety of the behaviors of the various models Tip In order to check if your transceiver communicates to the PC the TX RX mode changes proceed as follows 1 Open the monitoring module 2 Switch into TX directly from the transceiver 3 Check that t
272. fore validation Delete Deletes the current record Add Bookmark Adds a bookmark for the current record file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 25 of 365 Clear All Bookmarks Clears all stored bookmarks Go to Bookmark Presents a list of all stored bookmarks d Find Invokes a Find dialog allowing a search of the database Select a field Column to search the search criteria Match the direction Up Down and the value of the field Find FA FA Find Previous Find Next Searches backwards forwards in the database for the next occurrence of data specified in the Find dialog Possible problems 1 After updating the program the new fields do not appear please delete the layout file GRD associated with the current database in order to reset the layout of the grid to the default 2 1f the grids appears empty or corrupted you have to delete the layout file associated with the database The next time you open the database the default layout will be displayed file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 26 of 365 Saving your parameters Saving your parameters The Parameters Save Parameters subenu saves all your current settings Setup and Preferences into a reg file TRX Manager reg Depending on your system and version the TRX Manager reg file may be located 1 in the TRX Manager Backup folder 2 in the User AppData Local TRX Manager Backu
273. from the Transceiver Levels window Please note the program does not synchronize with the current settings at startup If a slider is grayed out the corresponding level is not available from a computer Omni VI and Omni VI For Omni VI and Omni VI please see the instructions for ICOM transceivers ORION Behavior of Orion transceiver may be erratic with TRX Manager please note ORION is NOT listed as a supported rig You can test it at your own risk Please select ORION in the Setup s combo box DTR and RTS must be checked and communication Speed must be set to 57600 bauds Orion uses hardware handshaking make sure your cable is wired for RTS Handshaking Almost all main programmable functions including DSP filtering and setting of the levels AF RF Power are implemented Automatic DSP selection must be set from the Preferences Transceiver dialog While TRX Manager has been tested successfully with different firmware some users have reported a freeze of the front panel during computer control If the ORION s control panel freezes please try to uncheck Polling in Setup Please note in that case Te done from the rig is not reported on the display If necessary you may press the Monitoring s update button L to update the display OMNI VII TRX Manager supports Omni VII in radio mode Please select OMNIVII in the Setup s combo box DTR and RTS must be checked and communication Speed must be set to 57600 bauds OmniVII
274. from the program sets the transceiver on channel 0 the contents of the memory are therefore recopied on channel 0 which is used as the working channel e Transferring the current settings frequencies and modes by using VFO gt from the transceiver to the software may give wrong TX modes since the program can not recognize different modes for transmit and receive USB LSB This is not a bug but a limitation of the protocol IC 821 IC 970 IC 910 IC 9100 The program must be toggled in SAT mode in order for TRX Manager to correctly address the Main and Sub VFO s It is also important that both the transceiver and TRX Manager are is SAT mode In normal mode SAT not engaged from TRX Manager and by design the program adresses VFO A and B making possible the control of both RX and TX in the same band In SAT mode the sub VFO s frequency display is delayed after a QSY stops The TRACE mode of TRX Manager does not have any effect in SAT mode the SAT command does not have any effect on the IC 821 or IC 970 you also need to toggle the rig in SATELLITE mode manually Using a pair of transceivers Two transceivers can be used They must then be defined under the TRX1 and TRX2 Setup s tabs only in that case running two different ICOM Transceivers on one com port is supported However the interface with the transceiver used for transmit is simplified e Commands must always be done from TRX Manager by using the gt VFO button e T
275. g tips e You can even control the memory channels but you may find the program too slow for this application a e The Monitoring s update button L J forces a polling for the full status of the rig e Macro commands and rotator control of the Remote Window are still usable in Real control mode e Should this happen you may toggle from Real Mode to Standard mode by clicking L Bp in the Remote control interface e The sliders do not support the mouse wheel in real mode Please use the mouse movements only e Auto settings such as Tuner Antenna Linear RF Power Band decoder are set by the SERVER computer only the CLIENT computer s settings are ineffective The AUTO MODE s preset filters and Band Plan are set by the SERVER for DX Spots and by the CLIENT for a manual selection both computers must be set up accordingly AUTO MODE is switchable from the CLIENT computer Es Note for ICOMs When a command is sent using the real remote control mode the CLIENT station does not wait for the OK message acknowledge from the transceiver However the SERVER station by waiting for the OK message does check if the command has been accepted and send it twice if necessary Errors at the com port are minimized but in some rare cases since pollings of some parameters especially Split are not supported an erroneous display and a wrong operation is possible From this point of view the standard remote control mode is more secure Frequen
276. gain to release the CAT control mode Any monitoring is not possible It is not possible to retrieve from the FT 736 212 412 current operating conditions Consequently you may have a slight difference between transceiver s display and the PC s display even when controlling the transceiver from the PC and of course a big difference when controlling the transceiver from its front panel The FT 212 412 only support setting up of Frequency CTCSS Enc Dec Tone and TX RX switching All other commands are not supported FT 847 If you own one of the early firmware versions no monitoring is possible In this case TRX Manager quickly displays NO DUAL when you press the CAT button You may contact your Yaesu dealer to upgrade the CPU When under CAT control manual control is still possible But if the FC 20 antenna tuner is connected and switched ON CAT control is not possible The optional YF 115C 500Hz filter corresponds to the 250 Hz command Saving and loading the configuration FT 847 Via the cloning function of the FT 847 it is possible to save the whole configuration of the transceiver on hard disc and to recall it warning file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 53 of 365 Leave the CAT mode CAT OFF to carry out this function Check the speed for the clone mode 94 CLN RATE so that it is identical at the speed of Setup of the program preferably use a high speed 57600 bauds Saving a config
277. ger searches for TRX1 REG to TRX4 REG registry files in its main program folder If a TRXi reg file is found the registry keys are set up for the corresponding transceiver TRX1 REG for TRX1 TRX4 REG for TRX4 This function makes it possible to switch parameters for an external program a sound card etc WARNING On VISTA W7 8 this feature will only work if you run TRX Manager with Elevated Administrator Rights Run as Administrator checked file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 135 of 365 Drag and Drop TRX Manager provides fast transfers of frequencies by using drag and drop How to The drag and drop feature is possible from between some windows or labels You only have to hold the left mouse button and to drag the corresponding icon and to drop it into an another label or window If a window doesn t allow dropping a frequency the mouse pointer changes as follow Windows supporting drag and drop The drag and drop is supported by the following windows Monitoring Receive frequency s display VFO A VFO B Channel Sub Transceiver panel frequency display Quick Memories Channels S W database Commands panel Web Cluster Terminal Recorder Logbook DX Map Remote Logbook Data control Status bar to a second transceiver Note that some of theses windows only support dropping a frequency Some examples of use You will find certainly various applications but the most obvious are th
278. gged and the Worked option is checked under Log Filter Preferences Terminal your spot will NOT be displayed Azimuthal projection When pressing the DX Spot azimuthal projection button TRX Managers shows a window where the last 25 DX Spots are projected according to their distance and azimuth position see DXMap When a new spot is received the projection is automatically refreshed file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 272 of 365 Setting the transceiver You only have to double click the callsign of the spot in order to set the transceiver to the spot frequency You may also right click the spot and select QSY in the context menu fC gnaw R 21RC tnx for 56 LX7I HB10DX 14 0344 WPX If a Split condition is specified in the comment field a powerful algorithm but not infallible calculates the TX frequency and sets the transmit frequency with the correct offset If you don t like this feature you have to uncheck the Auto QSX option Preferences under DX Spots If RTTY is specified in the comment field the transceiver can be set to a specific mode such as LSB or FSK to select from the RTTY frame Preference DX Spots tab In addition depending on the way RTTY is generated a Shift with the spot frequency can be set According to the status of the Main toolbar s Tools DX Squelch button aK if RX is muted AF Gain if supported is set to its previous value RX mutes after the delay specified un
279. guration requires the knowledge of the Cabrillo data format as provided by the Sponsor Some contests are pre configured but most require a manual configuration Choose the Contest from the CONTEST combo box If this Contest is pre defined the Cabrillo format format will be updated Otherwise you have to configure the Contest format manually RX or TX Cabrillo format have to be configured as follow example ceccccccceccccc rrr 11111111 Each character represents a field and the number of characters the length of the field as follow file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 253 of 365 Character Cabrillo field Abbreviation MDB Field RX TX Remarks Callsign CALL C X RSTRIRSTT _ RST_RCVD RST_Sent 59 or 599 by default SNR SNT SRX STX Numeric Once these data are completed you still have to define if applicable RX e Optionnal field of the database to be automatically populated from the SRX_STRING INFOR Info received field I E you may decide to transfer the content of the INFOR to one of the standard field of the database like CQZ ITUZ Up to you e if required TRACK default value overrides the current default of the Track field Track may be used if the contest fields are not enough e Serial number numeric starting serial number if incremental otherwise default value e Default value for the STX_STRING INFOT or Transmitted Info This may be your age your CQZ your Power or anythi
280. he SW Database are linked to the Remote transceiver Some critical messages sent by SERVER are displayed in the small terminal and sending small messages to SERVER is possible However this capability is essentially written for debugging and should not be used during normal operation If the auto connect option is checked the connection is established as soon as you engage the remote control mode from CLIENT provided the SERVER is running and listening For more information please see now Remote control operation PACKET 1 From the Client s Terminal TNC tab you connect the SERVER using your TNC 2 Once the connexion is established you send the message TRXiI PA i address of the Remote station 0 9 to initialize the remote control 3 You can control the remote station from the Remote TRX window Ea Notes e The Remote TRX window is automatically launched and the Remote Control mode enabled at startup if you exit TRX Manager with Remote Control enabled SERVER and auto connect checked CLIENT e SERVER logs each IP connected under Misc Remote log TCP IP only e Communicating your IP address to anybody exposes you to malevolent intrusions warning On the SERVER computer if you do not use the remote control please disable Remote Control button to avoid interfering with packet or Internet connections or problems with auto mode and other various CAT control functions necessary limited in this mode TROUBLESHOOTING 1
281. he VFO gt function is not usable to read the TX frequency except for ICOM Transceiver e Manual frequency change of the transmitter is taken into account by TRX Manager only if the sub Transceiver is an ICOM Moreover and this is the main limitation the correction of the TX frequency during transmit is generally not supported Except these limitations the transceivers are locked between them by the program and the operation is practically the same one as with a satellite transceiver warning TRX Manager does not check that you are not transmitting in the RX band file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 313 of 365 Standard transceiver in Split mode Such a configuration is supported including the Trace mode as well as TX and RX in the same band but you are advised of the following limitations e Of course simultaneous receive and transmit is not possible e While TRX Manager shifts the TX frequency the RX VFO is used as a temporary buffer except with Kenwood transceivers and receive may disturbed To minimize the inconvenience it is advised to choose a large Step 100 Hz or more and to use with a Satellite whose uplink frequency is lower than downlink frequency file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 314 of 365 Utilities Keyboard shortcuts Specific keyboard shortcuts are available for various modules Two types of shortcut are available MS Windows s shortcuts and TRX Ma
282. he computer The only CAT commands are frequency selection memory operation toggle from A to B Band up down by 500 Khz step TRX Manager was modified to work with this transceiver the best as possible But note that any change made from the FT 757GX is not displayed by the computer When opening the monitoring windows for the first time the frequency is 0 MHz select any valid frequency from the computer to synchronize both displays The Short Wave data base and Web cluster operations are possible but you have to select the mode manually prior to selecting the new frequency from the computer file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 49 of 365 Operation with FT 767GX This section applies for use with the FT 767GX Transceiver You may run the program as follow CAT Control Mode To be under CAT control you must press the CAT button located on the toolbar or the F9 key When the transceiver is under CAT Control you will not be able to set things from the transceiver s front panel as frequencies mode functions etc In order to gain manual control you have to press the CAT button on the toolbar or F9 again to release the CAT control mode The CAT control is only active when the CAT button looks as if is depressed The CAT light on your transceiver s front panel will also be illuminated when under CAT control CAT control is released upon program shutdown but it is a good idea to make it a habit when you shutd
283. he keyboard If the grid is locked pressing the space bar scans the database ascending Scanning automatically Auto scan is provided by using tools bar buttons KILIJ The duration of the Pause during scanning 10s by default and the Scanning Speed 30 by default are defined under the Transceiver tab of the Preferences Pressing the space bar stops the scanning The S0 9 combo defines the S Meter threshold which pauses scanning Scanning may also work with the sound recorder file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 295 of 365 Searching a SW station sorting Searches or Selections are launched from the Select G4 Select button When a selection is active Selectbutton appears as pressed and the number of selected stations is displayed in the tools bar Selection and Scanning are work together and give a very interesting tool for listening Search window The Search window shows two tabs i SWL Edit Filter a SS es a Ce e The Radio tab provides quick selection by ID frequency mode country keyword When you press OK only records matching the filled in criteria are displayed e The SQLtab provides advanced searches using SQL queries SWL table This button makes it easier to create SQL queries by translating the quick selection defined under Radio to a SQL query To go back to the display of the whole database please press Select again Sorting Sorting by any field is possible e
284. he monitoring indicates TX in the Status box If your transceiver does not communicate this data case of old ICOM transceivers this function is usable but there is no checking of the state of the transceiver before the sending of CW warning In spite of the apparent simplicity of this function it invokes a complex logic It is advised to carry out many tests before using it with a preamplifier or a linear amplifier It is essential to switch Off VOX and BreaK In in order to prevent any undesired starting of a CW transmission In the same way an independent checking circuit is necessary in order to prevent any effect of the failures of the program erratic behavior of the communications protocol or a serial connection which is not 100 reliable file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en CW Macros Page 187 of 365 The Macros are predefined fields made up of the current parameters such as your callsign but also that of the station you re working his name etc Extended macros allow you advanced features Macros are used in the CW module and in the MMVARI module Available macros The macros are inserted in the message at the current position of the cursor using the Insert or Macros menu The program inserts the following fields MY CALL your callsign your UserID UR RST the report sent to the station MY QTH your QTH Preferences Location MY RIG the transceiver in use MY NAME your first
285. he program for FT 1000MP MKV in order to have the benefit of the internal scanning function according to the versions of your ROM this command may be supported or give unexpected behaviors In the other cases if Auto is checked the program calculates a variable step according to the mode etc If AUTO is not checked step stays constant and the one defined from the Scanning dialog file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 101 of 365 Keyboard tuning The F2 or F3 function keys lets you direct input Frequencies for RX or TX If Monitoring or DXBar are highlighted a manual scanning is possible using the numeric keypad see also keyboard shortcuts 2626262036 26 i a MIMI 363636 903696 Numeric keypad Monitoring highlighted Using an USB Knob The Monitoring s shortcuts or accelerators are particularly useful if used in conjunction with an USB Knob the and keys numeric keyboard which behave exactly as the mouse wheel see above PgUp Range Up PgDn Range Down the I key which toggles INC tuning mode ON OFF the F6 key which will highlight the Monitoring window at any time Tip To improve the behavior of your USB Knob you may adjust the rate of key repetition from the Control Panel Keyboard Icon file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 102 of 365 Joystick Control Frequency tuning and some other functions can be carried out with a PC games joystick
286. he sub Channels MMVARI can decode up to 24 sub channels simultaneously You can select the desired number of sub channels from the Channels menu However 8 sub channels is a good compromized while 24 can be confusing and consumes more CPU time and memory By default if ALL MAIN is checked Channels menu the sub channels follow the mode of the main channel If this option is NOT checked you can select different modes and speeds for any sub channel At the beginning it is recommended you keep AFC NOT checked for the sub channels if AFC is selected some adjacent channels may quickly converge to the same frequency However once a channel is synchronized you can engage AFC for this channel only You can set AFC ON OFF for all the channels simultaneously using the Channels AFC ON OFF submenu file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 203 of 365 You can browse the different channels using the vertical scroll bar of the browser and make a sub channel Active by clicking its button 1 24 Once a channel is active the decoded text appears in the Active RX frame and you can engage a QSO the TX Tone always follows the RX Tone of a subchannel HE You can also swap the main channel and a sub channel by clicking the Swap button AS the main channel becomes the Active channel in that case y tog 0 9 AM BS B Bande Mod ae db BAe Insert 2 Ey revex catt qso Tks RIG Tu RIG Test
287. he text and if necessary insert a control code inside brackets Decimal ANSI value this feature allows you to send special commands to the TNC Ea Example e 3 to send a break signal e 13 to send a carriage return e 7 to send a bell Click OK to validate the command the 13 sequence doesn t allow you to send the command This code may be useful to add a carriage return inside a text or a succession of commands Watch dog e The WD button activates a Watch Dog function CR sent every 5 minutes file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 269 of 365 DX Cluster If you connect a DX Cluster through the Terminal module via the Internet and or Packet radio TRX Manager analyzes and displays the DX Spots under the Terminal s DX Cluster tab Telnet and Packet Spots are aggregated Telnet spotters are displayed in lower case and Packet spotters in upper case Packet You don t need to be connected to the cluster to use this module TRX Manager understands informations exchanged between nodes PC11 spot format Telnet You can connect up to two DX Telnet clusters simultaneously However generally this is not useful because all Telnet clusters display the same dx spots with a slight delay Each new spot is also displayed in the lower frame of the Terminal screen and in the status bar PJ4 G4IUF Terminal s DX Cluster tab Double clicking Spots sets the transceiver and a right click op
288. ht click on a DX spot and chose DXAtlas to show the propagation between your QTH and the DX P DX Atlas 2 0 FOR vpet PSIF ypsic z _ohuazs 3Y P _ paths between the spotters and the dxspots From the VUCC Award summary window the DXAtlas button creates the necessary files trx manager cfm amp trx manager wkd for the display of the VUCC Award progression on the map DXAtlas V2 24 or later is required to use this function BS DX Atlas 2 0 VUCC progression displayed by DXAtlas e Possible problems e If you launch DX Atlas from TRX Manager you will have the preferences for DX Atlas defined by TRX Manager recommended It you prefer your own preferences for DX Atlas you must launch DX Atlas before you start TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 231 of 365 e Sometime the computer crashes while launching DXAtlas from TRX Manager This problem is probably related to the video driver but remains unresolved A possible work around is to launch DX Atlas before you start TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 232 of 365 Interface with Google Earth TRX Manager provides an interface with Google Earth The Google Earth application V5 or later must be installed on your computer A google Earth icon 5 appears in various modules Logbook CD Rom RAC Buckmaster QRZ COM DX Cluster Web Cluster Quick Memories S
289. htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 110 of 365 INFO DAT file This file is used to store the current information for your memories It is a text file with e A literal information for each channel 20 characters e 32 90 or 99 lines of text no blank line Generally you don t need to edit this file file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 111 of 365 Band Scope Band scope overview The band scope function gives a pleasant view of the band activity and provides graphic tuning of your transceiver TRX Manager needs to scan the desired band portion to display the spectrum This scanning may be controlled by the signal strength to pause on busy frequencies To open the band scope you need to activate the Tools Band Scope CtrI B submenu or the corresponding tools bar button t3 Note This bandscope it NOT a real time one and does not replace a panadapter Buttons Below are the functions of each button or Enter to start or to restart analysis or Escape to stop scanning E to re draw the spectrum if altered vd to initialize parameters center frequency and spectrum width from current transceiver frequency or any HAM band E This button toggles from FS analysis to TFS analysis Frequency Time Signal Graphic tuning When the scanning is ended and the spectrum displayed you only need to click a desired portion on spectrum to tune your transceiver to the corresponding frequency
290. ible by 1 Selecting the desired column header click any record in this column z 2 Clicking the following buttons 2 or 4 to sort by ascending or descending values file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 244 of 365 Logbook s Explorer The Explorer 5 tab of the Logbook displays a hierarchical view of the database This very powerful and easy to use function coupled with the search function makes it possible to display and to save various reports for almost any award or to seek the database for specific records Please note the Explorer is a graphic control displaying can take several minutes depending on your criteria Selecting the QSOs You may explore the whole Log without selecting specific QSOs but to display an Award or for any other need you have first to select the valid QSOs You may use different methods e A search criteria defined from the Search window e A SQL Query defined from the same Search window e An automatic selection of the most current awards using the Select pulldown menu Displaying the report You have to select two fields which will be used to sort the eee CI you choose an award from the menu these fields will be automatically selected then you press the Refresh button 2 after some minutes the database is sorted and is displayed as a hierarchical structure You can limit the display to the First QSO for each search criteria with a big database the process takes less
291. idge not required in that case E Note TRX Manager s K3 synchro mode does not behave 100 like a K3 useful commands but not all are supported and it is NOT a bridge either however it is running much faster than a bridge since it does not poll the transceiver and uses internal data It is NOT recommended you use this protocol to synchronize a logging software but only to synchronize Power SDF or NAp3 Indeed some commands sent by a logging sofware which are not supported by TRX Manager may cause a lockup or a malfunction Supported settings are e Speed 4800 Bds StopBits 2 Parity None Protocol None e Speed 9600 57600Bds StopBits 1 Parity None Protocol None e Basic format but FI command Get supported Example You control a K3 with TRX Manager from COM1 38400 bds TRX Manager s Synchro tab is configured for K3 and COM3 57600 bds NAP3 is configured for Setup Elecraft K3 COM7 57600 N 8 1 Poll IF and Poll VFOB checked COM3 and COM8 are connected using a null modem cable or VSPE Now TRX Manager and NAP3 are synchronized TRX Manager Synchro tab file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 144 of 365 IF Frequency Offsets Hz Global IF Frequency Offset Hz Oe Pe Global Ofset OK LO Center 8215000 O oi Swap 1 Q Frequency Mhz 550 V Swap Q Channels OK Frequency 48 000000 eal Frequency Limits Mhz 1 Virimum 0500000 og Maximum 54 00
292. ields of the log still not supported FT 1000MP the internal scanning command gives unexpected behaviors with some transceiver and has been removed If your FT 1000MP supports this function please configure the program for FT 1000MP MKV Propagation the SFI Solar Flux Index is now extracted from the NOAA server Remote window buttons for Antenna switch added Memory Channels Reading a file fix for IC 746PRO and probably IC 756PRO PRO2 IC R75 IC 746Pro fix for Channels in FM Split Quick Split Split Memory file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 353 of 365 Memory channels function for clearing all memory channels in one click Icom and Kenwood only ICOM option COO Setup if the first channel is 00 Remote control Packet RC command to automate a reconnection Logbook true fied for Station Transceiver added If a layout has been created for your current database file with grd as extension it is recommended you delete it in order to display the new field under the Listing tab ev3 4 2 Rotators Support for AlfaSPID Rotor Remote control Internal tuning step by step supported for more precise tuning Joystick control ev3 4 1 Support for Yaesu VR 5000 Support for TS 711 and TS 811 Satellite support for SATEL939 Logbook QSL_RCVD field S mark for submitted supported Monitoring two rotators simultaneously supported Terminal Au
293. ile C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 302 of 365 SWL files structure The old SWL format is no longer used by TRX Manager Instructions that follow show how to import old databases which were created by FT Manager or TRX Manager V2 X Format A SWL file is a text file with swl as extension the content for each line of this file is as follow Frequency Mode Day Time Country Type Description The number of lines is not limited Each field is separated by commas or semicolons or Frequency in MHz Mode literal as follow LSB USB CW AM AMW AMN FMW FMN RTTY PKT Day in English Monday Time as follow HH MM Country Type Nav Aero BCL Description or information Importing SWL files into TRX Manager a Importing SWL files is done from the Open ay button and selecting SWL as type of file All records will be added to the current database file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 303 of 365 Loading DBF files A conversion utility DBFToMDB exe registered version only converts DBase or FoxPro DBF files to Access 7 mdb databases DBF files was distributed by e ILG Radio http www ilgradio de e SWBC Schedules Subscription Service http www fineware swl com Ey Notes e These files are no longer distributed This topic is given for reference only e Please see the distribution policy for these files before you download and use the database The con
294. ile C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 316 of 365 Internet browser TRX Manager includes an integrated Web browser based on Microsoft s Internet Explorer IE4 or later Obviously IE4 or later must be installed to be able to run the integrated browser A system error will occur if IE is not installed Running the browser The browser is launched by the File Browser submenu Features The browser s toolbars show the standard navigation buttons The Home Search are defined from the Preferences under Web While the Favourite button opens the favourite URL defined in the Preferences the associated drop down button opens a menu from which you may ADDU or REMOVE the current page to a customized list of Favourites Yahoo Groups Tee TRx Manager HAM Ped o CAT software j a aa 7 Ut Favourite sub menu Saved as favorites dat file using this format TITLE URL A toolbar provides Callsign look up from various servers via the Internet it is also accessible from the logbook but automatic link with the fields of the log not supported file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 317 of 365 Quick EMailer TRX manager can send electronic mails from various windows either with your default software or using an internal mailer this module makes it possible to send easily and quickly a short message and notifications such as DX Spot alerts Settings You set up the EMailer from the
295. in that case TRX Pan is a also distributed with LP Bridge by Larry N8LP and is compatible with N4PY software See also TRX Pan for LP Bridge May ys d ij bh y j f TRX Pan with TRX Manager LP Pan K3 EMU202 Sample rate is 192kHz 16bits Full screen mode Displays shows Main and SUB VFO Bandwidths TRX Pan has been written by Laurent F6DEX with collaboration modifications by Larry N8LP It is delivered as is for your enjoyment with this comprehensive documentation It may be updated in the future TRX Pan V2 1 3 or later requires TRX Manager V 4 5 8 or later LP Bridge is not required for users of TRX Manager which provides a specific Synchro mode Setting up TRX Pan Click the Options button Critical parameters e Audio Input it is possible TRX Pan does not support all Sound Cards and or all Audio input settings e Select Sample Rate S Rate according to your sound card Generally for a standard sound card 44100 s 44 kHz display width Up to 192kHz with some sound cards Reverse I Q Left Right Channels Reverses the displayed sidebands same as reversing I amp Q audio cables CAT Control TRX Manager if TRX Manager is running on your computer and set up for any transceiver K3 excepted You must Fill in Offset for each mode TRX Manager K3 if TRX Manager is running on your computer and set up for a K3 You must Fill in GlobalOffset if necessary 6 0 or 0 or LPBri
296. ince TRX Manager uses the DSP you must check DSP under the Preferences Transceivertab and fill in the default values for each filter See also Modes and Filters Monitoring s Wid and Nar buttons are related to the TRX Manager s virtual DSP filters not to the K3 s X Filters Since TRX Manager can not control the CW Pitch of the K3 until now it is important you fill in Pitch with the current value under Preferences Transceiver in order to scale IF Shift range for CW and to center the CW Bandwith Graphic Equalizer The EQ button 11 opens the Graphic Equalizer from which you can easily display the current settings and set up the 8 bands of the RX TX Audio Equalization file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 73 of 365 pos EEK ES a a E a a pone 2 j Equalizer Bargraph mode Please press GET to read the current equalization from your K3 After a GET command the program copies the current equalizer settings into the clipboard If necessary press to reset your changes unless the clipboard has been altered Press SET to set up your K3 KX3 using the data displayed tel Saves the current Equalization RX req files TX teq files lay Opens a teg or req equalization file Resets clears data each sliders to 0dB Copies the current displayed Equalization into the clipboard You may use this function to set up macros or to exchange your data with others Pastes clipboard value
297. indows this feature gives a spectacular result Any previous visited frequency may also be recalled by using the Undo function file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 122 of 365 How to change the modes TRX Manager provides important functions to automate the selection of modes and filters according to your preferences The Auto mode function Eventually you don t need to change the mode the software does it for you by reading the the Band Plan By default AUTO MODE is selected at startup but can be unselected at any time from the AUTO button Monitoring s or Sub transceiver s panels AUTO Mode activated By default AUTO MODE is ON at startup If you don t like this feature please uncheck the Auto Mode option under Preferences Transceiver Band Plan AUTO Mode will be OFF at startup is Notes e Ifa memory channel is selected from the main transceiver mem is displayed auto mode is always OFF Manual In case of the mode is unstable If the Mode is unstable Depending on the transceiver and especially variations of the Shift between modes SSB CW mode may be unstable between two sub bands Activating Manual mode is a possible solution However the BackLash parameter from the Preferences Transceivers Band Plan tab adjusts the change of modes between two sub bands and eliminates this behaviour In addition with Yaesu Transceivers you may try setting up the shift between SSB and CW by adjusti
298. ing exported again the Export field may also be used to mark the QSOs for which an electronic QSL has been sent see eQSL service the field Band is calculated from the frequency For a QSO via Satellite you have to manually introduce SAT as band QSL fields QSL_RCVD and QSL_Sent TRX Manager uses the following conventions R Requested Y Yes S Submitted RCVD only D Only Digitally confirmed N None I Ignore QSL_Print field TRX Manager uses the following conventions Blank default the field is ignored L Print label useful to select specific QSOs A Print Label Address N No label the QSLSDATE field does not appear under the Edit tab This field is automatically updated when you print labels or manually from the Listing while QSL_VIA is for the QSL Manager if required the QSL_SENT_VIA field is related to the way you send the QSL B Bureau D Direct E Electronic Saving the QSO When all the desired fields are filled in at least Callsign and Date ON the contact may be added into the data base by pressing the Log button or Ctrl S or F12 please note the Date_OFF field is automatically updated The log book is now ready for logging a new QSO and eventually may be minimized minimizing the Logbook window also minimizes the CD Rom HamQTH FCC QSOBefore windows Drag and drop Note finally that a drag and dropsets up a cluster s spot without passing by the monitoring The sp
299. ing if SPLIT SUB ON Refresh Rate of S Meter improved ICOMs sometime wrong display of RPT mode fixed e V 5 2 2 Minor fixes labels translations and commands e V 5 2 1 YAESU RX Antenna command added FTDX 9000 slight changes delay between command now 200ms DX Spots filter it is now possible to exclude some spots from the DXCC filtering e V 5 2 0 Support for FTDX 1200 ICOMs new functions major update Monitoring new design and graphic display of the bandwidth e V 5 1 4 Support for IC 7100 IC 9100 Support for DV mode and DVTX Callsign added D Star Minor changes and improvements for other ICOM rigs e V 5 1 3 FT 2000 5000 9000 3000 950 important fixes and improvements WARNING Please ensure that RTS TRX manager and the transceiver menuu are matched EAGLE ARGONAIT VI please check settings and RTS values file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 342 of 365 K3 KX3 fix for WID CUT mode Minor other fixes ev 5 1 2 Various optimizations Comm design Link with LOGic updated e V 5 1 1 Monitoring new analogic dial DLLs added for Yaesu rigs missing in V 5 1 0 Various fixes e V 5 1 0 Support for TenTec Argonaut VI FTDX 3000 Fixes for FTDX5000 FT 950 Optimization for SteppIR Comm control optimization for all devices New graphic slider with mousewheel control K3 KX3 FP buttons now support mousewheel control e V
300. ing macro commands to the amplifier through the TRX Manager s remote control mode LIO Linear OFF LI1 Linear ON LI2 Linear OPER LI3 Linear STAND BY ACOM 2000 The ACOM2000A automatic amplifier is controlled using the TRX Acom software TRX Acom exe is distributed with TRX Manager it may be executed as a stand alone program but installation of TRX Manager is required TRX Acom is usable through the Internet using a serial port server However Auto Tune function may give undesirable behavior if speed of your connection is too low Also the ON function may be difficult to support A warning While this program has been carefully tested by Stan LZ1IU ACOM s developer please consider this tool as an help to use your amplifier from a computer and NOT as a replacement for the RCU Depending on state of your amplifier data history changes and quality of the communication information displayed may be wrong and commands not properly processed Please launch TRX Acom exe located in TRX Manager s main folder or from Start menu Click Setup to choose com port and press Connect to connect your amplifier ON function requires a cable wired for DTR and RTS You will also need an adapter inserted in the RCU AMP and PC_AMP connections on the rear panel of the amplifier please contact ACOM for details and availability 3f Note Status of the RCU displayed by TRX Acom may be wrong if you connect your amplifier while it is already ON it
301. introduce a repeater Shift or simply different values for RX and TX This information may be also particularly useful for the introduction of the limit of the program scan function channels 90 to 99 for example to scan from 14 00 to 14 35 it is necessary to introduce 14 00 as the frequency and 350 KHz as the Shift With TS 790 channel 00 29 and TS 2000 480 590 you may define a repeater Offset These functions are not supported by the current TS 990 s driver Important Notes Old rig The selection of Wide filters 6K or 12K is not possible in SSB or CW The selection of Narrow filters is not possible in AM and FM The repeater s Offset itself is not accessible on most Kenwood transceivers recent rigs excepted entering a repeater shift in a memory channel initializes the associated split frequency see above It may be after having selected a channel from the PC that it is not possible to select a VFO from the transceiver It is then necessary to restart the program and to select a VFO To limit this nuisance being repeated TRX Manager switches to VFO before closing the serial port The Clear function may make the RIT button not working properly It is suggested to center the RIT button then to press on Clear to return to normal operation file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 62 of 365 TS 2000 TS 480 TS 590S SG Kenwood TS 2000 TS 480 TS 590S SG are particularly well suited to TRX Manager
302. ion some of them are programmable by band giving more power to computer control The main entry point for most advanced functions is the Levels window see below Switching On Off The button of the main toolbar or the F9 key alllows switching ON OFF the Transceiver In addition options for ON at Startup or OFF on exit are available from Setup TRX tabs file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 63 of 365 Monitoring If Auto Information is checked Setup the Refresh button Ww polls the transceiver in order to fix errors in the display 0 00 LSB The Levelsbutton t or the Transceiver Levels submenu opens the Levels window The DISP button sets up the sub receiver from the Monitoring window The TF Set function is supported by the TFS button In addition if you give the focus to the TFS button by pressing it once the keyboard s space bar toggles the TF Set function ON OFF TS 480 TS 590S SG PTT The TS 480 590S SG transceivers offers two modes for PTT PTT for MIC Input TX0 or PTT for ANY input TX1 By default TRX Manager uses TXO If your audio line is connected to the accessory jack you have to set up a macro TX1 for keying SSB Sub Receiver TS 2000 From the Levels window the ON button sets up the sub receiver ON OFF while the Sub button toggles Control PTT from Main to Sub From the Monitoring the Disp button toggles the display from Main to Sub and gives you access to specific fun
303. ional differences between some Yaesu transceivers e The generic Yaesu selection for transceiver should run with various but OLD Yaesu transceivers or receivers but with limited functions setting of frequency and mode only no monitoring Except for special needs or tests do not select Yaesu but the exact model of your transceiver eWith FT 847 FT 736 FT 212 412 FT 767GX FT 980 to be under CAT control you must press the CAT button located on the main toolbar or the F9 key e Early FT 990 and FT 1000 firmware versions prior to rev 1 3 or V6 FT 747 or FRG 100 do not allow a constant communication with the PC Please read the section about FT 990 ROM1 2 FT 1000V lt 6 FT 747 and FRG 100 for more information eFRG 9600 FT 757GX or FT 736 have limited functions Please see the corresponding sections of the help FT 757GxXII allows using all the functions of the program but editing the memories changing the frequency or the mode is not possible when in MEMemory mode eWith FT 817 857 897 FT 847 or FT 100 it is not possible to read write the internal memory channels of the transceiver memory channels implemented by TRX Manager are virtual and not related to the channels of the transceiver The FC 20 and FC 30 antenna tuners are not compatible with the CAT system e With FT 890 900 and FT 100 setting the clarifier is not supported However the program reads the clarifier and displays the right RX frequency With FT 840 the c
304. is recommended you first connect your amplifier and then switch it ON while it is connected to TRX Acom file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 157 of 365 z TRX Acom TS 2000 7 090 79 100 200 450 Vv TOP button keeps TRX Acom always on top of all other windows TRACK button connects TRX Manager and TRX Acom together via OLE Once TRACK is ON internal ACOM2000A s frequency counter is overcome all frequency changes are controlled by TRX Acom and selected segments are displayed 3f Note about RCU s PROT Led When an error happens the amplifiers goes to StandBy If you press Esc on RCU error message will be cancelled and RCU s PROT Led will stop flashing However if you cancel the error message from TRX Acom by pressing OPR RCU S PROT Led will continue flashing while TRX ACOM s PROT Led will stop flashing This is normal since the RCU s PROT Led is a kind of reminder for the local operator if any at the RCU side about a problem that has happened during the remote control operation Measurements Press SET to select DATA to measure Press START to start measurements 3 Note While in Measurement mode TRX Acom stops reading the RCU Press STOP to resume RCU reading Auto Tune TRX Acom uses ACOM2000A s AUTO TUNE function under the control of TRX Manager AUTO TUNE panel opens by clicking the gt gt gt button e if you use TRX Acom as a stand alone program not using TRX Manager leave TUNE vi
305. is possible to associate up to five buttons with any program of your choice Please open the Preference submenu under software to associate a button with a program TRX Manager extracts the icon so it appears on the tool bar Please note that the corresponding program opens from its directory To remove a program first press the delete button then the button to delete If the associated icon is not properly extracted like with MS DOS programs please copy the desired icon 16 X 16 pixels into the TRX Manager s directory and rename it as PROGi BMP i 0 to 4 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 18 of 365 Personalized Menus Office 2000 type By default TRX Manager shows all submenus menu commands TRX Manager sPersonalized Menus feature enables to focus on just the commands you need and use To enable the Personalized menus please open the Customize dialog box as indicated above and checkMenus show recently under Options Once this option is checked the menus will contain those primary commands that are used some 95 percent of the time infrequently used commands known as secondary are not displayed resulting in a simplified user interface At the bottom of each menu is a button that expands the menus to the full selection of choices so you can still easily find all menu commands As you access menu commands those commands are promoted while unused menu commands are not displayed Over time the user int
306. ise MMVARI is not set with the right sideband and mode Keep TRX Manager maximized if TRX Manager is minimized the refresh rate is reduced The MMVARI engine is fully usable in demo mode transceiver demo unregistered version whatever the session and its duration Don t forget to adjust the mode of the demo transceiver accordingly in order to have the right sideband selected file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 201 of 365 The MMVARI modules is only supported with the main transceiver set as Operating transceiver It is not supported in Remote mode The MMVARI windows being g opens outside of the main window and minimizes in the task bar To keep MMVARI on rma top please engage the OnTop function of the toolbars 5C You first have to set up the sound cards from the MMVARI Sound cards Ba submenu or from the Preferences Transceiver DIG tab Bal Eventually you have to adjust the levels for the Record Play channels from the Windows Sound Control Panel MMVARI Control Sound submenu Provided your sound card is correctly connected to the audio output of your transceiver MMVARI is now usable in RX Later you may adjust the various settings according to your Preferences and your operating practices When you start MMVARI the RX Tone is always set to the default Tone for AFSK or Other according to the Preferences and the selected mode By L Clicking the display FFT or Waterfall you set the Tone of the m
307. istance and Azimuth are calculated and displayed from the DXCC window according to the Prefix or the Gridsquare field if it comprises at least 4 digits Please note that the program responds to the Keyboard s Enter key ONLY from the Callsign or Gridsquare fields if the cursor is in one of these fields 2 Ultra fast mode Ultra Fast Logging must be checked under Preferences Software Logbook tab pressing F12 or Enter depending on your choice populates the fields like Enter above and saves the QSO in one click This logging mode is convenient if you don t have any other data to save Please note this function automatically fills in the various fields ONLY if the cursor is in the CALL field Consequently you log as follow type in the CALL and immediately press F12 or Enter That s all If you choose F12 recommended in most cases you may still use Enter to populate the fields edit them and press F12 to save the QSO 3 DX Spot mode gt gt gt Different buttons gt gt have an automatic recall function of some of the current data DX Spot DXCC country continent date hour frequency RST comment QSL manager A one key recall is provided by using the Spot button Spot Once you have pressed the Spot button if you want to complete the fields with data from a CD Rom or Internet you must press the button Ctrl Ins OR the Enter key while the cursor is in the callsign field Press the Log button to save the QSO
308. itive by default to set up a negative Offset please use the CW REVerse mode To use CW with a central frequency you have to define a nul Offset Pitch 0 from the Preferences Transceiver dialog ISB mode is not supported by TRX Manager as a standard mode However by convention TRX Manager displays ISB mode as FSK Consequently to set up ISB mode select FSK from TRX Manager Bandwidth is selectable for CW AM FM 3 selections are available WID Wide MED Medium NAR Narrow TRX Manager polls the receiver for installed filters and selects the most approriate for each mode OMNI RIG OMNI RIG is a COM component for transceiver receiver CAT control written by Alex VE3NEA It supports many rigs some not currently supported by TRX Manager and multiple programs at the same time TRX Manager does not install OMNI RIG on your computer You must downloadand install update OMNI RIG before you configure TRX Manager for OMNI RIG OmniRig s Setup may be included in the recent CDs For more information about OmniRig and its installation please see the Omni Rig s web site From the TRX Manager s Setup dialog select OMNI RIG1 or OMNI RIG2 depending on your Setup for Omni Rig If necessary click Configure to configure Omni Rig Restarting TRX Manager is mandatory in order to set up the TRX Manager s interface CW and DIG modes through OmniRig CW_U and DIG_U are selected by default for CW and DATA modes If CW_U gives CW R on your transcei
309. ived Please note in case of this option is checked opening the terminal window is not possible without opening the monitoring window From the Preference submenu under Terminal You also have to choose between the DX Cluster default and Clusse Dx Cluster formats for the DX spots Be sure to check the right option Troubleshooting Most problems are coming from a wrong speed Setup or from a wrong mode TRX Manager doesn t support any Host mode Read carefully the manual of your TNC Try to increase the speed to the maximum available value and disable the Autobaud mode on the TNC gt See also e Troubleshooting guide serial port and communications e On line tech support http www trx manager com su file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 266 of 365 Telnet connections The Terminal of TRX Manager makes it possible to establish two Telnet sessions TCP protocol simultaneously with distant computers servers over Internet or a local area network Internet Configuration You must check that your Internet connection is correctly configured and functions you can configure the Internet connection from the Window s configuration panel Internet options or from Internet Explorer Tools Options It is generally necessary to disable the proxy for Telnet connections moreover if you use a Firewall it will have to be to set not to block the Telnet connections established with TRX Manager Establishing a conn
310. iver Rotor The Auto Parameter check box must be checked If power is left blank no power control is done file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 148 of 365 Linear reminder Linear Reminder Operation Even if you don t own an automatic CAT controlled linear amplifier this little module can be very useful to help you using your manual amplifier or your manual antenna tuner The Linear Reminder provides the following functions e Alarm for band changes and cross mode Display of preset values for Tune Load 2 user defined fields USR1 USR2 for about 260 segments between 1 8MHz to 55MHz Tune function full power reduced power temporization Automatic Linear relay control or state of transmitter by Segments or Drive power Support for Telepost Inc LP 100 amp LP 100A ALPHAPOWER 4500 ELECRAFT W2 Digital Wattmeters Gain calculation and Assisted Tune for Experts The Linear Reminder only supports the Main transceiver however all options are memorized for each transceiver TRX1 4 The linear reminder does NOT support a Remote and OLE wattmeters The Linear Reminder module opens from the Tools Linear Reminder submenu EB warning This module provides a timed Tune function But in case you encounter RFI Radio Frequency Interference on your computer it can lock up while your transceiver is keying Consequently please always watch your transceiver s status and make sure you can stop keying m
311. king the TRACKING LIST button you can define up to 10 callsigns e DX Mail advanced if checked the internal mailer forwards DX Spots via EMail You can select only newone E and or needed or Spots of the tracking list The DX Spots can be send as soon as received immediately or each 5 10 minutes Since a large amount of emails can be interpreted as spamming by your SMTP provider the Each 5 minutes option is recommended Ex Notes Options under the DX Spots tab are also applicable to WebCluster spots How is working the DXCC filter If Show all is NOT checked default and Country is confirmed in this Mode AND this Band the Spot is NOT displayed Significance of the icons If Spot status is checked in the Preferences an icon is assigned with each spot This icon can be seized with the mouse to initiate a drag and drop operation Moreover its appearance informs summarily about the status of the corresponding country QSL related to the DXCC Award E new one the country is not confirmed in any mode or any band needed new mode or new band the country is already confirmed but not in this band or this mode 1 confirmed on this band but not in this mode or this mode but not on this band 2 confirmed IOTA detected 3 spot of the DX Trackink list unfiltered 4 1 according to your option Needed for defined under Preferences DX Spots 2 opposite condition of your option Needed for 3 if IOTA checked under
312. l and i Critical functions All functions All functions essential only rotator Rotator functions Interactivity Rotator reduced otting supported Setup Remote selected Real rig selected Real rig selected roman fo Remote ON Remote ON Remote OFF Polling Delay m 2 i T Logging E s Master ON Master ON Real rig selected Real rig selected Web Server Real rig selected Remote ON Remote ON Remote OFF Easy to use Protocol Very easy to Protocol not Slow no logging fast but limited optimized very fuse universal optimized or via the functions efficient for but interactivity remote desktop recommended Home Network reduced but not specific for Internet The various way of remote control using TRX Manager E il file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 176 of 365 Web Server TRX Manager s Web Server is a very different and alternative approach to the standard remote control via Packet or IP Thanks to a Web interface remote control is possible from any computer regardless of its operating system Linux Apple Android SmartPhone equipped with an audio link via Skype or other However this method of remote control is more limited with less interactivity than standard remote control The Web interface supports the most basic functions of the transceiver and provides rotor control and a small CW interface Audio transmission is not supported Standard or Real remote control
313. l ports kenwood Minor fixes for ICOM ev 5 2 7 Quick Edit of the log from the QSO Before window just click a row Winkey some parameters Weighting Dit Dah ratio Key Comp Port saved BY Transceiver TS 590 command for Filter A amp B memorizes filter by VFO A B Support for TS 990 not fully tested Update for DXSCape Web Cluster Virtual serial ports created by VSPE do not appear fixed Shortcuts revisited Logbook comment field now permanent new field WEB FTDX 1200 fix for Contour limits APF frequency added Various other fixes eV 5 2 6 Fix for 16 bits color video adapter Fix for K3 Synchro mode Preferences Software specific tab for DX Spots WebCluster updated for Simons DX Cluster CSV Format Memory channels displays of DCS codes instead of CTCSS Tones in some cases fixed TS 2000 480 590 Weird display of CTCSS tone in memory mode in some cases fixed TS 590 Pitch fixed TS 990 in progress ev 5 2 5 ICOM IC 7800 7700 ON OFF function added Comp ports now supported up to 32 ev 5 2 4 ICOM IC 7800 7700 update for new new firmware V3 0 New functions Power ON OFF and CW Memories K3 MIC SEL menu fixed selections added FTDX 1200 3000 Auto Information mode was disabled at startup fixed DXCC Window new option to display the band summary automatically ev 5 2 3 DX Tracking function updated K3 Refresh rate of QSX improved SUB VFO Tun
314. larifier read write is not supported This could cause the recalled frequency to be wrong e With FT 920 and FT 1000MP SWL and BAND SCOPE are running only with VFO A selected real time scanning functions up down are not supported Some commands of the Rig s internal electronic keyer are supported FT 920 Tools Rig s Keyer FT1000MP Tools EDSP With FT 1000MP MKV selected scanning from the Monitoring s Up down button as well as from the Command panel uses the proper scanning function smooth tuning This may not work properly with older FT 1000MP in that case please unselect AUTO from the Range dialog of the command panel receiver will be muted during scanning e With arecent Yaesu FT450 to FTDX9000 you must define the width of each DSP filter under Preferences Software See also Modes and Filters e With VR 5000 only 4800 bauds speed is supported correctly Communication is not bidirectional reading frequency and mode is not possible To be under CAT control you must press the CAT button wy located on the main toolbar or the F9 key Under CAT control the display of the receiver may freeze or the S Meter may be erratic S Meter only runs properly when the sub receiver is activated Consequently the TRX Manager s BandScope only runs with the sub receiver in AM N mode by defaut Reading writing the internal memory channels is not possible memory channels implemented by TRX Manager are virtual and not related to the channels o
315. lation under xP Vista w7 W8 W10 You must have administrator rigths to install TRX Manager Installing TRX Manager with restricted rights is not possible Installing TRX Manager Licensed version Run your personal file SETUP_TRX5_DYYYYMMDD_IDXXXX EXE as downloaded after your payment Once installed TRX Manager must be registered Demo version from a downloaded file You need to run the auto extractable file trmde5 exe in order to install the program Installation options If the installation software asks you to keep the files present on your system Please press first YES or OUI However if the program does not run properly uninstall and press NO the next time you install it It is also possible that Setup asks you to power off your computer this is normal and necessary for the update of certain shared resources once the computer is powered on again you may have to run Setup in order to finish the installation Folders structure used by TRX Manager Use AppData option Prior to CD Version 4 5 5 TRX Manager used the Program Files folder as the default folder this old scheme does not comply with the current specifications of Windows especially if UAC is set to ON TRX Manager V5 X uses e AppData Local TRX Manager as the default folder for all personal files you may backup this folder for reinstallation e ProgramData TRX Manager as the default folder for utility files you don t need to backup this fol
316. lay between calls CQ Delay is specified from the Setup under CW Pause mode is the default This is the delay between the beginning of the first CQ and the begenning of the second CQ this delay includes the duration of the CQ call Operation Any message can be used for CQ repeating looping calls press first the cycle button U followed by the number of the desired message M1 M16 or iz This function can be used simultaneously with the automatic switching into TX feature Between the calls the loop stops automatically as soon as you switch into TX manually During a call you must use the STOP button o stop the transmission or the TX interrupt function running faster than the Stop button Modes Pause and Period By default the CQ sequencer uses the Pause mode it means that the messages are repeated after the CQ delaydefined from the Setup However the extended macros make it possible to modify the duration of pause for each message or to switch into Period mode in this last case the messages are repeated with regular intervals as from the beginning of the first message this mode is used for meteor scatter or moonbounce operation in which synchronized transmitting and receiving sequences are required file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en CW Characters set Page 190 of 365 TRX Manager provides support for most of the Morse characters However some characters are not used very often and thus ignored b
317. le C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 291 of 365 Short Wave Listening Short Wave listening overview A comprehensive module is dedicated to Short Wave Listening This module is opened via the File SW Listeningsubmenu B F8 and allows choosing stations from a database Using a database Access 7 0 mdb format is more convenient than classic memory channels you may define thousands of frequencies add information locator perform queries and you may transfer a frequency from the VFO as easily as into a channel Please note a compilation of the HFCC public data Broadcast stations database is available from the TRX Manager s web site In addition various importing features are available J Features 18 Fields suited to Short Wave Listening and HAM Radio quick introduction of a station scanning capabilities configurable grid various search functions selections and queries print out reports of grid data automatic identification of the stations automatic creation of Access 7 databases Importationfrom Excelor DBF database distributed on the Internet ILG SWBC sound recorder F See also e Database Grids Overview SW module features a main Grid an Editing frame which opens by pressing the Edit i button two Tools bar and a Navigation bar file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 292 of 365 Ecoute O C trx swl mdb votare Be fm glen fs fo Howa wooo ff O eC
318. le This format must be used with the ProXR Series Relay Controllers this video by Randy K7AGE Using the band decoder There is only ONE Band decoder it is selectable on off for each Transceiver TRX1 4 from the Rotator Ant Misc tab of the Preferences Transceiver The Monitoring must always be active in order to update the band data for the Band you are using However depending on your transceiver and the way you use the software this information may be transmitted with a delay or may be erroneous please perform many tests before going live and make sure the desired switching is done correctly before transmitting Sending macro commands to the band decoder LPT or COM port is possible You must use the syntax explained above however in that case only the command must be inserted inside square brackets no space before or after the square brackets Example 11110000 or AS103_ If the macro command is not inserted inside square brackets it is sent to the transceiver Notes and possible problems A LPT Ports not supported e Windows 8 10 64bits Under recent versions of Windows 810 64 bits the third party LPT driver does not work USB LPT converters the drivers writen for the USB LPT converters are rarely compatible with the use of a band decoder PINS 2 9 are not programmable In both cases since these problems are related to the way a third party drivers is writen it is not possible to fix TRX Manager The
319. le for the current Main Transceiver If you need to change the preferences for a Sub Transceiver please define it temporarily as Main from the Transceiver menu Layout In addition to the Preferences Software dialog from which you may select Fore Background colors the Configuration button opens the configuration dialog box Other functions Band selection For each band the software retains the last visited frequency like a band stack register but unrelated with those of your transceiver Direct entry of Frequencies Direct entry of frequency is provided from the Band switch in MHz file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 115 of 365 14250 A Left click on gt RX sets up the receive frequencies while a right click sets up the transmit frequency TX Tuning steps TS TS Tuning Step is memorized for each Transceiver and each mode A clic on TS or TS increases or decreases the tuning Steps respectively for Fast and Slow scannings OP function By default at startup the Main Transceiver is the Operatingtransceiver In conjunction with the Monitoring the OP button selects the Operating transceiver at any time and very quickly during a session Function buttons Four Function buttons are user definable Sync The Sync button synchronizes a Sub Transceiver with the Main Transceiver for RX or TX Drag and Drop A drag and drop from a sub transceiver can be initialized from main display just bel
320. lick changes a frequency Up down by one digit while holding the left right button allows scanning T0492 TX 7 049 72 A left right click increases decreases the frequency By default the analog display frequency bar is moveable with the mouse for fast QSY s drag the bar right to go DOWN in frequency while dragging left on the bar will increase the frequency Ik 300 21 200 21 250 E nl Moving the analog display provides fast changes of the frequencies a If the Fixed scale option is checked Ny the analog display frequency bar does not move while the indicator bar moves to the current frequency Just click the frequency bar to set up a new frequency This option is recommended in HAM bands since it allows displaying the whole band with all spots If you have Cluster spots displayed on the bar you can go directly to the spot by double clicking in the MIDDLE of the callsign not on the indicator bar If your transceiver supports AF level control via the computer the slider sets up the gain When the DxXBar window is highlighted all the Monitoring s Keyboard shorcuts are available Rotator When a spot has been activated the corresponding azimuth is graphically displayed The Rotate button controls the rotator and will move it to the corresponding position file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 117 of 365 DX Spots The DX Spotsreceived from either the Terminalor the Web Cluste
321. lize the display STOP forces a polling of the Remote Rotator CW Keyer The Remote control iself has no specific CW Interface However as soon as the Remote transceiver is the Operating transceiver the TRX Manager s CW Interface is linked to the Remote transceiver and you can use your keyboard to send CW characters to the Remote station provided the CW keyer is wired and properly configured on the SERVER computer If a Winkey device is defined from CLIENT in Setup you can use the local Winkey device and a paddle for CW keying Warnings CW strings are sent word by word The latency of the communication may be a disconcerting factor with a paddle Paddle EchoBack must be checked see also Winkey configuration Ea Note TRX Manager CLIENT does not control your SERVER CW keyer directly it communicates with the SERVER instance of TRX Manager to control your keyer This why configuring SERVER is important In addition there is absolutely no relation between the configuration of SERVER and CLIENT CW setup are totally different SteppIR interface The Misc tab of the Remote control interface allows controlling the Remote SteppIR antenna with critical and basic commands However synchronization with the Remote transceiver is controlled by the SERVER computer only Synchro ports SERVER the Synchro ports of the SERVER computer are activated or not for linears antenna and other device provided the Synchro option is checked from the Pr
322. ll as update your database from an LOTW s ADIF Status report See also Logbook Of The World ARRL Creating a file for submission The TQSL program V 1 13 or later provided by ARRL must be installed and running on your computer You must have access to the LOTW website and a valid certificate No support can be provided for the use or configuration of the LOTW nor TQSL Manual submission From TRX Manager you create an adif file and convert it eu into a certified file TQ8 to be uploaded to the LOTW website To create the ADIF file please click the Save choose the ADIFformat and type the name of the file to create The Export dialog opens and you may have to choose some options as explained in the Importing Exporting section Please see TQSL instructions to continue Automated submission TRX manager automates the process making submissions to the LOTW easier see notes below Exit TQSL if it is running Click the TQSLicon which appears in the Logbook s toolbar to open the LOTW Export dialog 1 Choose your options as explained in the Import Export section and also which Action to take after Export 2 Type in the username Login and password required to log in to the LOTW WebSite 3 Click SIGN TQSL TRX Manager deletes the previous submission files creates a new adif file LOTWEXPORT ADI using your options and launches the TQSL software allowing you to digitally sign your QSOs file and data dialogs are skipped
323. ll parameter changes to the computer This mode is recommended because it is the more efficient and display is very fast However collisions between commands may rarely cause some errors in the display 2 Auto Information unchecked polling mode if Auto Information is not checked TRX Manager polls the transceiver at regular intervals polling This mode slows down the program and the computer but communication errors are almost impossible For this reason this mode is preferable if the transceiver is to be remote controlled i e when using the TRX Manager s remote control ability IP Port is usually unchecked This option provides control of the com port via IP A warning Please note that when a menu is activated on your transceiver commands via PC are ignored except commands related to this menu make sure to exit the menu after each change Q Alternative setup for TS 590S SG TS 590S SG 480 2000 share a similar driver and TS 590S or SG are listed in setup Just for fun you may select the TS 990 driver by directly typing TS 590 instead of TS 590S or TS 590SG in the Transceiver combo box TRX Manager will sense your TS 590S or TS 590SG automatically Layout is different and you may find it more convenient however some features like Memory channels read write are not supported Menus Some critical menu items are accessible via TRX Manager but not via a menu but by using contextual dialogs preferences etc in addit
324. log However please uncheck the Internal CW option for the transceiver to be used with this keyer since CW Internal has the priority over any other settings of the CW Tab for a transceiver which supports keying via CAT see C A 1 SERIAL PORT How to choose the serial port and the line to use The CW interface keys the DTR or RTS line of a serial port As DTR or RTS lines are not used by all the serial ports you can use an already occupied port provided you make sure that its DTR or RTS line is free For your information from TRX Manager e DTR or RTS lines of the Transceiver ports can be disabled in order to be available for CW then check the correct operation of your CAT interface e DTR or RTS lines of a TNC are both used and are therefore not available for CW e RTS and DTR lines of the Rotators are reserved and are therefore not available for CW If you carry out a bad selection TRX Manager prompts a warning message but you could also note a continuous key down condition Your choice must be coherent with the choice made for the PTT line is Under Windows ME Please see the Troubleshooting Serial port section for more information about the DTR and RTS lines A 2 Serial Interface Interface wiring The interface identical to that of other programs is very simple to build The level of RTS or DTR lines passes from 12v to 12v with the rhythm of CW Keying A 1N4148 diode makes it possible to chop the 12v signal whereas a fast
325. log to the SW data grid allows you adding the record corresponding to the dragged icon Editing the database Editing is preferably performed from the Edit frame however direct editing of the grid is possible to enable this feature it is necessary to disable the grid locking with the following button database ie listening It is better to lock this while using the The Delete button deletes one or more selected entries of the database Tip When you edit the database it may be preferable to lock the setting of the transceiver by using this button Of course please make sure to unlock the transfer for listening file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 294 of 365 Scanning the SW Database This section describes manual and automatic scanning capabilities of the database Q Tip During scanning please make sure to unlock the transfer of frequencies to the transceiver A button not pressed Scanning manually A single click of a record any click in the corresponding line transfers the station s settings to the transceiver if geographical data longitude latitude are available direction and propagation predictions are displayed from the DXCC window Depending on your own preferences you may choose to ignore the mode of the database by checking the No Mode button LE you may prefer listening all broadcast stations in SSB or keeping the current mode and filter From t
326. lso e DX Map beacons e Alex VE3NEA web site Displaying the predictions Once DXCC Info window is open you only need to click the main azimuth indicator in order to toggle to the HF Propagation prediction mode Predictions are then displayed for the current country according to a diagram with indication of maximum and lower usable frequencies MUF LUF for each hour of the day Click the Propagation diagram to toggle to Azimuth indicator and vice versa Maximum usable frequency is the highest frequency which supports reflection in fact refraction through F2 Layer MUF between two points Minimum usable frequency LUF is the maximum E Layer s Cut Off Frequency ECOF A red dot indicates your current position in the Time Frequency space By moving the mouse on the diagram the touch help gives you for the current time MUF LUF and a prediction of Hops to the current country You will note that if LUF is higher than MUF a path is not possible through F2 Sun Set and Sun Rise time for the DX Station are indicated in the lower part of the graph DX and represented by two orange lines while two blue lines indicate the end and the beginning of the twilight When the red dot is between a blue line and an orange line the absorption of the D layer is minimal while MUF is high and the propagation may momentarily improve Your own Sun Set and Sun Rise time are also indicated Loc and your twilight is represented by two little blu
327. lso lock up with some comm drivers like Prolific If you own an LP 100 Digital wattmeter you can configure it from Setup TRX1 Please restart TRX Manager after checking for all the parameters Now you launch the Monitoring which is the heart of TRX Manager by clicking the Monitoring button or F6 With some transceivers you may have to click the CAT control button if it is visible to engage the communication between the program and the transceiver If all has been properly configured the Monitoring window displays the current state of the main transceiver and you can control it from the computer 3 About com ports If you select the same com port for different transceivers or devices you will receive a warning message like Erroneous parameters While this is is a Warning only and this configuration will be accepted by the program it is recommended you take care not using these different devices sharing the same com port at the same time since it is NOT supported by Windows and may generate an error at startup of TRX Manager Selecting the Main Transceiver Monitoring The Monitoring window controls the Main transceiver When you start TRX Manager for the first time the main transceiver is generally the one defined under Setup TRX1 The Main Transceiver can be selected at any time from the Transceiver menu This menu displays various items corresponding to each configured transceivers 3 About com port main tra
328. lti Documents Interface system each window is displayed inside the same container You can minimize or resize most windows in order to adjust your interface as you want The program keeps in registry window s position and size You may also automatically recall the last session You may quickly re open the last screen s configuration from the File Previous session submenu You also may automate this procedure by checking the Previous session option Preferences under Software Related Topic e Windows layout Customizing the main tool bar The user may customize the main tool bar a right click on the tool bar or the Display Toolbars menu opens the editor Customize It is possible to remove to move any button and to set Large icons Moving adding or removing of the buttons are done by drag and drop when the customization window is open file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 17 of 365 3 TRX Manager FT 990 OLE File Edit Tools Display Parameters j 8 68 e820 87279 Toolbars Tools Options Categories Tools Exit Favorite Program a DXFile Parameters 9 Save config LogBook Load config Selected tool Description Modify Selection TRX Manager FT 990 O File Edit Tools Display Parameters lekla ea 6 File Edit Tools Display Parameters eke 6RS Toolbars Tools Options Pasetacs hirti Custom Dutt It
329. ly Channels reports TRX Manager implements 99 virtual channels without relationship with the internal channels of the FRG 9600 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 56 of 365 Operation with FT 450 to FTDX 9000 This section applies for operating TRX Manager with the FT 450 FT 950 FT 91 FT 2000 FTDX 3000 FTDX 5000 FTDX 9000 Transceivers TRX Manager only supports the latest firmware PEP versions early versions are no more supported Setting up your transceiver It is recommended to use the maximal available CAT speed 38400 bds RTS is selectable recommended if it is correctly supported by your hardware FTDX9000 PEP 38400 bds FTDX5000 38400 bds menu 32 Other settings are menu 33 10 menu 34 RTS Enable FTDX 1200 3000 38400 bds menu 38 Other settings are menu 39 10 menu 40 RTS Enable FT 2000 PEP 38400 bds menu 27 38 4 Other settings are menu 28 10 Menu 29 RTS ON FT 450D 38400 bds menu CATRATE 38400 menu CAT TOT 10 menu CAT RTS ON FT 950 PEP 38400 bds menu 26 38 4 Other settings are menu 27 10 Menu 28 RTS ON FT 991 38400bds menu 31 38400 menu 32 CAT TOT 10msec menu 33 CAT RST Enable If you use the internal USB adapter or the rig or the SCU 17 USB interface please make sure to choose the enhanced driver The standard driver can NOT be used for CAT control it activates FSK and PTT by default Setting up TRX Manager Don t forget
330. m Synchronizes two transceivers SteppIR Alpha amp ACOM amp e TRX Command Sends user defined commands or macros to your transceiver or your LPT port e TRX Pan an SDR Decoder e LP Monitor and LP SteppIR by Larry N8LP to control remote relays rotors over serial ports and or IP SteppIR beam Setup OLE Link is automatically enabled by TRX Manager there is no specific Setup Please note that when TRX Manager is minimized the CAT communication stops You may wish to disable this ability to keep the benefit of the Automode feature the solution is to avoid minimization of the TRX Manager s main window License for the OLE Link Running the link requires a properly installed version of TRX Manager and requires the same license information Testing the link With TRX Manager two programs are distributed to demonstrate the OLE Link e FT Control this program allows you to test the OLE ability You may run as many instances of FT Control as you want The current operating conditions are reported into FT Control every 3 seconds and you may select your operating conditions from the FT Control window e TRX Synchro exe this program controls and synchronizes a second Transceiver only ICOM and some Yaesu with the Transceiver under the control of TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 322 of 365 Running LOGic TRX Manager is able to communicate with LOGic 5 amp later via the OLE link LOGic is
331. m 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 200 of 365 MMVARI Operating The MMVARI Module is based on the MMVARI Engine by Makoto Mori JE3HHT It supports digital modes such as RTTY Baudot PSK BPSK MFSK QPSK GMSK and can deal with the Varicode optimized for MBCS however MBCS is not supported by TRX Manager The MMVARI engine is included in the distribution package for TRX Manager and you don t need to install MMVARI on your computer You launch the MMVARI module from the External MMVARI is submenu While the most of parameters and settings are about the same than for the MMVARI stand alone application the user interface is specific to TRX Manager e _ Som Se BRAE met o BA OBA WM SS BD Bande Mode Fite Cy reoex cant gso tKs mic Tu mic Test mo mo mi miz m3 ma mis 73 MBB MMAR Canaux Playback P RTTV 45 BPSK 31 BPSK 63 BPSK 125 MFSK 16 enefa low eti o amp a 0Aehn esit mittt o udte thee e ginih 25 etz ah ao ol z TRURX ICOM 756 PROM a ANTENNA parallel Dipote for 8Omeht0Om Basiwm up thei PC Self RST HIS NAME HIS QTH EtatDpt Grid Commentaire st 599 Laurent JENNA MY CALL pO O NAM IOTH STATE GRID RIG PWR SOFT TKS DEAR OM FOR NICE OSQ Txor cwo 9 gt See also e MMVARI Settings Getting started RX 3 Important notes The Monitoring must be running during the operation of MMVARI Otherw
332. m the Log Book window by pressing the HAM DB button ae but also with a right click on a spot displayed in Web Cluster or DX Cluster or Azimuthal projection windows Features When you call for a search from another module if the required callsign is in the database it will be immediately displayed If a QSL Manager is found the corresponding text box displays the latest information You may select another QSL Information by clicking the desired line in the list under QSL If a valid EMail address is found it is possible to send an email by pressing this button The copy button transfers Name and address into the Windows clipboard Firstname City State GridSquare and QSL Manager and other fields if available are transferred into the Logbook s corresponding fields by pressing from the RAC window A new search may be performed by filling in the callsign field and pressing the search button oh Note TRX Manager uses the Gridsquare from the CD to compute beam heading 9 From the Logbook If the Auto logging option is checked the transfer of the data to the logbook is automated when you introduce a callsign into the callsign field of the logbook and press Enter keyboard or the Info i button of the Logbook the transfered data depend on your options for the Fields to transfer In summary e Enter or il fetches the data into to the fields of the Logbook A function performs a search but does NOT transfer the data You must u
333. may be unable to power the transceiver on again Generally if you use a separate CIV converter CT17 or clone powered by a 12v source it should work See the documentation provided by ICOM Depending on the transceiver you are using and the way the interface is powered on when you switch off the transceiver you may be unable to power the transceiver on again Generally if you use a separate CIV converter powered by a 12v source it should work Additional functions Levels window If you are using a recent ICOM since IC 746 a lot of commands are available such as AF Level Squelch APF NR PBT IF Shift Keyer Most of these commands are implemented from the Level windows Transceiver Levels submenu or Toolbar s button Controls automatically update at startup then click ICOM icon to update the controls file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 43 of 365 4 Niveaux r t Levels window IC 7100 If necessary additional commands may be implemented using the Monitoring s macro buttons or TRX Command About the memory channels The number of memory channels number of the last channel available is limited to 99 for all the models TRX Manager begins memory channels numbering from 1 some ICOMs begin numbering from 0 and a shift of one unit is possible between the channel number displayed by the program and the one displayed by the transceiver If the first channel is Channel 0 please ch
334. med countries the program displays a more comprehensive coded information OEN Tnx Bill Gar ry ten new band Bill gl DXCC Column The DXCC Award status for each spot is coded on 4 characters as follow ABCD Confirmed C Worked W New N for BAND Confirmed C Worked W New N for MODE Confirmed C Worked W New N for BAND MODE Confirmed C Worked W New N for all BANDS and MODES DAUD DXCC Country is displayed in clear If more than one DXCC Country is possible for a given prefix a appears If the LoTW users list is installed is added in front of the DXCC status for each user of LoTW Saving the spots The program keeps the last 90 spots in memory and on hard disk DXCluster txt file So the spots of the last session may be recalled for each opening of the terminal screen this is an option Load Spots you have to choose from the Preferences Terminal tab Sending an announce To announce a new spot you have to press the spot button of the Terminal s toolbar The dialog box helps you to compose your spot by recalling all the necessary information A frequency button allows you to recall the current frequency If Split is ON the comment field is filled in with QSX and the TX frequency DX GRID gt YOUR GRID can be added to the comment V UHF if the DX has just been logged E3 Notes e Always give the frequencies in KHz e Understand that if you announce a spot that is just lo
335. menu no code is required Once your registration is confirmed launch TRX Manager at least once to confirm your registration you can update TRX Manager to the current version Drivers for band decoder not found or not installed Setup LPT Tab Please reinstall the program or the update don t forget to reboot your computer to complete the installation If the problem persists please ask for a support A Windows 8 10 64bits Under recent versions of Windows 8 10 64 bits the third party LPT driver may not work Please note until now that NO FIX is available Regional settings A common problem may be coming from your Windows settings TRX Manager strictly uses the standard Windows interface if you encounter a problem entering a frequency with a decimal separator such as 0 125 or 0 125 or if you get an incorrect azimuth indication please check your Regional Settings in the Control Panel under Numbers You have to use the same separator as the separator defined for Windows It is best to use the period as the decimal separator It may be however that on certain international versions of Windows this choice gives an incorrect operation in this case choose the comma At last the digit grouping symbol must be a blank space Problems with the Toolbars It may be sometime required to reset the Toolbars to their defaults To reset the Toolbars please exit TRX Manager and run TRX Tools delivered with TRX Manager Reset
336. must be set to 1200 bauds TRX Manager supports the Argonaut V transceiver and almost all programmable functions including DSP filtering Keyer Speed NB Attenuator the Argonaut V s protocol does not support setting of AF amp RF levels Jupiter Please select Jupiter from Setup and check RTS and DTR Communication Speed must be set to 57600 bauds TRX Manager supports the Jupiter transceiver and almost all programmable functions including DSP filtering NB NR Attenuator AF RF SQ Levels file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 78 of 365 Alinco transceivers TRX manager supports the Alinco DX 77 Transceiver Setting Please choose generic model Alinco or DX 77 Setup Speed is always fixed on 9600 bauds Limitations It is not possible to upload the memory of the DX 77 The channels are virtual unrelated with the channels of the transceiver file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 79 of 365 JST Transceivers TRX manager supports JRC JST transceivers and the NRD 545 receiver with some limitations on program functionality Settings Choose NRD 535 NRD 545 JST 145 or JST 245 from the Setup dialog box Communications speed is fixed at 4800 bps see your manual in case of different speeds are supported DTR is not checked See your manual in case of the RTS protocol is required if RTS is checked and RTS Protocol not supported you may have a lock up of the program Restart the prog
337. n warning If you encounter RFI Radio Frequency Interference on your computer it can lock up while your transceiver is keying Consequently please always watch your transceiver s status and make sure you can stop keying manually in all situations Synchronization for band changes If your amplifier provides a data input RS 232 ICOM or Kenwood compatible like the most recent solid state amplifiers Tokyo HP Expert 1K FA IC PW1 you may configure TRX Manager as a Kenwood or ICOM ICPW1 serial server and automatically control band changes see Synchronization The Band decoder can also be used to make band changes from the 8 pins of a parallel port i e by using the Yaesu BCD format Linear Reminder OPR STBY control support for digital wattmeters The Linear Reminder module can be used to display Preset Tuning Settings of a manual linear amplifier or with a LP 100 amp LP 100A or ALPHAPOWER 4500 or Elecratft W2 Digital wattmeter adding various additional functions The Linear Reminder also provides a Standby Operate function which may help to prevent from transmitting with the linear on certain prohibited segments or just after band changes or by drive power Automatic Drive power control If your transceiver supports setting of Power output via CAT you can use this feature to automatically adjust the Drive power to the required values for the different bands Power output values by bands are set from the Preferences Transce
338. n ability to split either the 10m or the 80 m band eV 3 3 2 DXMap amp DXAtlas a button allows drawing paths from Spotters to DX Spots VUCC amp DXAtlas drawing the confirmed or worked gridsquares TS 2000 1 2GHz band supported e V 3 3 1 Prefix mdb update of the ARRL DXCC codes for 4W FK CH amp VP6D you must run the Tools DXCC Update to update the codes for your previous QSOs LogBook minimizing the LogBook window also minimizes the CD Rom GoList Fcc QSOBefore windows e V 3 3 0 TRX Command updated multiple commands supported DX Atlas interface improved DXCC Summary detailed summary DXCC Window detailed informations e V 3 2 7 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 354 of 365 IC 746PRO memory channels interface fixed Remote window SUB button added TRX Command an additional program that allows you to send direct commands to your Kenwood Icom or LPT Port via OLE eV 3 2 6 FT 1000MP smooth tuning implemented may not work with older FT 1000MP HAMSCOPEsupports TRX Manager via OLE IC 821 Main and Sub reversed in SAT mode TS 2000 amp K2 probably a problem of priority with WinXP support for N8LP s rotor interface e V 3 2 5 FT 1000MPMKV smooth tuning implemented IC 821 IC 910 Fixes and updates in SAT mode eV 3 2 4 Printing the log options for Margin and Font Prefix database updated for Ducie Island VP6D S
339. n not run TRX file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 81 of 365 Manager and launch TRX Juma exe simultanously however the TRX Juma s interface is also available from TRX Manager using the External TRX Juma submenu TT CH NAR 0 7 fF 10 110 000 VFOA M TRX Juma s interface file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 82 of 365 CAT Programming The CAT Commands window Tools CAT Commands submenu may help you testing and understanding the communication protocol between a PC and a transceiver its limitations and features You may send data and read the reply from this window If necessary this window may also help you to debug any communication problem by placing a strobe on the serial line to see if the transceiver is communicating gt Related Topic e Macro commands Old Yaesu transceivers FT 1000 FT 990 FT 897 All commands sent from the computer to the transceiver consist of five byte blocks Byte 1 to byte 4 then OpCode Some commands cause the transceiver to send status data 3 Example To set Split ON FT 990 1000 you have to send the following command hex 00 00 00 01 01 From the CAT Command Windows you have to declare the bytes in the same order that they need to be sent Byte 1 2 3 4 OpCode then press the Send button Note that for some models the Yaesu manual give these commands in the reverse order This so called Yaesu CAT System was complicated and
340. n the TRX Manager s DX Map Load Spots forces TRX Manager to keep spots in memory between sessions not recommended DE lt DX Spots send by Spotters outside of a 5000Km radius default are ignored Max distance for Spotters in Km default 5000 Server data distance to Spotters calculated using server data if available prefix database by default BlackList enable disable the DXSpot and Spotter s blacklists 3 Note Web Cluster and Telnet Packet DX Clusters share many other options to be defined from the Preferences DX Spots tab such as Log filter DXCC Filter DX Filter DX Tracking list Operation The Web Cluster Interface opens from File Web Cluster sub menu or from the Tools Bar s button A You may have to resize the window or to resize each column clicking or te resets to default settings to display all desired information Downloading the spots Manual loading is done using the pil or pe buttons When the Timer button B looks as if is depressed extractions are automatic according to your Preferences If the IE Icon is checked the corresponding web page opens under the Web tab You can save the spots as HTML file or to recall a previous HTML file via the following buttons Open or Save Troubleshooting If the software is not responding when clicking on po or buttons or if the Spots do not appear e Web Cluster s URLs addresses and data format frequently change Please update TRX Manager to the most r
341. nager MDB extension may be opened from Access however do not save the bases with the Access 2000 format which is not compatible file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 319 of 365 SQL Language The Structured Query Language SQL is used to retrieve sort and filter specific data from a database it is not possible within this on line help to give a full tutorial of this programming language however the following basics will make it possible to create current queries necessary for the compilation of varied reports More information can be found on the Microsoft s MSDN under SQL Expressions and on many other web sites Basics SQL queries selects particular records from a database Typically an SQL query contains a select statement and a clause with one or more logical conditions SELECT statement The SELECT statement queries the database in order to extract the records matching specified criteria SELECT can be followed by or DISTINCT SELECT selects all of the records that meet the conditions in the SQL statement SELECT DISTINCT field omits records that contain duplicate data in the selected field makes possible to select the different values for the specified field Clauses FROM specifies the tables or queries that contain the fields listed in the select statement WHERE specifies which records from the table are affected by the select statement ORDER BY sorts a query s resulting records on a s
342. nager behaves like a Kenwood or ICOM transceiver whatever the rig under the control of TRX Manager you must connect this serial port to the serial port configured from your logging program with a null modem cable Unless specified below the Kenwood protocol is recommanded to synchronize a third party program 3 Example You control an FT 1000MP with TRX Manager and COM1 Your logging program is configured for Kenwood and COM2 TRX Manager s Synchro A tab is configured for Kenwood and COM3 COM2 and COM3 are connected using a null modem cable Now TRX Manager is under the control of your logging program like if it is a Kenwood transceiver Depending on the program you use and how it polls TRX Manager and the flow of data exchanged connecting two serial ports on the same computer may be critical and can slow down TRX Manager Kenwood mode This mode should be always selected to synchronize a logging software If you select Kenwood as protocol under Synchro A or enable any of the 6 available com ports under Synchro B TRX Manager behaves like a basic Kenwood transceiver TS 440 TS 450 or similar for the defined serial port A null modem connection must be used to connect the controller i e an other computer running a logging program or any device such as amplifier antenna tuner Supported settings are e Speed 4800 Bds StopBits 2 Parity None Protocol None e Speed 9600 57600Bds StopBits 1 Parity None Protocol None
343. nager is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties TRX Manager is licensed not sold Reproducing the COMMERCIAL version of TRX Manager is strictly prohibited Anyone distributing the EVALUATION version of TRX Manager Demo on CD Rom for any kind of remuneration must respect the conditions explained in the documentation Return policy PDA does not accept returns on TRX Manager Please try before buying Because of the nature of software this is the best way to protect our copyrights Thank you for understanding If you experience problems with our software please contact us for a support 3f Disclaimer of warranty In any case you should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software USERS OF THE SOFTWARE MUST ACCEPT THE FOLLOWING DISCLAIMER BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY AND ARE BECOMING A PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT TRX Manager IS SUPPLIED AS IS PDA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE PDA ASSUME NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 335 of 365 UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE WILL PDA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FO
344. nager s shortcuts MS Windows s shortcuts These shortcuts as for any Windows compatible software use a control key Alt key or Ctrl key they are self documented Below Windows shortcut for Transceiver menu is Alt R Specific TRX Manager s shortcuts These shortcuts are only available if the corresponding window is highlighted to highlight a window please click its title bar They do not require a control key and you have to press the key with caps off If you have no effect please make sure to give the focus or to highlight to the corresponding window To improve the behavior of the keyboard you may increase the rate of key repetition from the Control Panel Keyboard Icon Monitoring F6 or DX Bar window Main keyboard Key Effect VFO A VFO B Memory channel operation Clarifier clearing FM mode This help Incremental tuning mode On Off PTT key LSB mode AM mode Filter toggle wide narrow Clarifier On Off QMB displaying QSX Start Tuner Split mode Tuner On Off USB mode VFO gt M W CW mode X Quick Split Recall Y RTTY FSK mode Ct Ent Sto QMB BkSp Rcl QMB Esc XFC TFS TXW PgUp Range Up PgDn Range Down Home AF Level Up End AF Level Down SGAHVPOVOZSROATIDMOVS file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 315 of 365 Numeric keypad Key Effect QSY 1 250 Hz FT 980 FT 767GX 100 Hz 3 250 Hz FT 980 F
345. nce for the DXCC Award during a special event a new DX Pedition or even your friends it is recommended you edit the Special CallSigns database specialcallsigns mdb and NOT the prefix database This method is highly recommended for short callsigns with 3 letters The specialcallsigns mdb database is created empty the first time you open TRX Manager This database is personal and preserved each time you update TRX Manager In practice TRX Manager searches first for a strict match with any callsign defined in this database before doing a full search in the Prefix database the special callsigns database has the priority over the Prefix database Editing the database is done from the Special CallSigns tab of the Prefix database editor Click qF to create a new record and to save the current report or the changes The button next to the DXCC field allows you to select the DXCC country in the list You may personalize the Longitude Latitude CQZ ITUZ Territory fields for a perfect match with the location of the station so that Azimuth and Distance CQZ ITUZ are properly populated C Cont COZ _ ITUZ Teritoy Cal Dxcc_ Longitude Latitude Meee kso KP 67 49 18 38 N4 Jos 11 Desecheolsland DX Editing the Special CallSigns database Editing the Prefix database l file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 221 of 365 warnings The format of the Prefix and DXCC table must strictly match the f
346. nction is only usable if RX VFOA and TX VFOB it is NOT available if the VFO B is the main VFO or it may give unpredictable results You may have to initialize the VFOB display before using these functions 2 While TFS XFC TXW is activated the Monitoring loop stops and VFO A can NOT be tuned improper changes may happen if you try it 3 ICOM Transceivers Only the most recent firmware allows this function see availability of cmd 25 26 in the CI V manual However for the other ICOMs a similar function has been implemented the VFOB is selected as soon as you move the mouse over any digit of the SUB VFOB display and tuning is possible this way the VFO A is selected again as soon as the cursor leaves the VFOB zone In that case VFOB tuning is not usable in conjunction with the ESC key 4 This function is not supported by all transceivers If your transceiver does not support this function the SUB icon opens the Quick Split QSX window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 90 of 365 QSX function The QSX function Edit Split or F3 or QSX button opens the Quick Split window You may set up either e a transmit frequency MHz and split Mode with same operating mode as receive frequency e any offset QSX in kHz The Split screen also provides a memory for split settings Please fill in the text boxes for Offset and Mode under the Split Memory frame The Recall button recalls these settings quickly In additi
347. nd TRX Manager is unable to find the corresponding com port You will have an error like this one Initialization error COM PORT T5 590 6 ErrDescription ErrNumber 0 This TS 590 is not powered up The USB interface does not work Make sure the right and exact model of Transceiver is selected under Setup and select the same Transceiver from the Transceiver menu see Dual Setup If the exact model is not selected or a generic model is selected the program may run but with limited functions Make sure the Com Port OFF function ee Transceiver menu is not activated It you find it activated at startup please exit the program and delete the Toolbar folder before you restart TRX Manager You can check the status of the com port using the Parameters My Configuration sub menu Make sure that your interface is not running with another program physically connected or not to a device like a modem a FAX or a PDA Step 2 check your interface and your cable The communication problems generally come from the interface or a faulty cable most likely In some cases you may have to program your interface or to wire it Please note that you may control your serial data line with help of the CAT Commands window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 37 of 365 In case of you use an USB Serial adapter please check for the com port number that has been created in the Device Manager Step 3 the T
348. nds panel scanning range fixed ICOM IC R75 improved support DX Map Shows NCDXF IARU beacons eV 2 4 0 Telnet terminal remote control via Telnet Quick memories window history list Preferences up to five custom buttons Exporting the log the CSV format Excel delimited text format is supported QSO Before QSOs sorted by descending dates Prefix database KA Inversion between USA and Japan KC6 Inversion between USA and Caroline RA Callbook Grid Square is calculated using the Latitude and Longitude of the station improved support for the international database CD Rom Preferences for the fields to transfer ADIF Import fix for the US states New Windows menu Support for IC 718 eV 2 3 6 New icons Fixes for TS 440 680 790 Support for the SWBC Schedules Subscription Service SW database Scanning Stop the scanning resumes when the signal drops down VUCC Grid square award summary Logbook SATband has been added advanced searchesand reports using SQL eV2 3 5 Preference for CW reverse Gridsquare award tracking fix eV 2 3 4 Logbook inversion between CD Rom and Previous QSO searches the program searches for the most recently entered information 59 9 by default for rstS has been added to the Preferences under Logbook DXCCwindow responding to 4 digits gridsquare reporting if the gridsquare has been worked confirmed before ILG radio database
349. ng else e Default value for MISC reminder MISC is like TRACK while MISC is fixed and NOT saved in the database Once you save the Contest settings by closing the dialog using the OK button the corresponding settings become the current contest s settings Example Cabrillo QSO template for Sweepstakes info sent info revd QSO freq mo date time call nr p ck sec call nr Pp ck sex QSOS vyvy mm dd nnnn nnnn ann aaa nnonNn a nn aai QSO 21042 CW 1997 11 01 2102 N5KO 3 B 74 STX K9ZO 2A 69 IL nnnn serial number prec precedence A B M Q S or U ck two digit check sec ARRL Section abbreviation O 0O O 0 Info rcvd RX cccccccccc nnnn p tt iii Info sent TX ccccccccce nnnn iiiiiiii In that case data sent p ck sec are concatenated in the STX_STRING field of the database 1771777177 Data received ck is stored in the Track field tt of the database file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 254 of 365 Logging during a contest Once the Contest mode is configured you may enable disable the Contest mode using the Logbook s Contest toggle al Appearance and behavior of the Logbook are slightly different than from the standard mode In particular the fields useful for the contest are displayed side by side and ordered in the Contest frame at the bottom of the window Please note Contest mode is designed so that creating a specific l
350. ng frequency offset with respect to the RX sampling frequency If your sound card has been calibrated you can type the actual value i e 74 25 e RX TX Buttons these buttons give access to the RX and TX settings respectively RX Settings e HPC If Checked the high pass filter is engaged for RX Although this is unnecessary for most soundcards it sometimes is effective for eliminating hum in the input audio e AFC Width Specifies the frequency sweeping width Hz for the AFC This value is applied to all the RX channels e AFC Level Specifies the S N level dB for the wide AFC In case AFC Width is less than or equal to 50Hz default the wide AFC does not function and AFC Level is ignored This value is applied to all the RX channels e ATC PPM If selected Automatic Timing Control ATC is turned on In the rtty mode ATC is always off irrespective of this option In the mfsk mode ATC is always on irrespective of this option e ATC Offset This value specifies the adjustment offset in ppm for the RX sampling frequency If ATC PPM is checked MMVARI automatically manages the ATC Offset e Handling center frequency If checked the center frequency is used for the carrier frequency If NOT checked the base tone frequency is used for the carrier frequency only affects the display in MMVARI e Use metric level squelch If checked mfsk metric level is used for the squelch If NOT checked the S N level is used for the squelch This p
351. ng the Pitch or the CW SSB offset from the Preferences Transceiver tab The pitch is generally between 500 and 700 Hz Also please check if a special parameter of your transceiver allows setting up to OFF frequency corrections between SSB and CW as it is possible with Yaesu and Kenwood transceivers auto mode disabled in Split In Split if VFOA and VFOB does not belong to the same segment TRX manager disables the Auto mode to prevent any mode changes Reverse option The REVERSE option CW RTTY DATA affects the sideband in CW and digital modes e RTTY this option applies to FSK AFSK and SSB DATA e DATA this option applies to PSK PKT and SSB DATA in RTTY or other DATA modes the sideband is selected depending on the band segment of the band plan file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 123 of 365 Setting up the Preferences for Filters main transceiver For the Main Transceiver you may associate a Mode and a Filter by entering your settings from the Preferences dialog under Transceiver This selection is only valid if the mode is automatically selected by the program band segment change DX Spots If you change the mode manually either from the transceiver s front panel or TRX Manager the associated filter for that mode is NOT selected E3 Notes e Ifa DSP only is used these filters are virtual and their bandwidths have to be defined under the DSP PBT frame see below e If Quartz filte
352. ng the same size as the largest window you will be using The size of the map must be 40000 km x 40000 km world map and the globe must be the same diameter as the length of the sides of the square y How to find a MAP If you are looking for a program able to draw this map you should visit The World according to GARP on http www schaik com garp garp html AZ_PROJ on http www wm7d net azproj shtml GMT on http qmt soest hawaii edu NS6T s Azimuthal map on http ns6t net azimuth Azimuthal Equidistant Map by OK2pbq on http ok2pbq atesystem cz AziWorld by F6DQM http www f6dqm fr software htm NCDXF s HF Beacons The Beacons menu displays the positions of the HF beacons of the Northern California DX Foundation Inc Opening the menu sets up the transceiver on the beacon s frequency your computer clock must be set to the correct time The Cycle button UO allows an automatic tracking of a beacon over the five bands To go back to the display of the DX Spot please click All Spots or any band button See also e HF Propagation prediction e There are a number of free programs that will help you keep your clock accurate a free software is available on the NIST s web site at http www nist gov pml div688 grp40 its cfm file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 227 of 365 HF Propagation Predictions TRX Manager includes HF Propagation predictions via the F2 Layer from the DXCC window See a
353. nkey or CAT Interface Intuitive logging Awards tracking Log book with advanced Import Export utility Logbook s Explorer Comprehensive DXCC information Prefix database editing customization 11m possible Real time tracking of the DXCC IOTA WAZ WAS and VUCC awards Support for the DDFM DPF awards Support possible for other awards Advanced searches using the SQL language QSL labels printing Compatibility with HamQTH QRZ Callbook and HAMCall CD Roms or Internet database Automatic lookup of the FCC License records Callsign lookup from various Internet websites Contest mode Support for the LogBook of The World e Link with LOGic Graphic interface Multi language interface French English Spanish Swedish German Polish Configurable Tool Bar Office type and Sessions Comprehensive on line help Internet browser Quick EMailer Screen saver and desktop background Specifications The software runs under any 32 bits or 64 bits version of Windows Except NT3 51 and supports the following transceivers defined as Main transceiver ntrolled wath Woanager YAESU FT 212 FT 412 FT 736 FT 450 FT 747 FT 757GX FT 757GXII FT 767GX FT 817 FT 840 FT 847 FT 857 FT 890 FT 897 FT 900 FT 920 FT 980 FT 990 FT 991 FT1000MP MKV FT1000D FT 990 and FT 1000 ROM 1 2 FRG 100 FT 100 FRG 9600 VR 5000 FTDX 1200 FT 2000 FTDX3000 FTDX5000 FTDX9000 KENWOOD R 5000 TS 440 TS 450 TS 480 TS 570 TS 590S TS 590SG TS 680 TS 690 TS 711 TS 790 TS 81
354. ns A description of the message window is provided below Refer to Sending Receiving messages and Group messages Tracking a Callsign is possible using the DX Tracking function Uploaded data Data is sent to the WOTA server 1 when you connect to the database 2 at five minute intervals or 3 on demand The following fields are sent to the server e your Callsign e your Operating frequency and mode e your Comment you may add oF or remove this comment to from your favorite comments from the Select menu e your geographical data Grid State PAS QTH SAS Longitude and Latitude This data originates from the Software Location preference panel Check the accuracy of this data You can view your position on a high precision map located at http 71 198 184 113 newwota WotaMap aspx e your software and version TRX Manager e your CQ and ITU zones e your Message Groups If you change any of these data fields after you are connected you may force an upload by using the Upload button it do not abuse Mode is transferred as a comment using the ADIF format Not all programs support Mode Settings Some settings can be defined from the WOTA s Preference dialog box Eg e your Callsign only if you use an unregistered version of the program Please note TRX Manager always uses the registered callsign at startup e the comment to send when you disconnect file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 365 of 3
355. nsate a shift between CW Skimmer and the real frequency TRX Manager s settings Using TRX Manager and CW Skimmer together Telnet Link Pi Note Please launch TRX Manager BEFORE CW Skimmer to prevent CW Skimmer from opening the serial port Please open the TRX Manager s Terminal and under Telnet 1 or Telnet 2 connect CW Skimmer In a local network Host is always localhost 7300 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 195 of 365 Host ocahost7200 a2 B2 c2 D2 e2 F2 52 Ha Connecting CW Skimmer Now TRX Manager populates CW Skimmer s Spots like other spots if you set CW Skimmer on a new frequency TRX Manager populates the callsign and set up your transceiver in synchro with CW Skimmer Possible problems e if you note a shift between TRX Manager and CW Skimmer please adjust the Offset Hz parameter under Preferences Terminal until both programs are synchronized If frequencies are reversed swap I Q channels under CW Skimmer s Audio tab e relative positions of Spots may be shifted between TRX manager and CWSkimmer with Softrock IF setup file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 196 of 365 Digital Modes Interface with Flidigi Fldigi is a Digital modem program for Linux Free BSD OS X Windows XP NT W2K Vista and Win7 8 TRX Manager interfaces with Fidigi using the XML RPC protocol via Internet Ethernet Bi Note In principle this type of interfa
356. nsceiver The serial port for the main transceiver is opened as soon as the program starts and closes when you exit TRX Manager however it can be temporarily closed using the Transceiver Com Port submenu Whatever its state when you exit TRX Manager the com port is always activated at startup You can check the status of the com port and the transceiver selected from the Parameters My Configuration sub menu Control of a Sub Transceiver To control a Sub Transceiver you open the Sub Transceiver panel from the Transceiver Sub submenu Only Transceivers supported as Sub Transceiver see list are displayed in this menu file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 35 of 365 E About com port sub transceivers The sub transceiver s com port opens only as you open the Sub Transceiver window and closes when you closes this window Preferences The Transceiver s preferences are distinct for each Transceiver Band Plan excepted Transceiver model and Logging TX Power are also memorized for each Transceiver Preferences are accessible only during the time the corresponding transceiver is selected as Main Transceiver If you need a change in the Preferences for a Sub Transceiver please define it temporarily as Main from the Transceiver menu Definition the Operating Transceiver The Operating transceiver is the one activated for the DX Spots Web amp DX Cluster the Short Wave database the Logbook the DXC
357. nt from transmitting with the linear on prohibited segments or just after band changes or above a critical drive power Since TRX Manager does not control your linear amplifier directly control is provided either using a CAT function of the transceiver or a relay inserted in the PTT line between the transceiver and the linear amplifier this relay beeing itself controlled via a dedicated PIN of the parallel port defined under the band decoder settings Setup You can choose Control by e CAT This is the recommended option for TS 480 570 870 2000 transceivers The CAT function controls the state of Pin 3 of the Remote port LINEAR AMP function e LPT In that case the Band Decoder must be defined in Setup for a parallel port and properly wired You must indicate which PIN 2 9 of the parallel port you are using to control the relay you select a pin not used by the band decoder itself in the BCD codes of the band decoder you must indicate for this pin instead of 0 or 1 By default the selected pin goes to a HIGH state while OPR is ON Inhibit NOT checked if Inhibit is checked the pin goes to a HIGH state to force SBY Example see image above Pin 6 of the LPT port Band Decoder is used to control the relay High state OPR Low state SBY TRX Manager forces SBY above 65W If control of the linear amplifier is not possible via CAT or LPT TRX Manager provides two selections which may help to prevent from transmitting on prohibited segm
358. ntrol two transceivers Support for JST transceivers and receivers e V2 2 3 new DXCC Window e V2 2 2 Preference for Distances Km Mi e V2 2 1 Personalized Menus Office 2000 type e V2 2 More support for the FT 100 Support for the IC R75 ADIF Import fixes New registration code required New distribution policy CD only FT 1000MP and FT 920 fixes Terminal understands the nodes PC11 spot format e V2 1 Support for the FT 100 Support for the QRZ Pro CD Rom e V2 0 FT Manager becomes TRX Manager Support for the ICOM transceivers Support for the Kenwood transceivers new S Meter Floating and flat toolbars Sound Recorder with 3 modes Scanning Programmable manual DX Spot with icon showing the QSL s status for the DXCC Web Clusterand DX Cluster file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 358 of 365 Drag and drop ability of frequencies between windows Gray line DX Map Support fort both Log EQF V8 amp V9 format Remote control of a rig via packet Favorite Web link Support for French DDFM and DPF awards Support for the HAMCALL CD Rom Ability to Load Save the configuration of the FT 847 You have now to double click a spot to set the rig If you are using LOGic run TRX Manager FIRST file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 359 of 365 Distribution of TRX Manager Anyone distributing TRX Manager fo
359. o be compiled into a database for use from TRX Manager You have to follow this procedure 1 Please go to the FCC Web Site http wireless fcc gov uls index htm job transaction and download L_AMAT ZIP Amateur Radio Service Licenses The file is about 90 MB Extract EN DAT and AM DAT optional from this file RUN FCC_Call EXE distributed with TRX Manager and click the Setup button Fill in the required option Path for EN DAT AM DAT and FCC MDB AM DAT License Class info is optional Click the CREATE button in order to create the FCC MDB database Please be patient the process takes about 30 minutes for 790000 records per file You are now able to look up callsign from FCC_Call or from TRX Manager SALOVOT AWN Setting TRX Manager You have to set up TRX Manager for FCC callsign look up Please 1 Open the Preferences Software submenu Tyi 2 Under HAM Bases fill in the path for FCC MDB by clicking the open button a 3 Check the mark for automatic callsign lookup auto logging You are now able to look up US Callsigns from the ae Display FCC Database submenu 9 From the Logbook If the Auto logging option is checked the transfer of the data to the logbook is automated when you introduce a callsign into the callsign field of the logbook and press Enter keyboard or the Info il button of the Logbook the transfered data depend on your options for the Fields to transfer In summary e Enter or fetches the data int
360. o obtain the last 100 spots amp limit 100 onHF http new dxsummit fi api v1 spots content_type csv amp limit 100 amp include HF Practically when you use the Web version of DXSummit you can see your current filter as a query string in the URL field of your browser The full description of the API commands query strings can be found in the DX Summit Tutorial http new dxsummit fi tutorials 2 Simon s DX Cluster requires you use the CSV file format i e http www ham radio ch dxc top_50_all csv default See also the API s tutorial Home Technology file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 278 of 365 Setting up the Web Cluster Web Cluster requires some parameters to be entered from the Preferences Software Web Cluster tab E as follow e HTTP addresses URL for spots You may customize for the supported WebClusters the URL which matches your personal choices but it is preferable to avoid an URL with more than 250 spots Default parameters are for 1 DXSummit Spots ALL 50 2 DXScape Spots WW ALL 25 Delay between automatic downloads applies if Auto option and or the WebCluster s auto button G is checked option for automatic downloading spots from 1 or 2 URLs Stacked if checked Spots from successive downloads accumulate but TRX Manager checks for duplicates Spot status recommended DXCC Status of DX Spots are computed according to your current logbook MAP auto DX Spots are displayed o
361. o to the fields of the Logbook auto logging function performs a search but does NOT transfer the data You must use to transfer the data 3 Important notes e you can simultaneously use look up Callsigns from any CD Rom AND from the FCC Database e the FCC module is only activated for callsigns of the USA e the FCC module has a priority over all previously entered information s or any information extracted from a CD Rom e if more than one record is found the arrows of the tools bar jumps from one record to an other file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 289 of 365 HamQTH TRX Manager provides support for the free on line HamQTH database http www hamgth com by Petr OK2CQR owner of HamQTH com Settings You must have an account at HamQTH To activate HamQTH check HamQTH from the Preferences Software HAM Bases tab and fill in UserName and Pasword with your HamQTH account settings HamQTH can be used in addition or as a substitution to the others database e If QRZ COM is selected as Ham database and the HamQTH option is checked data from QRZ COM are automatically completed by the data extracted from HamQTH e If no Ham database is selected under Ham Database CD Rom None is selected HamQTH becomes the main Ham Database In that case only the CD Rom icon has the same effect that the HamQTH icon HO HAM Database lookup The HO Display HamQTH menu opens the HamQTH module from which a manu
362. odes and Filters switching Quick memories Undo Redo Repeater settings Keyboard shortcuts The Levels window The Monitoring offers the most used controls of a transceiver with pre set choices for the bandwidth But many other controls are generally supported by the most recent transceivers The Levels window completes the Monitoring with many additional controls like Squelch PBT IF Shift DSP AGC The Levels window opens with the Transceiver Levels submenu or the t button of the Monitoring The activated controls the shape and appearance of the window depend on the type of transceiver KM1 KM2 KM3 KM4 KM5 iow SET il rfl le VMI ale Sey pee apr 1 YM3 ma ete a ee NR co D keser J mon _vm5 Levels window FTDX 1200 Lastly if you need some other controls that are not provided by the Levels window you can use Macro commands either from the Monitoring window itself or using the TRX Command utility file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 88 of 365 DX Squelch If AF gain control is supported by your transceiver and according to the status of the Main toolbar s Tools DX Squelch button S amp AF is muted after a given period of inactivity The specified delay can be defined under the Band Plan tab of the Preferences AF Gain is set to its previous value as soon as you set a dx spot or you change the frequency file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en
363. of your amplifier by clicking the OPR button according to the current state of the amplifier Settings You must check the TUNE GAIN option from the Linear Reminder s Settings dialog LP 100 frame However if you don t use the functions below it is recommended you do NOT check this option Gain measurement It is necessary to proceed as follow 1 Memorizing the Drive power The Drive power without amplifier in line has to be memorized for each Segment and each Tune button 1 Disable OPR which opens the relay inserted in the PTT line your amplifier is not in line 2 Perform a Tune at reduced power Tune gt WITHOUT amplifier or Tune F if Tune gt is NOT available 3 The program switches LP 100 to Tune mode T 4 Thanks to the digital wattmeter the program measures the Drive power 5 Make sure the program stops the transmission automatically as soon as the measurement is done or stop the Tune manually 6 The program switches LP 100 back to Peak mode W Linear Reminder FWD 58T SWR 1 17 1 00kT gt 2 5 Measuring Drive power Please REPEAT the same operation while using Tune F Drive full power WITHOUT amplifier Then gradually as you are Tuning and making gain measurements for the different segments TRX Manager will memorize the Drive Power output for each Transceiver 1 4 consequently it is not necessary to repeat this operation each time you file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager
364. og file for a given contest is absolutely not necessary but you can still create a specific log if you prefer The way of logging is essentially the same than in normal mode except that all entries can be done much more quickly using the Contest frame only Please note In Contest mode TRX Manager uses the Expert s Logging mode warning messages NOT displayed 3 Logbook normal mdb New QSO CONTEST amp gt D 8 N 3 di VS DI7JC PA z i Logbook in Contest mode CW Toolbars activated Dupes are indicated by a red square Some useful shortcuts e Click Enter while the cursor is in the CALL field to populate other fields The cursor moves to the next useful position CTR S or F12 to Save a QSO CTRL I or F11 gives CALL field focus CTRL N to toggle New QSO Edit mode TAB to navigate from left to right F1 F8 to send a CW message CW M1 M8 if F11 F8 gt CW MSG checked under Preferences Logbook CtrI K sends the current message CtrI F12 stops the current message if possible F11 gives Logbook focus from the main window Eventually if Ultra Fast Logging is checked Preferences Software Logbook Fi2 or Enter populates the fields and save the QSO in one click e Ctrl QCycle Button Le CQ Sequencer It may be usefull to display the CW Toolbar in Contest mode See Preferences Logbook Q How to A CW Contest file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page
365. oke the TRX Manager s Windows Reset submenu for each layout in order to restore the default sizes of each window and or to delete the whole Registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software VB and VBA Program Settings FT Manager if more parameters are concerned TRX Tools exe delivered with TRX Manager allows various changes in the registry without opening TRX Manager or the Registry About the registration The Save Parameters function does not save your registration these registry keys are not transferable It is recommended your restore the parameters AFTER you register the software in some case restoring the parameters may erase your registration Saving restoring your personal files See also Installation Reinstallation and the note about the TRX Manager s folders structure All personal files such as Logbook database mdb SWL mdb MEM mem should be located in the AppData Local TRX Manager subfolders However if you have upgraded from an older version your files may be still located in the TRX Manager s subfolders depending on your version and option for Use AppData It is recommended that you backup all these subfolders warning Please never copy any EXE DLL OCX file from one computer to the other This is useless and can make a reinstallation very difficult and unstable The only way to install TRX Manager on a new computer is to use the Setup engine file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 27 o
366. ols exe to delete the whole registry key just before you unisntall TRX Manager file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 29 of 365 Troubleshooting guide Installation and use 9 Please read all This section summarises the most frequent problems communications excepted encountered during the installation or the use of TRX Manager Please read ALL See also e Communications e On line support How to delete and change parameters without opening TRX Manager If you can not open TRX Manager because of wrong settings and errors at startup you can delete or change some parameters without running the program TRX Manager stores all parameters and settings in the Registry The little program called TRX Tools exe and delivered in the TRX Manager s main folder allows you doing some operations on parameters without running TRX Manager or opening the Registry See also Saving your parameters TRX Tools available from the TRX Manager s Start menu About the system To run TRX Manager the minimum required version is Windows 95 SP1 TRX Manager has been tested on all versions of Windows up to Windows 10 32 bits and 64 bits Crash during installation In case of a crash during the setup process please make sure to exit all software anti viral software included A crash often occurs because Setup can not update the DLL loaded in memory by other software Please note that 256Mb RAM is the minimal requi
367. oming connections and an IP number which is your IP number Write down this IP number 4 Start TRX Managerand its Telnet terminal From the HOST text box connect to the IP number that you wrote down Login into the DXTelnet shell by typing your callsign 6 Now start a second DXTelnet session and connect to the CQDX IRC node CQDX IRC Spots should start flowing into TRXManager Ea Notes e writing down the IP number each time might not be very convenient if you telnet from TRXManager to 127 0 0 1 while ACCEPT_2 is active it should work in most cases e you may automate DXTelnet with one click The launcher utility embedded in DXTelnet can be configured to start both ACCEPT_2 and CQDX IRC automatically with one click So once configured the link between the two applications would be fast and easy file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 277 of 365 Web Cluster Web Cluster overview The software processes DX Spots available on some Internet WEB Clusters http Q Tip In most cases it is more efficient to connect a DX Cluster via Packet or Telnet using the Terminal The Web Cluster by default does not require any configuration but interactivity is limited the recent WebClusters are now using proprietary push modes that are not compatible with third party applications or requires a complex configuration Unlike WebClusters the telnet DX Clusters offer much more features and above all an instant inf
368. omizable from this dialog You may also toggle from one type to another by clicking the s meter The S Meter values are not displayed or irrelevant during a frequency change gt Related Topic e TRX Meter High precision S Meter Calibration You may calibrate the software s s meter in accordance with the s meter of your transceiver this calibration is done from the Preference transceiver tab dialog box S Meter frame by moving the dedicated slider S Meter Bargraph or Analog mode The S meter value is indicated in microvolts S9 50 uV below 30 MHz 5 uV above 30 MHz The Analog mode is displayed by default at startup The linear scale 0 10 displays the auxiliary meter values see below The Bargraph mode features a peak hold function The maximum s meter value is displayed and will be reset when beginning a new frequency change or after 2s An auxiliary bargraph displays the auxiliary meter values 713573 DM PT ITTiitt TTT 40 S Meter Scope mode This mode can display a graphical representation of the signal vs time The s meter displays the signal values for the last 30 seconds Auxiliary Meter E Meter If feedback of meter data is supported by your transceiver please choose the value to be read SWR Po ALC in the combo box an additional indicator analog or bargraph displays measurement of SWR COMP ALC during transmission In addition different other choices are possible e OLE
369. on once the Split Memory is set up and if the Monitoring Window has the focus the X key keyboard shortcut automatically recalls the Split Memory 44 12 4 0 0 An instant digit by digit tuning of the sub VFO frequency is also supported dual RX transceivers Tip A typical use for this function is to be able to copy RTTY in FSK mode with a sound card program and transmit on SSB the split is usually about 2 13 khz This makes it possible to change frequencies reasonably quickly Auto QSX DX Spots While clicking a DX Clusteror Web Cluster spot TRX Manager automatically sets the TX frequency if any split condition is specified in the comment field This feature may be disabled from the Preference submenu under Terminal Auto QSX file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 91 of 365 Undo Redo The Undo and Redo functions main Toolbars are running in conjunction with the Monitoring window They recall the last visited frequencies When a frequency change is done the software keeps in memory each frequency visited up to 10 frequencies e The Undo button goes back to the last frequency visited e The Redo ca button cancels effect of Undo file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 92 of 365 S Meter and Multi Meter The S Meter of the Monotoring features two modes of operation three appearances to be selected from the Transceiver Layout dialog All colors of the s meter are cust
370. onitoring update for firmware V 3 11 OmniVII fix for OD FT DX9000 Power ON OFF function added CAT button ev 4 3 5 Remote Commands for SteppIR Interface eV 4 3 4 Special Event Callsigns Support for OMNI RIG s Library by Alex VE3NEA Interface with Google Earth file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 346 of 365 e V 4 3 3 K3 updated NRD 535 updated IC 7800 updated some changes for ICOMs Help updated e V 4 3 2 Support for LP 100A Digital WattMeter by N8LP Warning You have to reconfigure your LP 100 from Setup TRX1 1 Support for IC 7200 Interface with CW Skimmer by Alex VE3NEA Panorapic Spectrum Analyser for SDR TRX Pan Logbook Export by Operator now possible Support for RT 21 Rotor Green Heron Engineering Slave IP adresses are shown Many fixes optimization and new functions for Elecraft K3 e V 4 3 1 Fix for older Kenwood ev 4 3 0 Synchronizing two controllers now possible Synchro 1 or Synchro 2 Band decoder now controllable by Segments of the band plan K3 LPBridge option eV 4 2 9 Elecraft K3 Filter selections updated various fixes or improvements ev 4 2 8 Elecraft K3 s tools levels window eV 4 2 7 QSL labels printing fix for Vista Rotator Support for MicroHAM Interface e V 4 2 6 Support for ICOM IC 7700 e V 4 2 5 Update for FCC_Call Command line switch for TRX1 4 FTDX9000 FT
371. ons Day Month Year OFF MHz Mode gt gt gt i R gt gt gt QSL RCVD Sent Via Band RSTR RSTS Gh An editing tab to input a new QSO or edit an existing QSO A listing tab a8 using a configurable grid for a general view of the data base QSO selection or sorting by any field An Explorer tab es which displays a Hierarchical view of the database A data control navigation bar to navigate inside the data base Setting up your Preferences Before you use the Logbook it is recommended you set up some Parameters under Preferences Software dialog Logbook tab Fields by default e RST S sent or R received fixed Contest format CQWW 5914 customized e QSL S sent or R received e QSL S Y gt QSLSDate field filled in with date of the day when you update this field e QSL Sent via to indicate if a QSL has been sent via bureau direct e Message to be printed on Labels e Power and Transceiver Auto or User defaults to be automatically added in the corresponding fields of the Logbook Auto power requires a connected wattmeter e Callsign Operator field filled in with the registered Callsign Suffix if needed such as P M 2 e Suffix a suffix such as P M 2 can be added to the Operator field Check Suffix and fill in the text box with the desired Suffix e User defined logbook s field title Track by default Behavior The Copy check box provides r
372. op up Please click the Properties button for the device you are using Click theAdvanced tab and under Default Format select the highest sample rate and resolution that you will use with your sound card typically 24bits 192000Hz for an EMU202 close the sound form Now please configure your sound card using the utility provided with your driver i e the EMU s control panel and configure it for the same settings file C Help index htm Page 328 of 365 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 329 of 365 ps z2 Line In Properties x General Levels Default Format Select the sample rate and bit depth to be used when running in shared mode 2 channel 24 bit 192000 Hz Studio Quality v Configuring an EMU202 for 192kHz Launch TRX Manager Ea Note Instructions below may be specific for the use with TRX Manager if necessary please see LPBridge or N4PY helps systems for more information Click Start gt to start the analysing If you use a fixed reference a vertical line shows the current frequency of your transceiver The current frequency is always centered Inside of the grids Left click the display spectrum to set up your transceiver point to click Frequency changes Right click the display to set up the TX frequency When using LP Bridge left click changes the VFO A frequency and right click changes the VFO B frequency which usually controls the TX frequency when in
373. operation requires with very low bandwidth requirements even practicable via Packet at 1200 Bauds This standard mode of remote control described below and called standard remote control mode works with any transceiver BUT features a generic user interface the same for all transceivers However many functions are supported and macros can be defined for particular needs An enhanced mode called Real Mode allows using your transceiver remotely with TRX Manager almost exactly as if you are controlling the transceiver locally supports opening of the Transceiver Levels window However it requires a fast network it is not available with all transceivers and controlling one transceiver with two software simultaneously may be somewhat disconcerting This is why this mode requires a good experience of the standard mode and understanding of how TRX Manager works so please DO NOT START configuring TRX Manager in real mode first J Standard control requires you consult E Remote control settings Operation Transmission of Audio J Syntax of commands See also e Alternatives to remote control e Real remote control mode e Web Server Requirements You must have at least a transceiver and its interface a local network or a good access to the Internet or two stations equipped with VHF TNC for a control via packet two computers with TRX Manager installed and running a voice link VHF Phone line Skype Princi
374. or a home made one Joystick control is supported by the Monitoring module which must be opened TRX Manager will use the default joystick configuration on a sound card or USB port Activation and functions Setting the Joystick is done from the Joystick tab of the Preferences Transceiver Once Joystick control has been enabled each axis of the Joystick must be enabled and calibrated separately If one axis is not detected TRX Manager automatically disables it in order to avoid an inopportune frequency drift Please note if TRX Manager is configured in SERVER mode see Remote control the Joystick does not have any effect X Y Axis ailerons and elevator These axes tune the frequencies by the step generated by the program The step is variable according to the position of the Joystick X Axis variably scans while Y Axis increases or to decreases the effect of the variable scanning In order to understand how the tuning step is calculated you may observe the step displayed by the program according to the position of the X Y Axis R Axis rudders This axis controls the frequencies in two ways by default R Axis has the same effect than X Axis but the step may be different If Internal Tuning is checked the step is fixed and is determined by the scanning function of the transceiver This give more precise tuning but this option may not run with all transceivers It is especially recommended in remote control mode If this function is not av
375. ording to the Preferences and the selected mode You can click the Normalize button S of the Transceiver menu to normalize the Tone and move the frequency of your transceiver accordingly NOR is equivalent to the Fldigi s QSY function It is highly recommended you only use the Fldigi s user interface to control the RX TX state Fldigi communicates with TRX manager which controls your transceiver using the PTT mode you have defined from Setup TRX1 4 or the DIG CAT Commands of the DIG Preferences A slight delay is possible depending on your transceiver this is why a PTT delay is adjustable from Fldigi Q Maximizing TRX Manager from Fldigi It may be sometime difficult to maximize TRX Manager from the taskbar while Fldigi is running This is caused by the communication loop running even if the application is minimized You can retry several time or just type MAX or in the call field from Flidigi to maximize TRX Manager DX Spotting TRX Manager can detect a spot with RTTY PSK31 PSK63 in the comment field and set the digital mode and offset accordingly To enable this function you must select under Preferences Software DX Spots e a mode for RTTY LSB USB FSK FSK R FM and PSK LSB USB DATA FM e an offset for AFSK Mark frequency 2125Hz by default and PSK 1500Hz by default Comment RATTY __ PSK AFSK OFFSET PSK Hz IV Auto OSX recommended settings is Notes e Offset in FSK Data or FM mode is supposed
376. ories as split frequencies TRX Manager can NOT read the memory channels content Filters The JST receivers and transceivers support 3 filter selections per mode The program allows you to choose any filter bandwidth however the display may differ from the actual selection See also Mode and filters file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 80 of 365 Other brands CODAN NGT Select CODAN in Setup By convention TRX Manager adresses the CODAN NGT s Channels by their name or label from 01 to 99 Consequently you have to rename all names by using only 01 02 03 99 RACAL 6790 Select RACAL in Setup and fill in the Address field After you restart TRX Manager press the CATbutton a CAT control in order to activate remote control This mode takes over control of the radio there is NO manual control from the radio controls while in this mode not even the tuning dial CAT ON is absolutely required for scanning or controlling the receiver from the Monitoring however tuning a spot using DXor Web Cluster tuning a SW Station does not require activating CAT mode Also displaying the current frequency mode of the receiver does not require CAT ON By default TRX Manager uses CW mode with BFO Prior to use the CW mode you have to set up Offset at least ONCE by setting up Pitch from the Edit Pitch submenu or from the Preferences Transceiver dialog Later on TRX Manager retains the correct Pitch Offset is pos
377. ormat required by TRX Manager A wrong format can cause malfunction and erratic behavior of TRX Manager As a precaution you should backup the original prefix mdb database before doing any change At any moment you may cancel your changes by using the Cancel button Please note the Prefix database Prefix mdb is updated each time you update TRX Manager while the Special CallSigns database specialcallsigns mdb is personal and preserved during program update Editing The Prefix mdb database contains two tables the Prefix table and the DXCC table Prefix and DXCC tabs are related to the corresponding tables of the database You must edit the database from the grid itself You have to move to the last record in order to add an entry To validate a new entry click on any existing entry To delete an entry click the Delete button The Cancel button allows you to exit without saving the changes Make sure you check all new entries It is very important to check the right association between a prefix and a DXCC entry The Prefix table This table keeps all prefix combinations and associations 3000 entries The Prefix table includes the following fields Prefix DXCC Longitude Latitude Continent CQ Zone ITU Zone Territory This table allows you to associate a given prefix with a DXCC country and any of these geographical data Ex Notes Example you may associate VKOIR to VKO H DXCC Heard Island or distinguish
378. ormation what is of great importance for DXIng Internet Explorer IE 4 or later is required on your computer Related Topics e Web Cluster s Spots e Watch List advanced users Supported WebCluster servers TRX Manager is compatible with the following servers New DX Summit http new dxsummit fi see note 1 DXScape http www dxscape com Simon s DX Cluster http cluster sdr radio com see note 2 DX Summit discontinued http oh2aq kolumbus com http www dxsummit fi Asia Web Cluster discontinued http dx bgtelecom ru Of course Web Cluster spotting requires a connection to the Internet TRX Manager uses the Windows s default parameters for this connection If you use a Firewall it will have to be to set not to block the Internet connections established with TRX Manager is Notes 1 New DX Summit requires you use the API commands with a CSV content content_type csv The TRX Manager s default URL is for ALL Spots as follow http new dxsummit fi api v1 spots content_type csv You can add filters using the APIs amp Include amp Exclude as follow To include HF only amp include HF http new dxsummit fi api v1 spots content_type csv amp include HF To exclude UHF SHF amp exclude VHF UHF SHF http new dxsummit fi api v1 spots content_type csv amp exclude UHF SHF To include 5MHz only amp include 5MHz http new dxsummit fi api v1 spots content_type csv amp include 5MHz T
379. ostal address mandatory E mail address mandatory aa n Please give us a reliable email address You will receive the link to your download via email Callsigns Callsigns are optional but strongly recommended Your full name will be used by default If necessary you may request a new file registered to your new callsign or to a special personal callsign free of charge during the 3X years of free downloadable update Up to three callsigns are permitted see License It is preferable to notify the different registered callsigns when ordering We may ask you to prove that they are personal file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 337 of 365 Registering TRX Manager Any version or copy of TRX Manager Licensed V5 X shall be registered Please install the licensed copy using instructions provided and your personal file SETUP_TRXXXX_IDYYY exe where XXX is the version number and YYY your customer ID To run the installation kit you need a password which is included in the instructions for your download The password is easy to remember and prevents any mixing between files each file is personal After the program is installed it starts the first time as unregistered Registering the program requires you confirm the validity of your personal data After a first installation the Registration dialog pops up However in case of a previous version was installed already the Registration form is not displayed and
380. ot or any other icon of frequency must be dropped into the data control lower part of the logbook s window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 240 of 365 Editing a QSO To select a QSO for edition you click the corresponding row of the sting E to make that QSO current Then select Edit E tab and the log book toggles to the edit mode The new QSO button looks as unpressed the title bar shows Edit Mode and the fields take the colors of the grid this last functionality can be disabled by unchecking the Edit Color check box under Preferences LogBook After changing a field from the Edit tab if you click in another record your changes will be discarded and not saved You have to save the change into the database using the Log button It is also possible to delete a contact by pressing the delete button or by right clicking the corresponding line However after changing a field directly from the Listing tab if you click in another record your changes are saved E Notes e Itis possible to toggle from new QSO mode to Edit mode by pressing the new QSO button k this button acts as a toggle The fields of the new QSO are saved in memory but not in the log when you toggle to Edit mode e Click the column header button of the Listing to sort the logbook by that column Context menu From the Listing tab 4 a context menu right click in a record allows you deleting and logging off a
381. otator 2 a warning may pop up Rotator control The rotator is controlled from the DXCC windows IngqICSauUT VE3NFK Locator JNO5 The rotating button i rotates the antenna the stopbutton stops it The direction may be set for short path or long path according to the button selection It is also possible to select any direction by moving the slider and then to rotate the antenna by pressing the rotating button With some rotors the Stop button also polls the rotator for its current azimuth Es Notes e the DX Map windows is interfaced with the DXCC windows any click on the map affects the azimuth indication e the stop button doesn t work for all interfaces and rotators warning Because of the ease of remote controlling you may forget the mechanical limitations of your rotator please make sure that you read and respect the factory limitations Satellite interface The Satellite Interface supports a direct control of the rotator in Azimuth and Elevation with some rotators see above If you wish your rotator being controlled in Elevation please check the Setup s Elevation option and indicate the maximum elevation 90 by default The Step combo in degrees makes it possible to specify the increment for the automatic control file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 225 of 365 DX map TRX Manager provides an azimuthal projection of the 25 last DX Spots or the NCDXF s HF Bea
382. ots relayed by the WebServer are those received from the Telnet Packetor WebCluster TRX Manager s interface if active using the filters defined under the Preferences of the Terminal or of the WebCluster Using the Web Interface From the Server computer which controls the station please launch TRX Manager and the Monitoring If needed launch the WebCluster or connect a Telnet Cluster to relay spots Activate the Web Server Transceiver Web Server submenu using the OPEN button From the remote computer or device please launch its Internet browser and connect to TRX Manager by typing in the Server s address in the URL field of the browser click the GO button of the brower If you connect from a local network you use a local address such as http 192 If you connect from the Internet you must use the Internet IP of the router If the defined port is not 80 you must specify the port by adding the suffix nn nn port to the web address i e lt FONT gt http 192 168 1 100 8500 if 8500 is the specified port If a Password is requested a welcome page displays Type in the Password and click Enter If the Password is valid the Web Interface is displayed file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 178 of 365 192 168 1 100 TRX MANAGER WEE S TRX MANAGER FODEX ELECRAFT K3 RX 1X STATUS 7 032 00 7 032 00 35WANT1 AUTO CWO 40K RECEIVE 0 SPOT METER S METER CW 6 1pV S6 CONTROL
383. ou may also use the Squelch to control the scanning the program resumes the scanning if the carrier drops only if the Monitoring is running The duration of the Pause during scanning 10s by default and the Scanning Speed 30 by default are defined under the Transceiver tab of the Preferences This scanning is not related to the scanning of the transceiver however the program reads if available the status of each channel if the channel is to be skipped by the transceiver the program also skips this channel It is easy to change the status for scanning from the Channels window by right clicking on the channel and choosing the Skip submenu From the tool bar you start the scanning in descending ascending order and stop it The slider sets up the time delay for the pause The Stop check box stops the scanning on a busy channel then the scanning resumes when the signal level or the squelch drops down file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 108 of 365 Creating memory files The program allows you to create memories files on hard disk using the TRX Manager s file format MEM or the FTBasic s file format CSV From the main tool bar click Transceiver Open rs to load a file of memories into your transceiver Click Transceiver Save to save the content of your transceiver memory on hard disk MEM files TRX Manager Please read the file section for more information about the mem file structure and do
384. ou must have your transceiver powered OFF TRX Manager can take few seconds to detect the OFF state and you click the POWER button Levels window a dialog prompts from which you choose the com port the line to activate DTR or RTS and the duration of the Burst signal You can choose any free com port the K3 KX3 s com port file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 74 of 365 provided at least one line DTR or RTS is not selected in setup and available for this function Once you configuration is done you click the POWER ON button of the dialog to send the signal Power ON dialog box This window prompts each time you click POWER while your transceiver is powered OFF Spectrum analyser and Pan Adapters Various options are possible e See TRX Pan A Panoramic Spectrum Analyser for SDR or Panadaptor connected to the IF output Audio sound card and KXV3 required e See also Synchronization with PowerSDR IF or NaP3 using the K3 Synchro mode alternative to LP Bridge K3 KX3 Graphic virtual control screens K3 and KX3 have specific graphic control screens similar to their real front panels Please use External Elecraft FP Submenu to display the virtual front panel Functions are very similar to the K3 KX3 s front panel functions however difference may exist generally due to the limitation of the protocol ELECRAFT KX3 TRANSCEIVER nove Ae DATA AS ar EA Tuning methods e Use left right mouse clicks
385. ow is still available and additional controls including macro commands not supported by the Monitoring window can be used from the IP Control window The Levels window is not available in this mode see Real Control mode for using the Levels window Q Operating tips e The program can check the status of the remote transceiver from time to time using the Update button of the Monitoring e The behavior of TRX Manager in Remote mode may be different from its behavior with a local transceiver this mention especially applies to the scanning commands and filters This is because the interface is simplified to be able to work with all the different transceivers that TRX supports The commands available are very different from one transceiver to another please see your transceiver manual to check the availability of certain commands via Computer especially the ability to switch to TX via the serial port VOX control etc e If your transceiver features a step by step incremental tuning it is remotely controllable from the Monitoring s Up Down buttons or by using a Joystick R Axis This function unfortunately not available with all transceivers gives more precise and smooth tuning e Preferences transceiver most of the preferences such as Tuner Antenna Linear RF Power Band decoder filters selection Band Plan must be defined from the SERVER computer However AUTO MODE is selectable from the CLIENT computer Wattmeter
386. ow the frequency TRX2 IC 703 DX Spots From the DXClusteror the WebCluster windows you may send spots to a Sub Transceiver without opening the corresponding panel and or even if it is not the Operating Transceiver 74 o i OM3Pg UNFCI G file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 116 of 365 Advanced features The DX Bar window The DX Bar window in the Tools DX Bar submenu synthesizes the most important information and controls of TRX Manager for the Operating Transceiver in one easy to operate panel Unlike other windows the DX Bar window is displayed mm outside the main application and remains On Top according to the position of the On Top toggle S Thus by opening the DX Bar window and while using another program you can keep an eye on the traffic and the operation of your transceiver Tip To understand all the functions of the DX Bar window it is advisable to have a good understanding of the controls and the functions of TRX Manager Only some functions are described here Indeed the DX Bar duplicates some of the commands available from the main toolbar as well as from the other modules Some of these modules must be active especially the Monitoring the Terminalor the Web Cluster so that their functions can be used in the DX Bar Transceiver control The DX Bar window displays the current frequency mode and filter Each digit of the display is click able a left right c
387. own the software BEFORE shutting turning off the transceiver However you may set a DX Spot or a SWL frequency without setting on the CAT Mode The Monitoring shows a variable tuning control warning During CAT Control manual control is NOT possible Limitations No S Meter function Not available through the FT 767GX CAT interface therefore the Band Scope is not available Filters Filters are not controllable via the CAT system Memory channels CTCSS tone data are supported FT 8 tone squelch unit required However you have to manually switch on the T Enc or the T SQL function from the front panel Warning if you don t own the FT 8 unit do not check Enc or Dec Tuner Tuner functions and status are not controllable via the CAT system file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 50 of 365 Operation with FT 817 FT 857 FT 897 This section has been written by Rich KOFUN Due to the available CAT Codes provided by Yaesu there are some limitations in the interface provided by TRX Manager with the FT 817 857 897 The best way to understand what is possible is to take few minutes and review the available CAT Commands on page 72 FT 817 62 FT 897 115 FT 857 of your operating manual Operational Notes VFO A B With the CAT Codes it is only possible to switch from one VFO to the other There is no way for TRX Manager to read if the FT 817 857 897 is on VFO A or VFO B The TRX Manager interface has been mo
388. p folder by default since TRX Manager V5 X Restoring your parameters To restore your parameters you have to exit TRX Manager and double click the TRX Manager reg file or use the TRX Tools software delivered with TRX Manager Restore Parameters command Pay attention to the file paths which will be restored with your settings Exporting the parameters It is sometime possible to restore your parameters into an other computer by running the TRX Manager reg file Please pay attention to the file paths and com port numbers which must be the same ones as on the computer on which the TRX Manager reg file has been created You must then use the same organization of your hard disk the same system the same com ports the same UserName and the same screen resolution A warnings incompatibilities 1 Do not export the parameters into an other computer if it does not have the same screen resolution or does not have the same folders structure and the same UserName 2 Use the reg file with caution from a 32 bit system to a 64 bits system file paths of the program file folder are generally different between 32 and 64 bit systems However if you don t use this folder to store your data this should not be an issue 3 To avoid any crash at startup due to a different enumeration of the com ports it is recommended to set ALL DEVICES NONE using TRX Tools before running the new installation If this operation is done by mistake you may have to inv
389. parated by a slash If you prefix the data with i e FC12FB the data are sent as is without preamble adresses and suffix and you can add a preamble that is different from the one of the transceiver under control ex to control a linear amplifier Remote control mode In remote control mode you can send commands to the server computer from Client You use the same syntax as above depending on the type of remote transceiver you are using ICOM Comp OFF 164400 You may also send a remote control commandto the Server computer You must use the TRX Manager s remote control syntax and add as preamble Example Disconnect RCO Others generally not supported Setting up a macro slider You right click the cursor of macro slider to set up a macro commands From the combo box you select either STRING for a Kenwood Yaesu Elecraft transceiver some others or you select ICOM which uses hexadecimal data You use the same syntax as above but you add the necessary digits for a variable command The command string includes as many joker as number of digits required by the protocol The Min and Max values are always decimal starting from 0 to 255 generally but not always TheCaption field allows you to display a short name for the function CEN a as a OC cre Audio Gain Kenwood Bi Example ICOM Command for AF gain is 14010000 to 14010255 Syntax 1401 4 digits required with Min 0 and Ma
390. pe your message and press the Enter key the corresponding line will be transmitted A buffer allows you to type the next lines without being obliged to wait for the end of the transmission Characters mode Press the Keyboard button em in order to engage the character mode and then begin typing of your message the transmission starts immediately The Enter key generates the K code Using macros Some different macros are available from the Insert menu This function is not available in characters mode but it is still possible to use quick macros made up of special characters Quick logging The interface displays the logbook s most often used fields Log frame is switchable using the Log s toolbar button Please fill in these fields in order to activate the corresponding macros Press the Log button CTRL S or F12 to log and save the QSO or the Paste To Log E button Ctrl P to log without saving the QSO in order to let you to complete all fields file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 183 of 365 CW Interface settings This section describes how to configure the TRX Manager for CW Keying A TRX Manager as CW Generator B Keying using the internal CAT Keyer of the transceiver C Keying using Winkey A TRX MANAGER AS CW GENERATOR TRX Manager generates CW and keys the RTS DTR lines of a serial port or the Select line of a parallel port You configure the CW keyer from the CW tab of the Parameters Setup dia
391. pecified field or fields Operators Logical operators The logical operators are used to compose an expression that records must satisfy to be included in the query results Available operators are AND OR NOT Relational operators Relational operators allow the comparison of the relative values of two expressions Available operators are the following lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to Equal to lt gt Not equal to BETWEEN Determines whether the value of an expression falls within a specified range of values LIKE Compares a string expression to a pattern you can specify the complete value for example Like F6DEX or use wildcard characters to find a range of values for example Like F6 Syntax The conventions are the followings SQL statements are not case sensitive string expressions are enclosed in quotes alpha decimal separator is the dot 14 195 date use US convention enclosed in mm dd yyyy logical values are True or False Examples SELECT FROM LOGBOOK WHERE QSL_RCVD Y ORDER BY DATE_ON this query selects all records from the logbook table for which QSL received is YES records are sorted by ascending date SELECT DISTINCT IOTA FROM LOGBOOK WHERE QSL_RCVD Y this query selects the distinct values for the IOTA field for which QSL received is Yes file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 320 of 365
392. ple of operation TRX Manager implements its own client server interface and can exchange commands between both stations using Windows networking capabilities UDP and TCP protocols are supported A strict syntax has been implemented such as commands controlling a transceiver and are automatically generated by the program but may also be entered on the keyboard The Packet connections must be processed through the Terminal The Transceiver Remote TRXsub menu opens the remote control window which allows setting up your network and controlling the remote station Transceiver Rotor CW Keyboard SteppIR through a generic interface file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 160 of 365 Limitations TRX Manager allows control of virtually all elements of your remote station economically without any other equipment than a second networked computer It s a fun experience and quite effective in DXing That said interactivity is necessarily limited compared to the use in local control mode Supported features are less extensive and limited to the display of critical data and or to the control of your remote equipment using a keyboard transceiver rotor keyer There are also efficient other solutions such as serial port servers Remoterig generally also compatible with TRX Manager Which method works the best depends on the transceiver that you are using other elements of your station and the speed and reliabili
393. ponder mode Once the proper shift and Doppler compensation have been applied using one the above procedures you may note the TX and RX frequencies displayed by the interface are constantly corrected This is normal while the Doppler compensation is not engaged Before any QSY you have first to engage the Trace mode Now each change of the RX frequency involves the same change of the TX frequency And as soon as you engage the Doppler compensation DOP working frequencies of the file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 311 of 365 satellite become stable and TRX Manager tracks the satellite by the defined Step Hz While working the satellite you can still do a manual QSY using the tuning dial of your transceiver TRX Manager recalculates the working frequencies of the transponder in real time and tracking resumes from the current frequencies Listening on the fly Tracking a satellite on the fly i e without knowing its working frequencies amounts to using linear transponder satellite by 1 Adjusting the receive frequency on your transceiver or receiver 2 Pressing the TRSP button to capture the satellite s working frequencies 3 Engaging the Doppler compensation by pressing DOP Additional information Functions that are not fully described above are the following one SAT Satellite mode for compatible transceivers TRX activates a second transceiver for transmit ANT activates rotator
394. port for CTCSS DEC SHIFT OFFSET commands Repeaters Function to save the parameters of the Registry Internet Callsign Look up option for External Browser Current Spot new keyboard shortcut F4 Support for the LogBook of The World eV 3 5 9 ICOM Fix for S Meter sensitivity Fixes for FT 767GX CTCSS LPT Port driver updated TVICLPT 1 3 DXBar Optimization Monitoring keypad band switch Bd button file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 352 of 365 Satellite support for WXTrack CW Keyer Speed from 1 wpm to 50 wpm Remote interface Frequency up to 1300MHz Prosistel rotator fix LogBook Duplicate submenu QuickLog mode eV 3 5 8 ICOM F2 function VFO causes an error fixed eV3 5 7 Update for the AlfaSpid controllers RS232 TRX Synchro new version and new Dual Receive mode IC 706MKIIG WFM IC 703 746PRO Tuner disabled at startup fixed TS 2000 Scanning speed improved SUB ON OFF button PBT DSP display New menu Transceiver Com Port Off option ICOM Kenwood only New menu External for external programs Satellite if TRX2 ICOM TRX Manager reads the TX Frequency Terminal Telnet DX Spots broadcasting via Packet eV 3 5 6 IC 706MKIIG 746PRO 756PRO 756PRO2 R75 R9000 R7100 New controls Levels window preferences and display for 3 filters if available Support for IC 703 Support for FT 212 412
395. pot s right click if a valid IOTA is found in the comment and liorta checked under Preferences DX Spots amp Sloe Na 104 fh Ba it IOTA V 17 2013 01 04 ersce IOTA Islands NA 104 St Kitts and Nevis IOTA Window Functions of the IOTA toolbar e searching for IOTA please type the IOTA reference and click Enter or g e copying information to the clipboard 32 e browsing the RSGB website e displaying Google Earth S or DX Atlas e updating the IOTA full list fulllist xml from the RSGB website E Award tracking The Display Award Summary 10TA i submenu displays the IOTA Summary Selection by Continent or Region is possible WI West Indies BI British islands AI Antartic Islands file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 216 of 365 co IOTA Summary W7G aoo lee fao Ascension Island aoe ayine Eo Diego Garcia Island E 3 Pantelleria sland E E AF 022 Steer tend a yy AF024 Sine F Q f TO Ma a a AF 073 Sfax Region Group a AF 086 Cape Verde Windward KAT JB IOTA Summary file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 217 of 365 WAZ WAS Summary The Display Awards WAZ WAS submenus open the summary for WAZ Worked All Zones or WAS Worked All States WAZ and WAS have a very similar appearance All combinations of modes and bands may be displayed Initially the combinations are displayed for all modes mixed
396. r any kind of remuneration must first contact Laurent Labourie for authorization This authorization will be granted to distributors with the following conditions 1 Only the EVALUATION version of TRX Manager Demo may be distributed Distributing the commercial version or any file of a registered version is strictly prohibited 2 TRX Manager Demo MUST be included in a compilation of shareware demoware or freeware programs 3 Neither the software nor its documentation may be amended or altered in any way 4 By granting you the right to distribute the evaluation copy of TRX Manager you do not become the owner in any form 5 Laurent Labourie accepts no responsibility in case the program malfunctions or does not function at all 6 The distribution fee should only cover the cost of copying or distribution Under no circumstance should payment of such fees be understood to constitute legal ownership or a license fee file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 360 of 365 Contributions TRX Manager was created based upon the success of Soft990 for MS DOS and FT Manager for Yaesu Some users helped me in improving the software and gave me new ideas that resulted in TRX Manager Communication with users has been a real pleasure for all I must pay homage to my wife Evelyne for her patience and thank my children Claire Camille and Estelle TRX Manager took a lot of family time I also offer special thanks to all of
397. r are displayed in a simplified format A left click or a double click on a spot according to the option for Drag and Drop under the Preferences Software tab sets the program and the transceiver appropriately while a right click momentarily displays the spotter comments and your progress towards the DXCC award for that country A right click on a DX Spot displays the DXCC award progress and the comment Tools bar The tools bar duplicates some buttons available from the main tools bar or from various modules It is configurable so that more functions may be available e The Paste button E opens the logbook and inputs the fields for the current Spot however the QSO is not saved you need to click on the log button of the logbook The Log button reopens TRX if it has been minimized and does not paste input the current Spot e The DX Squelch toggle mutes the transceiver until a spot is activated or there is a frequency change or the delay specified under the Preferences Transceiver Band Plan tab has expired whereupon the receiver is reactivated and if AF a control is supported AF is set to its previous gain e The Auto QSY toggle for each new DX Spot received from the Terminal not WebCluster the transceiver is set to the corresponding frequency The status of the spots for which this function is activated is configurable from the corresponding drop down same icon of the Terminal e The Operating Transceiver can be sel
398. r each HAM band If TX Power is blank the program does not set any value These settings are saved for each transceiver separately TRX1 4 they are direct commands which are not supported by all the transceivers DX Squelch If AF gain control is supported by your transceiver and according to the status of the Main toolbar s Tools DX Squelch button 4 AF is muted after a given period of inactivity The specified delay can be defined under the Band Plan tab of the Preferences AF Gain is set to its previous value as soon as you set a dx spot or you change the frequency file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 130 of 365 Band Decoder TRX manager can control external accessories such as automatic selection of antenna linear amplifier external controller by using band data provided on a parallel port or commands sent to an RS232 port Q Tip Kenwood does not implement any band data directly on the radio and there is no Kenwood format ICOM provides the band data via an analog voltage signal For the ICOM and Kenwood radios the TRX Manager s band decoder provides a simple solution for the remote control of antenna switches or other accessories Parallel port The default format for the band data is compatible with the most popular software CT NA TR Log Yaesu accessories and many third party device Band Decoder Relay Box In addition the band decoder is programmable which allows you customizing i
399. r precision 8 it takes some hours to fill in all the screen but only a few minutes with the lower precision 1 In Manual mode you must set up the scanning Step in KHz Center frequency Any frequency allowed by your transceiver Sometime you may wish to define the lower and upper end of the spectrum to avoid a mental arithmetic click the button El to display the corresponding text boxes Width Half width of spectrum in KHz by step of 50 kHz file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 114 of 365 Sub Transceivers Sub Transceiver Panel Up to three Sub Transceivers can be controlled at the same time simultaneously with the Main Transceiver The Sub Transceiver control window opens from the Transceiver Sub submenu Only Transceivers supported as Sub Transceiver are displayed in this menu see List TRx4 TS 5905 Co je fss Sub Transceiver panel It should be also noted that the corresponding serial port only opens when you load the panel and closes as soon as you unload it Tuning methods The Sub Transceiver panel uses the same tuning methods as the Monitoring e Tuning knob and Programmable scanning Dial frame e Tuning by digits left right click of RX Frequency changes one digit while holding the mouse button scanning Preferences A Sub Transceiver uses its own Preferences in particular for Rotators Tuner Power band decoder However Preferences are only accessib
400. r to restore the default sizes Last screen layout lost at startup main window empty Please note that after a crash and in order to prevent automatic opening of the windows and a new crash to occur TRX Manager leaves the Previous option Preferences Software unchecked You may have to check this option again for normal use Uninstallation reinstallation of TRX Manager In case of serious problems reinstalling TRX Manager may be a solution In that case only it is better if you uninstall TRX Manager before reinstalling it af Note After a system upgrade you need to reinstall TRX manager because the new system erases your registration In that case you don t need and it is not recommended to uninstall TRX Manager Other problems with the software TRX Manager has been carefully tested but as with any software it is certain that some bugs remain As TRX Manager is not a classic commercial product you have the opportunity to ask the author for a correction Also do not forget that each transceiver is different a CAT command available for the FT 920 may not be available with the TS 590 or the FT 817 See your manual to check if the desired command is available You may also see the web site for the latest information or update at http www trx manager com support htm file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 33 of 365 Transceiver control Transceivers Overview and Settings TRX Manager can config
401. racked spot is received please configure the DX Mail frame under Preference Terminal restricted to registered users only Since a large amount of emails can be interpreted as spamming by your SMTP provider the Each 5 minutes option is recommended If necessary the STOP button temporarily stops the transmission of the DXMails however they are still memorized 3 Limitations Please consider the following limitations of the internal mailer of TRX Manager You must be a subscriber of a SMTP server outgoing mail and be connected to the Internet The program carries out a direct connection with your SMTP server without using your mailbox It may be that this module does not function with certain SMTP servers It is not possible to attach files file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 318 of 365 Data base compacting When making changes to your database the file can become fragmented and its size increases TRX Manager allows you to compact any mdb database via the Tools DB Compacting submenu A compacted database takes up less disk space and runs faster A Please note e You can only compact Access 97 databases with mdb as the extension e Make a backup copy of your file before compacting or opening it from Access e It is not possible to compact a database which is already opened you have to close the SWL and LogBook windows e TRX Manager uses the Access 97 database format any database created by TRX Ma
402. ram Note The generic JST Protocol is equivalent to the JST 145 245 protocol however with this setting TRX manager will not read the data send by the radio Press the CAT button a CAT control in order to activate the remote control CAT mode The CAT mode takes control over the radio after lighting the REMOTE light on the radio faceplate When communications is working properly the current state of the radio is reflected in TRX manager with the exception of the Split command which is not supported if the current Frequency and Mode do not appear at startup please turn a little the tuning dial With most JST JRC there is no manual control from the radio controls while in this mode not even the tuning dial If CAT is OFF you can not control your JRC JST from the Monitoring window However tuning a spot using DXor Web Cluster tuning a SW Station is possible TRX Manager sets ON OFF CAT during the time the transfer occurs and the corresponding changes are displayed by the program However any change done from the rig is not reflected by the program until you press CAT ON again CAT ON is absolutely required for Scanning otherwise erratic behaviors may occur Memory channels CAT ON only If CAT is ON you can control the memories Write only With TRX manager it is possible to store data into memories 1 to 99 only With the JST 145 245 the program memorizes the split frequencies the repeater shifts can be entered into the mem
403. rement on Windows 95 98 1MB on XP and 2MB on Vista and later Error messages during installation To install and update TRX Manager under Windows Vista Win7 Win8 Win10 you must have the so called administrator privilege Please make sure your system is up to date In some cases an error message appears because certain of your system files are out of date and incompatible with those necessary for the installation of the program In theory this problem should not occur if your version of Windows is higher than 95 SP1 and very rare since XP In certain cases a system file may be failing to register because the file may be locked in use at the time of file transfer Files that commonly have this problem should be registered upon reboot of the system file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 30 of 365 Some anti virus using Heuristic analysis are prone to display false positive warnings If you get a message like Windows cannot access the specified device path or file You may not have the appropriate permissions to access the item you have to disable your anti virus during the installation Error messages at run time Unexpected system error or crash These problems can occur the first time you launch the program but in general after the installation of another program which crushes the system files by older versions or versions not compatible with your system That should not occur but the experiment proves the oppo
404. ressed The CAT light on your transceiver s front panel will also be illuminated when under CAT control CAT control is released upon program shutdown but it is a good idea to make it a habit to shutdown the software BEFORE turning off the transceiver Split mode The FT 847 and the FT 736 are featured with a Split mode but this feature is not accessible via the CAT System However TRX Manager implements a specific Split mode this Split mode is only available if you switch to TX via the program Keybutton Monitoring Memory channels Memory channel operation is not accessible via the CAT system However TRX Manager implements the same interface as for other transceivers and gives you 99 virtual memory channels These channels are unrelated with those of the transceiver In addition TRX Manager supports FTBasic s memory file which provides programming of the transceiver using the Clone mode Please note as for other transceivers that the Automode feature is disabled when working with the memory channels Switch to the VFO mode press the Abutton of the monitoring window to enable the Automode feature DCS and CTCSS encoding are supported see Repeater settings FT 736 and FT 212 412 When the transceiver is under CAT Control you will not be able to do certain things from the transceiver s front panel as frequencies mode functions etc In order to gain manual control you have to press the CATbutton mi on the toolbar or F9 a
405. ries from a very fast 20ms Elecraft 50ms Kenwood to 150 200ms Yaesu Anyway a basic program written for a Kenwood model may function on another Kenwood or Elecraft model and sometime with a Yeasu model at least if it does not work it can be easily updated by the developper ICOM CI V protocol The ICOM CI V protocol is fundamentally different from the two preceding systems In fact it is a true communication protocol which allows networking four ICOM transceivers each transceiver transmits by interrupt its frequency and mode changes to the others ICOM protocol is fast efficient and very reliable Unfortunately unlike Kenwood and except for Mode and main Frequency changes ICOM does not implement an auto information function Polling each parameter is required but in practice not recommended to retrieve the current values in addition many of the parameter are still NOT accessible by polling in 2010 it is still not possible to get the current value of VFO B while your listen to VFO A even with an IC 7800 The available commands PC to ICOM are generally compatible between the various models file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 83 of 365 Exchanging data requires specifying the transceiver s address in hexadecimal code see your manual Each command is made up from a variable number of bytes comprising a heading FEFE the PC and transceiver s addresses a command code a data area and the FD suffix The
406. rol and does many file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 15 of 365 computations and represents a charge for the processor The communication loop may also slow down the use of other software It is therefore better to minimize the software as a task bar s icon while using other software since the CAT loop pauses while you minimize the main window Please read also the section related to the use of the TRX Manager s OLE interface with LOGic to get more information about this particular case However with recent computers running true multi tasks OS like Windows XP Vista Win7 8 this drawback is generally not perceptible TRX Manager uses less than 2 of CPU time System Resources TRX Manager implements a large number of graphic functions in each independent module If necessary please only open the modules which you need in order to free up the resources for other programs file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 16 of 365 Graphical interface and preferences The program allows choosing various preferences from the Preference sub menu Each Tab of the Preferences dialog boxes is related to a particular module Please click the help g button for getting help about the displayed tab Below only general settings are described Related Topics e Windows layout e Database Grids e Saving your parameters e Installation reinstallation Interface overview The software uses the Mu
407. roperty is effective only for mfsk e Enable sound playback If checked the sound playback function is enabled To start the playback function use the Plaback menu in MMVARI The sound playback function stores the PCM sound data for the latest 60 seconds in file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 207 of 365 the MMVARI control In case of the 11025Hz sampling frequency it uses about 1 3MB memory space for the sound playback RTTY Demodulator select IIR Infinite Impulse response recommended default or FFT Fast Fourrier Transform Width D default bandwidth at startup Squelch dB Squelch level for decoding 3dB is the default in MMVARI however 6dB is sometime preferable This value is applied to all the RX channels FIFO Depth of the RX FIFO default 12 Custom RTTY Shift User defined RTTY Shift Hz to select from the MMVARI RTTY submenu lt 450Hz TX Settings Port PTT FSK Specifies the COM PORT used by the MMVARI module not under the control TRX Manager for PTT switching and FSK Keying EXTFSK is required if you use an USB serial adapter due to timing issues Whatever your choice TRX manager always uses its own PTT keying functions this option does NOT disable the keying function in TRX Manager EXTFSK requires an external plugin to download from the MMVARI MMTTY HAMSOFT by VE5KC web site RTTY FSK If checked MMVARI does the FSK keying at the selected COM port only in RTTY MMVARI generates
408. rs in addition and for compatibility with some applications TRX Manager sends Transceiver number 1 3 or 2 4 to Pin 14 The band decoder can be used in conjunction with the linear reminder to control a linear amplifier relay in that case you define _ for the state of the corresponding pin i e 0100_abc pin 6 is not used by the band decoder and can be selected to control the linear amplifier relay RS232 Commands The band decoder is conceived to send any numbers of characters You have to choose between ASCII format and HEXA decimal format ASCII is the default but Hexadecimal is mandatory if you have to send non printable characters other than CR ASCII format default Default values are compatible with the MicroHam MK2R controller however depending on how the accessory port is wired you may have to adjust these commands for each band or segment You may also write specific ASCII commands for any other RS232 compatible device To send a carriage return use the underscore character _ TRX Manager will replace any underscore with a carrage return lt CR gt Example AS103_ AS103 lt CR gt is sent file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 132 of 365 Hexadecimal format HEX You write the commands using the hexadecimal format Example OFO11A If the commands are documented using ASCII numbers like chr 044 you have to translate ASCII commands into HEXA Decimal 44 ascii 2C hexa Examp
409. rs The selected DXCall and or the Spotter may be added to the blacklist by clicking The blacklists can be edited The button deletes the current entry while the A button clears the whole list Q Tips When you click a spot the DX Spot Callsign is copied into the Windows clipboard and is available for being pasted into any other program See also Drag and drop drag and drop of spots are supported into a list of frequency the logbook the DX Map file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 281 of 365 Watch List advanced Written by Fred KE2QR You can display your own Watch List in the WebCluster window This is a convenient way to track a bunch of stations and check for dupes Use it during a contest when you check into a list directed DX Net or when you are waiting for your chance to bust through a pile up Simply create a CSV comma separated file with the Callsign and Frequency in MHz and open the file in the WebCluster window Creating the watch list For example create the file WatchList csv using Notepad or Excel with these entries YA1LRS 14 215 TO4E 14 255 W2BIE 3 905 KE2QR 7 233 ZK2G1I 14 025 Save the file If you are using Excel use save as and select file type CSV In the WebCluster window click on the File Open button In the Open dialog box choose Watch List CSV and select the file you have created Watch List essai csv YAIRS TO4E W2BIE KE2OR ZK2GI Displaying
410. rs etc In order to improve operation with this method it is desirable to disable the Dual Control mode of TRX Manager see also Disabling Dual Control On Elecraft K2 K3 you have to check the LPBridge Serial server option E Use of desktop remote control software like pcAnywhere winVNC or Teamviewer This is a simple method to setup and use but requires that all software be located on the remote computer The feel of this method depends on the speed of the network connection These alternate methods of remote control are listed for reference only and are not supported functions beyond what is presented here As with TRX Manager Remote Control these methods may not support all functions of your particular rig For further support information about these methods please check the archives on the TRX Manager mailing list and the N8LP s web site file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 175 of 365 S A as E aS TRX Manager TRX Manager fany Internet TRX Manager Remote Desktop Browser software TRX Manager TRX Manager TRX Manager Serial Device Remote Desktop Manager control Real mode Web Server l Remote TCP IP Packet amp Telnet Telnet internet Web Internet Home Network Web Internet Internet Home with Ethernet WiFi with network reservation Cellular reservation Ethernet network Home Network All ICOM TS 7 All ICOM 2000 480 K2 TS450 350 and older Kenwoods Critica
411. rs are used please select only the filters that are installed in your transceiver If you select a non supported filter the effect obtained is unforeseeable and depends on the type of transceiver e With FT 1000MP TS 450 690 850 950 selection of either 455 KHz AND OR 8 9MHz IF filters is possible e These settings are saved for each transceiver separately TRX1 to TRX4 Variable DSP PBT filters Most recent transceivers use a DSP and allow defining preset virtual Filters Once the virtual filters defined you may restore any of them automatically by using the Filter functions in TRX manager i e FIL1 3 WID NAR Monitoring s buttons If desired you have to enable this function by checking the DSP or PBT option and filling in the various filter settings for each mode with the valid values permitted by the DSP please read the transceiver s manual in order to check the valid values Generally if you introduce an invalid value the program selects the nearest bandwidth You may have to adjust these parameters to match the possible settings permitted by your transceiver and to suit your requirements The displayed mentions names and values depend on the brand you are using Please read also the Specifications this help for the transceiver you are using for more information is Notes In CW Bandwidth BW is centered on Pitch I E 600Hz or 200 Hz In SSB Bandwidth may be defined by High and Low cut frequencies Low 200 and High 2800 d
412. rs structure above Save your parameters e Make a copy of the username app data local TRX Manager folder From the new computer Make sure this new computer uses the same folders structure than the old one same username Install TRX Manager on the new computer Exit TRX Manager Copy the user app data local TRX Manager from the old computer to the new computer this may erase some of the data created after the recent installation e Double click the TRX Manager reg file located in the backup folder to restore your parameters see Instructions and cautions e Running TRX Tools set ALL DEVICES NONE This process avoids any crash at startup of TRX Manager due to a different enumeration of the com ports e Run TRX Manager register your copy restart e Now you can open the Parameters Setup dialog to configure all your devices according to the new enumeration of the com ports Ad copying system or executable files For a reinstallation the installation procedure must be followed completely Copying any EXE DLL OCX files or copying the hard disk Drive Copy or the system files from one computer to the other can make the application unstable and may prevent any further installation Never copy the content of the main Program Files TRX Manager s folder with EXE DLL OCX files on another computer since this can make the installation unstable Q Running TRX Manager on Linux Mac TRX Manager is NOT compatible with Linux Mac
413. ry channel module is one of the most complex of TRX Manager There is absolutely no standardization and each model has its own set of parameters which makes writting a standard interface almost impossible Please understand that such a software is a compromise and that some very specific functions may be not supported Please take your time to test it before you purchase the program file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 105 of 365 Editing the memory channels Direct editing of memory channels is very easy from the FE Edit Memory Window Most of supported parameters may be edited You edit the parameters and click Apply to save It is also possible to quickly fill the contents of the memories by drag and drop The icon frequency can be dropped into the channel s display of the Monitoring window or directly into the list of the channels in this case with each addition of a frequency the current channel number is incremented You move to another channel by clicking up down buttons or click OK to exit the window a Notes e Offset may be converted into a Shift between the RX and the TX frequencies especially on ICOM and Kenwood See also Repeater settings e When editing a channel auto mode should be disabled OFF otherwise when checking on the memory channel by switching the transceiver the Monitoring may reset the mode to its default value according to the band plan e This function does not apply to
414. s a repeater offset in FM Recent ICOMs IC 703 IC 746 PRO IC R75 and IC 756PRO PRO2 PRO3 IC 7000 IC 7410 IC 7600 IC 7700 IC 7800 7850 IC 9100 provides editing of the memory labels from the PC supported But Destination Call Sign Access Area Repeater Link Gateway Repeater and Digital Squelch settings are NOT supported TRX Manager preserves the contents of the memories on hard disk between the sessions D Star DV mode and DV TX Callsigns D Star are supported compatible transceiver only either from the Edit Frequency F2 dialog or the Edit Memory Dialog Remote control Like all other transceivers your ICOM may be controlled through a LAN or the Internet using the standard remote control mode of TRX Manager but with limited functions In addition you may also take full control over your transceiver through a network using the real remote control mode TRX Manager behaves like if the com port is locally controlled file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 44 of 365 Yaesu Yaesu transceivers F Related Topics FT 990 ROM1 2 FT 1000 V5 FT 747 FRG 100 FT 1000MP FI 757GX FT 767GX FI 817 857 897 FT 847 736 212 412 FT 980 FRG 9600 FTDX3000 FTDX5000 FTDX9000 FT 2000 FT 950 FT 450 General remarks YAESU transceivers are very different from one model to another Consequently many functional differences are possible depending on the transceiver selected Please note the following funct
415. s all the windows in cascading fashion The windows are resized with their default size Tile horizontal lays out the windows one on top of the other Vertical mosaic lays out the windows one beside the others T Arrange icons the icons of the minimized windows are re aligned Reset the windows are re initialized with their size by default without changing their position Es Note The Tile Horizontal Vertical menus resizes the windows to occupy the maximum area of the display In practice this function produces rather undesirable results Active resizing option Some windows provide active resizing Active Resizer maintains the same proportions and locations of controls relative to one another The Active Resizer also dynamically adjusts the size of the fonts used in the controls so the size of the text in a control remains proportional relative to the overall size of the control This option optimizes the available space This option is set from the Preference dialog box under Software This option does not affect all the controls for example grids and listings are not affected For those controls you may have to adjust the size of the font manually if available Saving the position of the windows recalling a session At the end of each session the program saves the size and position of each window This configuration is automatically recalled the next time you start TRX Manager if the previous session option in Preference Sof
416. s if remote control is not used remote control NOT enabled and make sure all is working perfectly locally you must be physically present 2 Install TRX manager on the remote computer CLIENT and configure both instances of TRX Manager CLIENT and SERVER for the standard mode of control as described in THIS section of the help 3 Please keep the defaults settings for your first tests with NO password or Watchdog 4 Make sure all is working and you are able to control remotely all elements of the station with of course some limitations inherent to the remote control mode 5 Eventually consider configuring TRX Manager for the Please DO NOT SKIP none of these major steps and follow each step carefully file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 164 of 365 STARTING THE REMOTE CONTROL Once both station are configured you engage Remote Control mode from SERVER and from CLIENT REMOTE CONTROL It is recommended you disable any screen saver or sleep mode on the SERVER computer You may also use the STOP SAVER option of the TRX Manager s Preference software tab TCP and UDP From Client you click the Connect button remote control is established and the status of the remote transceiver is displayed under the remote control tab As soon as you click the OP button of the Remote control window the remote transceiver becomes the Operating transceiver and the CW Keyboard the Rotor the Logbook the DX Bar window t
417. s interface features 16 Buttons X2 i e 32 commands 6 Sliders which can be configured by the user with a right click Each button or slider can be named by a Caption if necessary the Result text box displays the answer The On top check box keeps TRX Command on top of all other windows TRxX Command A right click opens this dialog from which you configure the button Supported commands Commands to a parallel port These commands are sent via OLE to TRX Manager therefore TRX Manager must be running when you activate the button and activate the parallel port the Custom port is not supported Please select LPT for the Command to field fill in the LPT n field with the port number and indicate the desired state for pins 2 to 9 using the following convention O low 1 high no change file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 332 of 365 Setup i FE X a a TLPT2 PIN2 amp 3 1 PIN4 9 0 ka ok Setup for LPT2 Pin 2 amp 3 1 Pin4to9 0 Direct commands to a local serial port not controlled by TRX Manager These commands are sent by opening the specified com port Therefore this port must be free if TRX Manager is running please make sure it does not use this com port Please select Com Local for the Command to field and fill in the Port n field with the port number and the Settings field with the necessary parameters using this format Speed Parity n Bytes Stop Byte i e 4800 n 8 2
418. s into the graphic Opens the prperties dialog box setting up of colors RX TX Toggles from RX lt gt TX Equalization GET Reads current Equalization and copies the values into the clipboard SET Set up Equalization using displayed data 3 Notes e Data format clipboard files uses the CAT command format TE for TX Equalization RE for RX Equalization RE CAT command still not supported e While the graphic Equalizer is displayed and running it is strongly recommended you do not make any manual change to the K3 Power On Off K3 KX3 While the K3 and KX3 have a CAT command to Power the transceiver OFF PSO they do not have a Power ON CAT command Consequently if you power your transceiver off using the POWER button of the program you may be unable to power it on remotely However Elecraft has provided a way to power the K3 and the KX3 ON remotely e K3 A remote control system can pull the POWER ON line to ground ACC connector pin 8 to turn the K3 ON e KX3 A remote control system must place 8 to 12 volts DC on the mic jack s PTT line for 100 ms or longer A warning See the Elecraft manual for more accurate information and official reference So it is possible from TRX manager using the DTR or RTS line of a com port and a small interface built around a reed relay or a buffer and eventually a timer in the case of the KX3 to activate a dedicated line to power the K3 or the KX3 ON To set up this function y
419. sceiver TRX Manager offers 8 or 7 23 macro buttons In the case of 30 macros button 8 becomes a toggle between macros 1 7 and 9 31 Monitoring screen with Macros enabled Left 8 macros only Right 7 27 Macros more macros selected a toggle Setting up a macro button At startup captions of Macro buttons are blank no label To set up a macro please right click a macro button and choose in the dialog either a pre defined Function or a CAT Command Macro dialog appears after a right click on a macro buttons Selecting a predefined function If you select a function please make sure the function is available and supported by your transceiver Displayed functions may be NB Noise Blanker NR Noise Reduction file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en PRE Preamplifier ATT Attenuator ANF Automatic Notch Filter COM Speech processor RXA RX Antenna BC Beat Cancel TS 2000 480 VOX VOX A B A B A B A B SPL Split UP1 QSX up 1 KHz SUB Opens Close Sub Receiver or dual watch VFO Set Frequency mode QSX Set QSX Operation INF Set current Spot Info LOG Quick Log of current Spot and Save M gt V Current Channel to VFO V gt M VFO to current Channel PwB restore default power for the current band Preferences SPO CWT Tune K3 Kenwoods Cw Tune The list is variable from one rig to another Writing a CAT Command Page 1
420. sceiver can transmit the selected antenna to the computer and it is not compatible with sub transceivers and REAL TIME e TX checked Synchro follows TX Frequency Unchecked RX requency Once configured the SteppIR controller must be set up for General Coverage Mode at this point a POWER OFF ON sequence is recommended to reinitialize the communications However don t forget to activate the SYNCHRO mode for the current transceiver if needed from the Preferences Transceiver Misc tab By default Synchro follows the TX frequency or RX if TX unchecked gt gt STEPPIR flashes in Monitoring confirming that new data has been sent to the controller if the controller does not follow make sure Split is OFF Near the middle of each 10KHz segment xx xx5 MHz changes of less than 2KHz are ignored 1KHz below 7 5 MHz this hysterisis avoids frequent and undesired tuning of the controller near the limits of a segment Ck Buffer checked is recommended with STPIR If checked the program checks for an empty buffer before sending any new command This reduces the number of collisions but the program may lock up with some comm drivers like Prolific The SteppIR window The SteppIR window opens from the Tools SteppIR submenu and provides various functions and displays Synchro A 1 only file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 141 of 365 SteppIR V07 W 7 070H Hz EEEE A j E ER el N D2 Di DAY Al 1
421. se both programs on the same computer If Fidigi and TRX manager are not installed on the same computer Host address different from 127 0 0 1 e you may have to set up your router or your network accordingly e you must start Fldigi BEFORE TRX Manager otherwise and error will occur and TRX Manager will disables the Fidigi interface you just have to launch it again from the Preferences Transceiver DIG by selecting Fldigi as DIG interface Bi Important notes file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 198 of 365 The Monitoring must be running during the operation of Fidigi Otherwise Fidigi is not set with the right sideband and mode Keep TRX Manager maximized if TRX Manager is minimized the refresh rate is reduced The Fidigi interface is only supported with the main transceiver set as Operating transceiver It is not supported in Remote mode TRX manager communicates with Fldigi and set the current frequency spot and select the correct sideband As soon as you change the frequency from your rig or TRX manager the carrier offset is reinitialized By default the LSB mode is recommended in RTTY and USB in PSK You can use the Fidigi user interface to change the mode however if you use one of the data mode of your transceiver you must select it from TRX manager From Fldigi the REV mode allows selecting CW R or FSK R When you start Fidigi the RX Tone is always set to the default Tone for AFSK or Other acc
422. se to transfer the data Possible problems e The program doesn t properly transfer the firstname QTH and or other fields of the Callbook into the logbook s fields that feature is only available for the US and some Canadian callsigns For other callsigns international database all informations belong to the same Address field errors are possible i e inversion between lastname and firstname and there is no solution to this problem file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 285 of 365 e The program doesn t display the QSL manager information the program may have a problem to read the CD especially if the drive is connected to a parallel or USB port Check that your CD is provided with a Data QSLMGR DAT file Open the TRX Manager s directory and delete QSLMGR MDB Copy the data QSLMGR dat file into the TRX Manager s directory Run the program e Your CD may be outdated please order the latest version of the Callbook CD Rom file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 286 of 365 HAMCall The program allows you to perform a callsign search via the Buckmaster s HAMCALL CD ROM Settings To declare the CD Rom type and drive you have to open the Preferences dialog box HAM Bases tab You must indicate e the drive of the CD e which folder contains the HAMCALL DAT and HAMCALL IDX database files The default folder is HAMO but may change depending on the CD you are using CD on
423. sible from the Monitoring window Key button or K from the keyboard Moreover the CW interface features an Auto TX feature file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 138 of 365 TX Interrupt advanced The TX interrup line allows detection of the RX TX state via the DSR or CTS line It is set up for each transceiver as follow e The Enabled check box TX Interrupt frame is usually not checked e Otherwise you activate the TX Interrupt function by the one available circuit DSR or CTS often the CTS line is used by the RS 232 interface and is not available for this feature is Notes e Do not check the TX Interrupt option if you don t need if because if your RS 232 interface uses one of the DSR or CTS lines the program could interpret this condition as a TX command e The TX Interrupt circuit must be electrically independent of the PTT line If both PTT and TX Interrupt are mixed the program will not be able to distinguish a manual switching from a switching via CAT the effect is to lock the CW interface or VKE file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 139 of 365 Synchronization TRX Manager can synchronize via an RS232 port between the transceiver under the control of TRX Manager and any external device or software which supports Kenwood ICOM K3 SteppIR ACOM600S protocols e A logging program with CAT Control PowerSDR IF a port mapping software is required or a null modem and two free
424. sion The progression towards the awards is obtained by the Display Awards Summary DDFM DPF LE submenu A combo makes it possible to choose between the various forms of the awards The program displays the score for each band as follow e the total number of departments or provinces worked and confirmed e the list of the departments or provinces contacted and confirmed Consult the rules of the DDFM and DPF awards for further information List of provinces Each province is located according to its sequence number as follows Alsace Aquitaine Auvergne Basse Normandie Bourgogne Bretagne Centre Champagne Corse 10 Franche Comt 11 Haute Normandie 12 Languedoc Roussillon 13 Limousin 14 Lorraine 15 Midi Pyr n es 16 Nord 17 Pays de Loire 18 Picardie 19 Poitou Charente 20 Provence C te d Azur 21 Ile de France 22 Rh ne Alpes OANDHAWNHH file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 219 of 365 Other Awards Other awards or reports can be computed displayed and saved from the Logbook s Explorer The first action is to select the valid QSOs by using the search functionor a SQL query some queries are preprogrammed for the most current awards Then the Explorer tab of the Logbook makes it possible to set the fields to sort and to display the database with a hierarchical structure The selection of QSOs using SQL queries and the configurable hierarchical display of the Logbook provides a very large
425. site This incompatibility exists because some of the software installed are using different version of some DLL or OCX shared programs used by other software You may also come across the same incompatibility with any VB5 6 VC software It will then be enough to reinstall TRX Manager Frequent crashes or system lock up at startup Please try to reduce the number of program running in background Try also to switch Windows into 16 bits color mode if that fixes the problem please try to update your video driver to the latest version INITIALIZATION ERROR PARAMETER 6 You get this message The Jet VBA file VBAJET dIl for 16 bit versions or VBAJET32 dIl for 32 bit versions failed to initialize when called Try reinstalling the applications that returned the error or INITIALIZATION ERROR PARAMETER 6 VBAJET32 This error happens because the MS Jet 3 51 database engine s DLLs on your computer are mismatched TRX Manager uses the MS Jet 3 50 version It works fine with the 3 51 version but some programs feature a wrong installation package with mismatched or missing DLLs It is generally enough to process as follow please 1 Search for DAO350 DLL on your computer 2 Rename DAO350 DLL as DAO350 BAK 3 Reinstall TRX Manager For information TRX Manager is installing and requires the following MS Jet s DLL DLL Version DAO350 d11 3 50 3602 0 MSJet35 d11 3 50 3602 4 MSJInt35 d11 3 50 3602 5 MSJtEr35 d11 3 50 3602
426. sound announces for particular messages or Spots such as defined under WAV tab Preferences dialog box file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 264 of 365 a Change font this button allows you to choose a convenient font You should choose a non proportional font such as Courier New System Terminal Fixedsys to have good text alignment Full window toggle This buttons stretches the receive area so it fits the window 2 Azimuthal projection this button creates an azimuthal projection from the 25 last DX Spots Detailed or Icon report resets columns to the default width TS 2000 Only This button toggles the TS 2000 into PKT mode CAT is disabled Boutons de fonction lella Function buttons 1 9 A D for each button a right click allows you to program a function Then a simple left click on the button sends the corresponding command WD Watch dog CR sent to the server every 2 minutes REC Auto reconnect Allows an automatic reconnection almost as soon as the current connection is lost requires WD ON and auto logon at startup defined Double click a double click of a string text in the receive window performs specific functions e message number sends this message to the server gt reads the message r xxxx e frequency KHz QSYs the transceiver below sets 24 9 MHz and current info TK DL8NBH E sE Status BTerminal Dx Cluster RECEIVE VFO AHAM
427. splay and commands are related to the active receiver CW Keyer Memory KM1 5 TRX Manager uses the Message TEXT type You can store data into the memory keyer using the SET button only messages 1 5 are supported Remote control Like all other transceivers your TS 990S may be controlled through a LAN or the Internet using the standard remote control mode of TRX Manager but with limited functions However the TS 990S is well suited for remote control using a serial port server Limitations TRX Manager does not work exactly the same as the transceiver with Kenwood s ARCP software In case of empty memory channels or in memory channel mode TRX Manager s behavior may be indeterminate and provide unexpected result file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 69 of 365 Elecraft K2 K3 K3S KX3 TRX Manager supports the Elecraft K2 K3 K3S KX3 transceivers Settings Setup K3 and K3S are equivalent TRX Manager automatically adapts It is recommended you set up the Transceiver for the highest practical speed 38400 bds it is necessary to restart TRX Manager and the Transceiver after each change of the communication speed Please check KPA3 or K2 100 is the 100W module is installed uncheck KPA3 or K2 100 if you use a K3 10 or a K2 10 or a KX3 alone K3 KX3 TRX Manager uses the extended format K22 or K31 of the rig and the normal auto information mode consequently it is highly recommended you configure yo
428. split mode file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 60 of 365 Kenwood Kenwood transceivers This section is mainly related to the older Kenwood transceivers TS 450 850 gt See also e TS 2000 TS 480 TS 590 e TS 990 General remarks The Kenwood generic option Setup should function with any Kenwood transceiver eventually not listed but provides basic functions only and does not allow reading of the data sent by the transceiver Except for special needs or tests do not select Kenwood but please select the exact model you are using i e TS XXXX The highest CAT speed is recommended avout RTS and Handshaking For all speeds from 9600bds and above RTS Setup must be selected in order to support the Kenwood Handshaking protocol In such case CW Keying or PTT switching is not possible using the RTS line If RTS enabled is required for Handshaking TRX Manager disables any settings for PTT or CW Keying made using the RTS line and re assign RTS to handshaking Dual Control if available is usually checked unchecked only if you connect your Kenwood to your computer through a serial server see also Disabling Dual Control Some Differences between models R 5000 TS 940 TS 711 TS 811 and TS 440 The rigs require the IC 10 accessory and the IF 232C interface These rigs do not provide the selection of the filters or the reading of the S Meter and therefore prevents the bandscope from working
429. stance azimuth azimuthal projection The program calculates distance and azimuth for each spot The mapbutton Bhatows you to create an azimuthal projection of the 25 last DX Spot Setting the transceiver To set the transceiver on the spot s frequency you double click the desired spot displayed under the DX Spot tab gnaw R 21RC 2201 tnx for 56 LX7I 28 HB10DX 14 0344 WPX Select the DX Spot tab double click the desired spot If a Split condition is specified in the comment field QSX UP a powerful algorithm but not infallible calculates the TX frequency and sets the transmit frequency with the correct offset If you don t like this feature you have to uncheck the Auto QSX option Preference DX Spots tab DX Spot Callsign is copied into the Windows clipboard and is available for any application According to the status of the Main toolbar s Tools DX Squelch button BL if RX is muted AF Gain if supported is set to its previous value RX mutes after the delay specified under the Preferences Transceiver Band Plan tab Sorting DX Spots context menu A right click on Spot opens a context menu and allows you to activate various functions instant QSY transfer to the second transceiver if supported displaying DXCC displaying CD Rom QRZCallbookBuck launching DX Atlas Go List HAM Cap searching or direct logging 1 0030 4 9047 1 1660 e BlackList Binis function opens the black list of spots and spotte
430. standardization inexistent the parameters number and values of data returned depend on the model you are using On the other hand it was efficient because the number of data was reduced to the minimum Yaesu now uses a protocol very similar to the Kenwood protocol Kenwood protocol Data are exchanged as String which is of great interest for the writing of programs A command or a reply generally consists of two alphabetical characters String followed by numerical values and terminated by a semicolumn i e BNO1 Moreover a small communications protocol allows controling data flows and errors Recent models TS 2000 TS 480 FT 2000 K2 K3 have an extended auto information function AI1 or AI2 command which limits or avoids polling by automatically notifying the most important status changes any status change for Kenwoods Ea Example e To set the VFO A to 7 00 MHz you have to send FAO0007000000 e To set the CW Pitch to 500 Hz send PTO5 e To read the CW pitch send PT The number of commands now offered by the recent Kenwood transceivers is impressive These commands make it possible to control all their functions TRX Manager is far from using them all Kenwood has control software RCP available for these transceivers sf Note A Kenwood like protocol has been adopted by Elecraft and Yaesu from FTDX9000 However set of commands and parameters may be different from one rig to another and timing delay between commands va
431. sts on the net are limited and not supported by ARRL e If you want to disable this feature you only have to delete the lotwusers mdb file located either in the main folder or Misc file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 261 of 365 ADIF format The ADIF format was created to permit easy and direct transfer of data between various amateur programs For more information about ADIF please go to the Independant ADIF Site The DXCC Country code Please note that TRX Manager transfers reads all the fields including the DXCC field using the ARRL country code in accordance with the ADIF specifications In order to use this ability your log software must be able to support and translate this country code to the code as a DXCC country This functionality is not supported by all software If your log software doesn t use the DXCC code the corresponding field will be empty or filled in from the prefix in this case you may have problems as a lot of radio prefix s amateurs are not in accordance with the ITU allocation Inversely if your log software doesn t support the DXCC code when importing TRX Manager will not be able to recognize the DXCC country In this case you will have to perform a DXCC Update and manually edit some QSOs to select the right DXCC country Valid ADIF codes are necessary to determine your DXCC award A Binary data TRX Manager can NOT read ADIF files including binary data If this is the case ple
432. t number com n e g com 1 in the Port combo box Warning this may cause a crash at startup if this com port does not exist Step 4 the Transceiver s settings Check that the Setup s speed is the same as that definite for your transceiver if necessary try to decrease or increase this speed Particular case ICOM and TenTec If you are using an ICOM or a TenTec OMNI VI please check e TRANSCEIVE function is ON CdE on TenTec Setting methods differ according to radios Refer to the instruction manual of each radio The transceiver address of the radio is the same as the one in the Setup of TRX Manager e AUTO Baud or Auto Speed is not selected but select a true speed 9600 or 19200 e CI V 731 Mode is set as OFF except for IC 735 e In most cases Stop Bits 2 gives more reliable communications however in some other cases this parameter does not work properly and you must try Stop Bits 1 e The ICOM and TenTec transceivers function better at 19200 bds file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 38 of 365 Sometimes if you use an ICOM or a TenTec OMNI VII you may receive this message Communication error Invalid message format This is a warning only which appears once for each session Generally this message is without consequence however you can try to improve your parameter settings Particular case FT 847 Unlike most other transceivers the FT 847 serial data cable is a null modem crossed
433. t to your particular needs RS232 port The format depends on the controller you are using Default values are compatible with the MicroHam MK2R controller but you can adjust these values according to the wiring of the accessory port or the controller you are using Hexadecimal or ASCII commands are supported gt Related Topics e Band plan e SO4R Settings You set up the band decoder from the Parameters Setup dialog under the BAND DCD tab Parallel port Please choose a free LPT port because the decoder can not be used with any other device i e a printer However the decoder is compatible with the CW Interface of TRX Manager To set up a non standard LPT such as USB Parallel adapter please do the followings e from the System Properties note the base address for that LPT port Address should be in the XXXX YYYY format Note only XXXX e from TRX Manager open the Setup dialog and under Band DCD select Custom LPT as LPT Port Fill in the address box H with the base address XXXX of the LPT Port RS232 Com Port Select a free COM port and fill in the settings accordingly do not select Handshaking if your controller does not use it this may lock up the program Default command format is ASCII If you use the Hexadecimal format check HEX Band Segment The Band Segment option defines the way the band data are defined e If BAND is checked default band data are defined for each band GEN 160m to 70cm e If
434. ted entities Linear reminder display last power MAX even in RX resume by dbl click or after band changes Web cluster sort order memorized for the current session only Minor other improvements K3 eV 4 6 8 TRX Pan FLIP I Q settings added for CW and USB vs LSB Prefix database updated for NH8S Minor fixes e V 4 6 7 Remote control Winkey now usable from Master for CW keying eV 4 6 6 minor fixes and update of the prefix database support for the Juma TRX2 transceiver e V 4 6 5 Fixes for TenTec Eagle and Orion K3 QSX kHz added to the K3 Levels window Minor update of the prefix database Update of the documentation Support for IC 9100 fixes for IC 7410 Prefix database RIMV now deleted e V 4 6 4 TRX Acom remembers antenna change for the same segment and session other fixes TS 2000 fix at startup while TS2K is OFF Prefix database fully updated for Russian callsigns Oblast other update e V 4 6 3 Prefix database updated TRX Acom hysteresis and TX RX freq defaults Update for QRZ COM and REF UNION database ev 4 6 2 TS 790 fixes and improvements TRX Pan more accurate S Meter Band Mode Macro buttons 07 27 2011 Prefix database updated for STO South Sudan ev 4 6 1 Eagle tested and fixed K3 Window support for bargraph in TX mode PWR only see BG command eV 4 6 0 Support for ICOM IC 7410 Support for TenTec Eagle
435. ted functions file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 66 of 365 In addition you may also take full control over your TS 2000 480 590S SG through a network using the real remote control mode TRX Manager behaves exactly like if the com port is locally controlled Limitations TRX Manager does not work exactly the same as the transceiver with Kenwood s ARCP software When the sub receiver has the control or in case of empty memory channels TRX Manager s behavior may be indeterminate and provide unexpected result file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 67 of 365 TS 990S The Kenwood TS 990S is particularly well suited to TRX Manager Fully controllable via a computer it also have a rich front panel which takes advantage of the TRX Manager s computer aided traffic concept Consequently TRX Manager offers an alternative to the full control via computer Setting up your transceiver and TRX Manager It is recommended to set up the Transceiver for the highest practical speed It is necessary to boot TRX Manager and the Transceiver after each change of the communication speed It is also recommended to set e Transceiver s Auto Mode OFF e Frequency Correction USB CW OFF e Beeper OFF From TRX Manager s Setup please select TS 990S and check RTS The highest available speed is recommended 115200 If you use the internal CW Keyer of the TS 990S via CAT you have to check CW Internal TR
436. ters for each band Take care to ensure that the parameters are valid for your transceiver These parameters are saved for each transceiver separately TRX1 4 If Auto RPT is checked the default parameters Shift are sent to the transceiver at each band change only in FM file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 94 of 365 Transverter TRX Manager provides settings for a Transverter from the Preferences Band Plan tab By checking this option in the Transverter frame Band Plan tab all frequencies for the specified range will be shifted depending on band switch I E You may use a transverter from 28 to 30 MHz for the 144MHz band with a 116MHz Shift as follow To enable the frequency conversion you must select using the program a frequency within the range of the transverter To disable the frequency conversion please just select a frequency outside the range of transverter This way you may click dx pots and have the right frequency conversion This option is not related to the Satellite s Transverter option Using both functions at the same time is not recommended and may give unpredictable results file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 95 of 365 Tuning methods Frequency editing Direct input The EDIT VFO menu F2 opens the VFO window and allows for edition of the current frequency VFO Please note TRX Manager has been written to reduce typing To set 14 200 you only n
437. the FSK timing and keys TxD When Port EXTFSK MMVARI sends the character data to the EXTFSK plugin EXTFSK generates the FSK timing MMVARI and EXTFSK use Windows multimedia timer so that about 1msec jitter is expected The baud rate is fixed to 45 irrespective of the selected RTTY speed PTT Exclusive lock If checked MMVARI exclusively uses the PTT port specified If NOT checked MMVARI opens the PTT port only during TX INV FSK If checked MMVARI reverses the polarity of the FSK signal at the specified com port However if Port EXTFSK this option is ignored External Loopback full duplex If checked the sound loopback mode is set to External This is used for adjusting the TX timing or for satellite communication requires an external wiring K3 KX3 FSK PSK Elecraft only If checked keying is generated by the K3 KX3 by CAT commands Single Tone If checked MMVARI generates a single tone at the end of transmission Diddle RTTY Specifies the diddle code in the RTTY idle state LTR or BRK FIFO Depth of the TX FIFO default 6 CW ID text for the CW ID message sent en CW The following characters can be used for special CW codes AS SK VA AR BT KN CW Speed wpm Specifies the CW ID speed Digital Output Level Specifies the digital output level AFSK Audio Level in the range of 0 to 32767 The default is 16384 This parameter must be used in conjunction with the output level of the sound card Sound Control Panel and th
438. the Watch List Once the entries appear in the WebCluster window you can take advantage of all the built in features e g check for dupes QSY by clicking on the Callsign see previous entries in your log paste the call into your log etc Results TRX Manager displays the result using the following convention C W Confirmed Worked C WM Confirmed Worked for Mode according to the band plan C WB Confirmed Worked for Band C WBM Confirmed Worked for Band and Mode file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 282 of 365 HAM databases CDRom CD_QRZ QRZ_XML QRZ COM The program allows you to perform a callsign lookup from the QRZ CD ROM or using the QRZ Online subscription service or the QRZ COM Internet website gt See also Radio Amateur Callbook HAMCall FCC Database lookup HamQTH Internet lookup Settings Preferences HAM Bases tab You have to select the Type of HAM Database HAM Database frame e CD_QRzZ Select Drive and Path for callbkc idx QRZ XML Online requires an account and a subscription Enter your Username and your Password e QRZ COM requires an account Enter your Username and your Password Software f Location LogBook A web Clust HAM Database CD ROM Type User Name Password orzo fox amp V Auto Logging j HamQTH QRZ COM is selected as HAM Database The Auto Logging check box allows you to automatically perform a search while logging in a n
439. the last hour with paths either from your station or paths from spotters to DX Spots Pin s color follows the DX Web Cluster convention red new one green needed yellow optional file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 233 of 365 anta Isbell island AL les Salomon Vanuatu Coller vers Log Recherche QSO gt TS 2000 S gt IC 703 yyPort Vila T gt IC PCR1000 T gt Elecratt K3 y l Context menu location of the selected station Ee suopeasti Sk eee DX Spots 8 web l Spots DX Spot Frequency Infor Miliisi S ee Pye Paths from Spotters to DX Spots file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 234 of 365 file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 235 of 365 Log book Log book overview TRX Manager is not a conventional logging program but provides a very intuitive real time logging TRX Manager uses the very reliable Microsoft Jet 3 data base engine Access 97 base format Any data base created by TRX Manager MDB extension may be opened from Access however do not save the database with the current Access format 2000 or later which is not compatible and make a backup copy of your file before opening it from Access Would you prefer to use a Logging program with specialized functions such as multiple awards contesting Please note that TRX Manager is fully interfaced with LOGic via OLE Whatever your needs the
440. the maximum period of inactivity in minutes after which the server automatically disconnects In that case only one user can control the radio at the same time In case of inactivity the server disconnects after the specified delay All users are logged in by IP in the webserver log file Auto Refresh If auto refresh is checked please specify the delay 2 30s after which the page is refreshed A refresh is done only once after the most crirical commands 5s is recommended Viewport iPhone Set up for the initial scale of the screen in Pixels Tag Adds a user defined tag in the lt Head gt section of the page I E lt body onload window scrollTo 0 1 gt hides the URL bar on the Safari browser lt meta name viewport content width 300px gt forces the zoom for a width of 300 pixels to be adjusted to your smartphone Setting up remote control You may specify some limitations such as e TX authorization for TXing Frequency Range in MHz for TXing Maximum Power in Watts e Authorization for using the Rotor e Maximum AF volume for the receiver 0 255 e DX Spots relay maximum number of Spots and display of the DXCC Award status by colors e Predefined CW messages and Macros however these parameters may be edited dynamically from the Web Interface e Logbook allows quick logging of the current Spot QSO must be edited for additional information such as DXCC country Note in all cases Sp
441. tial parameters including those required in Split QSX or via Repeaters as well as geographical data Grid An Icon may be selected to provide a pleasant display of the various frequencies The context menu right click provides various operations with the quick memories and especially direct editing file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 119 of 365 The Erase button erases all the quick memories while the Delete x deletes the selected memory The Open i and Save manages various files of quick memories qmb as extension but please note these binary files are not directly editable Scanning Scanning the quick memories bank is possible by using the appropriate commands Prior to scanning you must include the desired Quick Memories into Scanning by checking the Scan option from the Edit dialog The SO 9 allows defines the S Meter threshold which pauses scanning Squelch is not supported The duration of the Pause during scanning 10s by default and the Scanning Speed 30 by default are defined under the Transceiver tab of the Preferences Quick Scan tab The Quick Scan tab is not related to the Quick Memories This tab displays the whole band plan but does not allow editing it directly The advantage of this tab is that a double clik sets up the lower and upper limits of the internal Scanner of TRX Manager however starting scanning must be started manually A right click on a segment initializes th
442. tions In case of DXPeditions with specific callsigns you may use the Special Callsigns database TRX Manager determines the country starting from the left character it may be necessary to force a country by adding a valid identifier See also e How to force the DXCC Code from the Logbook see Updating DXCC codes file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 209 of 365 Edition of the prefixes DXCC Information is located in the PREFIX MDB database This database may be edited under MS Access 7 or preferably from the integrated editor The database contains two tables e a PREFIX table with all the possible prefixes e a DXCC table with all the DXCC Countries 3 About Prefix mdb The prefix database prefix mdb results from own work of the author and is derived for a large part from the DXAtlas s prefix database courtesy of Alex VE3NEA The file prefix mdb is released in the public domain and you may use it for any commercial or non commercial purpose in the modified or non modified form provided that 1 The source of the original dataset is clearly indicated DXAtlas and TRX Manager 2 All derivative products are also released as public domain data file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 210 of 365 DXCC Award status The ARRL DX Century Club award status for a given country may be displayed from the DXCC Window This ability is only provided for QSOs with a valid DXCC
443. to QSY Option for All Needed New One Sound announces option to play a wav file for a needed only country priorities between wav files revised eV 3 4 0 Band decoder new driver to support customized LPT port under Windows 2000 NT XP FT 847 CAT ON at startup fixed again Logbook Mode on 3 digits only if you create a new database SW Listening Support for ICOM with 3 filters Prop prediction indication for Sun Set and Sun Rise WWV announcements Commands pannel Scanning dialog updated range FSK mode selected when RTTY appears in the comment of a DX Spot eV 3 3 6 FT 817 847 897 757 747 improvement of speed especially FT 817 897 Remote control Specific command for TX in Split eV3 3 5 Commands Panel Improved accuracy of the display between 100 and 160 MHz FT 847 CAT ON at startup fixed Remote control Setting up TX if split changes RX with FT 1000 920 fixed IC 7400 746PRO IC 756PRO2 Transceive ON at startup eV3 3 4 DXCC Summary calculation of the bandpoints more detailed reports Logbook Logging OFF for a selection of QSO IC R8500 improved support Support for FT 897 Database Grids new system files fixes eV 3 3 3 new Prefixdatabase much more accurate 2800 entries resolving CQ ITU Zones and provinces derived from DXAtlas courtesy of Alex VE3NEA please run Tools DXCCUpdate to fill in CQ and ITU fields of your logbook Band Pla
444. to turn the knobs to the left or to the right or the mousewheel if the control get focus file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 75 of 365 e RX Frequency tuning use left right mouse clicks on the RX Frequency digits while holding the mouse buttons or use the mouse wheel e Tuning using the numeric keypad is supported e K3 if the PAD button near VFOB Knob is pressed the numeric keypad tunes VFO B Position and appearance e This window opens outside the main window so that you can move it to another screen Because of the use of a true graphic display this windows is NOT resizable However the size must fit any screen width lt 1024px e The window stays On Top depending on the state of the TOP button e Incase of difficulty to restore this window from the taskbar please use the TRX Manager s Windows menu and click the button Remote control Like all other transceivers your Elecraft may be controlled through a LAN or the Internet using the standard remote control modeof TRX Manager but with limited functions In addition you may also take full control over your transceiver through a network using the real remote control mode TRX Manager behaves exactly like if the com port is locally controlled Q A particular experience by Karsten DL1QC CW keying using Remoterig and TRX manager This is my configuration from operator to antenna side Cw paddle gt Winkey gt laptop gt TRX Manager gt RRCMicro
445. ton by pressing it the keyboard s space bar toggles the TF Set function ON OFF REV Reverse is related to CW FSK PSK and SSB Mode USB LSB DAT allows cycling through the three data mode D1 D3 Auxiliary Meter From the Monitoring below the S Meter select KENWOOD to display the auxiliary meter values You may select the current meter using the MET METER button of the Levels window file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 68 of 365 Reading VDD PTT The TS 990 offers two modes of operation for PTT switching PTT for MIC Input TX0 or PTT for ANY input TX1 By default TRX Manager uses TXO If your audio line is connected to the accessory jack you have to set up a macro TX1 for keying SSB Memory channels operation TRX Manager allows switching to the current memory channel mode use the small arrows near the C button to choose the current memory channel and press C or A B to toggle between the memory mode and the VFO mode This version of TRX Manager does not support reading writing files of memory channels Levels window The levels window allows controlling most of the critical functions The labels being sometime small please use the touch help to understand the meaning of the labels Sub Receiver The Levels window controls the operating receiver If the Monitoring s SUB button is pressed or if the Sub Receiver is active the Levels window control the sub receiver s levels All di
446. ton you may create a new database or open an existing SW database mdb as extension The Save button provides export using the CSV format Excel Creating Loading a database using Excel Using a spreadsheet as Excel may be very convenient for creating a large database from various sources Once your database has been created under Excel you may import it into TRX Manager by using a CSV file warning e Before loading the CSV file and if necessary create a new database e All imported stations will be added to the current database It is recommended that you first export a database into the CSV format by using the Save button please examine the structure of the file which has been created by TRX Manager for a better understanding of the CSV format Loading old SWL files created by FT Manager or TRX Manager V2 X TRX Manager V5 can import old SWL files Warning unlike FT Manager or TRX Manager V2 X imported stations will be added to the current database Loading other Short Wave database Please note a compilation of the HFCC public data is available from the TRX Manager s web site A version is included with the CD Demos HFCC folder In addition TRX Manager supports some other shortwave databases distributed on the Internet provided they use the generic DBF format A conversion utility installed with TRX Manager DBFToMDB exe makes it possible to convert DBase files DBF to the MDB format file C Help index htm
447. tops e Make sure Watch Dog is enabled with the same settings on both computers e Make sure your IPs have not changed e If necessary press the LISTEN button to resume operation and reconnect file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 166 of 365 Remote control operation The Remote interface of the as Remote TRX window is simple to use and allows controlling most of the functions of the Remote station E3 Summary of the main steps 1 Configure TRX Manager from the base station SERVER as if remote control is not used remote control NOT enabled and make sure all is working perfectly locally you must be physically present Install TRX manager on the remote computer CLIENT and configure both instances of TRX Manager CLIENT and SERVER for the standard mode of control as described in THIS section of the help Please keep the defaults settings for your first tests with NO password or Watchdog Make sure all is working and you are able to control remotely all elements of the station with of course some limitations inherent to the remote control mode Eventually consider configuring TRX Manager for the real mode AW N v wE Remote control interface Transceiver control The remote control interface is generic to be able to work with all the different transceivers that TRX supports The commands available being very different from one transceiver to another please see your trans
448. transceiver TRX1 or TRX2 FT 100 Meter data available Monitoring Support for IC 7800 eV 3 6 8 OLE updated for N8LP Software DXBar Scanning by digits improved Remote window fully updated Remote Keyer with ICOM in real mode fix for long strings eV 3 6 7 DX Spots more comprehensive DXCC Award tracking for each spot filters for 60m 220MHz 1 2GHz QSO Before uses the Logbook s font file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 351 of 365 Remote Keyer fix for long strings Band scope Step adjustable in Manual mode Remote control azimuth feedback rotator eV 3 6 6 TS 2000 button for RX Antenna Misc tab TS 480 option for Wid Nar1 filters Translation in German Spanish and Polish updated WebCluster Incoming spots are now added to the display e V 3 6 5 Support for Argonaut V transceiver Support for Jupiter transceiver Translation in German by Eike DM3ML DX Tracking by band IC 756PRO2 NR s right click engages a timer TRX2 DX Spots accepted DXClusteror WebCluster context menu DXSpots Log filter allows filtering by Callsign Mode Band LogBook new fields for QSLSDATE Date for QSL_Sent and QSL_SENT_VIA Method Warning please delete the layout file GRD associated with the database to make these new fields visible from the Listing e V 3 6 4 Translation in Polish by Marek SP7DQR Monitoring INC function
449. transceivers Support for ACOM 600S Support for FT 991 ev 5 4 3 Black list now editable Labels From page option to resume a printing session ICOM 7100 9100 FM Data mode added K3 KX3 Power ON supported using an RTS or DTR Line DXCC Summary now uses the Logbook s fonts window is configurable QRZ Databaseand Internet look up automated copy of some data to the log ev 5 4 2 Prix database update for TXSW Fix sometime the program reopens when exiting file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 340 of 365 ev5 4 1 WebCluster DXSummit Spotters distance calculated using Server Data configurable Spotters Distance configurable default 5000Km BlackLists for DXSpot and Spotters eV 5 4 0 Update for NOAA SFI s URL Prefix database ready for KiN Navassa eV 5 3 9 new change for the DXSummit WebCluster e V 5 3 8 Support for TS 590SG Warning if you use a TS 590 select now TS 590S FT 990S support for the internal CAT CW Keyer FT 990 590 improvements for the sub transceiver module DX Clusters improved calculations for the spotter s location WebCluster updated for the New DXSummit click default URL to update eV 5 3 7 XFC TFS TXW function updated Split Operation Logbook CW Toolbar option Preferences Mailer updated supports Authentification Security options Prefix database updated for FT4T eV 5 3 6 Dual RX transceivers S
450. ts the incremental tuning of the transceiver if supported The tuning direction depends on the selected arrows OR the depressed mouse button the right mouse button reverses the tuning direction For the other transceivers if incremental tuning is not supported you can use the arrows for a quick increment standard step depending on mode or you can display and then select a specific frequency by holding the mouse button file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 98 of 365 Tuning knob and Scanning Tuning Knob There are two methods to control the VFO button according to the position of the Dial switch Fast button makes it possible to speed up the QSY Note that behavior is very different according to the type of transceiver Tuning knob fal cel o Dial switch depressed The VFO can be grabbed with the mouse maintain the left button while making turn the cursor around the VFO knob 2 Dial switch pressed The VFO knob is controlled with the mouse buttons a right click increases the frequency and a left click decreases the frequency Please note the speed is variable but effect is depending on CAT system of the transceiver Tuning scanning by clicking a DIGIT In most windows which display a frequency you can have a precise tuning or engage a scanning by left right clicking a digit However the behavior of the program depends on the state of the FAST Digit tuning option Scanning dialog see
451. tside of the AGC loop of the transceiver Using macros Different macro commands are available from the Macros menu macros are similar to those used in the CW Keyer module or from the Log frame Just select the desired macro to insert the corresponding information in your text If Quick macros is enabled in the Macros menu Quick Macros u can be used and speed up the transmission You have to disable this option if you want to send these characters gt Related Topics file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 204 of 365 e See also CW Macros for more information about the Macros Preset messages You can define up to 16 messages First you click the Edit button Ep to engage the Message editing mode and click the desired message button This action opens the Edit frame at the bottom of the window From this edit frame you define the message s caption and you can compose the message by using if required the Macros menu to insert macros and or the Cut Paste Copy functions You save the message by clicking the Save button The captions of the messages are limited to 6 characters The messages are limited to 512 characters To send a preset message click the corresponding button M1 16 or F1 to F8 keys The transmission stops at the end of the message if TX is not engaged otherwise it is added to the text being transmitted Notches MMVARI allows creating notches in the band pass R Click the
452. tware is checked n In addition saving and recalling a particular session i e position and sizes of each window is possible from the File Open F Save Session sub menus Sessions are saved as trx files file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 23 of 365 Database Grids TRX Manager uses configurable grids Infragistics Data Widget 3 library to display the database SW List LoqBook Prefix This section summarizes the common methods for the use and the configuration of these grids Manipulating and configuring the grids Scrolling the database Scrolling the database is possible using the horizontal and vertical scrollbars horizontal and vertical scrollbars Resizing the columns The columns may be resized using the mouse in the same way as with Windows s Explorer resizing the columns Moving the columns The columns are moveable by moving their header or from the drop down menu which appears in the header SW Database is displayed by groups of data groups may also be swapped Frequency M ID Frequen Mode tt moving or swapping the columns Splitting the grid Grids may be divided by moving the splitter This provides horizontal scrolling while keeping a fixed section moving the splitter Colours Odd lines uses Windows default colours colour of even lines may be set from the Preference dialog under Software file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX
453. ty of your network E Important Generally unless stated of course and especially in the other sections of this help all the functions of TRX Manager described in the documentation apply to a local control mode and NOT to a remote control mode The remote control mode is specific All modules are not always usable in remote mode file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 161 of 365 Remote control Settings All settings are defined from the Remote TRX window Transceiver Remote TRX submenu warning This section describes the specific settings required for remote control It does not describe how to configure your local real station choices for transceiver cw interface rotors Please do not attempt configuring TRX Manager for remote control before your local station called SERVER is perfectly operational Q Tip This section describes how to set up TRX Manager for the standard mode of control Once the standard mode is set up and working you may eventually consider the real mode of control But please do not attempt configuring TRX Manager for the real mode before you are sure the standard mode is perfectly operational Conventions You control the SERVER or remote station from the CLIENT or base station H Internet or Packet PC RIG CLIENT SERVER Please imagine you have to control a FT 1000 remotely a CW Keyer a rotator e SERVER will be the station equipped with a comput
454. u may disable the download of the DXCC and Activity informations using the buttons and p file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 290 of 365 Internet The Internet Browser provides Callsign lookup from various HAM websites This functionality is also accessible from the Logbook Internet lookup button and various other windows The following website are supported QRZ Online HAM Callbook FCC RAC Canada REF France eQSL IK3QAR QSL Manager and Google Options settings Under the Preferences HAM Bases tab Internet frame you configure the default website QRZ COM is selected as the default web site If External Browser is checked the Internet button a launches your default browser outside of the main window Otherwise the TRX Manager s internal browser is displayed inside the main window Microsoft Internet Explorer in required in that case If Auto is checked TRX Manager will choose the most appropriate website for the country when you perform a search from the Logbook YKSS V Qsl Manager Info 1 Ees R Internal browser Search engine E Limitations e Automatic reporting of the data to the log s datafields is NOT supported e FCC License search engine FCC uses a protected access automatic search is not possible However the browser opens FCC web site with callsign in clipboard You still have to paste the clipboard into the Callsign field and press Search fi
455. u may toggle from the locked VFO A to the unlocked VFO B That is particularly useful when working a DX in split Diversity The F button FT 1000 920 IC 7800 and Kenwoods allows VFO B to Follows VFO A Once you engage this function Offset between A and B remains constant OP function By default at startup the Main Transceiver is the Operating transceiver In conjunction with a Sub Transceiver panel the OP button selects the Operating transceiver at any time and very quickly during a session Interfacing The copy toolbar s button 33 lets you copy the current data s callsign frequency mode date into the clipboard Update function In some case after a power on off or an error the Update function may be used to resume the communications and synchronize the display with the transceiver If something wrong appears on the display this function may be used to fix it The corresponding Update button if available is located at the bottom right of the display Appearance of the button may differ from one brand to another a Kenwood wW ICOM icon or Elecraft GY icon may be used file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 87 of 365 lam 7 161 00 0 00 LSB update function SUB Frequency display SUB The SUB Icon allows displaying and tuning the SUB or VFO B frequency see Split Operation gt Other advanced functions Split Operation S Meter and Multi Meter Info for Current Spot M
456. uirement is 124 MB Windows 9 X Much more RAM is required under XP and later However this is no more an issue with recent computers Display The preference menu Software tab offers you a choice of suitable colors font type and size The program is optimized for a 1024 768 32 bits color display or more You may have to adjust your Windows settings size of title bars if some dialogs are truncated RS 232 TTL interface This is of concern only with the older transceivers before year 2000 2005 since all transceivers now include the RS232 TTL interface You need an RS232 interface to connect your transceiver to the RS232 port of your computer While recent transceivers include such interface in that case you only need a cable between the radio and the computer the others require an external device The following types are recommended FIF232C Yaesu CT 62 FT 100 IF 232C Kenwood or IF 10 TS 440 940 50 CT 17 ICOM or the universal LCU 3 distributed byPDA USA andWiMo Germany Other reasonably priced interfaces are available on the market Cable Generally the cable between the computer and the interface or the radio is a straight wired serial data cable RS232 DB9 DB9 Exceptions are FT 847 null modem cable FT 100 Yaesu CT 62 cable SteppIR special wiring and JRC special wiring RS 232 USB converters While a com port on the mother card is always preferable if your computer does not have a serial RS2
457. umbers effective e It is not possible to edit a channel opened in the sub receiver please deselect the memory mode of the sub receiver before editing any channel See also Channels overview Automatic configuration of the DSP Filters TRX Manager automatically configures the DSP filters according to the values defined under the Transceiver tab of the Preference submenu Please check DSP Enabled in order to activate the automatic configuration and take care to fill in the desired values for the Pitch and repeaters Shifts If you own a TS 480 and the additional SSB narrow filter is installed you may check the NAR1 option the corresponding filter will be associated with TRX Manager s Narrow selection SSB FM AM only selected by DSP in CW file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 64 of 365 E Ts 590s TRX Manager memorizes the Filters A B for each VFO This is particulary useful in Split mode while you use the TF Set function To use this function you have to initialize the desired Filter for each VFO at startup either from the Levels window or directly from the transceiver and engage the AUTO Mode Filter switching See also Modes and filters Levels window From the Levels window Transceiver Levels submenu you may set up the transceiver s parameters or access some menus or functions in an intuitive way On the left you will find AF Level DSP and Squelch controls The Sub button TS 2000 gives th
458. ur K3 KX3 for CONFIG AUTOINF nor TECH MD required You may also prefer using your K3 KX3 and TRX Manager with CONFIG SW TONE OFF With the KX3 if you don t have the KXPA100 set PA MODE OFF in order to reduce the flow of data on the RS232 port If you use TRX Manager through an RS232 Serial Server via the Internet or Intranet or through the Larry N8LP s LPBridge program you may have to check the LPBridge Serial server option in Setup not always you can leave LPBridge Serial server unchecked default if it works this way with LPBridge or your serial server since the serial server option limits the TRX Manager s ability to detect state On Off of the Rig and accuracy of the TRX Manager s S Meter See also Alternatives to the remote control function Disabling the dual control mode 3 About LP Bridge LP Bridge is NOT required with TRX Manager use the Synchro function K3 Protocol to synchronize TRX Manager your Pan adapter and PowerSDR IF Stage or Nap3 Generally this setup works much better If CW Internal is checked in Setup Internal Electronic CW Keyer of the Rig selected you can use the CW terminal to send either CW PSK of FSK but please note the CW Internal option overrides the choice of keyer made from the CW Tab i e if you use Winkey do not check CW Internal However whatever your choice it will be always possible to send CW FSK PSK using the K3 KX3 since K3 KX3 levels window includes a small terminal see below data
459. uration open the Transceiver Save Configurationsubmenu i choose a file 847 as extension press Save select the menu 95 of the transceiver SEND CLN then press key MCK W then press the OK button of the dialog box once the transfer on disc carried out the program confirms the save UBRWNe Loading a configuration open the Transceiver Load configurationsubmenu i choose a file 847 as extension press Open select the menu 96 of the transceiver RCV CLN press key MCK W then press the OK button of the dialog box of the program rai O file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 54 of 365 Operation with FT 980 This section is only for use with the FT 980 Limitations The FT 980 was one of the early transceivers featured with a CAT Control system So there are some differences between the FT 980 and with later models of Yaesu CAT transceivers no dual control you have to choose between CAT Control or Manual Control no S Meter Band scope is not available no dual VFO system the split mode uses a memory channel two VFO s for GENeral coverage or HAM coverage tuner functions and status are not controllable via the CAT system Note you may have to disconnect the PIN 4 of the DB9 plug FT 980 to prevent the RIG from keying during CAT Control CAT Control Mode To be under CAT control you have to press the CAT button main toolbar s button or the F9 key When the transceiver is under
460. ure up to four transceivers Setup TRX1 to TRX4 tabs Definitions Up to four local transceivers one remote transceiver can be used at the same time e One Transceiver is called Main and is controlled from the Monitoring window The Main Transceiver can be selected from the Transceiver menu e The other three Transceivers are called Sub Transceivers and are controlled from the Sub Transceivers panels Not all Transceivers are supported as Sub Transceiver e The Operating Transceiver is the one activated for the various modules of TRX Manager By default at start up the Main Transceiver is the Operating Transceiver but a Sub Transceiver can be defined as the Operating Transceiver at any time during a session see below about the Operating transceiver The Remote transceiver can be configured as the Operating transceiver as well The Main Transceiver has a comprehensive support while a Sub Transceiver or a Remote transceiver only supports essential functions and programmable macros Synchronization Drag and Drop is possible between transceivers OP function support of SO4R mode Single Operator Four radios provides great flexibility in the use of five transceivers at the same time mtkor Ea Monitoring Elecraft 13 Sub TS 590S left Main K3 right Operating transceiver TS 590 A when transmitting There is no function in TRX Manager to protect a transceiver in receive mode while an other is transmitting You must switch
461. urn the VFO Knob on the radio slightly 6 If Split is enable on the radio disable it from the radio If you want to operate split enable it from the program Features and limitations The number of memory channels is limited to 99 for all the models see below Generally the oldest ICOMs before IC 746 do not allow reading of the s meter and consequently the bandscope is not supported SPLIT command status write and or read VFO A B PTT controls may be not available If PTT control is not available you can still control TX RX status using the RTS DTR Lines Only the most recent firmware allow reading and controlling the unselected VFO see the CI V manual and if cmd 25 and 26 are available With IC R75 please use AM Reverse to set AM Synchronous With IC PCR1000 press the button of the main toolbar to power on the receiver With IC 820 821 910 9100 MAIN amp SUB VFO are simultaneously displayed and updated only if you are in SAT mode it is important you engage SAT mode from the program see also Satellite interface Power ON OFF TRX Manager assumes that the transceiver is turned on at startup If this function is supported use the power button ai to turn on off the transceiver After sending a POWER ON command you may have to press the Monitoring s Refresh button to refresh the display warning Depending on the transceiver you are using and the way the interface is powered on when you switch off the transceiver you
462. use of a second transceiver for transmit gives about the same behaviour and comfort of use please see considerations about Transceivers If you use the SAT mode of your transceiver and the Main and Sub VFOs please press SAT If you are using two transceivers press TRX2 or TRX1 Also press RX and TX to control both downlink and uplink frequencies warning TRX Manager does not check if you are transmitting in the RX band Ea Notes for Satellite transceivers To control the Main and Sub VFOs for RX and TX respectively SAT mode must be engaged from the program and from the rig Otherwise TRX Manager will control VFO A and VFO B this is not a limitation but a feature allowing the control of both RX and TX in the same band as required for packet operation with ISS See also the consideration about transceivers for satellites Using a transverter The TRX tab allows you setting up the program for the use with a transverter up down converter These parameters RX and or TS offset only affect the frequencies defined from the SAT interface Of course they do allow the correct calculations of the Doppler compensation file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 309 of 365 This option is not related to the Transverter option of the Preferences Transceiver dialog Using both options at the same time is not recommended and my give unpredictable results file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 310
463. used by TRX Manager seems to give representative results but is pessimistic It is however useful to calculate the best hour for a specific contact For sunrise and sunset times and twilight TRX Manager uses an algorithm from Montenbruck and Pfleger Astronomy on the Personal Computer Integration with HAM Cap TRX Manager provides an interface with HAM Cap HAM Cap is an HF propagation prediction tool for Amateur Radio by Alex VE3NEA For more information please go to the Alex VE3NEA web site If HAM Cap is properly installed and running on your computer the External menu shows the HAM Cap icon which opens the HAM Cap Window You may also display propagation predictions for a given callsign from the Web Cluster s or DX Cluster s context menus ia Installing HAM Cap Installing HAM Cap is not a totally straightforward process e Install HAM Cap e Install VOACAP using the latest itshfbc_yymmdd exe file to download from http www greg hand com hfwin32 html Use the default directory c itshfbc only e Run HAM Cap Use the same UAC settings for HAM Cap and TRX Manager usually UAC ON is fine for both HAM Cap is a freeware However the best way to use HAM Cap is in integration with IonoProbe distributed as a shareware for a very moderate fee file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 229 of 365 Interface with DX Atlas TRX Manager provides an interface with DX Atlas written by Alex VE3NEA DX Atlas
464. uses hardware handshaking make sure your cable is wired for RTS Handshaking It is recommended you set up the Omni VII s Interface menu item to SERIAL IF and not Stepp IR CT while TRX Manager supports both Almost all main programmable functions including DSP filtering and setting of the levels AF RF Power are implemented Automatic DSP selection must be set from the Preferences Transceiver dialog However PTT function do not exist in radio mode EAGLE ARGONAUT VI These transceivers include an USB interface USB cable is a standard device cable with small square connector on one end and rectangular USB to computer connector on the other same as normally used for a printer Do not expect the TenTec optional Model 712 USB Soundcard Digital Mode Adapter Cable to provide proper connection for rig control and logging it is used for digital soundcard applications The most recent USB driver must be obtained from the TenTec web site and installed Please follow instructions provided by TenTec to find the virtual com port number to be selected from the TRX Manager s Setup screen Communication parameters are 57600 N 8 1 RTS should be checked Almost all front panel commands are supported by software or interface and are sufficient for good DXing see the Programmers reference guide for more information about available commands TRX Manager supports all functions listed file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 7
465. ust be more than three characters long caps on or off Ea Example You wish playing the MAIL WAV sound announce when receiving in the Terminal the following message You have new mail from You have to enter the following parameters Message Playing Vv 1 You have new mail from rnail wav Now as soon as You have new mail from is received in the Terminal the program plays mail wav If the WAV file doesn t exist TRX Manager plays Asterisk If you are not connected to a station you should disabled this feature by unpressing the Sound button of the Terminal tool bar If the DCD line of your controller or TNC is wired TRX Manager is able to disable enable this function according to the connection status file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 275 of 365 DX Spots Broadcasting TRX Manager allows you broadcasting DX Spots received from a Telnet server via Packet To engage this function please select the Telnet tab and click the Broadcastingtoggle A dialog box allows you choosing how to filter the spots if a repetition is required and the delay milli seconds between each transmission 500ms is generally recommended to separate spots in distinct packets To disengage this function please press again the Broadcasting toggle 3f Notes about Repetition and Delay e In connected mode you don t have to set up the program for a repetition the delay may be very short e In unconnected mode UI fr
466. ver check CW Reverse in the TRX Manager s Preferences Transceiver tab warning OmniRIG and CWSkimmer save their settings in an INI file located in the program files folder depending on the configuration of UAC on your computer this file may be virtualized by Windows Make sure you launch TRX Manager and any other program which communicates with OmniRig CWSkimmer with the same administrator rights If CAT control by Omni Rig does not start correctly please try to launch TRX manager with the Run This Program As An Administrator option checked JUMA TRX2 TRX Manager supports the JUMA TRX2 transceiver loaded with the firmware modified by Adrian 5B4ATY Version 1 07wb10 or later You have to configure your Juma with RS232 JUMA TRX2 and recommended Baud Rate 115200 TRX Manager uses the extended auto information mode of this firmware and simultaneous control of the PA1OOD is still possible using an Y cable TRX Pan TRX Manager works fine with a JUMA TRX2 using the I Q output of the rig However since TRX2 uses a phasing and I Q are reversed between LSB and USB you have to set up TRX Pan with Flip I Q not checked CW Flip checked USB Flip checked You also have to set up an Offset Pitch value in CW in kHz With the distribution of TRX Manager a stand alone freeware application is included TRX Juma TRX Juma provides control of the main functions of this transceiver and its interface mimics the TRX2 s front panel You ca
467. ver option allows a real time link with the LOGic s database provided LOGic is installed and running file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 237 of 365 e The CW Bar option makes the CW Toolbar visible or not visible e Fi F8 gt CW Msg enables or NOT the CW Keyer s F1 F8 shortcuts recommended during a contest Moreover if the Auto Log box is checked under CD Rom the program performs a search from the defined CD and fills in Name QTH Gridsquare and State fields Files Here you may define the default prefix database and the logbook database mdb format If Auto Backup is checked you must specify a backup folder for your database Then 1 Each day the first time you launch TRX Manager the log book is saved in this folder 2 Each day each time you exit TRX Manager the logbook is saved in a different folder for each day of the week You can find and open the Backup folder easily without opening and running TRX Manager which may erases a previous backup using the TRX Tools software Date and time format Dates and Times are displayed according to the format defined for Windows please set these preferences from the Windows s Regional Settings Panel Date and Time property pages Ea Possible problems After updating the program some fields do not appear please delete the layout file GRD associated with the current database in order to reset the layout of the Listing to the defaults fil
468. version utility The conversion program DBFToMDB exe is installed in the TRX Manager s main folder Ee DBF TO MDB By FEDEX i D RADIO Info DBF SWBC SW_UPD SWBC pa o il Running the conversion utility You have to specify e The format e The path of the database by selecting one of the DBF files e The table to convert ILG the name of the table is indifferent SWEBC the name of the table is always SW_UPD DBF e the default station field optional e the default mode AM Converting Please click Conversion to convert and indicate the name of the MDB file You still have to load the corresponding MDB database into TRX Manager by using the open button or the SW module file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 304 of 365 Recorder TRX Manager has a very useful recorder for recording stations The recorder provides recording of a preset sequence of stations programmable mode but can also be used in scanningmode with the SW database the memoriesor the bandscope Finally it has a manual mode Interface overview The recorder is opened under the Tools Recorder a submenu The interface is standard with two toolbars one for the functions the other for the recorder itself Ak Sound recorder essail wav Be ta TS 27712 051449 00 j2 IC PCR1000 27 12 05 14 50 00 Sensitive image hot spots Move the mouse over the picture for more information A click in the Dat_ON column caus
469. ween commands slows down the program and some commands can not be executed However if you do so the Polling option is required in order to synchronize the program and the selected transceiver after a frequency mode change done from a second ICOM Sometimes you may receive this message Communication error Invalid message format This is a warning only which appears one time for each session Generally this message is without consequences however you can try to improve your parameter settings See also Disabling Dual Control If Dual Control is checked TRX Managers waits for NG and OK messages before displaying the new status of the transceiver Dual Control is more secure but not compatible with the use of a serial server via the Internet for the older ICOMS IC 751 IC 761 or if you select the ICOM option TRX Manager polls the tansceiver every 500ms since these rigs do not have a Transceive function 1c PcR1000 Some PCR1000 owners have reported that they have corrupted their EEPROM by running 3rd party software and or even the Icom s software The PCR1000 s EEPROM stores the calibration data and each EEPROM is specific It is recommended you backup your EEPROM before using any software A third party application TALKPCR can save and restore your EEPROM See also here file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 41 of 365 Operation The set of commands is variable from one model to the other Due to
470. window TRX Manager shows the corresponding azimuth and DXCC award information and reports the corresponding information into the DX Map HF Propagation predictions may be displayed TRX Manager also calculates distances and directions based on grid squares at least 4 digits and provides an interface with DX Atlas and Google Earth 1 DXCC K Azimuth to the station From the station 37 i vate Grid Square of the station ae Click the azimuth indicator to toggle to HF Propagation mode and vice versa If the DXCC window stays open each time a new dx spot is selected azimuth is updated and allows you to immediately remote control a rotator When used in conjunction with the automatic identification of stations that feature gives spectacular results Azimuth FROM the station is displayed inside brackets file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 223 of 365 Rotator control TRX Manager can control a rotator via a com port or a DDE interface See also e Band Plan e Troubleshooting Settings It is possible to define up to two rotators from the Setup dialog box under Rotator but only ONE via DDE is supported The program is compatible with The SARtek 1 universal rotator interface Azimuth Yaesu Kenpro rotators Azimuth and Elevation Orion PA PX and PX V2 4 most recent firmware ORION 2800 Azimuth only HyGain rotators Azimuth MicroHAM Hygain protocol MicroHAM interface KCT int
471. ws using an other IP port e Dig Power Digital power If this option is checked TRX Manager limits RF Power to a fraction of the reference power default power by band or Max power of the transceiver e CAT DIG PTT you can indicate specific CAT commands for RX and TX macro commands as required by some transceivers in data mode when the ACC port or the USB port is in use Kenwood RX TX1 e Carrier offset you indicate the default carrier offset for FSK or AFSK default 2210Hz and the other modes default 1500Hz Generally the carrier offset is the center frequency of the bandwidth of your transceiver for the data mode If you use the LSB mode AFSK the carrier Offset is not very important provided the carrier frequency is within your passband lE Note The RTTY PSK offsets indicated in the first Transceiver tab are NOT used by the TRX Manager Fidigi interface They are only used to calculate the correct frequency of a DX Spot in data mode The CW pitch indicated in the Transceiver tab is used by the TRX Manager Fidigi interface to calculate the carrier frequency Interfacing TRX Manager and Flidigi Once both programs are set up you can run TRX manager and Flidigi simultaneously If you run TRX Manager and Fidigi on the same computer Host 127 0 0 1 you can start stop TRX Manager and Fldigi in any order warnings You may have to set up your firewall to not block TRX Manager and Fidigi for the specified port even if you u
472. x 255 KENWOOD Command for AF gain is AG0000 to AG0255 Syntax is AGO 3 digits required with Min 0 and Max 255 Sending a command to the Band Decoder Sending a direct command to the band decoder is possible provided e The format of the command is the format defined for the band decoder you are using Parallel port 8bits Com port ASCII or HEX e The command to the band decoder is inserted inside square brackets xxxx no space before or after the square brackets file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en file C Help index htm 11110000 00001111 DCD Command sent to a parallel band decoder Page 127 of 365 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 128 of 365 Band Plan TRX Manager implements various functions related to the Band Plan When you run TRX Manager for the first time you are prompted to define your IARU region e Region 1 Africa Europe Russia Middle East excluding Iran and Mongolia e Region 2 North and South America including Hawaii Johnston and Midway Is e Region 3 The rest of Asia and Oceania You may set Preferences for each band such as Mode and miscellaneous parameters Antenna Rotator Tuner Power under the Preferences Transceivers dialog 8 See also Band Decoder Synchronization RS232 Rotator control Modes and filters Band plan editing Preferences Band Plans for each IARU region are provided as CSV files region1 csv region2 csv region3
473. y imported into TRX Manager e A small program provided with TRX Manager DBFTOADIF makes it possible to convert DXLog EasyLog TopLog LogPlus and TurboLog files to the the ADIF format See also e Logbook of The World LOTW Export field The Export field facilitates the selection of QSO s to be exported TRX Manager provides selective exporting by using the status of the logical export field Checked Unchecked The Export field should be checked for any QSO s to export and unchecked for the QSO s not to export When exporting or printing a dialog box chooses the Export field status and what action to do after exporting no action uncheck QSO s The Export value may be modified from the context menu by right click It is up to you to choose how you use the Export field i e to upload LOTW reports to export your database periodically to a third party logging program etc Importing io Da Importing is done by pressing the Open a button of the Logbook the choice of the format is made through the Windows common dialog box Open LOTW Files be TRLog Files dat TRX Manager Access mdb LOGWindows ASCII asc Layout grd All Files ADIF During import the program may report errors incorrect or empty fields these errors are frequent but often without consequence After the file has been imported you have to perform a DXCC Update from the Tools menu in order to update
474. y most HAM operators The Special characters option Setup allows you to disable these characters Not supported by Winkey or a Kenwood CAT interface Standards characters e alphabet A Z e number 0 9 e standard punctuation Special characters EECAAONUA e punctuation _ amp Shortcut keys characters mode only End VA Home VE Entr e K BkSp Error Pause AS Quick macros codes The p characters are used by macros file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 191 of 365 Winkey Interface TRX Manager provides extensive local support for the K1EL s Winkey amp Winkey2 interface E3 Winkey2 WKUSB TRX Manager automatically detects Winkey2 Configuration panel slightly differs taking advantage of specific Winkey2 s functions In addition if you use WKUSB you may assign each Winkey s PushButton either to a message macro undchecked or a macro command macro checked to be sent to your transceiver Setting up TRX Manager To operate Winkey please open the Parameters Setup dialog and select the CW tab Select the Serial Com port from Setup CW tab and check the Winkey option Dual Ctrl Dual Control is checked by default You should set OFF Dual Ctrl only if you use Winkey through a serial server in order to reduce the communications between Winkey and TRX Manager during transmission of morse code E3 Notes e Please uncheck the Internal CW option TRX1
475. y use the evaluation copy of TRX Manager for a period of 30 days after which if you decide to continue using TRX Manager you are obligated to purchase the Licensed version After the 30 days evaluation period is expired the use of the evaluation version of TRX Manager is still possible and permitted for testing pupose only 8 See also e How to order LICENSED version The LICENSED version or commercial version is distributed as a downloadable and personal file compiled with your personal data encrypted A single copy of the licensed version of TRX Manager may be used by a single person who personally uses the software on one or several computers or two in remote mode or a single entity a club with an unique callsign The license and all the associated files are strictly personal and not transferable Up to three registered callsigns are accepted per license for your personal usage special and personal callsigns previous personal callsigns or for the use by immediate family members living with you We may ask you to prove they are personal For a club only the club s callsign can be registered Upon purchase of TRX Manager V5 X you are eligible for 36 months of free downloadable updates or upgrades Communicating a personal file to a third party invalidates the license and may result in civil and criminal charges Using a pirated copied version may prevent any further installation of a registered version Distribution TRX Ma
476. yCal1 2 This cluster send Login this is the default for trx manager If you don t need a specific ssid the syntax is only dxcluster no ip org 3 This cluster send Login this is the default for trx manager But you need a specific ssid a special callsign the syntax is dxcluster no ip org Login MySpecialCal1 4 If the cluster requires a password just add xxxxxx after the callsign xxxxxx is the password dxcluster no ip org Login MyCall xxxxxx Operation as a Client Server By default the Terminal only functions as a Client and does not process connection requests gf Remarks concerning security e Telnet connections are not secured e Communicating your IP address on the network exposes you to malevolent intrusions e Attempting to connect to a server for which you do not have access rights may be regarded as an intrusion and exposes you to possible prosecution file C Help index htm 31 10 2015 TRX Manager en Page 268 of 365 Function buttons Programmable commands are available to control the TNC by using the Terminal s function button 1 10 A1 H1 A2 H2 For each button a right click allows you to program a function This feature may be useful to send iterative commands such as sh u sh dx c my_dxcluster Then a simple left click on the button sends the corresponding command Check CR to add a carriage return and to send the command Check CMD to prefix the command with a break signal Type t

- TRX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents